Black plate (1,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2014/ 11/ 25
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and il lustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
*
C
Copyright 2015 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2014/ 11/ 25
This manual describes the following vehicle types.
Black plate (3,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Warranties
& Warranties for U.S.A.
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by
Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail
by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the
United States come with the following
warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Emission Control Systems Warranty
. Emissions Performance Warranty
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclu sions, is in the
“Warranty and Maintenan ce Bookl et”.
Please read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties for Canada
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by
Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by
an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada
come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Anti-Corrosion Warranty
. Emission Control Warranty
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclu sions, is in the
“Warranty and Service Booklet”. Please
read these warranties carefully.
How to use this Owner’s
Manual
& Using your Owner’s Manual
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
read this manual. To protect yourself and
extend the service life of your vehicle,
follow the instructions in this manual.
Failure to observe these instructions may
result in serious injury and damage to your
vehicle.
This manual is composed of fourteen
chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
table of contents, so you can usually tell at
a g lance if th at chapter contains the
information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS
airbags
This chapter informs you how to use the
seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
tions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and doors
This chapter informs you how to operate
the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
This chapter informs you about the opera-
tion of instrument panel indicators and
how to use the instruments and other
switches.
Chapter 4: Climate control
This chapter informs you how to operate
the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you how to operate
your audio system.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate
interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and operating
This chapter informs you how to start and
operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your
SUBARU in various conditions and ex-
plains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you
have a problem, such as a flat tire or
engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance care
This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you when you need
to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you
how to keep your SUBARU running
properly.
– CONTINUED –
1
0
Black plate (4,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about dimen-
sions and capacities of your SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Consumer information and
Reporting safety defects
This chapter informs you about Uniform
tire quality grading standards and Report-
ing safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’sin
this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
& Safety warnings
You will find a number of WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
These safety warnings alert you to poten-
tial hazards that could result in injury to
you or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well
as all other portions of this manual care-
fully in order to gain a better understand-
ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle
safely.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which injury or damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or sugges-
tions how to make better use of your
vehicle.
& Safety symbol
You will find a circle with a slash through it
in this manual. This symbol means “Do
not”, “Do not do this”,or“Do not let this
happen”, depending upon the context.
& Abbreviation list
You may find several abbreviations in this
manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-
tions are shown in the following list.
Abbreviation Meaning
A/C Air conditioner
ALR/ELR
Automatic locking retractor/
Emergency locking retractor
ABS Anti-lock brake system
AKI Anti knock index
ALR Automatic locking retractor
AWD All-wheel drive
BSD/RCTA
Blind Spot Detection/Rear
Cross Traffic Alert
CVT
Continuously variable trans-
mission
C.DIFF/
DCCD
Driver’s control center differ-
ential
DRL Daytime running light
EBD
Electronic brake force distri-
bution
ELR Emergency locking retractor
GAW Gross axle weight
GAWR Gross axle weight rating
GPS Global positioning system
GVW Gross vehicle weight
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
2
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Abbreviation Meaning
INT Intermittent
LATCH
Lower anchors and tethers for
children
LED Light emitting diode
LSD Limited slip differential
MIL Malfunction indicator light
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl man-
ganese tricarbonyl
MT Manual transmission
OBD On-board diagnostics
RON Research octane number
SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive
SRF
Steering responsive fog lights
system
SRS
Supplemental restraint sys-
tem
TIN Tire identification number
TPMS
Tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem
Vehicle symbols
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
For warning and indicator lights, refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F21.
Mark Name
WARNING
CAUTION
Safety precautions when
driving
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fast en their seatbelts BEFO RE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seat-
belts when the vehicle is moving.
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System) airbag does not do away
with the need to fasten seatbelts.
In combination with the seat-
belts, it offers the best combined
protection in case of a serious
accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
– CONTINUED –
3
0
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
. The SRS a irbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far f rom the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” F1-11.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)” F1-33.
& Child safety
WARNING
. Never hold a child on your lap or
in your arms while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a
collision, because the child will
be caught between the passen-
ger and objects inside the vehi-
cle.
. While riding in the vehicle, in-
fants and small children should
always be placed in the REAR
seat in an infant or child restraint
system which is appropriate for
the child’s age, height and
weight. If a child is too big for a
child restraint system, the child
should sit in the REAR seat and
be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Never allow a child
to stand up or kneel on the seat.
. Put children in the REAR seat
properly restrained at all times in
a child restraint device or in a
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill
children, especially if they are
not restrained or improperly re-
strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Always turn the child safety locks
to the “ LOCK” position when
children sit in the rear seat.
Serious injury could result if a
child accidentally opens the door
and falls out. Refer to “Child
safety locks” F2-32.
. Always lock the passenger’s win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Re-
fer to “Windows” F2-32.
. Never leave unattended children,
adults or animals in the vehicle.
4
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
They could accidentally injure
themselves or others through
inadvertent operation of the ve-
hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,
the temperature in a closed ve-
hicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or pos-
sibly fatal injuries.
. Help prevent children, adults or
animals from locking themselves
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the
trunk could quickly become high
enough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including
brain damage to anyone locked
inside, particularly for small chil-
dren.
. When leaving the vehicle, close
all windows and lock all doors.
Also make certain that the trunk
is closed.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” F1-11.
. For the child restraint system, refer to
“Child restraint systems” F1-21.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)” F1-33.
& Engine exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from enter-
ing the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Av oid remaining in a parked
vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the venti-
lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
& Drinking and driving
WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
stream delays your reaction time
and impairs your perception, judg-
ment and attentiveness. If you drive
after drinking – even if you drink just
a little – it will increase the risk of
being involved in a serious or fatal
accident, injuring or killing yourself,
your passengers and others. In
addition, if you are injured in the
accident, alcohol may increase the
severity of that injury.
Please don’t drink and drive.
Drunken driving is one of the most
– CONTINUED –
5
0
Black plate (8,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
frequent causes of accidents. Since alco-
hol affects all people differently, you may
have consumed too much alcohol to drive
safely even if the level of alcohol in your
blood is below the legal limit. The safest
thing you can do is never drink and drive.
However if you have no choice but to
drive, stop drinking and sober up comple-
tely before getting behind the wheel.
& Drugs and driving
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
counter and prescription) that can
delay your reaction time and impair
your perception, judgment and at-
tentiveness. If you drive after taking
them, it may increase your, your
passengers’ and other persons’ risk
of being involved in a serious or
fatal accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with
your doctor or pharmacist or read the
literature that accompanies the medication
to determine if the drug you are taking can
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
after taking any medications that can
make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
you have a medical condition that requires
you to take drugs, please consult with
your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
own health and well-being, we urge you
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
& Driving when tired or sleepy
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your
reaction time will be delayed and
your perception, judgment and at-
tentiveness will be impaired. If you
drive when tired or sleepy, your,
your passenge rs ’ and other per-
sons’ chances of being involved in
a serious accident may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but
instead find a safe place to rest if you
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you
should make periodic rest stops to refresh
yourself before continuing on your journey.
When possible, you should share the
driving with others.
& Modification of your vehicle
CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine SUBARU
parts and accessories. Other types
of modifications could affect its
performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting
from modification may not be cov-
ered under warranties.
NOTE
This vehicle is equipped with a function
that will record certain vehicle data in
the event the vehicle is operated or
maintained in a manner that exceeds or
varies from routine normal use.
That data may be used as a means of
determining whether or not a vehicle
condition is eligible for repair under
warranty.
6
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Car phone/cell phone and
driving
CAUTION
Do not use a car phone/cell phone
while driving; it may distract your
attention from driving and can lead
to an accident. If you use a car
phone/cell phone, pull off the road
and p ark in a safe place before
using your phone. In some States/
Provinces, only hands-free phones
may legally be used while driving.
& Driving vehicles equipped
with navigation system
WARNING
Do not allow the monitor to distract
your attention from driving. Also, do
not operate the controls of the
navigation system while driving.
The loss of attention to driving
could lead to an accident. If you
wish to operate the controls of the
navigation system, first take the
vehicle off the road and stop it in a
safe place.
& Driving with pets
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collisi on or sudden stop,
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
your passengers. Besides, the pets can
be hurt under these situations. It is also for
their own safety that pets should be
properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-
strain a pet with a special traveling
harness which can be secured to the rear
seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s
handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
in the front passenger’s seat. For further
information, consult your veterinarian,
local animal protection society or pet
shop.
& Tire pressures
Check and, if necessary, adjust t he
pressure of each tire (including the spare)
at least once a month and before any long
journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
tire pressures to the values shown on the
tire placard. For detailed information, refer
to “Tires and wheels” F11-31.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become ho t. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
7
0
Black plate (10,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
General information
& California proposition 65
warning
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its consti-
tuents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain o r emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids in vehicles and
certain components of product wear
contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
& California Perchlorate Advi-
sory
Certain vehicle components such as air-
bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
keyless entry transmitter batteries may
contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
& Noise from under the vehicle
NOTE
You may hear a noise from under the
vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours
after the engine is turned off. However,
this does not indicate a malfunction.
This noise is caused by the operation
of the fuel evaporation leakage check-
ing system and the operation is normal.
The noise will stop after approximately
15 minutes.
& Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,
data that will assist in understanding how
a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR
is designed to record data r elated t o
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for
a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely ac-
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the informa-
tion if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR.
8
Black plate (1,1)
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
Keys and doors
2
Instruments and controls
Climate control
4
Audio
5
Interior equipment
6
Starting and operating
7
Driving tips
8
In case of emergency
9
Appearance care
10
Maintenance and service
11
Specifications
12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
Index
14
3
北米Model "A1230BE-A" Edited: 2014/ 10/ 27
Black plate (12,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Illustrated index
& Exterior
1) Engine hood (page 11-9)
2) Front wiper (page 3-101)
3) Headlight (page 3-95)
4) Replacing bulbs (page 11-44)
5) Moonroof (page 2-38)
6) Door locks (page 2-5)
7) Outside mirrors (page 3-111)
8) Tire pressure (page 11-33)
9) Flat tires (page 9-4)
10) Snow tires (page 8-9)
11) Fog light (page 3-99)
12) Tie-down hooks (page 9-12)
13) Towing hook (page 9-12)
10
Black plate (15,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
(STI) 1) Center console (page 6-5)
2) Seat heater (page 1-6)
3) Cup holder (page 6-6)
4) Parking brake lever (page 7-44)
5) Power windows (page 2-32)
6) Door locks (page 2-5)
7) Outside mirror switch (page 3-111)
8) Glove box (page 6-5)
9) Front power supply socket (page 6-8)
10) Shift lever (page 7-17)
11) SI-DRIVE (page 7-29)
12) Driver’s Control Center Differential
(C.DIFF/DCCD) (page 7-19)
– CONTINUED –
13
0
Black plate (16,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
(Except STI) (models without the EyeSight system) 1) Center console (page 6-5)
2) Seat heater (page 1-6)
3) Cup holder (page 6-6)
4) Parking brake lever (page 7-44)
5) Power windows (page 2-32)
6) Door locks (page 2-5)
7) Outside mirror switch (page 3-111)
8) Glove box (page 6-5)
9) Front power supply socket (page 6-8)
10) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-17)/Select lever
(CVT) (page 7-24)
14
Black plate (17,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
(Except STI) (models with the EyeSight system) 1) Center console (page 6-5)
2) Seat heater (page 1-6)
3) Cup holder (page 6-6)
4) Parking brake switch (page 7-44)
5) Power windows (page 2-32)
6) Door locks (page 2-5)
7) Outside mirror switch (page 3-111)
8) Glove box (page 6-5)
9) Front power supply socket (page 6-8)
10) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-17)/Select lever
(CVT) (page 7-24)
11) Hill Holder switch (page 7-47)
– CONTINUED –
15
0
Black plate (18,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Instrument panel
1) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-98)
2) Trunk lid opener switch (page 2-36)
3) Combination meter (page 3-8)
4) Multi function display (page 3-48)
5) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-8)
6) Multi function display control switches
(page 3-48)
7) Audio (page 5-1)
8) Climate control (page 4-1)
9) Tilt/telescopic steering (page 3-113)
10) Horn (page 3-114)
11) SRS airbag (page 1-33)
12) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-40)
13) Fuse box (page 11-42)
14) Hood lock release knob (page 11-9)
15) Steering responsive fog lights OFF
switch (if equipped) (page 3-99)
16) BSD/RCTA OFF switch (if equipped)
(page 7-56)
NOTE
For models with the EyeSight system:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.
16
Black plate (19,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Steering wheel
1) Audio control buttons (page 5-18)
2) Cruise control (page 7-52)
3) Shift paddle (page 7-26)
4) Hands-free switches (page 5-87)
5) Multi information display control switches
(page 3-37)
6) SRS airbag (page 1-33)
7) Horn (page 3-114)
8) SI-DRIVE switches (except STI)
(page 7-32)
– CONTINUED –
17
0
Black plate (20,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches
1) Windshield wiper (page 3-101)
2) Mist (page 3-102)
3) Windshield washer (page 3-103)
4) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-102)
5) Wiper control lever (page 3-102)
6) Light control switch (page 3-94)
7) Fog light switch (page 3-99)
8) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-95)
9) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-96)
10) Turn signal lever (page 3-97)
18
Black plate (21,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Combination meter
! U.S.-spec. models
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter
may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
1) Tachometer (page 3-10)
2) Multi information display (page 3-37)
3) Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 3-34)
4) Speedometer (page 3-9)
5) Trip knob (page 3-9)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)
8) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)
– CONTINUED –
19
0
Black plate (22,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Except U.S.-spec. models
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter
may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
1) Tachometer (page 3-10)
2) Multi information display (page 3-37)
3) Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 3-34)
4) Speedometer (page 3-9)
5) Trip knob (page 3-9)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
7) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)
8) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)
20
Black plate (23,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Warning and indicator lights
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 3-14
Front passenger’s
seatbelt warning light
3-14
SRS airbag system
warning light
3-15
/
Front passenger’s
frontal airbag ON indi-
cator
3-16
/
Front passenger’s
frontal airbag OFF in-
dicator
3-16
CHECK ENGINE
warning light/Malfunc-
tion indicator light
3-16
Charge warning light 3-17
Oil pressure warning
light
3-17
Engine oil level warn-
ing indicator (except
STI)
3-17
AT OIL TEMP warning
light (CVT models)
3-18
Mark Name Page
Rear differential oil
temperature warning
light (STI)
3-18
ABS warning light 3-20
Brake system warning
light
3-21
Electronic parking
brake indicator light
(models with electro-
nic parking brake sys-
tem)
3-23
Door open warning
light
3-25
AWD warning light
(if equipped)
3-25
Power steering warn-
ing light (except STI)
3-25
Hill start assist warn-
ing light/Hill start assist
OFF indicator light
(models without elec-
tronic parking brake
system)
3-24
Hill holder indicator
light (models with
electronic parking
brake system)
3-24
Mark Name Page
Vehicle Dynamics
Control warning light/
Vehicle Dynamics
Control operation indi-
cator light
3-26
Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator
light
3-27
Turn signal indicator
lights
3-35
LED headlight warning
light (if equipped)
3-25
High beam indicator
light
3-35
Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light (if equipped)
3-35
Front fog light indicator
light (if equipped)
3-35
Access key warning
light (if equipped)
3-28
Security indicator light 3-33
Headlight indicator
light
3-35
– CONTINUED –
21
0
Black plate (24,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Mark Name Page
Cruise control indica-
tor
3-35
Cruise control set in-
dicator
3-35
Traction mode indica-
tor
3-27
Low fuel warning light 3-24
Low tire pressure
warning light
(U.S.-spec. models)
3-19
Windshield washer
fluid warning indicator
3-18
Sport (S) mode indi-
cator (if equipped)
3-34
Intelligent (I) mode in-
dicator (if equipped)
3-34
Sport Sharp (S#)
mode indicator (if
equipped)
3-34
Shift-up indicator (STI) 3-34
Driver’s control center
differential auto indi-
cator (STI)
3-35
Mark Name Page
Auto [+] mode indica-
tor (STI)
3-36
Auto [−] mode indica-
tor (STI)
3-36
Driver’s control center
differential indicator
and warning (STI)
3-36
REV indicator light
(STI)
3-37
Steering responsive
fog lights warning in-
dicator/Steering re-
sponsive fog lights
OFF indicator (if
equipped)
3-37
BSD/RCTA warning
indicator (if equipped)
3-37
BSD/RCTA OFF indi-
cator (if equipped)
3-37
22
Black plate (25,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. If your
vehicle is equipped with a multi function display, the settings for some of these functions can be changed using the display. Contact the
nearest SUBARU dealer for details. For details, refer to “Multi function display” F3-48.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation
Monitoring start delay time (after closure of doors) 0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds
Impact sensor operation (only models with shock
sensors (dealer option))
Operation/Non-operation Non-operation
Passive arming (models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
Operation/Non-operation Non-operation
Dome light and map lights (models with moonroof)
illumination
ON/OFF OFF
Keyless access (if equipped) Hazard warning flasher* Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal volume* Level 1 - 7 Level 5
Door unlock selection function (driver’s door unlock) Driver’s door only/All doors Driver’s door only
Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher* Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal volume* Level 1 - 7 Level 5
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation
Defogger and deicer system for models
with the automatic climate control sys-
tem*
Rear window defogger, outside mirror defogger and
windshield wiper deicer
Operation for 15 minutes/
Continuous operation
Operation for 15
minutes
Dome light Operation of dome light/map light OFF delay timer OFF/10 seconds/20 sec-
onds/30 seconds
30 seconds
Map light (models with moonroof)
– CONTINUED –
23
0
Black plate (26,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Item Function Possible settings Default setting
Battery drainage prevention function Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation
Auto on/off headlights (if equipped)* Sensitivity of the operation of the auto on/off headlights Low/Normal/High/Very high Normal
Welcome lighting* Approaching (operation of timer) OFF/30 seconds/60 sec-
onds/90 seconds
30 seconds
Exiting (operation of timer)
One-touch lane changer Operation of the one-touch lane changer Operation/Non-operation Operation
*: The settings can be changed by the customer using the multi function display.
24
Black plate (1,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Front seats........................................................... 1-2
Manual seat ........................................................ 1-4
Power seat (driver’s seat – if equipped) ............... 1-5
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-5
Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-6
Rear seats............................................................ 1-7
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-8
Folding down the rear seatback ........................... 1-9
Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-11
Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-11
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-13
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor (ALR/ELR) ......................................... 1-13
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-13
Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-13
Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-16
Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-17
Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner ............. 1-17
Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt
pretensioners................................................... 1-18
System monitors ................................................ 1-20
System servicing................................................ 1-20
Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-21
Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-21
Where to place a child restraint system.............. 1-23
Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-24
Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR
seatbelt ........................................................... 1-24
Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-28
Installation of child restraint systems by use of
lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-29
Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-32
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)................................................ 1-33
Models with SRS airbags and lap/shoulder
restraints for driver, front passenger, and
window-side rear passengers........................... 1-33
Components...................................................... 1-36
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system ........... 1-38
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-50
SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-57
SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-58
Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-59
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
Black plate (30,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
Front seats
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driv-
ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-
trol and personal injury.
. Before adjusting the seat, make
sure the hands and feet of rear
seat passengers and cargo are
clear of the adjusting mechan-
ism.
. After adjusting the seat, push it
slightly to make sure it is se-
curely locked. If the seat is not
securely locked, it may move or
the seatbelt may not operate
properly.
. Do not put objects under the front
seats. They may interfere with
front seat locking and cause an
accident.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright posi-
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the fr ont seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. The SRS airbags dep loy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far f rom the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
WARNING
Put children in the rear seat properly
restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because c hildren are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater. Consequently, we
strongly recommend that ALL chil-
dren (including those in child seats
and those that have outgrown child
restraint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all times
in a child restraint device or in a
seatbelt, whichever is appropriate
1-2
Black plate (31,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
for the child’s ag e, h eight and
weight. Secure ALL types of child
restraint devices (including forward
facing child seat) in the REAR seats
at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precau-
tions concerning child restraint sys-
tems, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tems” F1-21.
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
WARNING
Do not let rear passengers rest their
feet between the front seatback and
seat cushion. Doing so may lead to
improper operation of the following
systems and could result in serious
injury.
. Occupant detection system
. SRS side airbag
. Seat heater (if equipped)
. Power seat (if equipped)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
– CONTINUED –
1-3
1
Black plate (32,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
& Manual seat
! Forward and backward adjustment
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to
the desired position. Then release the
lever and try to move the seat back and
forth to make sure that it is securely locked
into place.
! Reclining the seatback
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the
seatback to the desired position. Then
release the lever and make sure the
seatback is securely locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position
can spring back upward with force when
the lever is pulled. While operating the
lever to return the seatback, hold the
seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.
! Seat cushion height adjustment
(driver’s seat)
1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat
is lowered.
2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat
rises.
The height of the seat can be adjusted by
moving the seat cushion adjustment lever
up and down.
1-4
Black plate (33,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Power seat (driver’s seat – if
equipped)
1) Seat position forward/backward con-
trol switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward. During forward/backward ad-
justment of the seat, you cannot adjust
the seat cushion angle or seat cushion
height.
2) Seat cushion angle control switch
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up
or push down the front end of the control
switch.
3) Seat height control switch
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push
down the rear end of the control switch.
4) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback,
move the control switch.
& Head restraint adjustment
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Also, never install
the head restraints the opposite
way round. Doing so will prevent
the he ad restraints from func-
tioning as intended. Therefore,
when you remove the head re-
straints, you must reinstall all
head restraints correctly to pro-
tect vehicle occupants.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
Both the driver’s seat and front passen-
ger ’s seat are equipped with head re-
straints. Both head restraints are adjusta-
ble in the following ways.
! Head restraint height adjustment
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
Each head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
– CONTINUED –
1-5
1
Black plate (34,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
NOTE
When the head restraint cannot be
pulled out or installed due to insuffi-
cient clearance between the head re-
straint and the roof, tilt the seat and
then perform the installation and re-
moval tasks.
! Head restraint angle adjustment
The angle of the head restraint can be
adjusted in several steps. While maintain-
ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the
head restraint to a position where the back
of your head is as close to the head
restraint as possible.
To tilt:
Tilt the head restraint by hand to the
preferred position. A click will be audible
when the head restraint is locked.
To return:
Tilt the head restraint once as far forward
as it can go. The head restraint wil l
automatically return to the fully upright
position. Then, adjust the head restraint
again to the preferred angle.
Seat heater (if equipped)
The front seats are equipped with a seat
heater.
The seat heater operates when the igni-
tion switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
CAUTION
. People with delicate skin may
suffer slight burns even at low
temperatures if they use the seat
heater for a long period of time.
When using the heater, always be
sure to warn the persons con-
cerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
. When the vehicle’sinterioris
warmed enough or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn
off the seat heater.
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long period
of time while the engine is not running
1-6
Black plate (35,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
can cause battery discharge.
Type A
Type B
1) HIGH (HI) – Rapid heating
2) LOW (LO) – Normal heating
3) Off
A) Left-hand side
B) Right-hand side
To turn on the seat heater, push the “LOW”
(“LO”)or“HIGH” (“HI”) position on the
switch, as desired, dependi ng on the
temperature.
Selecting the “HIGH” (“HI”) position will
cause the seat to heat up quicker.
To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the
opposite side of the current position.
The indicator located on the switch illumi-
nates when the seat heater is in operation.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
enough or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn the switch off.
Rear seats
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits well
back and upright in the seat. Do not
put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats
– CONTINUED –
1-7
1
Black plate (36,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward and
injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
& Head restraint adjustment
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head
restraints.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you have removed the head re-
straints, you must reinstall all
head restraints to protect vehicle
occupants.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
! Rear windows side seating position
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
After installing the head restraint, make
sure it is securely locked.
NOTE
When the head restraint cannot be
pulled out or installed due to insuffi-
1-8
Black plate (37,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
cient clearance between the head re-
straint and the roof, tilt the seat and
then perform the installation and re-
moval tasks.
! Rear center seating position
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used in the retracted position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the extended posi-
tion.
1) Incorrect (retracted position)
2) Correct (extended position)
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
When the rear-center seating position is
occupied, raise the head restraint to the
extended position. When the rear center
seating position is not occupied, lower the
head restraint to improve rearward visibi-
lity.
& Folding down the rear seat-
back
WARNING
. When you fold down the seat-
back, check that there are no
passengers or objects on the
rear seat. Not doing so creates
a risk of injury or property da-
mage if the seatback suddenly
folds down.
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded rear seatback or in
the trunk. Doing so may result in
serious injury or death.
. Secure all objects and especially
long items properly to prevent
them from being thrown around
inside the vehicle and causing
serious injury during a sudden
stop, a sudden steering maneu-
ver or a rapid acceleration.
. When you return the seatback to
its original position, shake the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats
– CONTINUED –
1-9
1
Black plate (38,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats
seatback slightly to confirm that
it is securely fixed in place. If the
seatback is not securely fixed in
place, the seatback may sud-
denly fold down in the event of
sudden braking, or objects may
move out from the trunk, which
could cause serious injury or
death.
Lock release knob
1) Unlocked
2) Locked
A) Unlocking marker in red
1) Securing hook
WARNING
When the seatback is returned to its
original position, observe the follow-
ing precautions. Failure to do so
may lead to serious injury or an
accident because the operation effi-
ciency of the seatbelt is inhibited.
. The seatbelt should not be
caught in the seatback and it
should be fully visible.
. The seatbelt should not pass
behind the securing hook for
the seatback.
CAUTION
Do not hang luggage etc. on the
securing hook. The possibility ex-
ists that the seatback may not be
able to be fixed firmly in place. This
could lead to unexpected accidents.
1. Lower the head restraint of the rear
center seating position.
1-10
Black plate (39,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Release knob
2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock
release knob then fold the seatback down.
To return the seatback to its origin al
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place and make sure that the unlock-
ing marker on the lock release knob is no
longer visible.
Lock release knob
1) Unlocked
2) Locked
A) Unlocking marker in red
WARNING
After returning the seatback to its
original position, confirm that the
unlocking marker of the lock release
knob is no longer visible. Failure to
do so could lead to serious injury or
death in the event of an accident.
When you return the seatback to its
original position, shake the seat-
back to confirm that it is securely
fixed in place.
Seatbelts
& Seatbelt safety tips
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fast en their seatbelts BEFO RE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. All belts should fit snugly in order
to provide full restraint. Loose
fitting belts are not as effective in
preventing or reducing injury.
. Each seatbelt is designed to
support only one person. Never
use a single belt for two or more
persons – even children. Other-
wise, in an a ccident, serious
injury or death could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies
including retractors and attach-
ing hardware worn by occupants
of a vehicle that has been in a
serious accident. Also, be sure to
replace seatbelt assemblies that
show signs of severe fraying or
having been cut. The entire as-
sembly should be replaced even
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
– CONTINUED –
1-11
1
Black plate (40,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
if damage is not obvious.
. Put children in the re ar seat
properly restrained at all times.
The SRS ai rbag deploys with
considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill chil-
dren, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly re-
strained . B ecause children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater. For that
reason, we strongly recommend
that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those
that have outgrown child re-
straint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device
or in a seatbelt, whichever is
appropriate for the child’s height
and weight.
Secure ALL types of child re-
straint devices (including for-
ward facing child seats) in the
REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. For instructions
and precautions concerning the
child restraint system, refer to
“Child restraint systems” F1-21.
! Infants or small children
Use a child restraint system that is
suitable for your vehicle. Refer to “Child
restraint systems” F1-21.
! Children
If a child is too big for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear seat
and be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Never allow a child to
stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
the face or neck, move the child closer to
the belt buckle to help provide a good
shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to
securely place the lap belt as low as
possible on the hips and not on the child’s
waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt
cannot be properly positioned, a child
restraint system should be used. Never
place the shoulder belt under the child’s
arm or behind the child’s back.
! Expectant mothers
Expectant mothers also need to use the
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips, not over the waist.
1-12
Black plate (41,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (ELR)
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows
normal body movement but the retractor
locks automatically during a sudden stop,
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
& Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR/ELR)
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-
matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic
Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor normally functions as an Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/
ELR has an additional lo cking mo de
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode” intended to secure a child restraint
system. When the seatbelt is once drawn
out completely and is then retracted even
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
that position and the seatbelt cannot be
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.
When securing a child restraint system on
the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt,
the seatbelt must be changed over to the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
When the child restraint system is re-
moved, make sure that the seatbelt
retracts fully and the retractor returned to
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
mode.
For instructions on how to convert the
retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to
the ELR mode, refer to “Installing child
restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt”
F1-24.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
Refer t o “Seatbelt warning light and
chime” F3-14.
& Fastening the seatbelt
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury.
. Keep the lap belt as low as
possible on your hips. In a colli-
sion, this spreads the force of the
lap belt over stronger hip bones
instead of a cross the weaker
abdomen.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of s liding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright posi-
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the front seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions.
If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result
in serious internal injury or
death.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
– CONTINUED –
1-13
1
Black plate (42,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
WARNING
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back. If an
accident occurs, this can increase
the risk or severity of injury.
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that
has been closed up in sunny weath-
er; they could burn an occupant. Do
not touch such hot parts until they
cool.
! Front seatbelts
1. Adjust the seat position according to
the following procedure.
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far from
the steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
back to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
1-14
Black plate (43,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder
belt anchor height
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower:
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor
down.
Pull down on the anchor to make sure that
it is locked in place.
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of th e
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Allow the seatbelt to retract slowly to
avoid the seatbelt being tangled or
twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
! Rear seatbelts
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
NOTE
The center seatbelt buckle is marked
as “CENTER”.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
– CONTINUED –
1-15
1
Black plate (44,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Allow the seatbelt to retract slowly to
avoid the seatbelt being tangled or
twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
& Seatbelt maintenance
To clean the seatbelts, use lukewarm
water with mild soap. Do not use the
seatbelts until they are dry. Never bleach
or dye t he belts because this c ould
seriously affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid.
. Never attempt to make modifica-
tions or changes that will prevent
the seatbelt from operating prop-
erly.
1-16
Black plate (45,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Front seatbelt pretensioners
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-
belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The
seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be
activated in the event of an accident
involving moderate to severe frontal and
side collisions.
The pretensioner sensor also serves as
follows.
. SRS frontal airbag sensor
. Side impact sensor (front door impact
sensor)
& Seatbelt with shoulder belt
pretensioner
NOTE
This section is applicable to the dri-
ver ’s side seatbelt.
Front seatbelt pretensioner
If the sensor detects a certain predeter-
mined amount of force during frontal or
side collisions, the front seatbelt is quickly
drawn back in by the retractor to take up
the slack so that the belt more effectively
restrains the driver.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
must be replaced.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
signed to activate in minor impacts or
in rear impacts.
. In cases of frontal collisions, the
following components will operate si-
multaneously.
– Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
– Seatbelt pretensioner for front
passenger
– SRS frontal airbag for driver
– SRS frontal airbag for front pas-
senger*
– SRS curtain airbags (both sides)
(if an offset frontal collision occurs)
*: This does not operate if the occupant
detection system deactivates airbag op-
eration. For details, refer to “Front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag” F1-40
.
. In cases of side collisions, the
following components will operate si-
multaneously.
– SRS curtain airbag (impacted
side)
– SRS side airbag (impacted side)
(when both the satellite safing sen-
sor and any of the center pillar
impact sensors/front door impact
sensors sense an impact force)
– Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
(when both the satellite safing sen-
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners
– CONTINUED –
1-17
1
Black plate (46,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners
sor and the driver’s side front door
impact sensor sense an impact
force)
However, when a center pillar im-
pact sensor detects a signal faster
than the front door impact sensor,
or both sensors detect signals
simultaneously, the seatbelt preten-
sioner does not activate.
– Seatbelt pretensioner for front
passenger (shoulder belt preten-
sioner only) (when both the satellite
safing sensor and the front passen-
ger’s side front door impact sensor
sense an impact force)
However, when a center pillar im-
pact sensor detects a signal faster
than the front door impact sensor,
or both sensors detect signals
simultaneously, the seatbelt preten-
sioner does not activate.
. Pretensioners are designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated,
both the driver’s and front passenger’s
seatbelt retractor assemblies should
be replaced only by an authorized
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-
belt retractor assemblies, use only
genuine SUBARU parts.
. If either front seatbelt does not
retract or cannot be pulled out due to
a malfunction or activation of the
pretensioner, contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
. If the front seatbelt retractor assem-
bly or surrounding area has been
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it has
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the
buyer to the contents of this section.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
the occupants should sit in an
upright position with their seat-
belts properly fastened. Refer to
“Seatbelts” F1-11.
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the front seatbelt retractor as-
semblies or surrounding area.
This could result in accidental
activation of the seatbelt preten-
sioners or could make the sys-
tem inoperative, possibly result-
ing in serious injury. Seatbelt
pretensioners have no user-ser-
viceable parts. For required ser-
vicing of front seatbelt retractors
equipped with seatbelt preten-
sioners, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. When discarding front seatbelt
retractor assemblies or scrap-
ping the entire vehicle due to
collision damage or for other
reasons, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
& Seatbelt with shoulder belt
and lap belt pretensioners
NOTE
This section is applicable to the front
passenger’s side seatbelt.
1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (should er
belt pretensioner)
2) Lap belt pretensioner
On the front passenger ’s side, the
1-18
Black plate (47,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
shoulder belt pretensioner is supplemen-
ted by a lap belt pretensioner, which is
located at the base of the center pillar.
Like the shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap
belt pretensioner instantaneously pulls in
the belt to eliminate slack if a certain level
of frontal or side collision force is detected.
As a result, the seatbelt restrains the front
seat occupant more effectively.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re-
mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt
cannot be pulled out and retracted and
therefore must be replaced.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
signed to activate in minor impacts or
in rear impacts.
. In cases of frontal collisions, the
following components will operate si-
multaneously.
– Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
– Seatbelt pretensioners for front
passenger (shoulder belt preten-
sioner only)
– SRS frontal airbag for driver
– SRS frontal airbag for front pas-
senger*
– SRS curtain airbags (both sides)
(if an offset frontal collision occurs)
*: This does not operate if the occupant
detection system deactivates airbag op-
eration. For details, refer to “Fr ont
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag” F1-40
.
. In cases of side collisions, the
following components will operate si-
multaneously.
– SRS curtain airbag (impacted
side)
– SRS side airbag (impacted side)
(when both the satellite safing sen-
sor and any of the center pillar
impact sensors/front door impact
sensors sense an impact force)
– Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
(when both the satellite safing sen-
sor and the driver’s side front door
impact sensor sense an impact
force)
However, when a center pillar im-
pact sensor detects a signal faster
than the front door impact sensor,
or both sensors detect signals
simultaneously, the seatbelt preten-
sioner does not activate.
– Seatbelt pretensioner for front
passenger (shoulder belt preten-
sioner only) (when both the satellite
safing sensor and the front passen-
ger’s side front door impact sensor
sense an impact force)
However, when a center pillar im-
pact sensor detects a signal faster
than the front door impact sensor,
or both sensors detect signals
simultaneously, the seatbelt preten-
sioner does not activate.
. Pretensioners are designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated,
both the driver’s and front passenger’s
seatbelt retractor assemblies should
be replaced only by an authorized
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-
belt retractor assemblies, use only
genuine SUBARU parts.
. If either front s eatbelt d oes not
retract or cannot be pulled out due to
a malfunction or activation of the
pretensioner, contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
. If the front seatbelt retractor assem-
bly or surrounding area has been
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it has
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners
– CONTINUED –
1-19
1
Black plate (48,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners
buyer to the contents of this section.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
the occupants should sit in an
upright position with their seat-
belts properly fastened. Refer to
“Seatbelts” F1-11.
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the front seatbelt retractor as-
semblies or surrounding area.
This could result in accidental
activation of the seatbelt preten-
sioners or could make the sys-
tem inoperative, possibly result-
ing in serious injury. Seatbelt
pretensioners have no user-ser-
viceable parts. For required ser-
vicing of front seatbelt retractors
equipped with seatbelt preten-
sioners, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. When discarding front seatbelt
retractor assemblies or scrap-
ping the entire vehicle due to
collision damage or for other
reasons, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
& System monitors
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
while the vehicle is being driven. The
seatbelt pretensioners share the control
module with the SRS airbag system.
Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a
seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag
system warning light will illuminate. For
details, refer to “SRS airbag system
monitors” F1-57.
& System servicing
WARNING
. When discarding a seatbelt re-
tractor assembly or scrapping
the entire vehicle damaged by a
collision, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. Tampering with or disconnecting
the system’s wiring could result
in accidental activation of the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or
SRS airbag or could make the
system inoperative, which may
result in serious injury. Do not
use electrical test equipment on
any circuit related to the seatbelt
pretensioner and SRS airbag
systems. For required servicing
of the seatbelt pretensioner, con-
sult your nearest SUBARU deal-
er.
CAUTION
The sensors and SRS airbag control
modules are located in the following
locations.
. Front sub sensors: on both the
right and left side at the front of
the vehicle
. Front door impact sensors: on
both front doors
. Satellite safing sensor: under the
rear center seat
. Side airbag sensors : on both
center pillars
. Curtain airbag sensors: on both
rear wheel houses
. SRS airbag control module (in-
cluding the impact sensors): un-
der the center of the instrument
panel
If you need service or repair in those
areas or near the front seatbelt
retractors, have the work performed
by your authorized SUBARU dealer.
1-20
Black plate (49,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
NOTE
If the front or side part of the vehicle is
damaged in an accident to the extent
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts to
your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
. Attachment of any equi pment
other than genuine SUBARU ac-
cessory parts to the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
Child restraint systems
Infants and small children should always
be placed in an infant or child restraint
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle. You should use an infant or child
restraint system that meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is com-
patible with your vehicle and is appro-
priate for the child’s age and size. All child
restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those described in “Installation of
child restraint systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-29).
Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraints are not
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
– CONTINUED –
1-21
1
Black plate (50,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
properly secured in the vehicle. When
installing the child restraint system, care-
fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
Lock release knob
1) Unlocked
2) Locked
A) Unlocking marker in red
WARNING
Before installing a child r estraint
system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is s ecurely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an ac cident,
serious injury or death could result.
WARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child
on his or her lap or in his or her
arms while the vehicle is moving.
The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision,
because the child will be caught
between the passenger and objects
inside the vehicle.
Additionally, holding a child in your
lap or arms in the front seat exposes
that child to another serious danger.
Since the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force, the
child could be injured or even killed.
WARNING
Children should be properly re-
strained at all times. Never allow a
child to stand up, or to kneel on any
seat. Unrestrained children will be
thrown forward during sudden stop
or in an accident and can be injured
seriously.
Additionally, children standing up or
kneeling on or in front of the front
1-22
Black plate (51,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
seat are exposed another serious
danger. Since the SRS airbag de-
ploys with considerable speed and
force, the child could be injured or
even killed.
& Where to place a child re-
straint system
The following are SUBARU’s recommen-
dations on where to place a child restraint
system in your vehicle.
A: Front passenger’s seat
You should not install a child restraint
system (including a booster seat) due to
the hazard to children posed by the
passenger’s airbag.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating
positions
Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
In these posit ions, Automatic Lockin g
Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor
(ALR/ELR) seatbelts and l ower an-
chorages (bars) are provided for installing
a child restraint system.
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
C: Rear seat, center seating position
The ALR/ELR seatbelt and an upper
anchorage (tether anchorage, if equipped)
are provided in this position.
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
When you install a child restraint system in
the rear seat’s center seating position,
raise the center head restraint.
Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side
seating positions may be used for a seat
in the center seating position if a child
restraint system manufacturer’s instruc-
tions permit and specify using anchors as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
If a child restraint system is not correctly
fixed in place (for example, if a child
restraint system can be moved more than
1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), you
should install the child restraint system in
a rear seat, window-side seating position.
WARNING
. Even with advanced airbags, chil-
dren can be seriously injured by
the airbag. Put children in the
rear seat properly restrained at
all times. The SRS airbag de -
ploys with considerable speed
and force and can injure or even
kill children, especially if they are
not restrained or improperly re-
strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
For that reason, be sure to se-
cure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
– CONTINUED –
1-23
1
Black plate (52,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
child seats) in the REAR seats at
all times. You should choose a
restraint device which is appro-
priate for the child’s age, height
and weight. According to acci-
dent statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the
front seating positions.
. Do not use lower anchorages
(bars) for a seat in the center
seating position unless a child
restraint system manufacturer’s
instructions permit and specify
using anchors spaced as far
apart as those in this vehicle.
WARNING
SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’ S
SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A
REARWARD FACING CHILD
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS-
SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’SHEADTOOCLOSETO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
& Choosing a child restraint
system
Choose a child restraint system that is
appropriate for the child’s age and size
(weight and height) in order to provide the
child with proper protecti on. The child
restraint system should meet all applic-
able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards for the United States
or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards for Canada. It can be identified by
looking for the label on the child restraint
system or the manufacturer’s statement of
compliance in the document attached to
the system.
Also it is important for you to make sure
that the child restraint system is compa-
tible with the vehicle in which it will be
used.
& Installing child restraint sys-
tems with ALR/ELR seatbelt
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
1-24
Black plate (53,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
! Installing a rearward facing child
restraint
1. Shake the seatback to confirm that it is
securely locked into place.
– It is possible to check whether the
seatback is locked visually. If the
seatback is locked into place, the red
colored unlocking marker whi ch is
attached to the bottom of the lock
release knob is invisible. For details,
refer to “Folding down the rear seat-
back” F1-9.
2. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
5. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
6. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
– CONTINUED –
1-25
1
Black plate (54,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
7. Push and pull the child restraint
system forward and from side to side to
check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a
child restraint can be more firmly secured
by pushing it down into the seat cushion
and then tightening the seatbelt.
8. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
9. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR
REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT
IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’ S
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
! Installing forward facing child re-
straint
WARNING
Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
serious injury or death could result.
1. Shake the seatback to confirm that it is
securely locked into place.
– It is possible to check whether the
seatback is locked visually. If the
seatback is locked into place, the red
colored unlocking marker which is
attached to the bottom of the lock
release knob is invisible. For details,
refer to “Folding down the rear seat-
back” F1-9.
2. Remove the head restraint of the rear
seating position where the child restraint
system is to be installed. For details, refer
to “Head restraint adjustment” F1-8.
1-26
Black plate (55,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
CAUTION
Store the head restraint that has
been removed in the cargo area.
Avoid placing the head restraint in
the passenger compartment to pre-
vent it from being thrown around in
the passenger compartment in a
sudden stop or a sharp turn.
3. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
WARNING
When you intend to install a child
restraint system on the rear center
seating position, if the child restraint
system does not fit snugly against
the contours of the rear center seat
cushion, install the child restraint
system on the window-side seating
position to be safe. For details, refer
to “Where to place a child restraint
system” F1-23.
4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
6. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
8. Before having a child sit in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and right and left to check if it is firmly
secured. Sometimes a child restraint can
be more firmly secured by pushing it down
into the seat cushion and then tightening
the seatbelt.
9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
– CONTINUED –
1-27
1
Black plate (56,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
10. Latch the top tether hook onto the
tether anchorage that is located behind
the rear seat and tighten the top tether
firmly. For additional instructions, refer to
“Top tether anchorages” F1-32.
11. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
& Installing a booster seat
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
1. Place the booster seat in the rear
seating position and sit the child on it. The
child should sit well back on the booster
seat.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the booster seat and the child
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click. Take care not to
twist the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder and
that the lap belt is positioned as low as
possible on the child’s hips.
1-28
Black plate (57,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
4. To remove the booster seat, press the
release button on the seatbelt buckle and
allow the belt to retract.
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury to the child.
. Never place the shoulder belt
under the child’s arm or behind
the child’s back. If an accident
occurs, this can increase the risk
or severity of injury to the child.
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in
order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as
effective in preventing or redu-
cing injury.
. Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious inter-
nal injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sud-
den braking or in a collision.
& Installation of child restraint
systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to e nsure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
– CONTINUED –
1-29
1
Black plate (58,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
Some types of child restraint systems can
be installed on the rear seat of you r
vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
child restraint systems are secured to the
designated anchorages provided on the
vehicle body. The lower and tether an-
chorages are sometimes referred to as the
LATCH system (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren).
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower
anchorages (bars) and three upper an-
chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-
modating such child restraint systems.
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for
installing a child restraint system only on
the rear seat window-side seating posi-
tions. For each window-side seating posi-
tion, two lower anchorages are provided.
Each lower anchorage is located behind
the cover of the seatback bottom.
The tether anchorages (upper an-
chorages) are provided at the locations
shown in the above illustration. For de-
tails, refer to “Top tether anchorages” F1-
32.
To install a child restraint system using
lower and tether anchorages, perform the
following procedure.
1. Shake the seatback to confirm that it is
securely locked into place.
– It is possible to check whether the
seatback is locked visually. If the
seatback is locked into place, the red
1-30
Black plate (59,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
colored unlockin g marker which is
attached to the bottom of the lock
release knob is invisible. For details,
refer to “Folding down the rear seat-
back” F1-9.
2. You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of
the rear seat seatbacks. These marks
indicate the positions of the lower an-
chorages (bars).
Remove the covers and locate the lower
anchorages (bars).
3. Remove the rear seat head restraint.
For details, refer to “Head restraint adjust-
ment” F1-8.
CAUTION
. When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufac-
turer ’s instructions supplied with
it. After installing the child re-
straint system, check to ensure
that it is held securely in posi-
tion. If it is not held tight and
secure, the danger of your child
suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be
increased.
. Store the head restraint that has
been removed in the cargo area.
Avoid placing the head restraint
in the passenger compartment to
prevent it from being thrown
around in the passenger com-
partment in a sudden stop or a
sharp turn.
4. While following the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint system manu-
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the
lower anchorages located at “
” marks on
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the
hooks are connected, make s ure the
adjacent seatbelts are not caught.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
– CONTINUED –
1-31
1
Black plate (60,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
5. [If your child restraint system is of a
flexible attachment type (which uses
tether belts to connect the child restraint
system properly to the lower anchorages)]
While pushing the child restraint into the
seat cushion, pull both left and right lower
tether belts up to secure the child restraint
system firmly by taking up the slack in the
belt.
6. Latch the top tether hook onto the
tether anchorage that is located on the
rear shelf and tighten the top tether firmly.
For additional instructions, refer to “To p
tether anchorages” F1-32.
7. Before seating a child in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and right and left to verify that it is
held securely in position.
8. To remove the child restraint system,
follow the reverse procedures of installa-
tion.
If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
SUBARU dealer.
& Top tether anchorages
Your vehicle is equipped with three top
tether anchorages so that a child restraint
system having a top tether ca n be
installed in the rear seat. When installing
a child restraint system using top tether,
proceed as follows, while observing the
instructions by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
tether whenever one is required or avail-
able.
1-32
Black plate (61,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Anchorage location
1) For left seat
2) For center seat
3) For right seat
These upper anchorages are installed on
the rear shelf behind the rear seat.
! To hook the top tether
CAUTION
Remove the head restraint when
mounting a child restraint system.
Otherwise, it might be possible that
the top tether cannot be fastened
tightly.
1. Open the cover and attach the top
tether hook to the appropriate upper
anchorage.
2. Tighten the top tether securely.
Please contact your SUBARU dealer if
you have any question regard ing the
installation of a child restraint system.
*SRS airbag (Supplemental
Restraint System airbag)
*SRS: This stands for supplemental re-
straint system. This name is used be-
cause the airbag system supplements the
vehicle’s seatbelts.
& Models with SRS airbags and
lap/shoulder restraints for
driver, front passenger, and
window-side rear passengers
Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-
mental restraint system in addition to a
lap/shoulder belt at each front seating
position and each rear window-side seat-
ing positions. The supplemental restraint
system (SRS) consists of seven airbags.
The configurations are as follows.
. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal
airbags
. Driver’s and front passenger’s side
airbags
. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-
senger, and window-side rear passen-
gers)
. Knee airbag for driver
These SRS airbags are designed only
as a supplement to the primary protec-
tion provided by the seatbelt.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-33
1
Black plate (62,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
The system also controls front seatbelt
pretensioners. For operation instructions
and precautions concerning the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre-
tensioners” F1-17.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accide nt, the
driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seat-
belts when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position. The SRS
airbag is designed only to be a
supplement to the primary pro-
tection provided by the seatbelt.
It does not eliminate the need to
fasten seatbelts. In combination
with the seatbelts, it offers the
best combined protection in case
of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seatbelt system,
refer to “Seatbelts” F1-11.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed – faster than
the blink of an eye – and force to
protect in high speed collisions,
the force of an airbag can injure
an occupant whose body is too
close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear your
seatbelt to help avoid injuries
that can result when the SRS
airbag contacts an occupant not
in proper position such as one
thrown forward during pre-acci-
dent braking.
Even when properly positioned,
there remains a possibility that
an occupant may suffer minor
injury such as abrasions and
bruises to the face or arms
because of the SRS airbag de-
ployment force.
. The SRS airbags dep loy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far f rom the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
. Do not place any objects over or
near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag.
If the SRS airbag deploys, those
objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
cause injury.
WARNING
. P ut children i n the rear seat
properly restrained at all times.
The SRS airbag deploys with
1-34
Black plate (63,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill chil-
dren, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly re-
strained . B ecause children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
For that reason, we strongly
recommend that ALL children
(including those in child seats
and those that have outgrown
child restraint devices) sit in the
REAR seat properly restrained at
all times in a child restraint
device or in a seatbelt, whichever
is appropriate for the child’s age,
height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child re-
straint devices (including for-
ward facing child seats) in the
REAR seats at all times.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat-
ing positions.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint
system, refer to “Child restraint
systems” F1-21.
. NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD
OR REARWARD FACING CHILD
SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT.
DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS IN-
JURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIR-
BAG.
. Never allow a child to stand up,
or to kneel on the front passen-
ger’s seat, or never hold a child
on your lap or in your arms. The
SRS airbag deploys with consid-
erable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breath-
ing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. If you or your
passengers have breathing pro-
blems after SRS airbag deploys,
get fresh air promptly.
. A deploying SRS airbag releases
hot gas. Occupants could get
burned if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.
NOTE
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it is
equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
the buyer to the applicable section in
this Owner’s Manual.
. If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel
supply will be cut off to reduce the risk
of fire caused by lea king fu el. F or
details about restarting of the engine,
refer to “If your vehicle is involved in
an accident” F9-18.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-35
1
Black plate (64,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
& Components
1) SRS frontal airbag
2) SRS side airbag
3) SRS curtain airbag
4) SRS knee airbag
The SRS airbags are stowed in the
following locations.
Driver’s SRS frontal airbag : in the center
portion of the steering wheel
Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:
near the top of the dashboard under an
“SRS AIRBAG” mark
SRS side airbag: in the door side of each
front seat seatback which bears an “SRS
AIRBAG” label
SRS cur tain airbag: in the roof side
(between the f ront pillar and a point
behind the rear quarter glass)
An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the
top of each center pillar and rear pillar.
SRS knee airbag: under the st eering
column
1-36
Black plate (65,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
1) Airbag control module (including impact
sensor)
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
side)
9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
hand side)
10) Airbag wiring
11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side)
13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)
18) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
19) Front passe nger’s occupant detection
system sensor
20) Front passe nger’s occupant detection
control module
21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
22) SRS airbag system warning light
23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
center seat)
24) Front door impact sensor (left-hand side)
25) Front door impact sensor (right-hand
side)
26) Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-37
1
Black plate (66,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
& SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system that com-
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag
requirements i n the amended Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
No. 208.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system automatically determines the de-
ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag at the time of deployment as well as
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the
SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy-
ment.
Your vehicle has warning labels on the
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag
attached to the glove box lid beginning
with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
the instructions on the warning labels and
tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
seated in an appropriate child restraint
system.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed
in the center portion of the steering wheel.
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is stowed near the top of the dashboard
under an “ SRS AIRBAG” mark. Also, the
driver’s knee airbag is stowed in the
bottom of the steering column.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
the following components deploy.
. SRS frontal airbag for driver
. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger
. Knee airbag for driver
. SRS curtain airbag
*1
*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.
These components supplement the seat-
belts by reducing the impact to the
occupant’s head, chest and knees.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR
REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT
IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
1-38
Black plate (67,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
WARNING
Never allow a child to stand up, or to
kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
The SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can
injure or even kill the child.
WARNING
The SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable speed and force. Occu-
pants who are out of proper position
when the SRS airbag deploys could
suffer very serious injuries. Be-
cause the SRS airbag needs enough
space for deployment, the driver
should always sit upright and well
back in the seat as far from the
steering wheel as practical w hile
still maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-39
1
Black plate (68,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
seatbelt to help avoid injuries that
can result when the SRS airbag
contacts an occupant not in proper
position such as one thrown toward
the front of the vehicle during pre-
accident braking.
WARNING
. Do not put any objects over the
steering wheel pad and dash-
board. If the SRS frontal airbag
deploys, these objects could in-
terfere with its proper operation
and could be propelled inside the
vehicle, causing injury.
. Do not put any objects under the
driver’s side of the instrument
panel. If the knee airbag deploys,
those objects could interfere with
its proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle,
causing injury.
. The key must not be attached to
heavy, sharp or hard acces-
sories, or another key. If the knee
airbag deploys, those objects
could interfere with its proper
operation and could be propelled
inside the vehicle and cause
injury.
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-
ror over the inside rear view mirror.
If the SRS airbag deploys, those
objects could become projectiles
that could seriously injure vehicle
occupants.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a
dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in
different ways depending on the severity
of impact.
Have the system inspected by your
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS
airbag system warning light illuminates.
NOTE
The driver’s SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are not controlled by the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem.
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bag
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator
operates in different ways depending on
the severity of impact.
The occupant detection system sensor is
installed under the seat upholstery and
monitors the physique and posture of the
front passenger. Using this information,
1-40
Black plate (69,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
the occupant detection system determines
whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag should be deployed or not.
The occupant detection system may not
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys. This is normal. In this
case, although the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag does not operate, the front
passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper-
ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten-
sioner. For details about the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre-
tensioners” F1-17.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
SUBARU advanced fro ntal airbag
system from functioning correctly
or cause the system to fail.
. Do not apply any strong impact
to the front passenger ’sseat
such as by kicking.
. Do not let rear passengers rest
their feet between the front seat-
back and seat cushion.
. Do not spill liquid on the front
passenger ’s seat. If liquid is
spilled, wipe it off immediately.
. Do not remove or disassemble
the front passenger’s seat.
. Do not install any accessory
(such as an audio amplifier) other
than a genuine SUBARU acces-
sory under the front passenger’s
seat.
. Do not place anything (shoes,
umbrella, etc.) under the front
passenger’s seat.
. Do not use the front passenger’s
seat with the head restraint re-
moved.
. Do not leave any articles on the
front passenger ’s seat or the
seatbelt tongue and buckle en-
gaged when you leave your ve-
hicle.
. Do not put sharp object(s) on the
seat or pierce the seat uphols-
tery.
. Do not place a magnet near the
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt
retractor.
. Do not use front seats with their
backward-forward position and
seatback not being locked into
place securely. If any of them are
not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure,
refer to “Manual seat” F 1-4
(models equipped with manual
seats only).
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
passenger’s occupant detection system
have failed, the SRS airbag system
warning light will illuminate. Have the
system inspected by your SUBARU deal-
er immediately if the SRS airbag system
warning light illuminates.
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
may affect the proper function of the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
Have your vehicle inspected at your
SUBARU dealer. Do not let anyone use
the front passenger’s seat while you are
driving the vehicle to your SUBARU deal-
er.
NOTE
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are not con-
trolled by the SUBARU advanced fron-
tal airbag system.
! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicators
Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON and OFF indicators” F3-16.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-41
1
Black plate (70,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! Occupant detection system
The occupant detection system sensor is
installed under the seat upholstery and
monitors the physique and posture of the
front passenger. Using this information,
the occupant detection system determines
whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag should be deployed or not.
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
If the front passenger’s seat cushion is
wet, this may adversely affect the ability of
the system to determine deployment. If
the seat cushion is wet, the front passen-
ger should s top sitting on the front
passenger’s seat. Wipe off liquid from
the seat immediately, let the seat dry
naturally and then check the SRS airbag
system warning light as follows.
. If the SRS airbag system warning light
illuminates, keep the seat dry until the
warning light turns off. If the SRS airbag
system warning light stays on even when
the seat has dried, do not allow anyone to
sit on the front passenger’s seat and have
the system checked by your SUBARU
dealer.
. If the SRS airbag system warning light
does not illuminate, check that the front
passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicators work properly. If the indicators
do not work properly, do not allow anyone
to sit on the front passenger’s seat and
have the system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
Also, if luggage or electronic devices are
placed on the front passenger’s seat, this
may adversely affect the ability of the
system to determine deployment. This
may prevent the front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON and OFF indicators from work-
ing properly. Check that the indicators
work properly.
When the OFF indicator turns off and the
ON indicator illuminates, the front passen-
ger ’s frontal airbag may deploy during a
collision. Remove luggage and electronic
devices from the front passenger’s seat.
CAUTION
Electrical devices, such as cell
phones, lap tops, po rtable music
players, or electronic games, espe-
cially when connected to the acces-
sory power outlet and placed on the
front passenger’s seat or used by
the person sitting in the front pas-
senger’s seat, may affect the opera-
tion of the occupant detection sys-
tem. If the occupant detection sys-
tem warning light illuminates or
operates erratically when using an
electronic device in the vehicle, at
first try to relocate that device to
avoid it creating any interference. If
the device continues to cause inter-
ference, the use of that device in the
vehicle should be discontinued.
NOTE
This device complies with Part 18 of
the FCC Rules. This device may cause
interference. If this device causes inter-
ference, consult the nearest SUBARU
dealer. Also, for maintenance of the
system, consult the nearest SUBARU
dealer. This product may cause inter-
ference to radio equipment and should
not be installed near maritime safety
1-42
Black plate (71,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
communications equipment or other
critical navigation or communication
equipment operating between 0.45-30
MHz.
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will not be activated when any of the
following conditions are met regarding the
front passenger’s seat:
. The seat is empty.
. The seat is equipped with an appro-
priate child restraint system and an infant
is restrained in it. (See WARNING that
follows.)
. The front passenger’s occupant detec-
tion system is malfunctioning.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR
REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT
IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT
EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSEN-
GER’S SRS FRONTAL AIRBAG IS
DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it
in the REAR seat in a correct
manner. Also, it is strongly recom-
mended that any forward facing
child seat or booster seat be in-
stalled in the REAR seat, and that
even children who have outgrown a
child restraint system be also
seated in the REAR seat. This is
because children sitting in the front
passenger’s seat may be killed or
severely inj ured should the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-
ploy. REAR seats are the safest
place for children.
CAUTION
When the front passenger’s seat is
occupied by an infant in an appro-
priate child restraint system, ob-
serve the following precautions.
Failure to do so may interfere with
the proper operation of the occu-
pant detection system, activating
the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag even though that seat is
occupied by the infant in the child
restraint system.
. Do not place any article (includ-
ing electronic devices) on the
seat other than the infant in the
child restraint system.
. Do not place more than one
infant in the child restraint sys-
tem.
! If the front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator illuminates
and the OFF indicator turns off
even when an infant or a small
child is in a child restraint sys-
tem (including booster seat)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Remove the child restraint system
from the seat.
3. By referring to the child restraint
manufacturer’s recommendations as well
as the child restraint system installation
procedures in “Child restraint systems”
F1-21, correctly install the child restraint
system.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and make sure that the front
passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.
If still the ON indicator remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the
following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than the child restraint system
and the child occupant.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-43
1
Black plate (72,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off after
taking relevant corrective actions de-
scribed above, relocate the child restraint
system to the rear seat and immediately
contact you r SUBAR U dealer for an
inspection.
NOTE
When a child who has outgrown a child
restraint system or a small adult is
seated in the front passenger’s seat,
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system may or may not activate the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the occupant’s seating
posture. Children should always wear a
seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre-
spective of whether the airbag is
deactivated or activated. If the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is acti-
vated (the ON indicator remains illumi-
nated while the OFF indicator turns off),
ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than the occupant.
If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the OFF indicator turns off
despite the fact that the actions noted
above have been taken, seat the child/
small adult in the rear seat and im-
mediately contact your SUBARU dealer
for an inspection. Even if the system
has passed the dealer inspection, it is
recommended that on subsequent trips
the child/small adult always take the
rear seat.
Children who have outgrown a child
restraint system should always wear the
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
is deactivated or activated.
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will be activated for deployment upon
impact when any of the following condi-
tions are met regarding the front passen-
ger ’s seat.
. When the seat is occupied by an adult.
. When certain items (e.g. jug of water)
are placed on the seat.
! If the passenger ’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator illuminates and
the ON indicator turns off even
when the front passenger’s seat
is occupied by an adult
This can be caused by the adult incor-
rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Ask the front passenger to set the
seatback to the upright position, sit up
straight in the center of the seat cushion,
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
the rearmost position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
If the OFF indicator remains illuminated
while the ON indicator remains off, take
the following actions.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Make sure that the front passenger
does not use a blanket, seat cushion, seat
cover, seat heater or massager, etc.
3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,
the front passenger should remove any
unnecessary items before sitting in the
front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a
rear seat.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and wait 6 seconds to allow the
system to complete self-checking. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator
should illuminate while the OFF indicator
remains off.
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
1-44
Black plate (73,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
nated while the ON indicator remains off,
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
and immediately contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
! How to contact the vehicle manu-
facturer concerning modifications
for persons with disabilities that
may affect the advanced airbag
system
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,
front side frame, radiator panel, instrument
panel, combination meter, steering wheel,
steering column, tire, suspension or floor
panel can affect the operation of the
SUBARU advanced airbag system. If
you have any questions, you may contact
the following SUBARU distributors.
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
of Columbia>
Subaru of America, Inc.
Customer Dealer Services Department
P.O. Box 6000
Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
<Hawaii>
Subaru Hawaii
2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202,
Honolulu, HI 96819-4467
808-839-2273
<Guam>
Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
bile
491, East Marine Corps Drive, Route 1
Dededo, Guam 96921-6225
671-633-2698
<Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00910
787-793-2828
<Canada>
Subaru Canada, Inc.
Consumer Support Department
560 Suffork Court, Mississauga, Ontario
L5R 4J7
1-800-894-4212
There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
in such an area, p lease c ontact the
SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
you bought your vehicle.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-45
1
Black plate (74,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! Operation
A) Driver’s side
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed.
The SRS airbags can function only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is designed to determine the
activation or deactivation condition of the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the characteristic of item
(s) or person on the front passenger’s seat
monitored by the front passenger’s occu-
pant detection system sensor. For this
reason, only the driver ’s SRS frontal
airbag may deploy in the event of a
collision, but this does not mean failure
of the system.
If the front sub sensors and the impact
sensors in the airbag control module
detect a predetermined amount of force
during a frontal collision, the control
module sends signals to the airbag
module(s) (only driver’s module or both
driver’s and front passenger’s modules)
instructing the module(s) to inflate the
SRS frontal airbag(s). On driver’s side, the
SRS knee airbag also inflates with the
SRS frontal airbag.
1-46
Black plate (75,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags use dual stage inflators.
The two inflators of each airbag are
triggered either sequentially or simulta-
neously, depending on the severity of
impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS
frontal airbag and depending o n the
severity of impact and the characteristic
of item(s) or person on the seat in the case
of the front passenger ’s S RS frontal
airbag.
After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-
diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s
vision is not obstructed. The time required
from detecting impact to the deflation of
the SRS airbag after deployment is short-
er than the blink of an eye.
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
pretensioners operate at the same time.
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS
airbag would activate in a non-accident
situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag
will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision
and will not interfere with the driver’s
ability to maintain control of the vehicle.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and
some smoke will b e relea sed. T hese
occurrences are a normal result of the
deployment. This smoke does not indicate
a fire in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system
components around the steerin g
wheel and dashboard w ith bare
hands right after deployment. Doing
so can cause burns because the
components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
signed to deploy in the event of an
accident involving a moderate to severe
frontal collision. They are not designed to
deploy in most lesser frontal im pacts
because the necessary protection can be
achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
are not designed to deploy in most side or
rear impacts or in most roll-over accidents
because deployment of only the driver’s
SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s and
front passenger ’s SRS frontal airbags
would not help the occupant in those
situations. The driver’s and front passen-
ger ’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to
function on a one-time-only basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the
level of force experienced in the passen-
ger compartment during a collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
! Example of accident in which the
driver’s/driver’s and front pas-
senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)
will most likely deploy
A head-on collision against a thick con-
crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-47
1
Black plate (76,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
magnitude to the co llision described
above.
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which it is possible that
the driver’s/driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy
Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags may be activated when the
vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
1-48
Black plate (77,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur
1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces in-
volved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-49
1
Black plate (78,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which the driver’s/dri-
ver ’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) will basically
not deploy
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags are designed not to deploy
in most cases if the vehicle is struck from
the side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its
side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-
speed frontal collision.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double collision,
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once either or both of the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
activated on the first impact, it/they will not
be activated on the second impact.
& SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback.
Inamoderatetoseveresideimpact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupant’s chest and
waist. The SRS side airbag operates only
for front seat occupants.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of
the cabin i s stored in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
the rear seat).
Inamoderatetoseveresideimpact
1-50
Black plate (79,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the side
window and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupant’s
head.
In a frontal collision, SRS curtain airbags
on both sides of th e vehicl e deplo y
between the occupant and the side
window and supplement the seatbelt by
reducing the impact to the occupant’s
head.
WARNING
The SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are designed only to
be a s upplement to the primary
protection provided by the seatbelt.
They do not do away with the need
to fasten seatbelts. It is also impor-
tant to wear your seatbelt to help
avoid injuries that can result when
an occupant is not seated in a
proper upright position.
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to either front door. The
SRS side airbag is stored in both
front seat seatbacks next to the
door, and it provides protection
by deploying rapidly (faster than
the blink of an eye) in the event of
a side impact collision. However,
theforceofSRSsideairbag
deployment may cause injuries
if your head or other parts of the
body are too close to the SRS
side airbag.
. Since your vehicle is equipped
with SRS curtain airbags, do not
sit or lean unnecessarily close to
the front or rear door on either
side. Also, do not put your head,
arms or hands out of the window.
The SRS curtain airbag on each
side of the cabin is stored in the
roof side (between the front pillar
and a point over the rear seat),
and it provides protection by
deploying rapidly (faster than
the blink of an eye) in the event
of a side impact. However, the
force of its deployment may
cause injuries if your head is
too close to it.
WARNING
Do not rest your arm on either front
door or its internal trim. It could be
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-51
1
Black plate (80,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
injured in the event of SRS side
airbag deployment.
WARNING
. Never allow a child to kneel on
the front passenger’s seat facing
the side window or to wrap his/
her arms around the front seat
seatback. In the event of an
accident, the force of the SRS
side airbag deployment could
injure the child seriously be-
cause his/her head or arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag.
Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children
should be placed in the rear seat
anyway and should be properly
restrained at all times.
. Never allow a child to kneel on
any passenger’s seat facing the
side window or put their head,
arms and hands out of the win-
dow. In the event of an accident,
the force of the SRS curtain
airbag deployment could injure
the child seriously because his/
her head is close to the SRS
curtain airbag.
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of t he SRS side airbag
deployment, they could be pro-
pelled dangerously toward the
vehicle’s occupants and cause
injuries.
. Do not attach a hands-free micro-
phone or any other accessory to
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
pillar, the windshield, a side win-
dow, an assist grip, or any other
cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag.
1-52
Black plate (81,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
A hands-free microphone o r
other accessory in such a loca-
tion could be propelled through
the cabin with great force by the
curtain airbag, or it could prevent
correct deployment of the curtain
airbag. In either case, the result
could be serious injuries.
. Never hang or place coat hangers
or other hard or pointed objects
near the side windows. If such
items are present when the SRS
curtain airbags deploy, they
could be thrown through the
passenger compartment and
cause serious injuries. They
could also prevent proper opera-
tion of the SRS curtain airbags.
WARNING
Do not put any kind of cover or
clothes or other objects over either
front seatback and do not attach
labels or stickers to the front seat
surface on or near the SRS side
airbag. They could prevent proper
deployment of the SRS side airbag,
reducing protection available to the
front seat’s occupant.
! Operation
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag can function only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
side airbags and SRS curt ain airbags
deploy independently of each other since
each has its own impact sensor. There-
fore, they may not both deploy in the same
accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and
SRS curtain airbag deploys independently
of the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags in the steering wheel and
instrument panel.
An impact sensor, which senses impact
force, is located in each of the following
locations.
. In the left and right front doors
. In the left and right center pillars
. In the left and right rear wheel houses
. Under the rear center seat
If the impact sensor that is located under
the rear center seat and one of the center
pillar impact sensors or front door impact
sensors together sense an impact force
above a predetermined level in a side
collision, the control module causes both
the SRS side airbag and curtain airbag on
the impacted side to inflate regardless of
whether the rear wheel house impact
sensor on the same side senses an
impact.
If the impact sensor that is located under
the rear center seat and one of the rear
wheel house impa ct sens ors tog ether
sense an impact force above a predeter-
mined level in a side collision, the control
module causes only the SRS curtain
airbag on the impacted side to inflate.
Even if a frontal collision occurs, the SRS
curtain airbags will deploy when the front
sensor and the control unit determine that
the impact results from an offset frontal
collision.
The SRS curtain airbags are designed to
deploy when the driver’s S RS frontal
airbag deploys or the driver’s and pas-
senger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy in a
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-53
1
Black plate (82,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
frontal collision, and also when the system
determines that the collision is an offset
frontal collision. The SRS curtain airbags
are basically designed not to deploy in a
frontal collision when the SRS frontal
airbags do n ot deploy or the system
determines that the collision is other than
an offset frontal collision.
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag
immediately starts to deflate. The time
required from detection of an impact to
deflation of an SRS side airbag after
deployment is shorter than the blink of
an eye.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
for a while f ollowing deployment then
slowly deflates.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deploy even when no one occupies
the seat on the side on which an impact is
applied.
When the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud
inflation noise will be heard and some
smoke will be relea sed. These occur-
rences are a normal result of the deploy-
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire
in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS side airbag
system components around the
front seat seatback with bare hands
right after deployment. Doing so can
cause burns because the compo-
nents can be very hot as a result of
deployment.
After deployment, do not touch any
part of the SRS curtain airbag
system (from the front pillar to the
part of the roof side over the rear
seat). Doing so can cause burns
because the components ca n be
very hot as a result of deployment.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed to deploy in the event
of an accident involving a moderate to
severe side impact collision. They are not
designed to deploy in most lesser side
impact. Also, they are not designed to
deploy in most frontal or most rear impacts
because SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag deployment would not help
the occupant in those situations.
Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed to function on a one-
time-only basis.
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment depend on the level of force
experienced in the passenger compart-
ment during a side impact collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
1-54
Black plate (83,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Example of the type of accident
in which the SRS side airbag will
most likely deploy.
A severe side impact near the front seat.
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which the SRS curtain
airbag will most likely deploy.
1) A severe side impact near the front seat
or the rear seat.
2) An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-55
1
Black plate (84,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and the
SRS curtain airbag are unlikely to deploy.
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment. In the event of accidents like
those illustrated, the SRS side airbag and
SRS curta in airbag may not deploy
depending on the level of accident forces
involved.
1-56
Black plate (85,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which the SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag
are not designed to deploy in
most cases
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision
with another vehicle (moving or station-
ary).
2) The vehicle is struck from behind.
3) The vehicle pitches end over end.
In the event of accidents like those
illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are not designed to deploy
in most cases.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
A) SRS curtain airbag
B) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
immediately followed by another from the
same direction, once the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
the first impact, they will not be activated
on the second.
& SRS airbag system monitors
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the SRS airbag system
(including front s eatbelt pretensi oners)
while the vehicle is being driven. The
SRS airbag system warning light will show
normal system operation by illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
The following components are monitored
by the indicator:
. Front sub sensor
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-57
1
Black plate (86,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Airbag control module (including im-
pact sensor)
. Frontal airbag module
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
. Side airbag sensor
– Center pillar right-hand side
– Center pillar left-hand side
. Front door impact sensor
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Side airbag module
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Curtain airbag sensor
– Rear wheel house right-hand side
– Rear wheel house left-hand side
. Curtain airbag module
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
center seat)
. Seatbelt pretensioner
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Lap belt pretensioner (front passen-
ger’s side)
. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-
ger ’s side)
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
. All related wiring
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbe lt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system. Immediately take your vehi-
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbag will not operate properly in
the event of a collision, which may
increase the risk of injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
& SRS airbag system servicing
WARNING
. When discarding an airbag mod-
ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
cle damaged by a collision, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer.
. The SRS airbag has no u ser-
serviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of
the SRS airbag, consult y our
nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-
ing with or disconnecting the
system’s wiring could result in
accidental inflation of the SRS
airbag or could make the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury.
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas
indicated in the following list, have
the work performed by an author-
1-58
Black plate (87,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-
bag control module, impact sensors
and airbag modules are stored in
these areas.
. Under the center of the instru-
ment panel
. On both the right and left sides at
the front of the vehicle
. Steering wheel and column and
nearby areas
. Bottom of the steering column
and nearby areas
. Top of the dashboard on front
passenger’ssideandnearby
areas
. Each front seat and nearby area
. Inside each center pillar
. Inside each front door
. In each roof side (from the front
pillar to a point over the rear seat)
. Between the rear seat cushion
and rear wheel house on each
side
. Under the rear center seat
In the event that the SRS airbag is
deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-
nents of the SRS airbag system are
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU
parts.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The front part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which only
the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver ’s and front passenger’sSRS
frontal airbags did not deploy.
. The pad of the steering wheel, the
cover over the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the front pillar to a point over the rear
seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
. The center pillar, front door, rear
wheel house or rear sub frame, or an
area near these parts, was involved in
an accident in which the SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not
deploy.
. The fabric or leather of either the
front seatback and seat cushion is cut,
frayed, or otherwise damaged.
. The rear part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident.
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
WARNING
. To avoid accidental activation of
the system or rendering the sys-
tem inoperative, which may re-
sult in serious injury, no modifi-
cations should be made to any
components or wiring of the SRS
airbag system.
This includes following modifica-
tions.
– Installation of custom steering
wheels
– Attachment of additional trim
materials to the dashboard
– Installation of custom seats
– Replacement of seat fabric or
leather
– Installation of additional fabric
or leather on the front seat
– Attachment of a hands-free
microphone or any other ac-
cessory to a front pillar, a
center pillar, a rear pillar, the
windshield, a side window, an
assist grip, or any other cabin
surface that would be near a
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-59
1
Black plate (88,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
deploying SRS curtain airbag.
– Installation of additional elec-
trical/electronic equipmen t
such as a mobile two-way
radio on or near the SRS
airbag syste m components
and/or wiring is not advisable.
This could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
system.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of any equi pment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
. Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,
etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
accessory parts to the side body.
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts on
your vehicle.
1-60
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys ..................................................................... 2-3
Key number plate................................................ 2-3
Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-3
Security indicator light ........................................ 2-4
Key replacement ................................................. 2-4
Certification for immobilizer system..................... 2-4
Door locks ........................................................... 2-5
Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-5
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-7
Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-7
Power door locking switches............................. 2-8
Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-9
Keyless access with push-button start
system (if equipped) ........................................ 2-9
Safety precautions ............................................. 2-10
Locking and unlocking with “keyless access”
entry function................................................... 2-13
Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-16
Warning chimes and warning indicator ............... 2-16
Disabling keyless access function ...................... 2-16
When access key does not operate properly ....... 2-18
Replacing battery of access key ......................... 2-18
Replacing access key......................................... 2-18
Certification for keyless access with push-button
start system..................................................... 2-18
PIN Code Access (models with “keyless
access with push-button start system”)........ 2-19
Registering a PIN code ....................................... 2-20
Unlocking .......................................................... 2-21
Remote keyless entry system ........................... 2-21
Locking the doors .............................................. 2-22
Unlocking the doors .......................................... 2-22
Opening the trunk lid ......................................... 2-23
Vehicle finder function ....................................... 2-23
Sounding a panic alarm ..................................... 2-23
Selecting audible signal operation (models
without “keyless access with push-button start
system”).......................................................... 2-23
Replacing the battery......................................... 2-24
Replacing lost transmitters ................................ 2-24
Welcome lighting (if equipped) ........................... 2-24
Certification for Remote keyless entry
system ............................................................ 2-24
Alarm system..................................................... 2-25
System operation............................................... 2-26
Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-26
If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
system ............................................................ 2-26
Arming the system ............................................ 2-27
Disarming the system ........................................ 2-29
Valet mode ........................................................ 2-30
Passive arming (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”) ....................... 2-30
Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-31
Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-31
Child safety locks .............................................. 2-32
Windows............................................................. 2-32
Power window operation by driver ..................... 2-33
Power window operation by passengers............. 2-35
Initialization of power window ............................ 2-36
Trunk lid ............................................................. 2-36
To open and close the trunk lid from outside...... 2-36
Keys and doors
2
Black plate (4,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors
To open the trunk lid from inside ........................ 2-36
Internal trunk lid release handle.......................... 2-37
Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-38
Moonroof switches ............................................ 2-39
Sun shade ......................................................... 2-40
Black plate (93,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys
NOTE
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, refer to
“Keyless access with push-button start
system” F2-9.
1) Master key
2) Submaster key
3) Sub key
4) Key number plate
Three types of keys are provided for your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the “ON” position to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position, thereby
stopping the engine.
& Key number plate
The key number is stamped on the key
number plate attached to the key set.
Write down the key number and keep it in
another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
number is needed to make a replacement
key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
vehicle. Refer to “Key replacement” F2-4.
Immobilizer
The immobilizer system is designed to
prevent an una uthorized pe rson from
starting the engine. Only keys registered
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can
be used to operate your vehicle. This
system, however, is not a 100% anti-theft
guaranty.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
If you press the push-button ignition
switch when carrying an unregistered
access key, the switch will not turn to the
“ON” position and the engine will not start.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
Even if an unregistered key fits into the
ignition switch and can be turned to the
“START” position, the engine will auto-
matically stop after several seconds.
If the engine does not start, perform either
of the following procedures.
. Perform the procedure described in
“Starting engine” F9-17 (models with
“keyless access with push-button start
system”).
. Pull out the key once before trying
again (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”). Refer to
Keys and doors/Keys
– CONTINUED –
2-3
2
Black plate (94,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Immobilizer
“Ignition switch (models without push-
button start system)” F3-4.
CAUTION
. Do not place the key under direct
sunlight or anywhere it may
become hot.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
. Donotmodifyorremovethe
system. If modified or removed,
the proper operation of the sys-
tem cannot be guaranteed.
NOTE
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
please pay close attention to the fol-
lowing security precautions:
– Never leave your vehicle unat-
tended with its keys inside.
– Before leaving your vehicle,
close all windows and the moon-
roof, and lock the doors.
– Do not leave spare keys or any
record of your key number in the
vehicle.
. The vehicle has a maintenance-free
type immobilizer system.
& Security indicator light
Refer to “Security indicator light” F3-33.
& Key replacement
Your key number plate will be required if
you ever need a replacement key made.
Any new key must be registered for use
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system
before it can be used. The maximum
number of keys that can be registered
for use with one vehicle is as follows.
. Four (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
. Seven (models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
One key that has already been registered
is required in order to register a new key.
If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code still
remains in the memory of the vehicle’s
immobilizer system. For security reasons,
the lost key’s ID code should be erased
from the memory. To erase the lost key’s
ID code, all keys that will be used are
required.
For details about new key registration and
erasing the lost key’s ID code, contact
your SUBARU dealer.
& Certification for immobilizer
system
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
Refer to “Certification for keyless access
with push-button start system” F2-18.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
! U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: MOZRI-38BFH
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
2-4
Black plate (95,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Canada-spec. models
NOTE
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard
(s). Operation is subject to the follow-
ing two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
NOTE
Le présent appareil est conforme aux
CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne
doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l’utilisateur de l ’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
! Mexico-spec. models
Door locks
& Locking and unlocking from
the outside
NOTE
If you unlock the driver’s door with a
key (including a mechanical key) and
open the door while the alarm system
is armed, the alarm system is triggered
and the vehicle ’s horn sounds. In this
case, perform any of the following
operations:
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
. Press any button on the access key
(except when the access key battery is
discharged).
. Turn the push-button ignition switch
to the “ACC” position.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
. Press any button on the remote
transmitter (except when the transmit-
ter battery is discharged).
. Insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position.
For details about the alarm system,
refer to “Alarm system” F2-25.
Keys and doors/Door locks
– CONTINUED –
2-5
2
Black plate (96,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Door locks
To lock the driver’s door from the outside
with the key, turn the key toward the front.
To unlock the door, turn the key toward the
rear. Pull the outside door handle to open
an unlocked door.
To lock the door from outside without the
key, the following methods are available.
NOTE
The mechanical key is directional. If the
key cannot be inserted, change the
direction that the grooved si de is
facing and insert it again.
Locking using lock lever
1) Rotate the lock lever forward.
2) Close the door.
2-6
Black plate (97,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Locking using power door locking switch
1) Press the front side (lock side) of the
power door locking switch.
2) Close the door.
In this case, all closed doors are locked at
the same time.
Always make sure that all doors and the
trunk lid are locked before leaving your
vehicle.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle when locking the
doors from the outside without the key.
& Locking and unlocking from
the inside
1) Unlock
2) Lock
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the
lock lever forward. To unlock the door from
the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward.
The red mark on the lock lever appears
when the door is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Always make sure that all doors and the
trunk lid are closed before starting to drive.
WARNING
Keep all doors locked when you
drive, especially when small chil-
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seat-
belts and child restraints, locking
the doors reduces the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in an
accident.
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out by preventing a door
from being accidentally opened, and
intruders from unexpectedly open-
ing doors and entering your vehicle.
& Battery drainage prevention
function
If a door is not completely closed, the
interior lights will remain illuminated as a
result. However, several lights will be
automatically turned off by the battery
drainage prevention function to prevent
the battery from discharging. The following
interior lights will be affected by this
function.
Keys and doors/Door locks
– CONTINUED –
2-7
2
Black plate (98,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Power door locking switches
Item
Switch
position
Automatically turning
off
Map lights* OFF*
Approximately 20
minutes later
Dome light DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
Ignition
switch light
—
Approximately 20
minutes later
Trunk light —
Approximately 20
minutes later
*: The battery drainage prevention function
affects only the map lights on models with the
moonroof, and only when the map light
switches are in the OFF position. The map
lights on models without the moonroof do not
turn off automatically, so push the light switches
manually to turn them off.
The operational/non-operational setting of
this function can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer to change the setting.
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure
that all doors and the trunk lid are
completely closed.
. The battery drainage prevention
function does not operate while the
key is in the ignition switch.
Power door locking switches
1) Lock
2) Unlock
All doors can be locked and unlocked by
the power door locking switches located at
the driver’s side and the front passenger’s
side doors.
To lock the doors, push the front side of
the switch.
To unlock the doors, push the rear side of
the switch.
When you close the doors after you set
the door locks, the doors remain locked.
2-8
Black plate (99,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside using the power
door locking switches.
& Key lock-in prevention func-
tion
This function prevents the doors from
being locked under the following condi-
tions.
. The key is still in the ignition switch
(models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position (models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
This function’s operational/non-opera-
tional setti ng can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. C ontact a SUBARU
dealer for details.
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure
you are holding the key before locking
the doors.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function operational
With the driver’s door open, the doors are
automatically kept unlocked even if the
front side of the power door locking switch
is pressed.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function non-operational
. If the lock lever is turned to the front
(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
open and the driver’s door is then closed
with the lock lever in that position, the
driver’s door is locked.
. If the spare key is used to lock the
driver’s door from the outside of the
vehicle, the door is locked.
Keyless access with push-
button start system (if
equipped)
1) Access key (main)
2) Access key (sub)
3) Key number plate
The vehicle has two access keys and a
key number plate. For details about the
key number plate, refer to “Key number
plate” F2-3.
The keyless access with push-button start
system allows you to perform the following
functions when you are carrying the
access key.
. Locking and unlocking of the doors and
unlocking of the trunk
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
– CONTINUED –
2-9
2
Black plate (100,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
. Opening the trunk
. Starting and stopping the engine. For
detailed information, refer to “Starting and
stopping engine (models with push-button
start system)” F7-12.
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. For detailed information, refer to
“Alarm system” F2-25.
Locking and unlocking by the remote
keyless entry system can also be con-
trolled with the buttons on the access key.
For detailed information, refer to “Remote
keyless entry system” F2-21.
A mechanical key is attached to each
access key. The mechanical key is used
for the following operations.
. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door
. Locking and unlocking the glove box
You cannot unlock the glove box without
using the mechanical key. You can keep
the glove box locked when you leave your
vehicle and the access key (with the
mechanical key removed) at a parking
facility.
1) Release button
2) Mechanical key
While pressing the release button of the
access key, take out the mechanical key.
& Safety precautions
WARNING
If you wear an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, stay at
least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the
transmitting antennas installed on
the vehicle.
The radio waves from the transmit-
ting antennas on the vehicle could
adversely affect the operation of
implanted pacemakers and im-
planted defibrillators.
If you wear electric medical equip-
ment other than an implanted pace-
maker or an implanted defibrillator,
before using the keyless access
with push-button start system, refer
to “Radio waves used for the key-
less access with push-button start
system” mentioned later, and con-
tact the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for more information.
The radio waves from the transmit-
ting antennas on the vehicle could
adversely affect the operation of the
electric medical equipment.
“Radio waves used for the keyless
access with push-button start sys-
tem”
. The keyless access with push-
button start system uses radio
waves of the following fre-
quency* in addition to the radio
waves used for the remote key-
less entry system. The radio
waves are periodically output
from the antennas installed on
the vehicle as shown in the
following illustrations.
* Radio frequency: 134 kHz
2-10
Black plate (101,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
1) Antenna
CAUTION
. Never leave or store the access
key inside the vehicle (e.g., on
the instrumental panel, inside the
glove box, on the seat, in the
door pocket or on the rear shelf)
or within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the
vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The
access key may be locked inside
the vehicle, or the battery may
discharge rapidly. Note that the
push-button ignition switch may
not turn on in some cases de-
pending on the location of the
access key.
. The access key contains electro-
nic components. Observe the
following precautions to prevent
malfunctions.
– Although you can replace the
battery of the access key
yourself, it is recommended
that the battery be replaced by
a SUBARU dealer to avoid the
risk of damage at the time of
replacement.
– Do not get the access key wet.
If the access key gets wet,
wipe it off immediately and let
it dry completely.
– Do not apply strong impacts
to the access key.
– Keep the access key away
from magnetic sources.
– Never leave the access key in
direct sunlight or anywhere
that may become hot, such
as on the dashboard. It may
damage the battery or cause
circuit malfunctions.
– Do not wash the access key in
an ultrasonic washer.
– Do not leave the access key in
humid or dusty locations.
Doing so may cause malfunc-
tions.
– Do not leave the access key
near personal computers or
home electric appliances.
Doing so may cause the ac-
cess key to malfunction, re-
sulting in battery discharge.
. If the access key is dropped, the
integrated mechanical key inside
may become loose. Be careful
not to lose the mechanical key.
. When you carry the access key
on an airplane, do not press the
button of the access key while in
the airplane. When any button of
the access key is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect
the operati on of the airplane.
When you carry the access key
in a bag on an airplane, take
measures to prevent the buttons
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
– CONTINUED –
2-11
2
Black plate (102,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
of the access key from being
pressed.
NOTE
. The operational/non-operational
setting for the keyless access function
can be changed. For the setting proce-
dure, refer to “Disabling keyless ac-
cess function” F2-16. The setting can
also be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
For more details, contact a SUBARU
dealer.
. For detailed information about the
operation method for the push-button
ignition switch while the keyless ac-
cess function is switched to the non-
operational mode, refer to “Access key
– if access key does not operate
properly” F9-16.
. The keyless access with push-but-
ton start system uses weak radio
waves. The status of the access key
and environmental conditions may in-
terfere with the communication be-
tween the access key and the vehicle
under the following conditions, and it
may not be possible to lock or unlock
the doors or start the engine.
– When operating near a facility
where strong radio waves are trans-
mitted, such as a broadcast station
and power transmission lines
– When products that transmit
radio waves are used, such as an
access key or a remote transmitter
key of another vehicle
– When the access key is placed
near wireless communication
equipment such as a cell phone
– When the access key is placed
near a metallic object
– When metallic acc essories are
attached to the access key
– When carrying the access key
with electronic appliances such as
a laptop computer
– When the battery of the access
key is discharged
. The access key is always commu-
nicating with the vehicle and is con-
tinuously using the battery. Although
the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, it is ap-
proximately 1 to 2 years. If the battery
becomes fully discharged, replace it
with a new one.
. If an access key is lost, it is
recommended that the remaining ac-
cess key be reregistered. For reregis-
tration of an access key, contact a
SUBARU dealer.
. For a spare access key, contact a
SUBARU dealer.
. Up to 7 access keys can be regis-
tered for one vehicle.
. Carefully store the key number plate
supplied with the access key. It is
necessary for vehicle repair.
. Do not leave the access key in the
storage spaces inside the vehicle, such
as the door pocket, dashboard and the
rear shelf. Vibrations may damage the
key or turn on the switch, possibly
resulting in a lockout.
. After the vehicle battery i s dis-
charged or replaced, initialization of
the steering lock system may be re-
quired to start the engine. In this case,
perform the following procedure to
initialize the steering lock.
(1) Turn the push-button ignition
switch to the “OFF” position. For
details, refer to “Switching power”
F3-7.
(2) Open and close the driver ’s
door.
(3) Wait for approximately 10 sec-
onds.
When the steering is locked, the initi-
alization is completed.
2-12
Black plate (103,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Locking and unlocking with
“keyless access” entry func-
tion
! Operating ranges
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
The operating ranges of the door locking/
unlocking f unctions and the trunk lid
unlocking function are approximately 16
to 32 in (40 to 80 cm) from the respective
door handles and the trunk ornament.
1) LED indicator
When the access key is within either of the
operating ranges of the front doors, the
LED indicator on the access key flashes.
When the keyless access functions are
disabled, the LED indicator does not flash
unless a button on the access key is
pressed.
! Operating range tips
. Locking by using the keyless access
function can be operated only by the door
lock sensor in the operating range in
which the access key is detected.
. Unlocking by using the keyless access
function can be operated only by the door
handle in the operating range in which the
access key is detected.
. If the access key is placed too close to
the vehicle body, the keyless access
function may not operate properly. If they
do not operate properly, repeat the opera-
tion from further away.
. If the access key is placed near the
ground or in an elevated location from the
ground, even if it i s in the in dicate d
operating range, the keyless access func-
tion may not operate properly.
. When the access key is within the
operating range, it is possible for anyone,
even someone who is not carrying the
access key, to operate the keyless access
function. Note that locking and unlocking
can be operated only by the door handle,
door lock sensor or trunk lid opener button
in the operating range in which the access
key is detected.
. It is not possible to lock the doors using
the keyless access function when the
access key is inside the vehicle. However,
depending on the status of the access key
and the environmental conditions, the
access key may be locked inside the
vehicle. Before locking, make sure that
you have the access key.
. When the battery of the access key is
dischar ged, or when operating it in a
location with strong radio waves or noise
(e.g., near a radio tower, power plant,
broadcast station or an area where wire-
less equipment is used), or while talking
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
– CONTINUED –
2-13
2
Black plate (104,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
on a cell phone, the operating ranges may
be reduced, or the keyless access func-
tion may not operate.
In such a case, perform the procedure
described in “Locking and unlocking” F9-
16.
. When an access key is in the operating
range, if the door handle becomes wet
due to exposure to a significant amount of
water when the vehicle is washed or
dur ing heavy rain, the doors may be
locked or unlocked.
. The keyless access function may not
operate properly depending on the status
of the access key and the radio wave
conditions around the vehicle. In such a
case, perform the procedure described in
“Locking and unlocking” F9-16.
! How to use keyless access func-
tions
! Keyless access function tips
. When you lock the doors using the
keyless access function, turn the push-
button ignition switch off. It is not possible
to lock the doors using the keyless access
function whe n the push-button ignition
switch is on the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Refer to “Switching power” F3-7.
. If the door handle is gripped or the door
lock sensor is touched with a gloved hand,
the door lock may not be operated.
. If the door lock sensor is touched three
times or more repeatedly, the system will
ignore the sensor operation.
. When performing the locking proce-
dure too quickly, locking may not have
been completed. After locking the doors, it
is recommended to pull the REAR door
handles to confirm that the doors have
been locked.
. It is possible to lock the doors even
when one of the doors is open. After
performing the locking procedure, close
the opened door to lock it.
. Within 3 seconds after locking the
doors by using the keyless access func-
tion, it is not possible to unlock doors by
using the keyless access function.
. When locking, be sure to carry the
access key to prevent locking the access
key in the vehicle.
. The setting of the hazard warning
flasher operation and the volume of the
audible signal can be changed by your
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details.
. The setting of the hazard warning
flasher operation can also be changed
by operating the multi function display. For
details, refer to “Hazard warning flasher
setting” F3-84.
! Unlocking
Carry the access key, and grip the door
handle.
. When the driver ’s door handle is
gripped, only the driver’s door will be
unlocked.
. When the front passenger’s door han-
dle is gripped, all doors will be unlocked.
Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice
and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
2-14
Black plate (105,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Opening trunk
1) Trunk lid opener button
Carry the access key, and press the trunk
lid opener button. Only the trunk lid will be
unlocked and opened. Also, an electronic
chirp will sound twice and the hazard
warning flashers will flash twice.
! Locking
1) Door lock sensor (above and below)
Carry the access key, close all doors and
the trunk lid and touch the door lock
sensor on the door handle. All doors will
be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will
sound once and the hazard warning
flashers will flash once.
NOTE
After touching the door lock sensor to
lock all of the doors, if you touch the
door lock sensor once more to attempt
the lock operation without first unlock-
ing the doors, n othing will happen,
even if the door lock sensor is touched.
In this case, perform the unloc king
operation once first. You can then
touch the door lock sensor to lock the
doors.
! Power saving function
The keyless access function will be
disabled in the following cases to protect
the access key battery and the vehicle
battery.
Case 1: When the keyless access func-
tion and the remote keyless entry system
have not been used for 2 weeks or longer
while all doors are locked
Case 2: When the access key has been
left in the operating range for 10 minutes
or longer while all doors are locked
! Recovery from power saving
mode
When one of the following is operated, the
keyless access function will be recovered.
Case 1:
. Unlock the doors by operating any
procedure other than gripping the front
passenger’s door handle
. Lock or unlock the doors
. Open a door and then close it
Case 2:
. Unlock the doors by gripping the door
handle
. Lock the doors by touching the door
lock sensor
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
– CONTINUED –
2-15
2
Black plate (106,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
. Lock or unlock the doors by using the
remote keyless entry system
. Lock or unlock the doors by using the
power door locking switch
. Open either of the front doors
! Door unlock selection function
The door unlock selection function makes
it possible to unlock the driver’s door
without unlocking any other doors. You
can change the setting for the driver’s
door.
Operational: Only the driver ’s door will be
unlocked.
Non-operational: All doors will be un-
locked.
For the factory setting (default setting),
refer to “Function settings” F23.
NOTE
The setting can be changed by your
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details. Also, the setting can
be changed by operating the multi
function display. For details, refer to
“Keyless access setting (models with
“keyless access with push-button start
system”)” F3-89.
& Selecting audible signal op-
eration
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
lock and unlock. If desired, you may
change the volume of the audible signal
or turn it off. For details, refer to “Keyless
buzzer volume setting” F3-84.
& Warning chimes and warning
indicator
The keyless access with push-button start
system sounds a warning c hime and
flashes the access key warning indicator
on the combination meter i n order to
minimize improper operations and help
protect your vehicle from theft.
For details, refer to “Warning chimes and
warning indicator of the keyless access
with push-button start system” F3-28.
& Disabling keyless access
function
WARNING
If you wear an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, operate
the driver ’s door to disable the
keyless access function. Otherwise,
the operation of an implanted pace-
maker or implanted defibrillator may
be affected by the radio waves from
the transmitter antenna.
When the vehicle is not going to be used
for a long time, or when you choose not to
use the keyless access function, the
keyless access function can be disabled.
NOTE
. The locking and unlocking function
by the remote keyless entry system is
not disabled.
. The setting can also be changed at
SUBARU dealers. For more details,
contact a SUBARU dealer.
. To start the engine while the func-
tions are disabled, perform the proce-
dure described in “Starting engine”
F9-17.
. We recommend that you disable the
keyless access functions under the
following conditions.
– When the vehicle is not going to
be used for an extended period of
time
– When the keyless access func-
tions are not going to be used
2-16
Black plate (107,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Disabling functions
! By operating the access key
If you have registered a PIN code for PIN
Code Access, you can disable the keyless
access function by operating the access
key. For details about registering a PIN
code, refer to “Registering a PIN code”
F2-20.
1. Open the driver’s door.
2. Rotate the lock lever forward.
3. Press and hold the “ ” button and
“
” button on the access key simulta-
neously for more than 5 seconds.
A chirp sound will be heard, and the
function will be disabled.
! By operating the driver’s door
1. Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the
door.
2. Push the rear side (unlock side) of the
power door locking switch.
3. Within 5 seconds after step 2 is
performed, open the driver’s door.
4. Within 5 seconds after step 3 is
performed, push the rear side (unlock
side) of the power door locking switch
twice while the door is open.
5. Within 10 se conds after step 4 is
performed, close and open the driver’s
door twice.
6. Within 10 se conds after step 5 is
performed, push the rear side (unlock
side) of the power door locking switch
twice while the door is open.
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
– CONTINUED –
2-17
2
Black plate (108,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
7. Within 10 se conds after step 6 is
performed, close and open the driver’s
door once.
8. Within 5 seconds after step 7 is
performed, close the door. A chirp sound
will be heard, and the functions will be
disabled.
NOTE
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door
locking switch slowly. If the switch is
pressed quickly, the functions may not
be disabled.
! Enabling functions
When the procedure to disable the func-
tions is performed again, the functions are
enabled.
A chirp sound will be heard once.
NOTE
. The keyless access function will be
enabled only if you perform the proce-
dure in the same manner you disabled
the function (for example, when dis-
abling by operating the driver’s door,
the function will not be enabled even if
you operate the access key).
. Press the push-button ignition
switch if you do not know the proce-
dure in which the keyless access
function was disabled.
– When disabling by operating the
driver’s door: a chirp will not be
heard
– When disabling by operating the
access key: a chirp will be heard
& When access key does not
operate properly
Refer to “Access key – if access key does
not operate properly” F9-16.
& Replacing battery of access
key
Refer to “Replacing battery of access key”
F11-50.
& Replacing access key
Access keys can be replaced at SUBARU
dealers. For more details, contact a
SUBARU dealer.
& Certification for keyless ac-
cess with push-button start
system
! U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: HYQ13CZZ
FCC ID: HYQ14AHC
FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02
FCC ID: Y8PSSPLF02
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
2-18
Black plate (109,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Canada-spec. models
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard
(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux
CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L’ex-
ploitation est autorisée aux deux condi-
tions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas
produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur
de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage
est sus cept ible d’en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
! Mexico-spec. models
IFT
RLVDE1413-2269
14AHC
DENSO
PIN Code Access (models
with “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
1) Trunk lid opener button
While all doors are locked, you can unlock
the doors without a key by operating the
trunk lid opener button.
NOTE
PIN Code Access will be helpful if the
key is accidentally left in the vehicle. It
is recommended that a 5-digit security
code (PIN code) is registered.
Keys and doors/PIN Code Access (models with “keyless access with push–button start system”)
– CONTINUED –
2-19
2
Black plate (110,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/PIN Code Access (models with “keyless access with push–button start system”)
& Registering a PIN code
! Preparation
1. Close all doors (including the trunk).
2. Press and hold the “
” button on the
access key. Then all doors (including the
trunk) will be locked.
3. Keep the “
” button pressed, and
press the trunk lid opener button within 5
seconds after step 2.
4. Press and hold the above button for
more than 5 seconds. Then a chirp will
sound.
5. Press the “
” button on the access key
while the chirp sounds.
Then the chirp will stop and the prepara-
tion is complete.
NOTE
If you do not press the “ ” button on
the access key, the chirp will sound for
30 seconds. In this case, the prepara-
tion for registering a PIN code does not
complete even if the chirp stops.
! Registration
For example, to register “32468” as the
PIN code, perform the following proce-
dure.
1. Press the trunk lid opener button three
times.
2. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the trunk lid opener button twice.
3. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the trunk lid opener button four
times.
4. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the trunk lid opener button six times.
5. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the trunk lid opener button eight
times.
6. Perform steps 1 to 5 again within
approximately 30 seconds after the buz-
zer starts sounding intermittently.
7. All doors will be unlocked and locked.
Then the PIN code will be registered.
NOTE
. If you make an error during the
registration procedure, open the dri-
ver ’s door and then close it. Then, start
over from the procedure described in
“Preparation”.
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
you cannot register “00000”, “11111” to
“99999” or “12345” as a PIN code.
. Do not register your vehicle license
plate number or simple numbers such
as “11122” or “12121” as a PIN code.
Doing so wi ll increase the risk of
vehicle theft.
. When you try to register “22222”,
the registered PIN code will be deleted.
You cannot unlock the doors by PIN
Code Access until a new code is
registered.
. After registering a new PIN code,
make sure that you can unlock the
doors using the PIN code.
. When you delete the PIN code while
the keyless access function is dis-
abled, the keyless access function will
be enabled.
. Reregister the PIN code in the
following case.
– when you forget the PIN code
– when you want to change the PIN
code
2-20
Black plate (111,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Unlocking
Perform steps 1 to 5 described in “Regis-
tration”.
NOTE
. You cannot unlock by PIN Code
Access in the following cases.
– when the access key is within the
operating ranges
– when the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position
. If you make an operation error
during the unlocking procedure, start
over with the unlocking procedure after
waiting for 5 seconds or longer.
. To protect your vehicle from theft, a
buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes
are entered five times continuously. If
this occurs, you cannot unlock the
doors by PIN Code Access for 5
minutes.
Remote keyless entry system
CAUTION
. Do not expose the remote trans-
mitter to severe shocks, such as
those experienced as a result of
dropping or throwing.
. Do not take the remote transmit-
ter apart except when replacing
the battery.
. Do not get the remote transmitter
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
a cloth immediately.
. When you carry the remote trans-
mitteronanairplane,donot
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane.
When any button of the remote
transmitter is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect
the operation of the airplane.
When you carry the remote trans-
mitter in a bag on an airplane,
take measures to prevent the
buttons of the remote transmitter
from being pressed.
For models with “keyless ac cess with
push-button start system”, the access
key is used as the transmitter for the
remote keyless entry system. For models
without “keyless access with push-button
start system”, the transmitter for the
remote keyless entry system is located
inside the key head.
The remote keyless entry system has the
following functions.
. Locking and unlocking the doors with-
out a key
. Opening the trunk without a key
. Sounding a panic alarm
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. For detailed information, refer to
“Alarm system” F2-25.
The operable distance of the remote
keyless entry system is approximately 30
feet (10 meters). However, this distance
will vary depending on environmental
conditions. The system’s operable dis-
tance will be shorter in areas near a
facility or electronic equipment emitting
strong radio waves such as a power plant,
broadcast station, TV tower, or remote
controller of home electronic appliances.
NOTE
. For models with “keyless access
with pus h-button start system”,the
remote keyless entry system will not
be activated when the push-button
ignition switch is in any position other
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
– CONTINUED –
2-21
2
Black plate (112,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
than the “OFF” position.
. For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”,the
remote keyless entry system will not
be activated when the key is inserted in
the ignition switch.
Access key
1) Lock/arm button
2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Trunk lid unlock button
4) PANIC button
Transmitter
1) Lock/arm button
2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Trunk lid unlock button
4) PANIC button
NOTE
The hazard warning flashers will flash
once or twice when the transmitter
button is pressed in the following
cases.
– When locking the doors
– When unlocking the doors
– When unlocking the trunk lid
Operation of the hazard warning
flashers in the above cases can be set
to “On” or “Off” by a SUBARU dealer.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-
tails. Also, the setting can be changed
using the display. For details, refer to
“Hazard warning flasher setting” F3-
84.
& Locking the doors
Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors.
An electronic chirp will sound once and
the hazard warning flashers w ill flash
once.
If any of the doors or the trunk lid is not
fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound
five times and the hazard warning flashers
will flash five times to alert you that the
doors (or the trunk lid) are not properly
closed. When you close the door, it will
automatically lock and then an electronic
chirp will sound once and the hazard
warning flashers will flash once.
& Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock
the driver’s door. An electronic chirp will
sound twice and the hazard warning
flashers will flash twice. To unlock all
doors, briefly press the unlock /disarm
button a second time within 5 seconds.
2-22
Black plate (113,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
NOTE
If the interval between the first and
second presses of the unlock/disarm
button (for unlocking of all of the
doors) is extremely short, the system
may not respond.
& Opening the trunk lid
The trunk lid opens when the “ ” button
is pressed continuously for at least 2
seconds. An electronic chirp will sound
twice and the turn signal lights will flash
twice.
& Vehicle finder function
Use this function to find your vehi cle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the
lock/arm button three times in a 5-second
period will cause your vehicle’s horn to
sound once and its hazard warning
flashers to flash three times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the lock/arm
button three times, the system may
not respond to the signals from the
access key/remote transmitter.
& Sounding a panic alarm
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
button once.
The horn will so und and the hazard
warning flashers will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the access key/remote transmit-
ter. Unless a button on the access key/
remote transmitter is pressed, the alarm
will be deactivated after approximately 30
seconds.
& Selecting audible signal op-
eration (models without
“keyless access with push-
button start system”)
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
the audible signal off.
Perform the following steps to deactivate
the audible signal. You can also use the
same steps to restore the function.
1. Sit in the driver ’s seat and shut all
doors and the trunk.
2. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side
of the power door locking switch.
3. While holding down the REAR (UN-
LOCK) side of the power door locking
switch, pull the key out and re-insert it into
the ignition switch at least 6 times within
10 seconds after Step 2.
4. Open and close the driver’s door once
within 10 seconds after Step 3.
5. The hazard warning flashers flash 3
times to indicate completion of the setting.
You may have the above settings done by
your SUBARU dealer. Also, the setting
can be changed using the multi function
display. For details, refer to “Keyless
buzzer volume setting” F3-84.
You may also change the volume of the
audible sign al by operating the mul ti
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
– CONTINUED –
2-23
2
Black plate (114,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
function display.
& Replacing the battery
Refer to “Replacing battery” F11-50.
& Replacing lost transmitters
If you lose a transmi tter or want to
purchase additional transmitters (up to
four can be programmed), your transmit-
ters should be reprogrammed for security
reasons. For details, contact your
SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters
programmed into the remote keyless entry
system.
& Welcome lighting (if
equipped)
The welcome lighting turns on the head-
lights, interior lights, etc. for smooth
approaching to or exiting from the vehicle
at night or in a dark place.
NOTE
. For the operati on of t he inte rior
lights, refer to “Interior lights” F6-2.
. The factory setting (default setting)
of the operation duration of the head-
lights and the exterior lights is 30
seconds for both approaching and
exiting. This setting can be changed
to OFF (no operation), 30 seconds, 60
seconds, or 90 seconds, respectively
for approaching and exiting at
SUBARU dealers. For more details,
contact a SUBARU dealer.
! Approaching
When it is dark and the light control switch
is in the “AUTO” position, if the doors are
unlocked using the unlock button on the
transmitter, the headlight low beams and
some exterior lights will illuminate. The
interior lights will also illuminate if the
dome light switch is in the “DOOR”
position.
The headlight low beams and the exterior
lights will illuminate for 30 seconds.
NOTE
If the doors are locked using the lock
button on the transmitter or the lock
sensor on the door handle, the head-
lights and exterior lights will turn off.
! Exiting
When the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the headlight indica-
tor light is on, if the ignition switch is turned
off or the key is removed from the ignition
switch, the headlight low beams and some
exterior lights will continue illuminating.
The headlights and exterior lights will turn
off under either of the following conditions.
. 30 seconds have elapsed since the
driver’s door was opened and closed.
. The lock button on the transmitter or
the lock sensor on the door handle is
operated two times successively.
NOTE
. If the light control switch is set to a
position other than “AUTO” position,
the headlights and the exterior lights
will turn off.
. When exiting from the vehicle, the
headlights and exterior lights will turn
off if the driver ’s door is not opened
and closed within 3 minutes from turn-
ing on of the welcome lighting.
& Certification for Remote key-
less entry system
! U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: CWTWB1U811
FCC ID: CWTWD1U781
CAUTION
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
2-24
Black plate (115,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
! Canada-spec. models
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard
(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux
CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L’ex-
ploitation est autorisée aux deux condi-
tions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas
produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur
de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage
est sus cept ible d’en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
! Mexico-spec. models
COFETEL RCPSUTW13-2221
COFETEL RLVSU8813-2140
Alarm system
The alarm system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
sounds and the hazard warning flashers
flash if someone attempts to break into
your vehicle.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The system can be armed and disarmed
with the keyless access function or access
key.
The system will not be activated when the
push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
The system can be armed and disarmed
with the remote transmitter.
The system will not be activated when the
key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
for activation at the time of shipment from
the factory. You can set the system for
deactivation yourself or have it done by
your SUBARU dealer.
Keys and doors/Alarm system
– CONTINUED –
2-25
2
Black plate (116,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Alarm system
& System operation
The alarm system will give the following
alarms when triggered.
. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
seconds.
. The hazard warning flashers will flash
for 30 seconds.
If any of the doors or the trunk lid remains
open after the 30-second period, the horn
will continue to sound for a maximum of 3
minutes. If the door or the trunk lid is
closed while the horn is sounding, the
horn will stop sounding with a delay of up
to 30 seconds.
The alarm is triggered by:
. Opening any of the doors or the trunk
lid
. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as
forced entry (only models wi th shock
sensors (dealer option))
NOTE
The alarm system can be set to trigger
the illumination of the following interior
lights.
. Map lights (for models with moon-
roof)
. Dome light (illuminates only when
the dome light switch is in the “DOOR”
position)
The notifications regarding the map
lights (for models with moonroof) and
dome light are deacti vated as the
factory setting. A SUBARU dealer can
activate the system. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details.
& Activating and deactivating
the alarm system
To change the setting of your vehicle’s
alarm system for activation or deactiva-
tion, do the following.
1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
“Disarming the system” F2-29.
2. Sit in the driver ’s seat and shut all
doors and the trunk lid.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
4. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side
of the driver’s power door locking switch,
open the driver’s door within the following
1 second, and wait 10 seconds without
releasing the switch. The setting will then
be changed as follows.
If the system was previously activated:
The odometer/trip meter screen displays
“AL OF” and th e horn so unds twi ce,
indicating that the system is now deacti-
vated.
If the system was previously deacti-
vated:
The odometer/trip meter screen displays
“AL ON” and the horn soun ds onc e,
indicating that the system is now acti-
vated.
NOTE
You may have the above setting
change done by your SUBARU dealer.
& If you have accidentally trig-
gered the alarm system
! To stop the alarm
Perform any of the following operations.
. Press any button on the access key/
remote transmitter.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”).
. Turn the push-button ignition to the
“ACC” position (models with “keyless
access with push-button start system”).
NOTE
Only registered keys will stop the
alarm. If the key is not registered, the
alarm will not stop.
2-26
Black plate (117,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Arming the system
NOTE
. The system can be armed even if the
engine hood, the windows and/or
moonroof are open. Always make sure
that they are fully closed before arming
the system.
. When arming the system, if any of
the doors or the trunk lid is not fully
closed, an electronic chirp sounds five
times, the hazard warning flashers
flash five times to alert you that the
doors (or the trunk lid) are not properly
closed. When you close the door, doors
will automatically lock and the system
will automatically arm in 30 seconds.
. The 30-second standby time can be
eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-
formed by your SUBARU dealer.
. If you open the trunk using the
remote transmitter’s “
” button in
the surveillance state (or the standby
state), the system will be temporarily
placed in a standby state. The system
will go back to the surveillance state in
30 seconds upon locking the trunk.
. The system is in the standby state
for a 30-second period before arming
the system. The security indicator light
will flash at short intervals during this
period.
. If any of the following actions is
done during the standby period, the
system will not switch to the surveil-
lance state.
– Doors (including the trunk lid)
are unlocked using the access key/
remote transmitter.
– Doors (including the trunk lid)
are unlocked using the keyless
access function (models with “key-
less access with push-button start
system”).
– Any door (including the trunk lid)
is opened.
– The ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position (models without
“keyless access with push-button
start system”).
– Push-button ignition switch is
turned to the “ACC” position (mod-
els with “keyless access with push-
button start system”).
! To arm the system using the access
key/remote transmitter
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped).
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)/turn the
push-button ignition switch to the “OFF”
position (models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”).
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close all doors and the trunk lid.
Access key
1) Arm button: Press to arm the system
2) Disarm bu tton: Press to disarm the
system
Keys and doors/Alarm system
– CONTINUED –
2-27
2
Black plate (118,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Alarm system
Transmitter
1) Arm button: Press to arm the system
2) Disarm button: Press to disarm the
system
6. Briefly press the arm button (for less
than 2 seconds). All doors will lock, an
electronic chirp will sound once, the
hazard warning flashers will flash once,
and the security indicator light will start
flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30
seconds (standby time), the indicator light
will then flash slowly (twice approximately
every 2 seconds), indicating that the
system has been armed for surveillance.
! To arm the system using power
door locking switches
1. Close all windows.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)/turn the
push-button ignition switch to the “OFF”
position (models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”).
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close the doors and the trunk lid but
leave only the driver’s door or the front
passenger’s door open.
6. Press the front side (“LOCK” side) of
the power door locking switch to set the
door locks.
7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will
sound once, the hazard warning flashers
will flash once and the security indicator
light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid
flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the
indicator light will then flash slowly (twice
approximately every 2 seconds), indicat-
ing that the system has been armed for
surveillance.
2-28
Black plate (119,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! To arm the system using the key-
less access function (if equipped)
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped)
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “OFF” position.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close all doors and the trunk lid.
1) Door lock sensor
Security indicator light
6. Carry the access key and touch the
door lock sensor. All doors will lock, an
electronic chirp will sound once, the
hazard warning flashers will flash once,
and the security indicator light will start
flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30
seconds (standby time), the security in-
dicator light will then flash slowly (twice
approximately every 2 seconds), indicat-
ing that the system has been armed for
surveillance.
& Disarming the system
Perform either of the following procedures.
. Briefly press the disarm button (for less
than 2 seconds) on the access key/remote
transmitter.
. Carry the access key and grip the front
door handle (models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”).
The flashing of the security indicator light
will then change slowly (once approxi-
mately every 3 seconds from twice ap-
proximately every 2 seconds), indicating
that the alarm system has been disarmed.
! Emergency disarming
If you cannot disarm the system using the
access key/transmitter (i.e. the transmitter
is lost, broken or the transmitter battery is
too weak), you can disarm the system
without using the access key/remote
transmitter.
The system can be disarmed if you turn
the ignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF”
to the “ON” position with a registered key/
access key.
NOTE
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, if the ac-
cess key battery is discharged, perform
the procedure described in “Switching
power” F9-16. In such a case, replace
the battery immediately. Refer to “Re-
placing battery of access key” F11-50.
Keys and doors/Alarm system
– CONTINUED –
2-29
2
Black plate (120,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Alarm system
& Valet mode
When you choose the valet mode, the
alarm system does not operate. In valet
mode, the access key/remote transmitter
is used only for locking and unlocking the
doors and for panic activation.
To enter the valet mode, change the
setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for
deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating
and deactivating the alarm system” F2-
26. The security indicator light will con-
tinue to flash once every 3 seconds
indicating that the system is in the valet
mode.
To exit valet mode, change the setting of
your vehicle’s alarm system for activation
mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat-
ing the alarm system” F2-26.
& Passive arming (models
without “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
When passive arming mode has been
programmed by the dealer, arming of the
system is automatically accomplished
without using the remote transmitter. Note
that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE
MANUALLY LOCKED.
! To enter the passive mode
If you wish to program the passive arming
mode, have it done by your SUBARU
dealer.
! Arming the system
CAUTION
In passive mode, the system will
automatically activate the alarm but
WILL NOT automatically lock the
doors. In order to lock the doors
you must either lock them as in-
dicated in step 4 below or with the
key once they have been closed.
Failure to lock the doors manually
will result in a higher security risk.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
1) ON
2) LOCK
2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to
“LOCK” position and remove the key from
the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
2-30
Black plate (121,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors
with the inside door lock levers.
5. Close the doors. The system wi ll
automatically arm after 1 minute.
In the passive mode, the system can also
be armed with the remote transmitter or
with the power door locking switches. If
the remote transmitter or power door
locking switch is used to lock the vehicle,
arming will take place immediately regard-
less of whether or not the passive mode
has been selected.
! Disarming the system
To disarm the system, briefly press the
disarm button on the remote transmitter.
& Tripped sensor identification
The security indicator light flashes when
the alarm system has been triggered.
Also, the number of flashes indicates the
location of unauthorized intrusion or the
severity of impact on the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the indicator light will light
for 1 second and then flash as follows.
. When a door was opened: 5 times
. When the trunk was opened: 4 times
. When a strong impact or multiple
impacts were sensed: twice (only models
with shock sensors (dealer option))
. When a light impact was sensed: once
(only models with shock sensors (dealer
option))
NOTE
Any of the above indicator light flash-
ings will recur each time the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
Rearming the alarm system cancels the
flashing.
& Shock sensors (dealer op-
tion)
The shock se nsors tri gger the alarm
system when they sense impacts applied
to the vehicle and when any of their
electric wires are cut. The alarm system
causes the horn to sound and the hazard
warning flashers to flash for a short time
when the sensed impact is weak, but it
warns of a strong impact or multiple
impacts by sounding the horn and flashing
the hazard warning flashers, both lasting
approximately 30 seconds.
If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can
connect them and set them for activation
or deactivation.
NOTE
. The shock sensors are not always
able to sense impacts caused by break-
ing in, and cannot sense an impact that
does not cause vibration (such as
breaking the glass using a rescue
hammer).
. The shock sensors may sense vi-
bration as indicated in the following
examples and trigger the alarm system.
Select the settings of the alarm system
and shock sensors appropriately de-
pending on where you usually park
your vehicle.
Keys and doors/Alarm system
– CONTINUED –
2-31
2
Black plate (122,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Child safety locks
Examples:
– Vibration from a construction site
– Vibration in a multistory car park
– Vibration from trains
. You can have the sensitivity of the
shock sensors adjusted to your pre-
ference by your SUBARU dealer.
Child safety locks
Each rear door has a child safety lock.
When the child safety lock lever is in the
lock position, the door cannot be opened
from inside. The door can only be opened
from the outside.
WARNING
Always turn the child safety locks to
the “LOCK” position when children
sit in the rear seat. Serious injury
could result if a child accidentally
opens the door and falls out.
Windows
WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by accidental, child’s mis-
chief, or improper operation, the
driver is responsible for obey ing
the following instructions without
exception.
. When operating the power win-
dows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,
neck, head or other objects from
being caught in the window.
. Always lock the passengers’ win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
. Always carry the key when you
leave the vehicle for safety rea-
sons and never allow an unat-
tended child to remain in the
vehicle. Failure to follow this
procedure could result in injury
to a child operating the power
window.
The power windows operate only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
2-32
Black plate (123,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Power window operation by
driver
! Driver’s side power window
switches
1) Lock switch
2) For driver’s window (with one-touch auto
up and down feature)
3) For front passenger’s window
4) For rear left window
5) For rear right window
All door windows can be controlled by the
power window switch cluster at the driver
side door.
! Operating the driver ’s window
1) Automatically open/close
2) Open/close
To open:
Push the switch down lightly and hold it.
The window will open as long as the
switch is held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto
down feature that allows the window to be
opened fully without holding the switch.
Push the switch down until it clicks and
release it, and the window will fully open.
To stop the wi ndow halfway, pull the
switch up lightly.
To close:
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The
window will close as long as the switch is
held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto up
feature that allows the window to be
closed fully without holding the switch.
Pull the switch up until it clicks and release
it, and the window will fully close. To stop
the window halfway, push the switch down
lightly.
NOTE
. If the vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected due to situations such as
battery or fuse replacement, the one-
touch auto up/down function is deacti-
vated. Initialize the power window to
reactivate the one-touch auto up/down
function. Refer to “Initialization of
power window” F2-36.
. When the following operations are
performed, the power window breaker
will operate and it may not be possible
to open or close the window.
– After the driver’s side window is
fully closed or fully opened, the
switch continues to be operated in
the same direction for a few sec-
onds.
– After the windows for three or
more seats are fully closed or fully
opened, each switch continues to
be operated in the same direction
simultaneously for a few seconds.
In this case, after the breaker recovers,
Keys and doors/Windows
– CONTINUED –
2-33
2
Black plate (124,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Windows
be sure to initialize the power windows.
If they are not initialized, the one-touch
auto up/down function will not operate.
Refer to “Initialization of power win-
dow” F2-36.
! Anti-entrapment function
CAUTION
. Never attempt to test this func-
tion using fingers, hands or other
parts of your body.
. The anti-entrapment function
may not operate properly if some
object gets trapped just before
the window fully closes.
NOTE
. If a window detects an impact simi-
lar to that caused by trapping an object
(for example, when the vehicle encoun-
ters a deep pothole), the anti-entrap-
ment function may operate.
. The window cannot be operated for
a few seconds after the anti-entrap-
ment function operates.
. If the vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected due to situations such as
battery or fuse replacement, the anti-
entrapment function is deactivated.
Initialize the power window to reacti-
vate the anti-entrapment function. Re-
fer to “Initialization of power window”
F2-36.
While closing the driver’s window auto-
matically, if the window senses a sub-
stantial enough object trapped between
the window and the window frame, it
automatically moves down slightly and
stops.
! Operating the passengers’ win-
dows
To open:
Push the appropriate switch down and
hold it unti l the window reaches the
desired position.
To close:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
2-34
Black plate (125,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Locking the passengers’ windows
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To lock:
Press the lock switch. When the lock
switch is in the lock position, the passen-
gers’ windows cannot be opened or
closed.
To unlock:
Press the lock switch again.
& Power window operation by
passengers
! Passenger’s side power window
switches
Each passenger window can be controlled
by the power window switch located on
the door.
! Operating the windows
To open:
Press the switch down and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
To close:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
When the lock switch on the power
window switch cluster, located on the
driver’s side door, is in the lock position,
the passengers’ windows cannot be oper-
ated with the passengers’ switches.
Keys and doors/Windows
– CONTINUED –
2-35
2
Black plate (126,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Trunk lid
& Initialization of power win-
dow
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected due
to situations such as battery or fuse
replacement, the following functions will
be deactivated.
. One-touch auto up/down function
. Anti-entrapment function
Initialize the power window using the
following procedure to reactivate these
functions.
1. Close the driver’s door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
3. Open the driver’s side window halfway
by pus hing down the power window
switch.
4. Pull up the power window switch and
close the window completely. Continue
pulling up the switch for approximately 1
second after the window is closed com-
pletely.
5. Open the driver’s side window com-
pletely by fully pushing down the power
windows switch.
Trunk lid
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas fro m entering the vehicle,
always keep the trunk lid closed
while driving.
. Help prevent children, adults or
animals from locking themselves
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the
trunk could quickly become high
enough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including
brain damage to anyone locked
inside, particularly for small chil-
dren.
. When leaving the vehicle, close
all windows and lock all doors.
Also make certain that the trunk
is closed.
& To open and close the trunk
lid from outside
The trunk lid can be opened using the
keyless access function or remote keyless
entry system. For details, refer to the
following section.
. For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, refer to “Open-
ing trunk” F2-15.
. For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”, refer to
“Opening the trunk lid” F2-23.
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the
trunk lid down until the latch engages.
NOTE
Do not leave your valuables in the
trunk when you leave your vehicle.
& To open the trunk lid from
inside
Press the trunk lid opener switch for more
than 1 second.
2-36
Black plate (127,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
NOTE
The trunk lid will not open when the
select lever is in a position other than
the “P” position (CVT models) or the
vehicle is moving.
& Internal trunk lid release
handle
The internal trunk lid release handle is a
device designed to open the trunk lid from
inside the trunk. In the event children or
adults become locked inside the trunk, the
handle allows them to open the lid. The
handle is located on the inside of the trunk
lid.
To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk,
pull the yellow handle as indicated by the
arrow on the hand le. Thi s ope ration
unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the
lid.
The handle is made of material that
remains luminescent for approximately
an hour in the dark trunk space after it is
exposed to ambient light even for a short
time.
WARNING
Never allow any child to get in the
trunk and play with the release
handle. If the driver starts the vehi-
cle without knowing that a child is
inside the trunk and the child opens
the lid using the release handle, the
child could fall out and be killed or
seriously injured.
CAUTION
. Do not close the lid while grip-
ping the release handle. The
handle may be damaged.
. Do not use the handle as a hook
to fasten straps or ropes to
secure your cargo in the trunk.
Such use may result in damage
of the handle.
. Load the trunk so that cargo
cannot strike the release handle.
If the cargo hits the handle while
the vehicle is being driven, the
handle may be pulled and the
trunk lid may open. That may
cause cargo to fall out of the
trunk, which could create a traffic
safety hazard.
! Inspection
Perform the following steps at least twice
a year to check the release handle for
correct operation.
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Use a flat-head screwdriver with a thin
blade. Slide the flat-head screwdriver
blade from the slit aperture of the lock
assembly fully to the end until you hear a
click.
Keys and doors/Trunk lid
– CONTINUED –
2-37
2
Black plate (128,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Moonroof
This places the latch in the locked posi-
tion.
3. Move the release handle, from outside
the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to
check if the latch is released.
If the latch is not released, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
In that case, use the key to release the
latch, then close the trunk lid.
Also, if the movement of the release
handle feels restricted or not entirely
smooth during operation, or the handle
and/or handle base is cracked, contact
your SUBARU dealer.
Moonroof (if equipped)
WARNING
Never let anyone’shands,arms,
head or any objects protrude from
the moonroof. A person could be
seriously injured if the vehicle stops
suddenly or turns sharply or if the
vehicle is involved in an accident.
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by accidental, child’s mis-
chief, or improper operation, the
driver is responsible for obey ing
the following instructions without
exception.
. Before closing the moonroof,
make sure that no one’s hands,
arms, head or other objects will
be accidentally caught in the
moonroof.
. Always carry the key when you
leave the vehicle for safety rea-
sons and never allow an unat-
tended child to remain in the
vehicle. Failure to follow this
procedure could result in injury
to a child operating the moon-
roof.
. Never try to check the anti-en-
2-38
Black plate (129,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
trapment function by deliberately
placing part of your body in the
moonroof.
CAUTION
. Do not sit on the edge of the open
moonroof.
. Do not operate the moonroof if
falling snow or extremely cold
conditions have caused it to
freeze shut.
. The anti-entrapment function
does not operate when the moon-
roof is being tilted down. Be sure
to confirm that it is safe to do so
before tilting the moonroof down.
. If the moonroof does not close,
we recommend that you have the
system checked by a SUBARU
dealer.
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding
functions.
The moonroof operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
& Moonroof switches
! Tilting moonroof
1) Raise
2) Lower
The tilting function is activated only when
the moonroof is fully closed.
To raise:
Press and hold the rear side of the “ UP/
DOWN” switch for a short time. The
moonroof raises completely.
To lower:
Press and hold the front side of the “UP/
DOWN” switch until the preferred position
has reached.
Release the switch after the moonroof has
been raised or has been lowered com-
pletely. Pressing the switch continuously
may cause damage to the moonroof.
NOTE
One-touch operation does not take
place when the moonroof is lowered.
Press the switch continuously to lower
the moonroof.
! Sliding moonroof
1) Open
2) Close
Tilt down the moonroof completely before
performing the sliding operation.
To open:
Press the rear side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”
switch. The sun shade will also be opened
together with the moonroof. The moonroof
will stop once at a midway position. Press
Keys and doors/Moonroof
– CONTINUED –
2-39
2
Black plate (130,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keys and doors/Moonroof
the rear side of the switch again to open
the moonroof completely.
To close:
Press the front side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”
switch.
To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-
way position while opening or closing it,
momentarily push the switch to the
“OPEN” side or “CLOSE” side.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains,
wipe away water on the roof prior to
opening the moonroof to prevent drops
of water from falling into the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
Driving with the moonroof fully open
can cause an annoying sound to be
generated at high speeds. If this oc-
curs, use the moonroof at the midway
stop position when the moonroof is
opened.
! Anti-entrapment function
When the moonroof senses a substantial
enough object trapped between its glass
and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
automatically moves back to the fully open
position and stops there. The anti-entrap-
ment function may also be activated by a
strong shock on the moonroof even when
there is nothing trapped.
CAUTION
Never attempt to test this function
using fingers, hands or other parts
of your body.
NOTE
For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
& Sun shade
The sun shade can be slid forward or
backward by hand while the moonroof is
closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
also moves back.
2-40
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Ignition switch (models without push-
button start system)......................................... 3-4
LOCK.................................................................. 3-4
ACC.................................................................... 3-5
ON ...................................................................... 3-5
START ................................................................ 3-5
Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-5
Ignition switch light............................................. 3-6
Push-button ignition switch (models with
push-button start system) ............................... 3-6
Safety precautions .............................................. 3-6
Operating range for push-button start system ...... 3-6
Switching power ................................................. 3-7
When access key does not operate properly ........ 3-8
Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-8
Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-8
Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-8
Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle
movement upon turning on the ignition
switch............................................................... 3-9
Speedometer....................................................... 3-9
Odometer............................................................ 3-9
Double trip meter ................................................ 3-9
Tachometer ........................................................ 3-10
Fuel gauge......................................................... 3-10
Temperature gauge ............................................ 3-11
ECO gauge ........................................................ 3-12
REV indicator light and buzzer (STI)................. 3-12
Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-13
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-14
SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-15
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicators ........................................................ 3-16
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator light .................................................. 3-16
Charge warning light.......................................... 3-17
Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-17
Engine low oil level warning indicator (except
STI) ................................................................. 3-17
Windshield washer fluid warning indicator.......... 3-18
AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models) ........... 3-18
Rear differential oil temperature warning light
(STI) ................................................................ 3-18
Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.
models) ........................................................... 3-19
ABS warning light.............................................. 3-20
Brake system warning light................................ 3-21
Electronic parking brake indicator light (models
with electronic parking brake system) .............. 3-23
Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-24
Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF
indicator light (models without electronic
parking brake system) ..................................... 3-24
Hill Holder indicator light (models with electronic
parking brake system) ..................................... 3-24
Door open warning light .................................... 3-25
All-Wheel Drive warning light (if equipped) ......... 3-25
Power steering warning light (except STI)........... 3-25
LED headlight warning light (if equipped) ........... 3-25
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
Dynamics Control operation indicator light ....... 3-26
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light/
Traction mode indicator light............................ 3-27
Instruments and controls
3
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls
Warning chimes and warning indicator of the
keyless access with push-button start system (if
equipped)......................................................... 3-28
Security indicator light ....................................... 3-33
SI-DRIVE indicator (if equipped).......................... 3-34
Shift-up indicator (STI)........................................ 3-34
Select lever/gear position indicator (CVT
models)............................................................ 3-34
Turn signal indicator lights ................................. 3-35
High beam indicator light ................................... 3-35
Cruise control indicator...................................... 3-35
Cruise control set indicator ................................ 3-35
Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light
(models with LED headlights) ........................... 3-35
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-35
Headlight indicator light ..................................... 3-35
Driver’s control center differential auto indicator
(STI)................................................................. 3-35
Driver’s control center differential indicator and
warning (STI).................................................... 3-36
REV indicator light (STI) ..................................... 3-37
Steering responsive fog lights warning indicator/
Steering responsive fog lights OFF indicator (if
equipped)......................................................... 3-37
BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped) .......... 3-37
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped) ................ 3-37
Multi information display ................................... 3-37
Basic operation.................................................. 3-38
Welcome screen................................................. 3-38
Good-bye screen................................................ 3-39
Warning screen .................................................. 3-39
Basic screens .................................................... 3-44
Menu screens .................................................... 3-45
Multi function display ........................................ 3-48
Basic operation ................................................. 3-49
Welcome screen ................................................ 3-49
Date screen ....................................................... 3-50
Ending screen ................................................... 3-50
Self-check screen .............................................. 3-50
Interruption screen ............................................ 3-52
Basic screens.................................................... 3-52
Selection screen ................................................ 3-58
Date and time settings ....................................... 3-62
Image quality and volume settings ..................... 3-69
Screen settings.................................................. 3-71
Maintenance settings ......................................... 3-79
Driving history registration................................. 3-82
Car settings....................................................... 3-83
Initialize............................................................. 3-92
Light control switch........................................... 3-94
Headlights ......................................................... 3-95
High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 3-96
Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-96
Daytime running light system ............................. 3-97
Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-97
One-touch lane changer..................................... 3-98
Illumination brightness control ......................... 3-98
Headlight beam leveler (if equipped) ............... 3-99
Automatic headlight beam leveler (models with
LED headlights) ............................................... 3-99
Fog light switch (if equipped) ........................... 3-99
Steering responsive fog lights system (models
with EyeSight system) ..................................... 3-99
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls
Wiper and washer ............................................ 3-101
Windshield wiper and washer switches ............. 3-102
Mirrors. .............................................................. 3-103
Inside mirror .................................................... 3-103
Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped)...... 3-104
Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink
®
(if equipped) .................................................. 3-105
Outside mirrors ................................................ 3-111
Defogger and deicer ........................................ 3-112
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ......................... 3-113
Horn.................................................................. 3-114
Black plate (136,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without push–button start system)
Ignition switch (models with-
out push-button start sys-
tem)
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
“LOCK” while the vehicle is
being driven or towed because
that will lock the steering wheel,
preventing steering control. And
when the engine is turned off, it
takes a much greater effort than
usual to steer.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows, the moon-
roof or other controls or even
make the vehicle move.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it banged
against your knees or hands while
you are driving, it could turn the
ignition switch from the “ON” posi-
tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-
tion, thereby stopping the engine.
Also, if the key is attached to a
keyholder or to a large bunch of
other keys, centrifugal force may act
on it as the vehicle moves, resulting
in unwanted turning of the ignition
switch.
The ignition switch has four positions:
LOCK, ACC, ON and START.
NOTE
. Keep the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position when the engine is
not running.
. Using electrical accessories for a
long time with the ignition switch in the
“ON” or “ACC” position can cause the
battery to go dead.
. If the ignition switch will not move
from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”
position, turn the steering wheel
slightly to the left and right as you turn
the ignition switch.
& LOCK
The key can only be inserted or removed
in this position. The ignition switch will lock
the steering wheel when you remove the
key.
If turning the key is difficult, turn the
steering wheel slightly to the right and left
as you turn the key.
3-4
Black plate (137,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
The key can be turned from the “ACC” to
“LOCK” position only when the select
lever is in the “P” position (CVT models)
and the key is pushed in while turning it
(all models).
& ACC
In this position the electrical accessories
(audio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can
be used.
& ON
This is the normal operating position after
the engine is started.
& START
The engine is started in this position. The
starter cranks the engine to start it. When
the key is released (after the engine has
started), the key automatically returns to
the “ON” position.
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position while the engine
is running.
If your registered key fails to start the
engine, pull out the key once (the security
indicator light will blink), and then insert
the key in the ignition switch and turn it to
the “START” position and again try to start
the engine.
NOTE
The engine may not start in the follow-
ing cases:
. The key grip is touching another key
or a metallic key holder.
. The key is near another key that
contains an immobilizer transponder.
. The key is near or touching another
transmitter.
& Key reminder chime
The reminder chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened and the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
The chime stops unde r the following
conditions.
. when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position
. when the key is removed from the
ignition switch
. when the driver’s door is closed
Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without push–button start system)
– CONTINUED –
3-5
3
Black plate (138,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Push–button ignition switch (models with push–button start system)
& Ignition switch light
For easy access to the ignition switch in
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-
nates when the driver’s door is opened or
when the driver’s door is unlocked using
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The light remains illuminated for several
tens of seconds and then gradually turns
off under the following conditions.
. when the driver’s door is closed
. when the doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter
The light turns off immediately under the
following conditions.
. when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position
. when all doors are locked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter
Push-button ignition switch
(models with push-button
start system)
& Safety precautions
Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-10.
& Operating range for push-
button start system
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
NOTE
. If the access key is not detected
within the operating range of the an-
tennas inside the vehicle, the push-
button ignition switch and the engine
start cannot be operated.
. Even when the access key is outside
the vehicle, if it is placed too close to
the glass, it may be possible to switch
the power or to start the engine.
. Do not leave the access key in the
following places. It may become im-
possible to opera te the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start.
– On the instrument panel
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– On the rear shelf
– Inside the trunk
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch or starting the engine,
if the access key battery is discharged,
perform the procedure described in
“Access key – if access key does not
operate properly” F9-16. In such a
case, replace the battery immediately.
Refer to “Replacing battery of access
key” F11-50.
3-6
Black plate (139,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Switching power
1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch
The power is switched every time the
push-button ignition switch is pressed.
1. Carry the access key, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Shift the shift lever in neutral (MT
models) or the select lever in the “P”
position (CVT models).
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
without depressing the clutch pedal (MT
models) or the brake pedal (CVT models).
Every time the button is pressed, the
power is switched in the sequence of
“OFF”, “ACC”, “ON” and “OFF”. When the
engine is stopped and the push-button
ignition switch is in “ACC” or “ON”, the
operation i ndicator on the push-button
ignition switch illuminates in orange.
Power
status
Indicator color Operation
OFF Turned off
Power is turned
off.
ACC Orange
The following
systems can be
used:
audio and ac-
cessory power
outlet.
ON
Orange
(while engine is
stopped)
All electrical
systems can be
used.
Turned off
(while engine is
running)
CAUTION
. When the push-button ignition
switch is left in “ON” or “ACC”
for a long time, it may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
. Do not spill drinks or other
liquids on the push-button igni-
tion switch. It may cause a mal-
function.
. Do not touch t he push-button
ignition switch with a hand soiled
with oil or other contaminants. It
may cause a malfunction.
. If the push-button ignition switch
does not operate smoothly, stop
the operation. Contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If the push-button ignition switch
does not illuminate even when
the instrument panel illumination
is turned on, have the vehicle
inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
. If the vehicle was left in the hot
sun for a long time, the surface of
the push-button ignition switch
may get hot. Be careful not to
burn yourself.
NOTE
. In CVT models, the push-button
ignition switch cannot be switched to
“OFF” when the select lever is in a
position other than “P”.
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch, firmly press it all the
way.
. If the push-button ignition switch is
pressed quickly, the power may not
turn on or off.
. If the indicator light on the push-
button ignition switch flashes in green
when the push-button ignition switch is
Instruments and controls/Push–button ignition switch (models with push–button start system)
– CONTINUED –
3-7
3
Black plate (140,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Hazard warning flasher
pressed, steering is locked. When this
occurs, press the push-button ignition
switch while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
! Battery drainage prevention func-
tion
When the push-button ignition switch is
left in the “ACC” or “ON” position for
approximately 1 hour, the push-button
ignition switch will be automatically
switched to “OFF” to prevent the battery
from going dead. (In CVT models, this
function is activated when the select lever
is in the “P” position.)
& When access key does not
operate properly
Refer to “Access key – if access key does
not operate properly” F9-16.
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher is used to
warn other drivers when you have to park
your vehicle under emergency conditions.
The hazard warning flasher works regard-
less of the position of the ignition switch.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher,
push the hazard warning button on the
instrument panel. To turn off the flasher,
push the button again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Meters and gauges
NOTE
Liquid-crystal displays are used in
some of the meters and gauges on
the combination meter. You will find
their indications hard to see if you wear
polarized glasses.
& Combination meter illumina-
tion
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the various parts of the
combination meter are illuminated in the
following sequence.
1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter
needles, gauge needles illuminate.
2. Meter a nd gaug e indic ations each
show MAX position.
3. Meter a nd gaug e indic ations each
show MIN position.
4. Regular illumination (for driving) be-
gins.
3-8
Black plate (141,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
NOTE
This sequence of operations may not
take place if you quickly turn the
ignition switch to start the engine. This
is not a malfunction.
& Canceling the function for
meter/gauge needle move-
ment upon turning on the
ignition switch
It is possible to activate or deactivate the
movement of the meter ne edles and
gauge needles that takes place when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position. To change the setting, perform
the procedures described in “Gauge Initial
Movement” F3-47.
& Speedometer
The speedome ter shows the vehicle
speed. The digital speedometer can be
also displayed on the multi information
display.
& Odometer
The unit displayed varies depending on the
models.
1) Trip knob
This meter displays the odometer when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The odometer shows the total distance
that the vehicle has been driven.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”
position, the odometer/trip meter will light
up. If you do not press the trip knob within
10 seconds of illumination of th e od-
ometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter
will turn off.
Also, if you open and close the driver’s
door within 10 seconds of illumination of
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
meter will turn off.
& Double trip meter
1) Trip knob
This meter displays the two trip meters
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
The trip meter shows the distance that the
vehicle has been driven since you last set
it to zero.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”
position, the odometer/trip meter will light
up. It is possible to switch between the A
trip meter and B trip meter indications
while the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If
you do not press the trip knob within 10
seconds of illumination of the odometer/
Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges
– CONTINUED –
3-9
3
Black plate (142,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges
trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn
off.
Also, if you open and close the driver’s
door within 10 seconds of illumination of
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
meter will turn off.
The display can be switched as shown in
the following sequence by pressing the
trip knob.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
trip or B trip meter by pressing the knob
and keep the knob pressed for more than
2 seconds.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
result.
NOTE
If the connection between the combina-
tion meter and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or
fuse replacement, the data recorded on
the trip meter will be lost.
& Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. In this range, fuel injection will
be cut by the engine control module
to protect the engine from overrev-
ving. The engine will resume run-
ning normally after the engine speed
is reduced below the red zone.
NOTE
To protect the engine/transmission
while the select lever is in the “P ” or
“N” position (CVT models) or the shift
lever is in the neutral position (MT
models), the engine is controlled so
that the engine speed may not become
too high even if the accelerator pedal is
depressed hard.
& Fuel gauge
1) Low fuel warning light
The fuel gauge shows the approximate
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
“OFF” or “ACC” position, the fuel gauge
shows “E” even if the fuel tank contains
fuel.
The gauge may move slightly during
braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel
level movement in the tank.
If you press the trip knob while the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”
position, the fuel gauge’s dial will light up
and the needle will indicate the amount of
fuel remaining in the tank.
If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating
the amount of fuel remaining in the tank,
3-10
Black plate (143,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
you (a) do not press the trip knob for 10
seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s
door, the fuel gauge needle will drop to the
“E” position and the dial and needle will
turn off.
NOTE
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge.
This indicates that the fuel filler door
(lid) is located on the right side of the
vehicle.
. When you have refueled, the fuel
gauge indicates the amount in the fuel
tank after starting the engine. Also, it
may take some time until the fuel
gauge indication stabilizes.
. The gauge indicates only an approx-
imate amount of fuel remaining in the
tank. Use this indication only as a
guide.
. If you refuel while the ignition switch
is in the “ON” position, the fuel gauge
may not indicate the correct amount of
the fuel in the fuel tank.
. If the refuel amount is less than
approximately 4.0 US gal (15 liters, 3.3
Imp gal), it may take some time until the
fuel gauge indication stabilizes.
& Temperature gauge
1) Normal operating range
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary i n
accordance with the outside temperature
and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately
until the pointer of the temperature gauge
reaches near the middle of the range.
Engine operation is optimum with th e
engine coolant at this temperature range
and high revving operation when the
engine is not warmed up enough should
be avoided.
CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal
operating range, safely stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Refer to “Engine overheating” F9-
11.
Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges
– CONTINUED –
3-11
3
Black plate (144,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/REV indicator light and buzzer (STI)
& ECO gauge
The unit displayed varies depending on the
models.
The ECO gauge shows the difference
between the average rate of fuel con-
sumption since the trip meter was last
reset and the current rate of fuel con-
sumption.
The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel
efficiency as shown in the following chart.
Displayed
unit
Needle position
“+” side “-” side
MPG Better Poorer
l/100km Poorer Better
km/l Better
Poorer
NOTE
. The ECO gauge s hows only an
approximate indication.
. After resetting the trip meter, the
average rate of fuel consumption is not
shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km).
Until that time, the ECO gauge does not
operate.
REV indicator light and buz-
zer (STI)
1) REV indicator light
The REV alarm system has the following
functions.
. When the engine speed reaches the
level that was previously set, the REV
indicator light illuminates to inform you. At
this time, a buzzer also sounds if the
buzzer setting is activated.
. Whenever the engine speed enters the
red zone of the tachometer, the REV
indicator light flashes.
NOTE
Even if the REV alarm system is not set,
the REV indicator light will flash when-
3-12
Black plate (145,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
ever the engine speed enters the red
zone of the tachometer.
To change the REV indicator settings,
perform the procedures described in “REV
settings (STI)” F3-47.
Warning and indicator lights
Several of the warning and indicator lights
illuminate when the ignition switch is
initially turned to the “ON” position. This
permits checking the operation of the
bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the “ON” position. For
the system check, the following lights
illuminate and then turn off after several
seconds or after the engine has started.
: Seatbelt warning light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the driver fastens the
seatbelt.)
: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning
light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the front seat passenger
fastens the seatbelt.)
: SRS airbag system warning light
ON /
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator light
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator light
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
function indicator light
: Charge warning light
: Oil pressure warning light
: REV indicator light (STI)
: AT OIL TEMP warning light
(CVT models)
: Rear differential oil temperature warn-
ing light (STI)
: Low tire pressure warning light
(U.S.-spec. models)
/ : ABS warning light
/ : Brake system warning light
: Electronic parking brake indicator
light
: Low fuel warning light
: Hill start assist warning light/Hill start
assist OFF indicator light (models
without electronic parking brake sys-
tem)
: Hill holder indicator light (models with
electronic parking brake system)
: Door open warning light
: AWD warning light (if equipped)
: Power steering warning light (except
STI)
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-13
3
Black plate (146,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-
tor light
: LED headlight warning light
: Headlight indicator light
: Automatic headlight beam leveler
warning light (if equipped)
: Traction mode indicator light
: Steering responsive fog lights OFF
indicator light
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
for repair.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
warning device at the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat, as required by current
safety standards.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, this device reminds the driver
and front passenger to fasten their seat-
belts by illuminating the warning lights in
the locations indicated in the following
illustration and sounding a chime.
Driver’s warning light
Front passenger’s warning light
! Operation
If the driver and/or front passenger have/
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri-
ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will
also sound simultaneously.
NOTE
. If the driver’s and/or front passen-
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning
device operates as follows according
to the vehicle speed.
– At speeds lower than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alt ernate between
steady illumination and flashing at
15-second intervals. The chime will
not sound.
– At speeds higher than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alt ernate between
flashing and steady illumination at
15-second intervals and the chime
will sound while the warning light(s)
is/are flashing.
. It is possible to cancel the warning
3-14
Black plate (147,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
operation th at follows the 6-second
warning after turning ON the ignition
switch . When the ignition switch is
turned ON next time, however, the
complete sequence of the warning
operation resumes. For further details
about canceling the warning operation,
please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
device for the front passenger’s seat will
be deactivated. The front passenger’s
occupant detection system monitors
whether or not there is a passenger on
the front passenger’s seat.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
to do so may prevent the device from
functioning correctly or cause the device
to fail.
. Do not install any accessory such as a
table or TV onto the seatback.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
place his/her hands or legs on the front
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
pull the seatback.
. Do not use front seats with their back-
ward-forward position and seatback not
being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
“Front seats” F1-2.
If the seatbelt warning device for the front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
deactivated even when the front passen-
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),
take the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than a child restraint system
and its child occu pant, although we
strongly recommend that all children sit
in the rear seat properly restrained.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth.
If still the seatbelt warning device for front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
tions described above, immediately con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
& SRS airbag system
warning light
For details about the SRS airbag system
warning light, refer to “SRS airbag system
monitors” F1-57.
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system. Immediately take your vehi-
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbag will not operate properly in
the event of a collision, which may
increase the risk of injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-15
3
Black plate (148,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
& Front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON and OFF indica-
tors
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators show you the status of
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located next to the
clock in the center portion of the dash-
board.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
which time the system is checked. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
indicators illuminates depending on the
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
indicator will remain off.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passenger’sfrontal
airbag ON indicator will remain off while
the OFF indicator will illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, if both the ON and OFF indica-
tors remain illuminated or off simulta-
neously even after the system check
period, the system is malfunctioning.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately for an inspection.
& CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light/Malfunction in-
dicator light
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi-
nates while you are driving, have
your vehicle checked/repaired by
your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible. Continued vehicle opera-
tion without having the emission
control system checked and re-
paired as necessary could cause
serious damage, which may not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate
that th ere is a problem or pote ntial
problem somewhere in the emission con-
trol system.
! If the light illuminates steadily
If the light illuminates steadily while driving
or does not turn off after the engine starts,
an emission control system malfunction
has been detected.
You should have your vehicle checked by
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
3-16
Black plate (149,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
NOTE
This light also illuminates when the fuel
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light illuminating
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
Remove the cap and retighten it until it
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering
with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the
cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE
warning light/malfunction indicator light
turn off immediately. It may take several
driving trips. If the light does not turn off,
take your vehicle to y our authorized
SUBARU dealer immediately.
! If the light is blinking
If the light is blinking while driving, an
engine misfire condition has been de-
tected which may damage the emission
control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emis-
sion control system, you should do the
following.
. Reduce vehicle speed.
. Avoid hard acceleration.
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
ble.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may
stop blinking and illuminate steadily after
several driving trips. You should have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
SUBARU dealer immediately.
& Charge warning light
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the charging
system is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the alternator belt. If the belt is
loose, broken or if the belt is in good
condition but the light remains illuminated,
contact your nea rest S UBA RU de aler
immediately.
& Oil pressure warning
light
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the engine oil
pressure is low and the lubricating system
is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
at the proper level but the light remains
illuminated, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer immediately.
For details about checking the engine oil
level or adding the engine oil, refer to
“Engine oil” F11-13.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
oil pressure warning light on. This
may cause serious engine damage.
& Engine low oil level
warning indicator (ex-
cept STI)
This indicator appears when the engine oil
level decreases to the lower limit.
If the engine low oil level warning indicator
appears while driving, park the vehicle in a
safe and level location, and then check
the engine oil level. When the engine oil
level is not within the normal range, refill
with engine oil. Refer to “Engine oil” F11-
13.
If the warning indicator does not disappear
after refilling the engine oil, or the warning
indicator appears even though the engine
oil level is within the normal range, have
the vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-17
3
Black plate (150,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
NOTE
. After replacing or adding the engine
oil, if the engine oil level is within the
normal range when restarting the en-
gine on a level surface, the warning
indicator will be off.
. The warning indicator may appear
temporarily in the following conditions
because a low oil level may be detected
as a result of significant oil movement
in the engine.
– when the vehicle is considerably
inclined on an uphill or steep slope
– when the vehicle has continu-
ously accelerated and decelerated
– when the vehicle is continuously
turned
– when the vehicle is driven on a
road that alternates continuously
between uphill and downhill
& Windshield washer
fluid warning indicator
This indicator appears when the fluid level
in the windshield washer fluid tank de-
creases to the lower limit (approximately
1.1 US qt, 1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt).
& AT OIL TEMP warning
light (CVT models)
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the transmis-
sion fluid temperature is too hot.
If the light illuminates while driving, im-
mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and let the engine idle until the warning
light turns off.
! Transmission control system warn-
ing
If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes
after the engine has started, it may
indicate that the transmission control
system is not working properly. Contact
your nearest SUBARU dealer for service
immediately.
& Rear differential oil
temperature warning
light (STI)
CAUTION
If the R.DIFF TEMP warning light
illuminates, reduce vehicle speed
and stop the vehicle in a safe
location as soon as possible. Con-
tinuing to drive with this light illumi-
nated may damage the rear differ-
ential and other parts of the power-
train.
If this light illuminates when the engine is
run ning, it may indicate that the rear
differential oil temperature is too hot.
At this time, the driver’s control center
differential will automatically cancel the
current torque-distribution ratio setting and
adopt its minimum ratio.
If the light illuminates while driving, reduce
vehicle speed and stop the vehicle in the
nearest safe location. Park the vehicle for
several minutes. After the light turns off,
you can start driving.
If the light does not turn off, contact the
nearest SUBARU dealer for service.
NOTE
. If the tire pressures are not correct
and/or the tires are not all the same
size and brand, the rear differential will
be heavily loaded when the vehicle is
driven, resulting in an abnormally high
oil temperature.
. The rear differential oil will deterio-
rate if its temperature increases en-
ough for the rear differential oil tem-
perature warning light to illuminate. It is
advisable to have the rear differential
oil replaced as soon as possible.
3-18
Black plate (151,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Low tire pressure
warning light (U.S.-spec.
models)
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2
seconds to check that the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
properly. If there is no problem and all tires
are properly inflated, the light will turn off.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufac-
turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note t hat the TPMS is not a
subst itute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver ’s responsibi lity to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain contin uously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfun ction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of re-
placement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wh eels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
Should the warning light illuminate stea-
dily after blinking for approximately one
minute, have the system inspected by
your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
If this light does not illuminate
briefly after the ignition switch is
turned ON or the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute, you should have
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly and k eep
driving straight ahead while gradu-
ally reducing speed. Then slowly
pull off the road to a safe place.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-19
3
Black plate (152,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the Low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
If the light illuminates steadily after
blinking for approximately one min-
ute, promptly contact a SUBARU
dealer to have the system inspected.
CAUTION
The tire pressure monitoring system
is NOT a substitute for manually
checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked peri-
odically (at least monthly) using a
tire gauge. After any change to tire
pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-
itoring system will not re-check tire
inflation pressures until the vehicle
is first driven to a vehicle speed of at
least 20 mph (32 km/h). After adjust-
ing the tire pressures, increase the
vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32
km/h) to start the TPMS re-checking
of the tire inflation pressures. If the
tire pressures are now above the
severe low pressure threshold, the
low tire pressure warning light
should turn off a few minutes later.
Therefore, be sure to install the
specified size for the front and rear
tires.
& ABS warning light
CAUTION
. If any of the following conditions
occur, we recommend that you
have the ABS system repaired at
the first available opportunity by
your SUBARU dealer.
– The warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
– The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position,
but it does not turn off even
after starting the vehicle.
– The warning light illuminates
during driving.
. When the warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is
off), the ABS function shuts
down. However, the conventional
brake system continues to oper-
ate normally.
The ABS warning light illuminates to-
gether with the brake system warning light
if the EBD system malfunctions. For
further details of the EBD system mal-
function warning, refer to “Brake system
warning light” F3-21.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following conditions,
the ABS system may be considered
normal.
. The warning light illuminates when
the ign ition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and turns off approxi-
mately 2 seconds after the engine has
started.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains illumi-
nated after the engine has been started,
3-20
Black plate (153,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
but it turns off while driving.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump
started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
and does not indicate a malfu nction.
When the battery becomes fully charged,
the light will turn off.
& Brake system
warning light
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains i lluminated,
have the brakes inspected by a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating prop-
erly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
pair.
. If the brake system warning light
illuminates, the electronic park-
ing brake system may be mal-
functioning. Immediately stop
your vehicle in a safe location,
use tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving
and contact your SUBARU deal-
er. For details, refer to “Electro-
nic parking brake (models with
electronic parking brake sys-
tem)” F7-44.
NOTE
. Even if the brake system warning
light illuminates, if the warning light
behavior is as described in the follow-
ing examples, the electronic parking
brake system is not malfunctioning.
– The warning light turns off when
the electronic parking brake is ap-
plied or released.
– The warning light turns off when
the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position again.
. The brake system warning light may
illuminate immediately after the engine
is started. However, it is not malfunc-
tioning if the warning light turns off
after the electronic parking brake is
released.
. The brake system warning light may
illuminate after the electronic parking
brake is f requently applied and re-
leased. However, the electronic parking
brake system is not malfunctioning if
the light turns off for a short period of
time.
. When the engine is started while the
electronic parking brake is applied/
relea sed, the system may judge an
abnormal situation and the warning
light may illuminate. If the warning light
illuminates, turn the ignition switch
once to the “LOCK/OFF” position and
then restart the engine. Then, apply/
release the electronic parking brake. If
the warning light turns off, the system
will be restored.
This light has the following functions.
! Parking brake indicator (models
without electronic parking brake
system)
This light illuminates with the parking
brake applied while the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position. It turns off when the
parking brake is fully released.
! Brake fluid level warning
This light illuminates when the brake fluid
level has dropped to near the “MIN” level
of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position and with the
parking brake fully released.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-21
3
Black plate (154,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
If the brake system warning light should
illuminate while driving (with the parking
brake fully released and with the ignition
switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place
and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid
level is below the “MIN” mark in the
reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have
the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
dealer for repair.
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) system warning
The brake system warning light al so
illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the
EBD system. In that event, it illuminates
together with the ABS warning light.
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
tional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehi-
cle’s motion may therefore become some-
what harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warni ng light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps.
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat place.
2. Shut down the engine, apply the
parking brake and then restart it.
3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights turn off, the EBD system
may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after the engine
has been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
! Electronic parking brake system
warning (models with electronic
parking brake system)
The brake system warning light illumi-
nates when the electronic parking brake
system is malfunctioning. If the warning
light illuminates, promptly park in a safe
location as soon as possible and contact
your SUBARU dealer.
The brake system warning light remains
illuminated when the parking brake cannot
be released even if the parking brake
switch is pushed. For details, refer to
“Electronic parking brake (models with
electronic parking brake system)” F7-44.
! Frequent operation warning
The brake system warning light illumi-
nates and a chirp sound will be heard if
the parking brake switch is operated too
frequently. In this case, the operation of
the parking brake switch is restricted to
protect the electronic parking brake sys-
tem.
! Vacuum pump system warning (ex-
cept STI)
This light illuminates when a malfunction
is detected in the vacuum pump system.
NOTE
The vacuum pump system assists the
boost pressure when driving at high
altitudes while the engine is cold.
3-22
Black plate (155,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Electronic parking
brake indicator light
(models with electronic
parking brake system)
! Parking brake indicator
The light illuminates with the parking
brake applied while the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position. It turns off when the
parking brake is fully released.
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
WARNING
. When you release the electronic
parking brake while the engine is
running, the electronic parking
brake indicator light will turn off.
However, if the light still illumi-
nates, stop the vehicle in a safe
place immediately and have the
system inspected by a SUBARU
dealer.
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating prop-
erly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
pair.
. If the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes, the elec-
tronic parking brake system may
be malfunctioning. Immediately
stop your vehicle in a safe loca-
tion, use tire stops under the
tires to prevent the vehicle from
moving and contact your
SUBARU dealer. For details, refer
to “Electronic parking brake
(models with electronic parking
brake system)” F7-44.
NOTE
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the
electronic parking brake applied, the
electronic parking brake indicator light
remains illuminated for approximately
30 seconds and then turns off.
. When the electronic parking brake
switch is pressed to apply the electro-
nic parking brake while the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
tion, the electronic parking brake in-
dicator light illuminates, remains illu-
minated for approximately 30 seconds
and then turns off.
. Even if the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes, if the warning
light behavior is as described in the
following examples, the electronic
parking brake system is not malfunc-
tioning.
– The indicator light turns off when
the electronic parking brake is re-
leased.
. The electronic parking brake indica-
tor light may flash immediately after the
engine is started. However, it is not
malfunctioning if the indicator light
turns off after the electronic parking
brake is released.
. The electronic parking brake indica-
tor light may flash after the electronic
parking brake is frequently applied and
released. However, the electronic park-
ing brake system is not malfunctioning
if the light turns off for a short period of
time.
The electronic parking brake indicator light
flashes when the electronic parking brake
system is malfunctioning. If the indicator
light flashes, promptly park in a safe
location as soon as possible and contact
your SUBARU dealer.
The electronic parking brake indicator light
remains illuminated when the parking
brake cannot be released even if the
parking brake switch is pulled. For details,
refer to “Electronic parking brake (models
with electronic pa rking brake system)”
F7-44.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-23
3
Black plate (156,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
! Parking brake apply inhibit warn-
ing
The electronic parking brake indicator light
flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound
will be heard if the parking brake switch is
operated when the parking brake cannot
be applied.
! Frequent operation warning
The electronic parking brake indicator light
flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound
will be heard if the parking brake switch is
operated too frequently. In this case, the
operation of the parking brake switch is
restricted to protect the electronic parking
brake system.
NOTE
Wait until the indicator light turns off.
& Low fuel warning light
The low fuel warning light illuminates
when the tank is nearly empty, at approxi-
mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp gal).
It only operates when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
ever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
NOTE
This light does not turn off unless the
tank is replenished up to an internal
fuel quantity of approximately 4.5 US
gal (17 liters, 3.7 Imp gal).
& Hill start assist warning
light/Hill start assist
OFF indicator light
(models without electro-
nic parking brake sys-
tem)
! Hill start assist warning light
While the engine is running, if there are
any malfunctions in the Hill start assist
system, the warning light will illuminate.
WARNING
When the Hill start assist warning
light illuminates, have the vehicle
inspected at an authorized SUBARU
dealer.
! Hill start assist OFF indicator light
While the Hill start assist system is
deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF
indicator light illuminates continuously to
inform the driver that the Hill start assist
system is not operational.
& Hill Holder indicator
light (models with elec-
tronic parking brake
system)
WARNING
If the Hill Holder indicator light does
not illuminate even when the Hill
Holder switch is pressed to activate
the Hill Holder function, the electro-
nic parking brake system may be
malfunctioning. Immediately stop
the vehicle in a safe location and
contact your SUBARU dealer.
The light illuminates when the Hill Holder
switch is pressed to activate the Hill
Holder function. For details about the Hill
Holder function, “Hill Holder function” F7-
46.
3-24
Black plate (157,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Door open warning
light
The warning light illuminates if any door or
the trunk lid is not fully closed. This
function is effective even if the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”
position, or the key is removed from the
ignition switch.
Always make sure this light is not illumi-
nated before you start to drive.
& All-Wheel Drive warn-
ing light (if equipped)
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven
with tires of differing diameters fitted on
the wheels or with an excessively low air
pressure in any of the tires.
WARNING
Continued driving with the AWD
warning light flashing can lead to
powertrain damage. If the AWD
warning light flashes, promptly park
in a safe place then check whether
all four tires are the same diameter
and whether any of the tires has a
puncture or has lost air pressure for
some other reason.
& Power steering warn-
ing light (except STI)
This warning light illuminates when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position and turns off after the engine
has started. This indicates that the warn-
ing system is working properly.
While the engine is running, this warning
light illuminates when a malfunction has
been detected in the electric power steer-
ing system.
CAUTION
When the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the vehicle inspected immedi-
ately.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following w ays, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from
overheating.
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
quently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
speeds, such as while frequently turn-
ing the steering wheel during parallel
parking.
. The steering wheel remains in the
fully turned position for a long period
of time.
At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
an opportunity to cool down. However,
if the power steering is operated in a
non-standard way which causes power
assist limitation to occur too fre-
quently, that may result in a malfunc-
tion of the power steering control
system.
& LED headlight warning
light (if equipped)
This light illuminates if the LED headlights
malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-25
3
Black plate (158,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
& Vehicle Dynamics
Control warning light/
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol operation indicator
light
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem provides its ABS control
through the electrical circuit of the
ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is
inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system becomes unable to
provide ABS control. As a result, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
also becomes inoperative, causing
the warning light to illuminate.
Though both the Vehicle Dynamics
Control and ABS are inoperative in
this case, the ordinary functions of
the brake system are still available.
You will be safe while driving with
this condition, but drive carefully
and have your vehicle checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
NOTE
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system itself mal-
functions, the warning light only illumi-
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System) remains fully opera-
tional.
. The warning light illuminates when
the electronic control system of the
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
malfunctions.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably inoperative under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
. The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is running.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following examples,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates when
the ignition switc h is turned to the
“ON” position and turns off approxi-
mately 2 seconds after the engine has
started.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light illuminates after
the engine has started and turns off
while the vehicle is subsequently being
driven.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
. The warning light illuminates when
the engine has stalled and continues to
illuminate after the engine has been
restarted. However, it will turn off once
the vehicle starts moving.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light
The indicator light flashes during activa-
tion of the skid suppression function and
during activation of the traction control
function.
NOTE
. The light may remain illuminated for
a short period of time after the engine
has been started, especially in cold
weather. This does not indicate the
existence of a problem. The light
should turn off as soon as the engine
has warmed up.
. The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem
3-26
Black plate (159,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light is on.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under the follow-
ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The light does not turn off even after
the lapse of several minutes (the engine
has warmed up) after the engine has
started.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light/Traction mode
indicator light
/
The indicator light shows the activated/deactivated conditions as follows.
Activated/deactivated status for each function
Traction Control
Vehicle
Dynamics
Control system
ABS
Indicator light
Turn off Activated Activated Activated
Deactivated Activated Activated
Deactivated Deactivated
Activated
For details about the Traction Control and Vehicle Dynamics Control system, refer to
“Vehicle Dynamics Control system” F7-38.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-27
3
Black plate (160,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-
dicator light
This light illuminates when the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF switch is operated
to select the traction mode or the Vehicle
Dynamic Control OFF mode. For details,
refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem” F7-38.
NOTE
. The light may remain illuminated for
a while after the engine has been
started, especially in cold weather. This
does not indicate the existence of a
problem. The light should turn off as
soon as the engine has warmed up.
. The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light is on.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under the follow-
ing conditions. Have your vehicle checked
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
. The light does not turn off even after
the lapse of several minutes (the engine
has warmed up) after the engine has
started.
! Traction mode indicator light
The light illuminates when the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
briefly to select the traction mode. For
details, refer to “Traction mode” F7-41.
& Warning chimes and warning
indicator of the keyless ac-
cess with push-button start
system (if equipped)
Access key warning light
The keyless access with push-button start
system sounds a warning chime and the
access key warning indicator appears on
the combination meter in order to minimize
improper operations and help protect your
vehicle from theft.
When the warning chime sounds and/or
the warning indicator appears, take the
appropriate action.
WARNING
Never drive the vehicle if the indi-
cator on the push-button ignition
switch is flashing in green when
starting the engine. This indicates
the status that the steering wheel is
not released and could result in an
accident involving serious injury or
death.
CAUTION
. When starting the engine again
after the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in green, if the operation
indicator is still flashing in green,
there could be a steering lock
malfunction. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in orange, contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
3-28
Black plate (161,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
NOTE
. Even when the access key is within
the operating ranges inside the vehicle,
the access key warning for engine start
may be provided depending on the
status of the access key and the
environmental conditions.
. When the access key is taken out of
the vehicle through an open window,
the access key takeout warning or
passenger access key takeout warning
will not be provided.
! List of warnings
CAUTION
When any of the following warnings
occurs even if the access key warn-
ing indicator does not appear, take
the appropriate action.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-29
3
Black plate (162,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indicator
on push-button igni-
tion switch
Status Action
Ding,
ding ...
(intermittent)
——
The driver’s door was opened while the
push-button ignition switch is “ACC” (in
CVT models, when the select lever is in
the “P” position.)
Switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”, or close the driver’s door.
*When exiting the vehicle, be sure to
switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”.
The push-button ignition switch was
switched to “OFF” while the driver’s door
is open.
Close the driver’s door.
Ding
Short beep
(2 seconds)
—
Lockout warning:
All doors were closed after the locking of
all doors was set by using the door lock
lever or power door locking switch while
the access key is inside the vehicle.
Take out the access key from the
vehicle, and lock the doors.
*The doors cannot be locked while the
access key is inside the vehicle.
*A chirp sound will be heard, and all
doors will be unlocked.
—
Short beep
(2 seconds)
—
Trunk lockout warning:
The trunk was closed with the access
key in it while all doors are locked (or
during the automatic lock time period).
Take out the access key from the trunk,
and close the trunk.
*By pressing the trunk lid opener button
after this warning chime sounds, the
trunk can be unlocked.
Access key lock-in warning:
The door lock sensor was touched while
the push-button ignition switch is “OFF”
and the access key is inside the vehicle.
Take out the access key from the
vehicle, and lock the doors.
*If the access key is inside the vehicle,
the doors cannot be locked.
—
Beep, beep ...
(5 beeps)
—
Door ajar warning:
The door lock sensor is touched while
the push-button ignition switch is in the
“OFF” position and another door or the
trunk is opened.
Close the doors securely and lock them.
*If one of the doors is opened, the doors
cannot be locked.
3-30
Black plate (163,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indicator
on push-button igni-
tion switch
Status Action
Ding
Long beep (60
seconds max.)
—
Power warning:
The door lock sensor was touched while
carrying the access key and the push-
button ignition switch is in a position
other than “OFF” and the select lever is
in the “P” position.
Open the door and return the access key
inside the vehicle, or switch the push-
button ignition switch to “OFF”.
*If the push-button ignition switch is not
switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be
locked.
Ding, ding ...
(7 seconds)
——
Access key warning:
The vehicle was driven while the access
key is not inside the vehicle.
Carry the access key, and drive the
vehicle.
Ding ——
Access key warning for engine start:
The push-button ignition switch was
pressed while the access key is not
inside the vehicle.
Carry the access key, and press the
push-button ignition switch.
Ding
Beep, beep, beep
(3 beeps)
—
Access key takeout warning:
The driver exited the vehicle with the
access key and closed the driver’s door
while the push-button ignition switch is in
a position other than “OFF” and the
select lever is in the “P” position.
Switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.
Ding
Beep, beep, beep
(3 beeps)
—
Passenger access key takeout warn-
ing:
A fellow passenger exited the vehicle
with the access key and closed a door
other than the driver’s door while the
push-button ignition switch is in a posi-
tion other than “OFF”.
Return the access key to inside the
vehicle, or switch the push-button igni-
tion switch to “OFF”.
Long beep
(continuous)
Long beep
(continuous)
—
The driver exited the vehicle with the
access key and closed the driver’s door
while the push-button ignition switch is in
a position other than “OFF” and the
select lever is in a position other than the
“P” position.
Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF” and exit the vehicle.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-31
3
Black plate (164,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indicator
on push-button igni-
tion switch
Status Action
Long beep
(continuous)
——
Select lever position warning:
The driver’s door was opened while the
push-button ignition switch is in a posi-
tion other than “OFF” and the select
lever is in a position other than the “P”
position.
Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF” and exit the vehicle.
Ding ——The battery of the access key is low. Replace the battery of the access key.
Ding —
Flashes in green (15
seconds max.)
Steering lock warning:
The engine start procedure was per-
formed, but the steering is still locked.
While turning the steering wheel right
and left lightly, depress the brake pedal
and press the push-button ignition
switch.
Ding — Flashes in orange
System malfunction warning:
A malfunction was detected in the power
system or steering lock.
Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately
and have the vehicle inspected.
NOTE
An electronic chirp will sound while the select lever is in the “R” position. In this case, the select lever position warning chime
will not sound.
3-32
Black plate (165,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Security indicator light
This indicator light shows the status of the
alarm system. It also indicates operation
of the immobilizer system.
! Alarm system
It blinks to show the driver the operational
status of the alarm system. For detailed
information, refer to “Alarm system ” F2-
25.
! Immobilizer system
The security indicator light starts blinking
in the following conditions.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
. Immediately after the push-button igni-
tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
. Immediately after the driver’s door is
opened or closed when all of the following
conditions are met.
– The push-button ignition switch is in
the “ON” or “ACC” position.
– The access key is outside the
vehicle.
– The engine is not running.
– In the event that an unauthorized
key is used (for example, the key is
unregistered or the ID code does not
match), the power is not switched to
“ON” and the security indicator light
continues blinking.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
. Approximately 60 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned from the “ON”
position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
. Immediately after the key is pulled out.
If the indicator light does not blink in the
above conditions, it may indicate that
immobilizer system may be malfunction-
ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
immediately.
In the event that an unauthorized key (for
example, an unauthorized duplicate) is
used, the security indicator light illumi-
nates. For details about the immobilizer
system, refer to “Immobilizer” F2-3.
NOTE
. The security indicator light remains
off in the following conditions. It means
that the matching of the ID code is
completed and the immobilizer system
is deactivated, and it does not indicate
a malfunction.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
– while the engine is running
– the push-button ignition switch
has been turned to the “ON” or
“ACC” position and the drive r’s
door has not been opened or closed
Models witho ut “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
– while the engine is running
– for approximately 60 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned
from the “ON” position to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position
– when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
. Even if a malfunction occurs, such
as the security indicator light flashes
irregularly, it will not affect the func-
tionality of the immobilizer system.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-33
3
Black plate (166,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
& SI-DRIVE indicator (if
equipped)
1) Sport (S) mode
2) Intelligent (I) mode
3) Sport Sharp (S#) mode
This indicator shows the current SI-DRIVE
mode.
For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to “SI-
DRIVE (STI)” F7-29 or “SI-DRIVE (except
STI: CVT models)” F7-31.
& Shift-up indicator (STI)
While driving, this indicator appears and
informs the driver about the upshift timing
for fuel-efficient driving.
The shift-up indicator can be activated or
deactivated.
Refer to “Gear Position Indicator Setting
(MT models)” F3-47.
& Select lever/gear position in-
dicator (CVT models)
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Select lever/gear position indicator
This indicator shows the position of the
select lever.
For models with manual mode, when the
manual mode is selected, the gear posi-
tion indicator (which shows the current
gear selection) and the upshift/downshift
indicator light up. Refer to “Continuously
variable transmission” F7-23.
For models with SI-DRIVE, the upshift/
downshift indicators are switched off while
the Sport Sharp (S#) mode is selected.
3-34
Black plate (167,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Turn signal indicator
lights
These lights show the operation of the turn
signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-44.
& High beam indicator
light
This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode.
This indicator light also illuminates when
the headlight flasher is operated.
& Cruise control indica-
tor
This indicator appears when the cruise
control main button is pressed to activate
the cruise control function. For details,
refer to “To set cruise control ” F7-53.
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light illumi-
nates, the cruise control indicator
flashes at the same time. At this
time, avoid driving at high speed
and have your vehicle inspected at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
& Cruise control set in-
dicator
This i ndicator appears when vehicle
speed has been set to use the cruise
control function. Refer to “To set cruise
control” F7-53.
& Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light (models with LED
headlights)
This light illuminates when the automatic
headlight beam leveler does not operate
normally.
If this light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off approximately 3 seconds after
turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, have your vehicle inspected at
your SUBARU dealer.
& Front fog light indicator
light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates while the
front fog lights are illuminated.
& Headlight indicator
light
This indicator light illuminates under the
following conditions.
. when the light switch is turned to the
“
” or “ ” position
. when the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the headlights illumi-
nate automatically
& Driver’s control center differ-
ential auto indicator (STI)
This indicator functions while the ignition
switch is “ON”. When it appears, it
indicates that the driver’s control center
differential is set to the auto mode. It
disappears when the driver ’s control
center differential is set to the manual
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-35
3
Black plate (168,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
mode. For details, refer to “Driver’s Con-
trol Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD)
(STI)” F7-19.
! Driver’s control center dif-
ferential auto [+] indicator
(STI)
When the AUTO [+] mode is set, the
AUTO [+] indicator appears.
For details, refer to “Dr iver’sControl
Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)”
F7-19.
! Driver’s control center dif-
ferential auto [−] indicator
(STI)
When the AUTO [−] mode is set, the
AUTO [−] indicator appears.
For details, refer to “Dr iver’sControl
Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)”
F7-19.
& Driver’s control center differ-
ential indicator and warning
(STI)
! Indicator
When you select the manual mode of the
driver ’s control center differential, the
initial limited slip differential (LSD) torque
that is currently selected for the center
differential is indicated by the illumination
of these indicator.
! Warning indicator
All the indicators will flash in the event that
the driver’s control center differential has a
malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected
by your SUBARU dealer. For details, refer
to “Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.
DIFF/DCCD) (STI)” F7-19.
If a malfunction occurs in the vehicle (for
example, when the rear differential oil
temperature warning light illuminates), all
of the indicators may disappear and the
setting value for the initial limited slip
differential (LSD) torque of the driver’s
control center differential (C.DIFF/DCCD)
may be cancelled. However, it does not
indicate a malfu ncti on of the C. DIF F/
DCCD itself.
3-36
Black plate (169,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& REV indicator light
(STI)
This indicator light illuminates when the
engine speed reaches the level that was
previously set. This indicator light also
flashes when the tachometer needle en-
ters the red zone. For details, refer to
“REV indicator light and buzzer (STI)” F3-
12.
& Steering responsive
fog lights warning indi-
cator/Steering respon-
sive fog lights OFF in-
dicator (if equipped)
NOTE
For details about the steering respon-
sive fog lights system, refer to “Steer-
ing responsive fog lights system (mod-
els with EyeSight system)” F3-99.
! Steering responsive fog lights
warning indicator
This indicator starts blinking when the
steering responsive fog lights system
malfunctions. When this indicator appears
while the system is activated, contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
! Steering responsive fog lights OFF
indicator
This indicator appears when the steering
responsive fog lights system is deacti-
vated. This indicator disappears when the
system is activated.
& BSD/RCTA warning in-
dicator (if equipped)
This warning indicator appears when the
BSD/RCTA is malfunctioning. In this case
the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will be
shown on the multi information display of
the combination meter. When this indica-
tor appears, have your vehicle inspected
by your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
& BSD/RCTA OFF indica-
tor (if equipped)
The indicator appears when the BSD/
RCTA OFF switch is pressed to deactivate
the BSD/RCTA. In this case the BSD/
RCTA OFF indicator will be shown on the
multi information display of the combina-
tion meter. For details, refer to “BSD/
RCTA” F7-56.
Multi information display
WARNING
Always pay adequate attention to
safe driving when operating the
multi information display while the
vehicle is in motion. When operation
of the multi information display
interferes with your ability to con-
centrate on driving, stop the vehicle
before performing operations on the
screen. Also, do not concentrate on
the display while driving. Doing so
may cause you to look away from
the r oad and could result in an
accident.
Various information will be shown on the
multi information display. Also, a warning
message will appear on the display if a
malfunction, etc. is detected. In addition,
several settings for the displayed content
can be performed.
Instruments and controls/Multi information display
– CONTINUED –
3-37
3
Black plate (170,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi information display
Multi information display
1) ECO gauge (refer to “ECO gauge” F3-
12.)
2) Warning screen (refer to “ War ni ng
screen” F3-39.)/Basic screen (refer to
“Basic screens” F3-44.)
3) Cruise control information display/
C.DIFF/DCCD indicator
4) Warning indicator
5) Select lever/gear position indicator (refer
to “Select lever/gear position indicator
(CVT models)” F3-34.)
6) SI-DRIVE indicator light (refer to “SI-
DRIVE indicator” F3-34.)
7) Odometer (refer to “Odometer” F3-9.)/
double trip meter (refer to “Double trip
meter” F3-9.)
& Basic operation
By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control
switch, the screens and selection items
can be switched. When the “
/SET”
switch is pulled toward you, the item can
be selected and set.
If there are some useful messages, such
as vehicle information, warning informa-
tion, etc., they will interrupt the current
screen, and appear on the display accom-
panied by a beep. If such a screen is
displayed, take proper action according to
the message shown on the screen.
& Welcome screen
When the door is unlocked, and the
driver’s door is opened and then closed,
the welcome screen will appear for ap-
proximately 20 seconds.
NOTE
. Once the welcome screen appears,
it takes a certain period of time to
display it again.
. The welcome screen will disappear
when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position while the welcome
screen is displayed.
. If any of the doors is opened while
the welcome screen is displayed, the
door ajar warning will appear.
. The welcome screen can be set to
on or off. For details, refer to “Welcome
3-38
Black plate (171,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Good-bye Screen” F3-47.
& Good-bye screen
If the i gnition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/ “OFF” position, the “Good-bye”
screen will appear for approximately 3
seconds.
& Warning screen
Example of warning
If a warning or a malfunction is detected, a
message will appear. Take the appropriate
actions based on the messages indicated.
Control switch
1) Up (select)
2)
/SET (enter)
3) Down (select)
The warning screen will return to the
original screen after a few seconds. While
the “
” information reminder is on the
display, it may be possible to display the
warning screen again. To recall the mes-
sage marked with “
” on the display, pull
the “
/SET” switch on the steering wheel
toward you.
Instruments and controls/Multi information display
– CONTINUED –
3-39
3
Black plate (172,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi information display
! Items of display message (for warning message)
Item Icon “ ” information reminder Refer to page
Seatbelt warning for driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat Red 3-14
SRS airbag system malfunction warning
Red 1-57, 3-16
Engine warning
Yellow 3-16
Coolant temperature high warning
Red 3-11, 9-11
Engine oil level warning (except STI)
Yellow 3-17
Transmission fluid temperature high warning (CVT models)
Yellow or red* 3-18
Transmission control system malfunction warning (CVT models)
Yellow 3-18
Low tire pressure warning (U.S.-spec. models)
Yellow 3-19
TPMS system malfunction warning (U.S.-spec. models)
Yellow
3-19
*: The displayed color varies depending on individual countries.
3-40
Black plate (173,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Item Icon “ ” information reminder Refer to page
ABS malfunction warning
Yellow 3-20
Vehicle Dynamics Control system malfunction warning
Yellow 3-26
Brake system warning
Red 3-21
Electronic parking brake system malfunction warning
Red 3-22
Brake fluid level warning
Red 3-21
Low fuel warning
Yellow 3-24
Windshield washer fluid level warning
Yellow 3-18
Hill start assist system malfunction warning
Yellow 3-24
Door/trunk lid open warning
— 3-25
AWD system malfunction warning (if equipped)
Yellow 3-25
Electric power steering system malfunction warning (except STI)
Red 3-25
Instruments and controls/Multi information display
– CONTINUED –
3-41
3
Black plate (174,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi information display
Item Icon “ ” information reminder Refer to page
Automatic headlight beam leveler system malfunction warning
(models with LED headlights)
Yellow 3-35
LED low beam headlight system malfunction warning (if equipped)
Yellow 3-25
The keyless access with push-button start system malfunction
warning*
——
Low battery warning of the access key*
— 3-28
Driver’s control center differential system malfunction warning
Yellow 3-35
Deactivation of switching SI-DRIVE mode
— 7-29, 7-31
Windshield washer fluid warning
Yellow 11-38
BSD/RCTA halt or warning (if equipped)
Yellow
7-56
*: Models with keyless access with push-button start system
3-42
Black plate (175,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Items of display message (for operation and vehicle condition)
Item Icon “ ” information reminder Refer to page
Deactivation of the selection of the SI-DRIVE Sport Sharp (S#)
mode when the engine is cold
——7-29, 7-31
Pedal operation for starting engine
— 7-12
Select lever into “P” operation
——
Access key warning* (The vehicle was driven while the access key
is not inside the vehicle.)
— 3-28
Push-button ignition switch without “OFF” warning* —— 3-28
Access key lock-in warning*
— 3-28
Emergency operation of push-button ignition switch*
— 9-16
Release operation for steering lock*
— 3-28
Power save function operation* —— 2-15
Key in the ignition switch reminder (if equipped) —— 3-5
Headlights ON warning ——
3-94
*: Models with keyless access with push-button start system
Instruments and controls/Multi information display
– CONTINUED –
3-43
3
Black plate (176,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi information display
& Basic screens
By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the
steering wheel, you can change the
screen that is always displayed.
Default screen:
Journey time screen:
This screen displays the journey time (the
time that has elapsed since the ignition switch
was turned to the “ON” position).
Digital speedometer:
SI-DRIVE mode screen:
This screen indicates the current SI-DRIVE
mode with its throttle angle.
Menu screen entering screen:
While this screen is selected, pull and hold the
“
/SET” switch to enter the menu screen.
3-44
Black plate (177,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Menu screens
Pull and hold the “ /SET” switch to enter
the menu screens when all of the following
conditions are satisfied.
. The vehicle has been completely
stopped.
. The select lever is in the “P” position
(CVT models).
. The shift lever is in the neutral position
(MT models).
. The menu screen entering screen is
selected.
Instruments and controls/Multi information display
– CONTINUED –
3-45
3
Black plate (178,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi information display
The menu list is as follows.
Top menu Menu option Possible settings Initial settings
Screen Settings Welcome Good-bye Screen On or Off On
Gauge Initial Movement On or Off On
Gear Position Indicator Setting (MT
models)
On or Off On
Languages Select the display language. The default language settings vary
depending on individual countries.
(For U.S. models: English)
REV settings (STI) REV Indicator Light On or Off Off
REV Alarm Level Engine Speed 2000 rpm - RED ZONE 2000 rpm
REV Buzzer On or Off Off
EyeSight (models with EyeSight
system)
Warning Volume Max/Mid/Min Mid
Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound On or Off On
Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor
Function
On or Off On
BSD/RCTA (if equipped)
Warning Volume Max/Mid/Min/OFF Mid
Default Settings
― Yes or No ―
3-46
Black plate (179,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the
steering wheel, you can select the menu.
Pull the “
/SET” switch to enter the
selected menu.
NOTE
If you enter the “Return” menu, the
system will return to the previous
screen.
! Screen Settings
After entering the “Screen Settings” menu,
select one of the following menus.
! Welcome Good-bye Screen
The welcome screen/good-bye screens
can be activated or deactivated. Select
“On” to activate the screens. Select “Off”
to deactivate the screens.
! Gauge Initial Movement
The movement of the meter needles and
gauge needles that occurs when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position can be activated or deactivated.
Select “On” to activate. Select “Off” to
deactivate.
! Gear Position Indicator Setting
(MT models)
Display of the shift position indicator can
be activated or deactivated. Select “On” to
activate display of the shift position in-
dicator or “Off” to deactivate it.
! Languages
Operate the “
” or “ ” switch on the
steering wheel to display the preferred
language. Then pull the “
/SET” switch to
select the displayed language.
! REV settings (STI)
NOTE
If the setting of the REV Indicator Light
is “Off”, the setting menus of the REV
Alarm Level Engine Speed and the REV
Buzzer are not displayed.
After entering the “REV settings” menu,
select any of the following menus.
! REV Indicator Light
Display of the REV indicator light can be
activated or deactivated. Select “On” to
activate display of the REV indicator light
or “Off” to deactivate it.
! REV Alarm Level Engine Speed
The alarm-level engine speed can be set
(in 100 rpm steps) within the range from
2,000 rpm to the red zone.
! REV Buzzer
The REV buzzer can be activated or
deactivated. Select “On” to activate the
REV buzzer or “Off” to deactivate it.
! EyeSight (models with EyeSight
system)
NOTE
For models with the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.
After entering the “EyeSight” menu, select
one of the following menus.
! Warning Volume
The volume of the warning buzzer that
sounds when the EyeSight system is in
use can be set in 3 stages (“Max”, “Mid”
and “Min”).
! Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound
When adaptive cruise control is used, the
buzzer that sounds under any of the
following conditions can be activated or
deactivated.
. A vehicle is detected in front
. Detection is not possible
Select “On” to activate the buzzer. Select
“Off” to deactivate the buzzer.
! Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor
Function
When the lead vehicle moving monitor
function is operated, the buzzer that
sounds if a vehicle in front has started
can be activated or deactivated. Select
Instruments and controls/Multi information display
– CONTINUED –
3-47
3
Black plate (180,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
“On” to activate the buzzer. Select “Off” to
deactivate the buzzer.
! BSD/RCTA (if equipped)
After entering the “BSD/RCTA” menu,
select the “Warning Volume” menu. You
can set the volume of the warning buzzer
that sounds when the BSD/RCTA is in
use. You can select “Max”, “Mid”, “Min” or
“Off”.
! Default Settings
Select “Yes” to use the menu screen to
restore customized settings to the factory
default settings. Select “No” to return to
the previous screen without restoring to
the factory default settings.
Multi function display
NOTE
. Illustrations show the display for
U.S.-spec. models as an example. For
models other than U.S.-spec. models,
elements in the illustrations (such as
the display indication and measure-
ment unit) may be different than the
ones for U.S.-spec. models.
. When the vehicle is in motion,
certain functions and selections may
not be available.
. The images shown in this Owner’s
Manual are sample images. The actual
images may vary depending on the
destinations and specifications.
WARNING
Always pay adequate attention to
safe driving when operating the
multi function display while the
vehicle is in motion. When operation
of the multi function display is
disturbing your awareness and abil-
ity to concentrate on driving, stop
the vehicle in a safe place before
performing operations on the
screen. Also, do not concentrate
on the display while driving. Doing
so may cause you to look away from
the r oad and could result in an
accident.
The multi function display has the follow-
ing functions.
Description Page
Displays useful messages, such
as warning information, etc.
3-52
Displays basic screens (e.g. fuel
consumption screen, etc.)
3-52
Sets and adjusts maintenance
notification
3-79
Registers driving history 3-82
Sets and customizes car opera-
tion
3-83
Also, the multi function display can also be
used to set and initialize the multi function
display itself.
3-48
Black plate (181,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Multi function display
1) Outside temperature indicator
2) Top display (For the display setting, refer
to “Top display setting” F3-71.)
3) Clock
4) Driving information display (For the dis-
played contents, refer to “Basic screens”
F3-52.)
& Basic operation
Control switch
1) Up (select)
2) ENTER (push)
3) Down (select)
By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control
switch, the screens and selection items
can be switched. When the
button is
pushed, the item can be selected and set.
& Welcome screen
When the door is unlocked and the
driver’s door is closed, the welcome
screen will appear for a short time.
NOTE
. The welcome screen will disappear
when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position while the welcome
screen is displayed.
. The welcome screen can be set to
on or off. For details, refer to “Bypass
screen setting” F3-77.
. For a certain period of time after the
welcome screen has once appeared, it
may not appear again even when the
driver’s door is closed again. This does
not indicate a malfunction.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-49
3
Black plate (182,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
& Date screen
If you have set the date and time in the
selection screen, after the welcome
screen is displayed, the current date will
be displayed for a certain period of time. If
“On/Off setting” is set to “On” in the
“Maintenance settings”, the date will be
displayed after the self-check screen.
! Birthday/anniversary screen
Example of notification on an anniversary
If you have set a birthday or anniversary,
after the date screen is displayed, the
notification (reminder) will be displayed for
a certain period of time from 7 days prior
to the set date.
NOTE
. Displaying the birthday/anniversary
screen can be set to on or off. Refer to
“Bypass screen setting” F3-77.
. Up to five items can be set for
birthdays and anniversaries respec-
tively. Refer to “Selection screen” F3-
58.
& Ending screen
If “Eco Summary” is set to “On” in the
“Bypass screen setting”, the “Fuel con-
sumption results screen” will be displayed
before the screen turns off when the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
Fuel consumption results screen
1) The average fuel consumption for the
entire driving distance, from when the
ignition switch was turned to the “ON”
position to when it was turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position.
2) This display shows the average rate of
fuel consumption since the trip meter
was last reset. It displays the average
fuel consumption corresponding to the A
trip meter mileage or the one corre-
sponding to the B trip meter mileage.
& Self-check screen
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the vehicle self-check will
be performed. The screens corresponding
to the following items will appear one after
another for several seconds each.
3-50
Black plate (183,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
1) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engine
oil replacement.
2) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filter
replacement.
3) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation.
4) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the
interval of inspection and maintenance.
When the checks are performed, the color
of the icon corresponding to the checked
item will turn green.
If there is no warning message, the self-
check will complete without notification.
Example of notification
If there is a warning message or a
maintenance notification, the color of the
icon corresponding to the item will turn
yellow and the warning message or the
maintenance notification will be displayed.
Take the appropriate actions based on the
messages indicated.
NOTE
. The self-check screen can be set to
on or off. The default setting is off. For
details, refer to “On/Off setting” F3-80.
. After performing the maintenance,
change the setting of the correspond-
ing maintenance item. For details, refer
to “Maintenance settings” F3-79.
. The maintenance notification screen
will be displayed under either of the
following conditions.
– The period of time remaining
until the registered notification date
is 15 days or less.
– The total driving distance remain-
ing until the registered notification
distance is approximately 311 miles
(500 km) or less.
. The maintenance notification screen
will be displayed until either of the
following conditions is satisfied.
– The period of time passed after
the registered notification date is 15
days or more.
– The total distance driven after the
registered notification distance is
approximately 311 miles (500 km) or
more.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-51
3
Black plate (184,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
& Interruption screen
Useful messages, such as reminder in-
formation, vehicle infor mation, warning
information, etc. may interrupt the current
screen and appear on the display accom-
panied by a beep. Take proper action
according to the message.
The warning screen will return to the
original screen after a few seconds.
& Basic screens
These are the basic screens of the multi
function display.
Item Page
Information bar 3-52
Boost pressure + accelerator
opening ratio screen
3-54
Fuel consumption screen 3-54
ECO history screen 3-55
Vehicle activation status
screen
3-55
Triple meter screen 3-56
Guidance screen 3-57
Clock/calendar screen
3-57
By operating the “ ” or “ ” of the control
switch, you can switch the screen that is
always displayed. Also, when the
button is pushed and held, the selection
screen can be displayed. For details about
the selection screen, refer to “Selection
screen” F3-58.
! Information bar
1) Information bar
2) Outside temperature indicator
3) Top display
4) Clock
While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the outside temperature
indicator, clock, etc. will be shown on the
information bar.
! Outside temperature indicator
This di splays the outside temperature
between − 408F(− 408C) and 1228F
(508C).
3-52
Black plate (185,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Icy road surface warning screen
When the outside temperature becomes
378F(38C) or less, the icy road surface
warning screen interrupts to inform the
driver that the road surface may be frozen.
NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature around the
sensor. Therefore, the temperature in-
dication may differ from the actual
outside air temperature.
. The icy road surface warning screen
should be treated only as a guide. Be
sure to check the condition of the road
surface before driving.
. Once the icy road surface warning
screen is displayed, it will not be
displayed again unless the outside
temperature has increased to 418F
(58C) or higher.
! Top display
One of the following items can be dis-
played on the top display.
. Average fuel consumption correspond-
ing to the driving distance of each trip
meter
. Current fuel consumption (This may
not be displayed when driving at a low
speed.)
. Driving range on remaining fuel
For details about the setting of the top
display, refer to “Top display setting” F3-
71.
NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel
is calculated using the average fuel
consumption of the last 19 miles (30
km) driven. This value may be different
from the values calculated using the
average fuel consumption correspond-
ing to the driving distance of each trip
meter or the current fuel consumption.
! Clock
The clock can be displayed in either 12-
hour display or 24-hour display. For details
about the setting, refer to “Current date
and time setting” F3-62.
NOTE
If the vehicle battery is disconnected,
the clock shown in the information bar
will be reset. Set the time again after
the vehicle battery is connected. For
details about the setting, refer to “Top
display setting” F3-71.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-53
3
Black plate (186,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
! Boost pressure + accelerator
opening ratio screen
1) Boost pressure (digital display)
2) Boost pressure (analog display)
3) Accelerator opening ratio (digital display)
4) Accelerator opening ratio (analog dis-
play)
5) The peak value of the boost pressure
(digital display)
6) The peak value of the boost pressure
(analog display)
This screen displays the boost pressure,
the accelerator opening ratio and the peak
value of the boost pressure in both digital
and analog fo rmat. Pressing the
button in the “Boost pressure + accelera-
tor opening ratio screen” moves to a
screen where you can reset the peak
value of the boost pressure.
To reset the peak value, select “Yes”.If
you select “No”, the current peak value is
still kept.
! Fuel consumption screen
1) Driving range on remaining fuel
2) Average fuel consumption corresponding
to the driving distance of each trip meter
3) Current fuel consumption
The displayed location can be custo-
mized. For details, refer to “Fuel consump-
tion screen setting” F3-72.
3-54
Black plate (187,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! ECO history screen
1) Average fuel consumption per unit time
(bar graph)
2) Average fuel consumption corresponding
to the driving distance of each trip meter
(red line)
This screen displays the fuel economy
history for the vehicle using a bar graph.
The horizontal scale represents the past
time range and the vertical scale repre-
sents the fuel consumption. The green
bars show driving with good fuel economy
and the yellow bars show driving with poor
fuel economy.
The time range of the history can be set.
The width of the bar graph is adjusted as
follows depending on the set time range.
Time range Width of bar graph
30 minutes 1 minute
60 minutes 2 minutes
120 minutes
4 minutes
For details about the setting, refer to
“Economy history setting” F3-73.
! Vehicle activation status screen
When the vehicle stops
1) Steering axle
When the vehicle is being driven regularly
1) Power train (illuminated in blue)
When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem starts to activate, the tires illuminate in
yellow.
1) History of Vehicle Dynamics Control
system activation
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-55
3
Black plate (188,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem activates, the tires illuminate in yellow
and the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
operating indicator flashes.
1) Activation status of the ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System)
2) Vehicle Dynamics Control system oper-
ating indicator (flashing in yellow)
3) History of Vehicle Dynamics Control
system activation
! Triple meter screen
Triple meter screen (display example)
This screen displays up to three optional
pieces of information that can be selected
from the following items.
The items shown in the triple meter screen
can be chan ged. For details, refer to
“Triple meter setting” F3-75.
Item Details
Average vehicle speed (Average
vehicle speed for the entire driving
time from when the trip meter was
reset)
Lifetime fuel consumption
Engine oil temperature (except
STI)
Accelerator opening ratio
Journey distance (the distance
that has been driven since the
ignition switch was turned to the
“ON” position)
Average fuel consumption for the
entire driving distance from when
the ignition switch was turned to
the “ON” position
Boost pressure
3-56
Black plate (189,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Guidance screen
When the button is pushed and held,
the selection screen can be displayed.
The displayed contents can be set or
customized from the selection screen. For
details, refer to “Selection screen” F3-58.
! Clock/calendar/screen OFF
Clock (Type A)
Clock (Type B)
Calendar
1) Today’s date
2) Birthday/Anniversary
In addition to the clock/calendar, the out-
side temperature and average fuel con-
sumption can also be displayed.
You can select clock (Type A), clock (Type
B) or calendar. The clock/calendar can
also be set so that it is not displayed. For
details, refer to “Clock/calendar screen
setting” F3-76.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-57
3
Black plate (190,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
& Selection screen
When the button is pushed and held, the setting screen for each menu can be displayed. Select the preferred menu by operating
the “
” or “ ” switch.
Top menu Menu option Description Initial setting Page
Time/Date
Time/Date Set and adjust the time and date. 12h or 24h format can be selected.
1/1/2013 12 h
13:00
3-62
Birthday Set a birthday. (max. 5) — 3-63
Anniversary Set an anniversary day. (max. 5) — 3-65
Daylight Saving Time Turn the daylight saving time on or off Off 3-68
Go Back Return to the top menu. ——
Display
Contrast Adjust the contrast. +5 ↔ −5 0 3-69
Screen Off Turn the screen on or off. On or Off Off 3-69
Beep Adjust the beep sound volume. High, Low or Off High 3-70
Go Back Return to the top menu. ——
3-58
Black plate (191,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Top menu Menu option Description Initial setting Page
Screen
Setting
Top Display
Set and customize the top display information
contents.
Avg Cons, Inst Cons, Range
or Off
Avg Cons 3-71
Cons Customize the fuel consumption information display.
Upper part: Driv-
ing range, lower
part: Fuel con-
sumption
3-72
Eco History
Set and customize the time of logging fuel
consumption history.
30 min, 60 min or 120 min 30 min 3-73
Triple Meter Set and customize the triple meter.
Left: Lifetime fuel
consumption,
center: Average
fuel consumption,
right: Accelerator
opening ratio
3-75
Clock Select the clock format.
Type A clock, Type B clock,
Calendar or Off
Analog clock 3-76
Bypass Screen Set the bypass screen for each item. On or Off
Welcome screen:
On
Eco Summary: Off
Birthday Remin-
der: On
Anniversary Re-
minder: On
3-77
Languages Select the display language.
English or French or Spanish
(U.S.-spec. models only)
The default lan-
guage settings
vary depending
on individual
countries.
3-78
Go Back Return to the top menu. ——
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-59
3
Black plate (192,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
Top menu Menu option Description Initial setting Page
Mainte-
nance
Engine Oil Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date.
The default va-
lues for the main-
tenance settings
vary depending
on individual
countries.
3-79
Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil filter maintenance notification date. 3-80
Tires Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date. 3-80
Maintenance Schedule Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date. 3-80
On/Off
Turn on or off the self-check screen that is
activated when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position.
On or Off Off 3-80
Clear All Settings Clear all items to the factory default settings. Yes or No — 3-81
Go Back Return to the top menu. ——
Driving
History
Set Register and overwrite the driving record. — 3-82
Go Back Return to the top menu. ——
Car
Setting
Keyless Buzzer Vo-
lume
Set the audible signal volume. 0 (OFF) to 7 On 3-84
Hazard Warning
Flasher
Set the hazard warning flasher. On or Off On 3-84
Defogger
Set and customize the operation of the
defogger.
15 minutes or Continuous 15 minutes 3-85
Interior Light
Set and customize the interior light off delay
timer.
10, 20, 30 seconds or Off 30 seconds 3-87
Auto Light Sensor (if
equipped)
Set and customize the sensitivity of the auto
light sensor.
Low, Mid, High or Max Mid 3-88
Keyless Access
Setting Driver’s Door
Unlock (if equipped)
Set and customize the keyless access func-
tion.
Driver’s Door Only, All
Driver’s Door
Only
3-89
Welcome Lighting Set the leaving time and approaching time. 30, 60, 90 seconds or Off 30 seconds 3-90
Go Back Return to top menu. ——
3-60
Black plate (193,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Top menu Menu option Description Initial setting Page
Initialize
Reset to Defaults Reset all settings to the default settings. Yes or No — 3-92
Lifetime Fuel Cons
Reset
Clear logged lifetime fuel consumption data. Yes or No — 3-93
Go Back Return to the top menu. ——
Go Back
— Return to the top menu. —
—
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-61
3
Black plate (194,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
& Date and time settings
The items in the date and time settings
can be set. To change the items, operate
the “
” or “ ” switch.
NOTE
. The “Time/Date” item must be set to
display the “Birthday”, “Anniversary”
and notifications for vehicle mainte-
nance.
. The “Birthday” and “Anniversary”
items can be entered after the “Time/
Date” item has been set.
. Dates that do not exist in the
Gregorian calendar cannot be set (for
example, April 31).
. If your vehicle is equipped with the
genuine SUBARU navigation system,
the clock of navigation system must be
set separately.
! Preparation for date setting
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Push and hold the
button to show
the selection screen.
3. After the selection screen is displayed,
operate the “
” or “ ” switch to show the
“Time/Date” item. Then, push the
button.
! Current date and time setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-
62.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Time/Date” item. Then push
the
button.
3. Select the item to set by operating the
“
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
3-62
Black plate (195,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
4. Select a number by operating the “ ”
or “
” switch. Then push the button.
When “12 h” is selected, the clock will be
set to a 12-hour display. When “24 h” is
selected, the clock will be set to a 24-hour
display.
5. After entering the date and time, select
“Set” by operating the “
” switch and
confirm the setting by pushing the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
! Birthday setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-
62.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Birthday” item. Then push the
button.
3. Select an entry in the list to set by
operating the “
” or “ ” switch. Then
push the
button.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-63
3
Black plate (196,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
4. The selected item will be shown. Push
the
button to set the selected item.
5. Select numbers by operating the “ ”
or “
” switch. Then push the button.
6. After entering the date by repeating
step 5, you can enter the name.
7. Select charact ers by operating the
“
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
– You can select characters of the
English alphabet (upper case charac-
ters and lower case characters are
available), eleven symbols or blank
spaces.
– The word being edited will be
displayed with an underline.
8. After entering the name by repeating
step 7, select “Set” by operating the “
”
switch and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
3-64
Black plate (197,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
9. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
If a birthday is approaching, the following
screen will be displayed accompanied by
a beep when the ignition switch has been
turned to the “ON” position. This function
can be set to on or off. For details, refer to
“Bypass screen setting” F3-77.
From 1 to 7 days prior to the birthday
On a birthday (displayed in red)
NOTE
If “__” is selected for either the
“Month” or “Day” item instead of
numbers, the birthday notification will
be deactivated.
! Anniversary setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-
62.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Anniversary” item. Then push
the
button.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-65
3
Black plate (198,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
3. Select an entry in the list to set by
operating the “
” or “ ” switch. Then
push the
button.
4. The selected item will be shown. Push
the
button to set the selected item.
5. Select numbers by operating the “ ”
or “
” switch. Then push the button.
6. After entering the date by repeating
step 5, you can enter the name.
7. Select characters by operating the
“
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
– You can select characters of the
English alphabet (upper case charac-
ters and lower case characters are
available), eleven symbols or blank
spaces.
– The word being edited will be
displayed with an underline.
3-66
Black plate (199,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
8. After entering the name by repeating
step 7, select “Set” by operating the “
”
switch and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
9. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
If an anniversary is approaching, the
following screen will be displayed accom-
panied by a beep when the ignition switch
has been turned to the “ON” position. This
function can be set to on or off. For details,
refer to “Bypass screen setting” F3-77.
From 1 to 7 days prior to the anniversary
On an anniversary (displayed in orange)
NOTE
If “__” is selected for either the
“Month” or “Day” item instead of
numbers, the anniversary notification
will be deactivated.
! Clearing birthday or anniversary
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-62
and display “Birthday” or “Anniversary” on
the screen.
2. Select the preferred birthday/anniver-
sary.
3. When “__” is selected for either the
“Month” or “Day” item instead of numbers,
the setting of “Birthday” or “Anniversary”
will be cleared.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-67
3
Black plate (200,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
! Daylight saving time setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-
62.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Daylight Saving Time” item.
Then push the
button.
3. The current setting will be displayed.
Push the
button to enter the selection
mode.
4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the
“
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
3-68
Black plate (201,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Image quality and volume
settings
The image quality and volume settings
can be adjusted. To change the items,
operate the “
” or “ ” switch.
! Preparation for image quality and
volume settings
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Push and hold the
button to show
the selection screen.
3. After the selection screen is displayed,
operate the “
” or “ ” switch to show the
“Display” item. Then, push the
button.
! Contrast setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for image quality and
volume settings” F3-69.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Contrast” item. Then push the
button.
3. Select a contrast level by operating the
“
” or “ ” switch, and confirm the setting
by pushing the
button.
! Screen OFF setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for image quality and
volume settings” F3-69.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-69
3
Black plate (202,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Screen Off” item. Then push
the
button.
3. Push the button once more.
4. The screen is turned off.
Restoring the screen
When the “
”, “ ” or button is
pushed after the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position, the screen will be
restored. The screen will be restored with
the basic screen that was displayed when
the screen was t urned off. While the
screen is off, a warning message will be
displayed if necessary, but other screens
will not be displayed.
! Beep volume setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for image quality and
volume settings” F3-69.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Beep” item. Then push the
button.
3. Push the button.
3-70
Black plate (203,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
4. Select an item by operating the “ ” or
“
” switch. Then push the button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
& Screen settings
The items in screen settings can be set.
To change the items, operate the “
” or
“
” switch, and then push the button.
! Preparation for screen settings
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Push and hold the
button to show
the selection screen.
3. After the selection screen is displayed,
operate the “
” or “ ” switch to show the
“Screen Setting” item. Then, push the
button.
! Top display setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-71.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-71
3
Black plate (204,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Top Display” item. Then push
the
button.
3. Push the button once more.
4. Select an item by operating the “ ” or
“
” switch. Then push the button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
! Fuel consumption screen setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-71.
3-72
Black plate (205,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Cons” item. Then push the
button.
3. Push the button once more.
4. Select the displayed configuration by
operating the “
” or “ ” switch. Then
push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
! Economy history setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-71.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-73
3
Black plate (206,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Eco History” item. Then push
the
button.
3. Push the button once more.
4. Select the time of the logged fuel
consumption history by operatin g the
“
” or “ ” switch, and then push the
button.
5. Select “Go Back” by operating the “ ”
switch.
6. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
7. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
3-74
Black plate (207,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Triple meter setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-71.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Triple Meter” item. Then push
the
button.
3. Select the setting location (left, center
or right) by operating the “
” or “ ”
switch. Then push the
button.
NOTE
The same item cannot be selected for
the left, center or right location.
4. Select the preferred item by operating
the “
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
If you also want to change the setting for
another location, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-75
3
Black plate (208,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
! Clock/calendar screen setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-71.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Clock” item. Then push the
button.
3. Push the button once more.
4. Select “Type A clock”, “Type B clock”,
“Calendar” or “OFF” by operating the “
”
switch. Then push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
3-76
Black plate (209,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
! Bypass screen setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-71.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Bypass Screen” item. Then
push the
button.
3. Select the item to set by operating the
“
” or “ ” switches. Then push the
button.
4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the
“
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
If you want to change setting for another
item, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” or
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-77
3
Black plate (210,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
“ ” switch, and confirm the setting by
pushing the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
! Language setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-71.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Languages” item. Then push
the
button.
3. The current language setting will be
displayed. Push the
button to enter
the language selection mode.
4. Select the preferred language by
operating the “
” or “ ” switch. Then
push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
3-78
Black plate (211,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
& Maintenance settings
The items in the maintenance settings can
be set. To change the items, operate the
“
” or “ ” switch.
! Preparation for maintenance set-
tings
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Push and hold the
button to show
the selection screen.
3. After the selection screen is displayed,
operate the “
” or “ ” switch to show the
“Maintenance” item. Then, push the
button.
! Engine oil setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-
tings” F3-79.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Engine Oil” item. Then push
the
button.
3. Select the setting location (month, day,
year or distance) by operating the “
” or
“
” switch. Then push the button.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-79
3
Black plate (212,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
4. Select a number by operating the “ ”
or “
” switch. Then push the button.
If you also want to change the setting for
another location, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” or
“
” switch and confirm the setting by
pushing the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
NOTE
. The notification will be displayed
with information of both date and
distance or either date or distance in
accordance with the setting
. When “__” is selected for either the
“Month”, “Day”, “Year” or “Distance”
item instead of numbers, the set noti-
fication will be deactivated.
. If the notification continues for 15
days or more, the system will display
“__” on the screen.
. When the distance announcement
reaches 0 km, the display will show
“0000” for the next 311 miles (500 km).
After exceeding 311 miles (500 km), “_
___” will be displayed.
! Oil filter setting
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine oil setting” F3-79, but select the
“Oil Filter” item in step 2.
! Tires setting
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine oil setting” F3-79, but select the
“Tires” item in step 2.
! Maintenance schedule setting
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine oil setting” F3-79, but select the
“Maintenance Schedule” item in step 2.
! On/Off setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-
tings” F3-79.
3-80
Black plate (213,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “On/Off” item. Then push the
button.
3. The current setting will be displayed.
Push the
button to enter the selection
mode.
4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the
“
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
! Clear setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-
tings” F3-79.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-81
3
Black plate (214,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Clear All Settings” item. Then
push the
button.
3. The system will prompt a Yes/No
dialogue (“No” is selected first). To clear
all maintenance settings, select “Yes” by
operating the “
” switch.
4. Confirm the setting by pushing the
button.
5. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
& Driving history registration
The items in the driving history can be
registered. To change the items, operate
the “
” or “ ” switch, and then push the
button.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Push and hold the
button to show
the selection screen.
3. After the selection screen is displayed,
operate the “
” or “ ” switch to show the
“Driving History” item. Then, push the
button.
3-82
Black plate (215,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
4. Push the button once more to
enter the setting mode.
5. The system will notify you of the place
to be selected for approximately 2 sec-
onds.
6. Select one of the registration lines by
operating the “
” or “ ” switch. Then
push the
button.
7. To overwrite the previous registration,
push the
button. When registration is
performed the first time, it is registered
directly without a notification.
8. The system will notify you that the
registration is complete.
& Car settings
The items in the car settings can be set.
To change the items, operate the “
” or
“
” switch, and then push the button.
! Preparation for car settings
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Push and hold the
button to show
the selection screen.
3. After the selection screen is displayed,
operate the “
” or “ ” switch to show the
“Car Setting” item. Then, push the
button.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-83
3
Black plate (216,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
! Keyless buzzer volume setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “ Preparation for car settings” F3-83.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Keyless Buzzer Volume” item.
Then push the
button.
3. Select a volume level by operating the
“
” or “ ” switch, and confirm the setting
by pushing the
button.
4. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.
! Hazard warning flasher setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “ Preparation for car settings” F3-83.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Hazard Warning Flasher” item.
3-84
Black plate (217,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Then push the button.
3. The current setting will be displayed.
Push the
button to enter the selection
mode.
4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the
“
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.
! Defogger setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “ Preparation for car settings” F3-83.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-85
3
Black plate (218,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Defogger” item. Then push the
button.
3. The current setting will be displayed.
Push the
button to enter the selection
mode.
4. Select the preferred setting by operat-
ing the “
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.
3-86
Black plate (219,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Interior light off delay timer setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “ Preparation for car settings” F3-83.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Interior Light” item. Then push
the
button.
3. The current setting will be displayed.
Push the
button to enter the selection
mode.
4. Select the preferred setting by operat-
ing the “
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-87
3
Black plate (220,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
! Auto light sensor sensitivity setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “ Preparation for car settings” F3-83.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Auto Light Sensor” item. Then
push the
button.
3. The current setting will be displayed.
Push the
button to enter the selection
mode.
4. Select the preferred setting by operat-
ing the “
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
3-88
Black plate (221,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.
! Keyless access setting (models
with “keyless access with push-
button start system”)
! Preparation for keyless access
settings
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “ Preparation for car settings” F3-83.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Keyless Access Setting” item.
Then push the
button.
! Driver’s door unlock setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for keyless access
settings” F3-89.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Driver’s Door Unlock” item.
Then push the
button.
3. The current setting will be displayed.
Push the
button to enter the selection
mode.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-89
3
Black plate (222,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
4. Select the preferred setting by operat-
ing the “
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.
! Welcome lighting setting
The leaving time and approaching time
settings can be adjusted.
! Leaving time setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “ Preparation for car settings” F3-83.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Welcome Lighting” item, and
then push the
switch.
3-90
Black plate (223,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
3. Select the “Leaving time set” by
operating the “
” or “ ” switch, and then
push the
switch.
4. The current setting will be displayed.
Push the
switch to enter the selection
mode.
5. Select the preferred setting by operat-
ing the “
” or “ ” switch, and then push
the
switch.
6. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
switch.
7. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-91
3
Black plate (224,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
! Approaching time setting
The setting procedure is the same as
“Leaving time setting” F3-90, but select
the “Approaching time set ” item in step 3.
& Initialize
Items that have been set to your pre-
ference can be initialized. To select an
initialization menu, operate the “
” or “ ”
switch as follows.
! Preparation for initialization
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Push and hold the
button to show
the selection screen.
3. After the selection screen is displayed,
operate the “
” or “ ” switch to show the
“Initialize” item. Then, push the
button.
! Reset to factory default settings
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for initialization” F3-
92.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Reset to Defaults” item. Then
push the
button.
3. The system will prompt a Yes/No
dialogue (“No” is selected first). To return
to the factory default settings, select “Yes”
by operating the “
” switch.
4. Confirm the setting by pushing the
button.
3-92
Black plate (225,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
5. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
! Lifetime fuel consumption resetting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for initialization” F3-
92.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Lifetime Fuel Consumption
Resetting” item. Then push the
button.
3. The system will prompt a Yes/No
dialogue (“No” is selected first). To reset
the lifetime fuel consumption, select “Yes”
by operating the “
” switch.
4. Confirm the setting by pushing the
button.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-93
3
Black plate (226,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Light control switch
5. Reconfirmation will be displayed. If
you are sure you want to proceed, select
“Yes” by operating the “
” switch.
6. Confirm the setting again by pushing
the
button.
7. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
Light control switch
CAUTION
. Use of any lights for a long period
of time while the engine is not
running can cause the battery to
discharge.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the lights are turned off.
If the vehicle is left unattended
for a long time with the lights
illuminated, the battery may be
discharged.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The light control switch operates when the
push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the push-button ignition
switch is turned off.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The light control switch operates when the
key is inserted in the ignition switch.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
3-94
Black plate (227,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
turned off when the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
NOTE
The light control switch can be oper-
ated (except auto on/off headlights),
even under the following conditions.
. when the key is not inserted into the
ignition switch (models without “key-
less access with push-button start
system”)
. when the push-button ignition
switch is turned off (models with “key-
less access with push-button start
system”)
If the driver’s door is opened while the
headlights are illuminated under such
conditions, the chirp sound will inform
the driver that the lights are illumi-
nated.
& Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
the end of the turn signal lever.
“
” position
Headlights, parking lights, front side mar-
ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are on.
“
” position
Parking lights, front side marker lights,
rear side marker lights, tail lights and
license plate lights are on.
“
” position: auto on/off headlights (if
equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, headlights, parking lights, front
side marker lights, rear side marker lights,
tail lights and license plate lights are
automatically on or off depending on the
level of the ambient light.
“
” position
The headlights are all off.
NOTE
The sensitivity of the auto on/off head-
lights can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer
for details. Also, for models with a multi
function display, the setting can be
changed using the display. For details,
refer to “Auto light sensor sensitivity
setting” F3-88.
Instruments and controls/Light control switch
– CONTINUED –
3-95
3
Black plate (228,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Light control switch
! Sensor for the auto on/off head-
lights (if equipped)
The sensor is on the instrument panel as
shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
If any object is placed on or near the
sensor, the sensor may not detect
the level of the ambient light cor-
rectly and the auto on/off headlights
may not operate properly.
& High/low beam change
(dimmer)
To change from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal lever forward. When
the headlights are on high beam, the high
beam indicator light “
” on the combina-
tion meter is also on.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever
back to the center position.
& Headlight flasher
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
position for more than just a few
seconds.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
toward you and then release it. The high
beam will stay on for as long as you hold
the lever. The headlight flasher works
even though the lighting switch is in the
“
” (off) position.
When the headlights are on high beam,
the high beam indicator light “
” on the
combination meter is also on.
3-96
Black plate (229,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Daytime running light system
WARNING
The brightness of the illumination of
the high beam headlights is reduced
by the daytime running light system.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “
” position when it
is dark outside.
The high beam headlights will automati-
cally illuminate at reduced brightness
when the following conditions are fulfilled.
. The engine is running.
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The light control swi tch is in the
“AUTO” (if equipped), “
” or off position.
. For CVT models, the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
NOTE
. When the light switch is in the “ ”
position, the instrument panel illumina-
tion, front side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are also illumi-
nated.
. For models with the auto on/off
headlights, while the ligh t control
switch is in the “AUTO” position and
the system is activated to the auto-on
mode depending on the ambient light
level, the high beam headlights that
have illuminated at reduced brightness
turn off, and the low beam headlights
turn on alternatively. At this time, the
instrument panel illumination, front
side marker lights, tail lights and
license plate lights are also illuminated.
Turn signal lever
To activate the right turn signal, push the
turn signal lever up. To activate the left
turn signal, push the turn signal lever
down. When the turn is finished, the lever
will return automatically. If the lever does
not return after cornering, return the lever
to the neutral position by hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
during the lane change. The turn signal
indicator lights will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position
when you release it.
Instruments and controls/Turn signal lever
– CONTINUED –
3-97
3
Black plate (230,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Illumination brightness control
& One-touch lane changer
To flash the turn signal and turn signal
indicator light three times, push the turn
signal lever up o r down slightly and
immediately release it.
The operational/non-operational setting of
the one-touch lane change r’s c an be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
Illumination brightness con-
trol
You can adjust the illumination brightness
of the combination meter, the climate
control panel, etc. by turning the control
dial.
. To brighten, turn the control dial up-
ward.
. To darken, turn the control dial down-
ward.
The multi function display automatically
adjusts its brightness together with the
brightness level of the instrument panel.
To adjust the display’s contrast, refer to
“Contrast setting” F3-69.
NOTE
. When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the il luminati on brightne ss
becomes the maximum and the auto-
matic dimming function does not work
at all.
. The brightness setting is not can-
celed even when the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
3-98
Black plate (231,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Headlight beam leveler (if
equipped)
& Automatic headlight beam
leveler (models with LED
headlights)
The LED headlights generate more light
than conventional halogen headlights.
Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle
may experience too much glare if your
headlight beam height adjustment is high
when the vehicle is carrying a heavy load.
The automati c headlight beam leveler
adjusts the headlight beam height auto-
matically and optimally according to the
load being carried by the vehicle.
Fog light switch (if equipped)
1) Headlight switch
2) Fog light switch
The front fog lights will turn on when the
fog light switch is placed in the “
”
position while the headlights are in the
following condition.
. while the headlight switch is in the “
”
position
. for models with the auto on/off head-
lights, while the headlight switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the headlights turn
on automatically
To turn off the front fog lights, turn the
switch back down to the “
” position.
The indicator light on the combinat ion
meter will illuminate when the front fog
lights are illuminated.
& Steering responsive fog
lights system (models with
EyeSight system)
The steering responsive fog lights system
automatically turns the front fog light on
and off based on the steering angle and
vehicle speed when entering a curve or
driving on curved roads. The system is
intended to help prevent accidents by
enabling better visibility of curves ahead
and early recognition of any disabled
vehicles or other obstacles.
The front fog light on the inside of a curve
will turn on if all of the following conditions
Instruments and controls/Headlight beam leveler
– CONTINUED –
3-99
3
Black plate (232,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Fog light switch
are met.
. The light control switch is in the “
”
position
. The light control swi tch is in the
“AUTO” position and the low beam head-
lights turn on automatically
. The fog light switch is in the “
”
position
. The low beam mode is selected (the
turn signal lever is in the center position)
. The select lever is in a position other
than the “R” position
. The steering responsive fog lights
system has not been deactivated
. The operating conditions such as the
steering angle and vehicle speed are met
The front fog lights on both sides will turn
on as usual if all of the following conditions
are met.
. The light control switch is in the “
”
position
. The light control swi tch is in the
“AUTO” position and the low beam head-
lights turn on automatically
. The fog light switch is in the “
”
position
. The low beam mode is selected (the
turn signal lever is in the center position)
! Steering responsive fog lights OFF
switch
Steering responsive fog lights OFF switch
Press this switch to deactivate the steer-
ing responsive fog lights system. Press
the switch again to activate the system.
! Steering responsive fog lights OFF
indicator
Steering responsive fog lights OFF indica-
tor
This indicator appears when the steering
responsive fog lights system is deacti-
vated. This indicator disappears when the
system is activated.
3-100
Black plate (233,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Wiper and washer
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the
windshield washer until the wind-
shield is sufficiently warmed by the
defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can
freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer con-
tinuously for more than 10 sec-
onds, or when the washer fluid
tank is empty. This may cause
overheating of the washer motor.
Check the washer fluid level
frequently, such as at fuel stops.
. Do not operate the wipers when
the windshield or rear window is
dry. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades and
might cause the wiper motor to
fail. Before operating the wiper
on a dry windshield or rear
window, always use the wind-
shield washer.
. In freezing weather, be sure that
the wiper blades are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window
before switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wiper
with the blades f rozen to the
window glass could cause not
only the wiper blades to be
damaged but also might cause
the wiper motor to fail. If the
wiper blades are frozen to the
window glass, be sure to operate
the defroster, windshield wiper
deicer (if equipped) or rear win-
dow defogger before turning on
the wiper.
. If the wipers stop during opera-
tion because of ice or some other
obstruction on the window, this
might cause the wiper motor to
fail even if the wiper switch is
turned off. If this occurs,
promptly stop the vehicle in a
safe place, turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” po-
sition an d clean the window
glass to allow proper wiper op-
eration.
. Use clean water if windshield
washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in
winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
Refer to “Windshield washer
fluid” F11-38.
Also, when driving the vehicle
when there are freezing tempera-
tures, use non-freezing type wi-
per blades.
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
NOTE
. The windshield wiper motor is pro-
tected against overloads by a circuit
breaker. If the motor operates continu-
ously under an unusually heavy load,
the circuit breaker may trip to stop the
motor temporarily. If this happens, park
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the
wiper switch, and wait for approxi-
mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
will reset itself, and the wipers will
again operate normally.
. Clean your wiper blades and win-
dow glass periodically with a washer
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or
road film. Operate the windshield
washer for at least 1 second so that
Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
– CONTINUED –
3-101
3
Black plate (234,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
washer solution will be sprinkled all
over the windshield or rear window.
. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
rial on the windshield or the wiper
blade results in jerky wiper operation
and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove those streaks after
operating the washer or if the wiper
operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
face of the windshield or rear window
and the wiper blades using a sponge or
soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and wiper
blades with clean water. The glass is
clean if no beads form on the glass
when you rinse with water.
. If you cannot eliminate the streaking
even after following this procedure,
replace the wiper blades with new
ones. For replacement instructions,
refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
F11-39.
& Windshield wiper and washer
switches
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
! Windshield wipers
: Mist (for a single wipe)
:Off
: Intermittent
: Low speed
:
High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “
” position.
For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.
! Wiper intermittent time control
When the wiper switch is in the “ ”
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-
ing interval of the wiper. The operating
interval can be adjusted in several steps
from the shortest interval to the longest.
3-102
Black plate (235,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Windshield washer
To wash the windshield, pull the wiper
control lever toward you. The washer fluid
sprays until you release the lever. The
wipers operate while you pull the lever.
NOTE
The windshield washer fluid warning
indicator appears when the washer
fluid level in the tank has dropped to
the lower limit. If the warning indicator
appears, refill the tank with fluid. For
the refilling procedure, refer to “Wind-
shield washer fluid” F11-38.
Mirrors
Always check that the inside and outside
mirrors are properly adjusted before you
start driving.
& Inside mirror
The inside mirror has a day and night
position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the
mirror toward you for the night position.
Push it away for the day position. The
night position reduces glare from head-
lights.
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
– CONTINUED –
3-103
3
Black plate (236,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
& Auto-dimming mirror/com-
pass (if equipped)
1) LED
2) Switch
3) Sensor
4) Compass display
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
feature which automatically reduces glare
coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you. It also contains a built-in compass.
. By pressing and holding the switch for
1 second, the automatic dimming function
is toggled on or off. When the automatic
dimming function is on, the LED indicator
will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,
the mirror surface turns bright if the
transmission is shifted into reverse. This
is to ensure good rearward visibility during
reversing.
. By pressing and releasing the switch
for less than 6 seconds, the compass
display is toggled on or off. When the
compass is on, an illuminated compass
reading will appear in the upper right
corner of the mirror.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter t he mir ror
housing and damage the mirror.
! Photosensors
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
the front and back sides. During nighttime
driving, these sensors detect distracting
glare from vehicle headlights behind you
and automatically dim the mirror to elim-
inate glare and preserve your vision. For
this reason, use care not to cover the
sensors with stickers, or other similar
items. Periodically wipe the sensors clean
using a piece of dry soft cotton cloth or an
applicator.
! Compass zone adjustment
Compass calibration zones
1. Refer to the “Compass calibration
zones” map shown above to verify that
the compass zone setting is correct for
your geographical location.
2. Press and hold the switch for 6
seconds until the zone selection comes
up (a number will be displayed in the
mirror compass window).
3-104
Black plate (237,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
3. Press the switch repeatedly until the
correct zone setting for your location is
displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 10 seconds
will exit the zone setting mode.
! Compass calibration
1. If a “C” is displayed in the compass
window, the compass needs to be cali-
brated.
2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8
km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
3. You can also calibrate the compass by
driving your vehicle on your everyday
routine. The compass will be calibrated
once it has tracked a complete circle.
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and
hold the switch for 9 seconds until a “C”
appears in the compass window.
5. Calibrate the compass according to
step 2 or step 3.
& Auto-dimming mirror/com-
pass with HomeLink
®
(if
equipped)
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) LED
4) HomeLink
®
button 3
5) Sensor
6) Automatic dimming on/off button
7) Compass display button
8) Compass display
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
feature which automatically reduces glare
coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you. It also contains a built-in compass
and HomeLink
®
wireless control system.
. By pressing the automatic dimming on/
off button, the automatic dimming function
is toggled on or off. When the automatic
dimming function is on, the LED indicator
will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in the automatic
dimming mode, the mirror surface turns
bright if the transmission is shifted into
reverse. This is to ensure good rearward
visibility during reversing.
. By pressing the compass display but-
ton, the compass display is toggled on or
off. When the compass is on, an illumi-
nated compass reading will appear in the
upper right corner of the mirror.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter t he mirror
housing and damage the mirror.
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
– CONTINUED –
3-105
3
Black plate (238,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
! Photosensors
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
both the front and back sides. During
nighttime driving, these sensors detect
distracting glare from vehicle headlights
behind you and automatically dim the
mirror to eliminate glare and preserve
your vision. For this reason, use care not
to cover the sensors with stickers, or other
similar items. Periodically wipe the sen-
sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
cloth or an applicator.
! Compass zone adjustment
Compass calibration zones
1. Refer to the “Compass c alibration
zones” map shown above to verify that
the compass zone setting is correct for
your geographical location.
2. Press and hold the compass display
button for 3 seconds until the zone
selection comes up (a number will be
displayed in the mirror compass window).
3. Press the compass display button
repeatedly until the correct zone setting
for your location is displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 5 seconds will
exit the zone setting mode.
! Compass calibration
1. If a “C” is displayed in the compass
window, the compass needs to be cali-
brated.
2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8
km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
3. You can also calibrate the compass by
driving your vehicle on your everyday
routine. The compass will be calibrated
once it has tracked a complete circle.
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and
hold the compass display button for 9
seconds until a “C” appears in th e
compass window.
5. Calibrate the compass according to
step 2 or step 3.
! HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
can be used to activate remote control
devices such as gate operators, garage
door openers, door locks, home lighting
and security systems.
There are three HomeLink
®
buttons on the
mirror, each of which can be programmed
for operation of one desired device. For
details on the device types which can be
operated by this sys tem, co nsult th e
HomeLink
®
website at:
3-106
Black plate (239,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515.
. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: NZLWLHL4
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
. Canada-spec. models
NOTE
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard
(s). Operation is subject to the follow-
ing two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
NOTE
Le présent appareil est conforme aux
CNR d’I ndustrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne
doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
HomeLink
®
and the HomeLink
®
house are
registered trademarks of Johnson Con-
trols, Inc.
WARNING
. When programming the
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem, you m ay be operating a
garage door opener or other
device. Make su re that people
and objects are out of the way
ofthegaragedoororother
device to prevent potential harm
or damage.
. Do not use the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System with a gar-
age door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these fea-
tures increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more infor-
mation, consult the HomeLink
®
website at www.homelink.com or
call 1-800-355-3515.
CAUTION
When programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System to operate
a garage door opener or an entrance
gate, unplug the device’s motor
from the outlet during programming
to prevent motor burnout.
NOTE
. After programming your HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for the de-
sired devices, retain the hand-held
transmitters for further programming
or device testing in the event of a
problem.
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
– CONTINUED –
3-107
3
Black plate (240,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
. It is recommended that you insert a
new battery in the hand-held transmit-
ter of a device to ensure correct
programming.
! Garage door opener program-
ming in the U.S.A.
NOTE
When programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for a garage
door opener, it is suggested that you
park the vehicle outside the garage.
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door
opener from the outlet.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink
®
buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the indicator light begins to flash
(after approximately 20 seconds). Then
release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the garage door
opener’s hand-held transmitter between
1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from
the HomeLink
®
button you wish to pro-
gram.
4. Simultaneously press and hold both
the hand-held transmitter button and the
desired HomeLink
®
button. DO NOT re-
lease the buttons until step 5 has been
completed.
NOTE
Some gate operators and garage door
openers may require you to replace
this programming step 4 with proce-
dures in “Programming for entrance
gates and g arage door openers in
Canada” F3-109.
5. Hold down both buttons until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light flashes, first
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapidly flashing light indi-
cates successful programming of the new
frequency signal.)
6. Press and hold the programmed but-
ton and check the HomeLink
®
indicator
light. If the indicator light stays on con-
tinuously, your garage door should acti-
vate and the programming is completed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then stays on continuously,
your garage door opener may be pro-
tected by a rolling code feature. In this
case you need to perform the additional
steps that are described in “Programming
rolling-code-protected garage door open-
ers in the U.S.A. ” F3-109.
3-108
Black plate (241,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Programming rolling-code-pro-
tected garage door openers in
the U.S.A.
If your garage door opener has a rolling
code feature, program the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for it by following
steps 1 through 5 in “Garage door opener
programming in the U.S.A.” F3-108. Then
continue with the following steps.
NOTE
The assistance of a second person
may make the programming quicker
and easier.
1. Locate the training button on t he
garage door opener motor head unit.
The exact location and color of the button
may vary by brand of garage door opener.
If it is difficult to locate the training button,
refer to your garage door opener’s instruc-
tion manual.
1) Training button
2. Press the train ing button on the
garage door opener motor he ad unit
(which activates the “training light” on the
unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for
2 seconds and release the HomeLink
®
button that was programmed in the pre-
vious secti on. Press and release the
button a second time to complete the
programming procedure.
NOTE
Some garage door openers may re-
quire you to do the above press-hold-
release sequence a third time to com-
plete the programming.
4. The garage door opener should now
recognize the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System and your garage door opener
should activate when the HomeLink
®
button is pressed.
! Programming for entrance gates
and garage door openers in
Canada
1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate
or garage door opener from the outlet.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink
®
buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
– CONTINUED –
3-109
3
Black plate (242,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the HomeLink
®
indicator light
begins to flash (after approximately 20
seconds). Then release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/
garage door opener’s hand-held transmit-
ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76
mm) away from the HomeLink
®
button you
wish to program.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
button.
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-
held transmitter button every 2 seconds
until step 6 is complete.
6. When the indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly after several seconds,
release both buttons.
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/
garage door opener to the outlet.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door
opener by pressing the programmed
HomeLink
®
button.
! Operating the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System
Once programmed, the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System can be used to
remote-control the devices to which its
buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate but-
ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-
ing that the signal is being transmitted.
! Programming other devices
To program other devices such as door
locks, home lighting and security systems,
contact HomeLink
®
at www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
! Reprogramming a single
HomeLink
®
button
1. Press and hold the HomeLink
®
button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
the button until step 4 has been com-
pleted.
2. When the HomeLink
®
indicator light
begins to flash slowly (after approximately
20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-
mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
(25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink
®
button you wish to program.
3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button. The HomeLink
®
indicator
light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly, release both buttons.
The programming for the previous device
is now erased and the new device can be
operated by pressing th e HomeLi nk
®
button.
! Erasing HomeLink
®
button mem-
ory
NOTE
. Performing this procedure erases
the memory of all the preprogrammed
buttons simultaneously. The memory
of individual buttons cannot be erased.
. It is recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the memory of all
programmed HomeLink
®
button s be
erased for security purposes.
3-110
Black plate (243,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons
(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator
light begins to flash (after approximately
20 seconds).
2. Release both buttons.
! In case a problem occurs
If you cannot activate a device using the
corresponding HomeLink
®
button after
programming, contact HomeLink
®
at
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515 for assistance.
& Outside mirrors
! Convex mirror (passenger side)
WARNING
Objects look smaller in a convex
mirror and farther away than when
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use
the convex mirror to judge t he
distance of vehicles behind you
when changing lanes. Use the inside
mirror (or glance backwards) to
determine the actual size and dis-
tance of objects that you view in
convex mirror.
! Remote control mirror switch
: Select side to adjust
: Direction control
The remote control mirrors operate only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
1. Turn the control switch to the side that
you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror,
“R” is for the right mirror.
2. Move the control switch in the direction
you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the control switch to the neutral
position to prevent unintentional opera-
tion.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-
ally.
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-111
3
Black plate (244,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer
Defogger and deicer
1) Rear window defogger
2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
The defogger and deicer system is acti-
vated only when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position.
To activate the defogger and deicer
system, press the control switch that is
located on the climate control panel. The
rear window defogger, outside mirror
defogger and windshield wiper deicer are
acti vated simultaneously. The indicator
light on the control switch illuminates while
the defogger and deicer system is acti-
vated.
To turn them off, press the control switch
again. They also turn off when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
The defogger and deicer system will
automatically shut off after approximately
15 minutes. If the rear window and the
outside mirrors have been cleared and the
windshield wiper blades have been deiced
completely before that time, press the
control switch to turn them off. If defrost-
ing, defogging or deicing is not complete,
you have to press the control switch to
turn them on again.
It is possible for the defogger and deicer
system to be set to continuous operation
mode by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for detail s. Also, for
models with a multi function display, the
setting can be changed using the display.
For details, refer to “Multi function display”
F3-48.
If the battery voltage drops below the
permissible level, continuous operation of
the defogger and deicer system is can-
celed and the system stops operating.
CAUTION
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
defogger and deicer system con-
tinuously for any longer than
necessary.
. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface
of the rear window. They may
3-112
Black plate (245,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
damage the conductors printed
on the window.
NOTE
. Turn on the defogger and deicer
system if the wipers are frozen to the
windshield.
. If the windshield is covered with
snow, remove the snow so that the
windshield wiper deicer works effec-
tively.
. While the defogger and deicer sys-
tem is in the continuous operation
mode, if the vehicle speed remains at
9mph(15km/h)orlowerfor15
minutes, the windshield wiper deicer
automatically stops operating, though
the rear window defogger and outside
mirror defogger maintain continuous
operation in this condition.
. While the defogger and deicer sys-
tem is in the continuous operation
mode, if the battery voltage drops
below the permissible level, continu-
ous operation of the defogger and
deicer system is canceled and the
system stops operating.
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
tilt/telescopic position while driv-
ing. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in
personal injury.
. If the lever cannot be raised to
the fixed position, adjust the
steering wheel again. It is dan-
gerous to drive without locking
the steering wheel. T his may
cause loss of vehicle control
and result in personal injury.
1) Tilt adjustment
2) Telescopic adjustment
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to
“Front seats” F1-2.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down,
and forward and backward.
Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
3-113
3
Black plate (246,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Instruments and controls/Horn
Horn
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
3-114
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Ventilator control................................................. 4-2
Center and side ventilators .................................. 4-2
Climate control panel.......................................... 4-3
Type A ................................................................ 4-3
Type B ................................................................ 4-4
Automatic climate control operation ................. 4-5
Sensors .............................................................. 4-5
Manual climate control operation ...................... 4-6
Airflow mode selection........................................ 4-6
Temperature control ............................................ 4-7
Fan speed control ............................................... 4-8
Air conditioner control ........................................ 4-8
Air inlet selection ................................................ 4-8
Defrosting ............................................................ 4-9
Type A ................................................................ 4-9
Type B ................................................................ 4-9
Operating tips for heater and air
conditioner ........................................................ 4-9
Cleaning ventilation grille..................................... 4-9
Efficient cooling after parking in direct
sunlight ........................................................... 4-10
Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit.............................................................. 4-10
Checking air conditioning system before summer
season ............................................................ 4-10
Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
low temperature weather conditions ................. 4-10
Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-10
Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-10
Air filtration system ........................................... 4-11
Replacing an air filter......................................... 4-11
Climate control
4
Black plate (250,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Climate control/Ventilator control
Ventilator control
& Center and side ventilators
Center ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
Side ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.
To open or close the ventilator, turn the
thumb-wheel up or down.
4-2
Black plate (251,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Climate control panel
& Type A
1) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” F 4-6.)
2) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode
selection” F4-6.)
3) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-112.)
4) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
speed control” F4-8.)
5) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-8.)
6) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-8.)
7) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-
matic climate control operation” F4-5
and/or “Temperature control” F4-7.)
8) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
mate control operation” F4-5.)
9) OFF button (Refer to “Automatic climate
control operation” F4-5.)
Climate control/Climate control panel
– CONTINUED –
4-3
4
Black plate (252,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Climate control/Climate control panel
& Type B
1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-
matic climate control operation” F4-5
and/or “Temperature control” F4-7.)
2) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode
selection” F4-6.)
3) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-112.)
4) DUAL mode button (Refer to ““DUAL”
mode (type B)” F4-7.)
5) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
speed control” F4-8.)
6) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-8.)
7) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-8.)
8) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” F 4-6.)
9) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-
matic climate control operation” F4-5
and/or “Temperature control” F4-7.)
10) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
mate control operation” F4-5.)
11) OFF button (Refer to “Automatic climate
control operation” F4-5.)
4-4
Black plate (253,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Automatic climate control
operation
When this mode is selected, the fan
speed, airflow distribution, air-inlet control,
and air conditioner compressor operation
are automatically controlled. To activate
this mode, perform the following.
NOTE
. Operate the automatic climate con-
trol system when the engine is running.
. Even when cooling is not necessary,
setting the te mperature much lower
than the current outlet air temperature
turns on the air conditioner compres-
sor automatically and the “A/C” indi-
cator on the control panel illuminates.
1. Depress the “AUTO ” butt on. T he
indicator “FULL AUTO” on the display
illuminates.
2. Set the preferred temperature using
the temperature control dial.
NOTE
. The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
. If you operate any of the buttons on
the control panel other than the “OFF”
button, rear window defogger button
and temperature control dial(s) during
FULL AUTO mode operation, the
“FULL” indicator on the control panel
will turn off and the “AUTO” indicator
will remain illuminated. You can then
manually control the system as desired
using the button y ou operated . To
change the system back to the FULL
AUTO mode, press the “AUTO” button.
. When the climate control system
turns off, the air inlet is fixed to the
outside air mode.
To turn off the climate control system,
press the “OFF” button.
& Sensors
1) Interior air temperature sensor
2) Solar sensor
The automatic climate control system
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are not treated
Climate control/Automatic climate control operation
– CONTINUED –
4-5
4
Black plate (254,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Climate control/Manual climate control operation
properly and become damaged, the sys-
tem may not be able to control the interior
temperature correctly. To avoid damaging
the sensors, observe the following pre-
cautions.
– Do not subject the sensors to impact.
– Keep water away from the sensors.
– Do not cover the sensors.
The sensors are located as follows.
– Solar sensor: beside the windshield
defroster grille
– Interior air temperature sensor: next to
the steering column
– Outside temperature sensor: near the
front bumper opening
Manual climate control op-
eration
& Airflow mode selection
To select the airflow mode:
Type A: Turn the airflow mode selection
dial.
Type B: Press the airflow mode selection
button.
To select the defrost mode:
Press the defroster button.
Airflow modes are as follows.
(Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets
(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and
foot outlets
(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of
the instrument panel and some through
windshield defroster outlets (A small
amount of air flows to the windshield and
4-6
Black plate (255,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
both side windows to prevent fogging.)
(Heat-def): Windshield defroster outlets,
foot outlets and both side outlets of the
instrument panel (Refer to “Defrosting”
F4-9.)
(Defrost ): Windshield defroster outlets
and both side outlets of the instrument
panel (Refer to “Defrosting” F4-9.)
NOTE
When the “ ” or “ ” mode is se-
lected, the air conditioner compressor
operates automatica lly regardless of
the position of the ai r conditi oner
button to defrost the windshield more
quickly. However the indicator on the
air conditioner button will not illumi-
nate. At the same time, the air inlet
selection is automatically set to the
outside air mode. After defrosting the
windshield by pressing the defroster
button “
”, pressing the button again
returns the system to the setting that
had been selected before the defroster
was activated.
& Temperature control
Turn the temperature control dial to set the
preferred interior temperature. With the
dial set to your preferred temperature, the
system automatically adjusts the tempera-
ture of air supplied from the outlets so that
the preferred temperature is achieved and
maintained.
If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise,
the system provides maximum cooling
performance. If the dial is turned fully
clockwise, the system provides maximum
heating performance.
NOTE
The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
! “DUAL” mode (type B)
a) Front passenger’s side temperature
b) Driver’s side temperature
You can change the setting of the driver’s
side and front passenger’s side tempera-
ture independently by selecting the
“DUAL” mode.
You can select t he “DUAL” mode by
performing either of the following proce-
dures.
. Press the “DUAL” button
Climate control/Manual climate control operation
– CONTINUED –
4-7
4
Black plate (256,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Climate control/Manual climate control operation
. Turn the passenger’s side temperature
control dial
The “DUAL” mode can be canceled by
pressing the “DUAL” button.
When the “DUAL” mode is selected:
Turn the driver’ssidedialtosetthe
driver’s side temperature. Turn the front
passenger’ssidedialtosetthefront
passenger’s side temperature.
When the “DUAL” mode is canceled:
Set the desired temperature by turning the
driver’s side dial.
When the “DUAL” mode is canceled, only
the driver’s side temperature is displayed.
& Fan speed control
The fan operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position. Select the
preferred fan speed by turning the fan
speed control dial.
& Air conditioner control
The air conditioner operates only when
the engine is running.
Press the air conditioner button while the
fan is in operation to turn on the air
conditioner. When the air conditioner is
on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates.
To turn off the air conditioner, press the
button again.
NOTE
For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
ing in cold weather, turn on the air
conditioner. However, if the ambient
temperature decreases t o approxi-
mately 328F(08C), the air conditioner
compressor will stop operating.
& Air inlet selection
Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet
selection button.
ON position (recirculation): Interior air is
recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the
air inlet selection button to the ON position
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
when driving on a dusty road.
OFF position (outside air): Outside air is
drawn into the passenger compartment.
Press the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position when the interior has cooled
to a comfortable temperature and the road
is no longer dusty.
WARNING
Continued operation in the ON posi-
tion may fog up the windows. Switch
to the OFF position as soon as the
outside conditions are no longer
dusty.
NOTE
When the battery is disconnected or
the battery voltage drops, the air inlet
selection operation indicator light may
blink. This does not indicate a malfunc-
tion. H owever, if the indicator light
blinks every time you start the engine,
a malfunction may occur in the elec-
trical circuit. Have the vehicle in-
spected at the nearest SUBARU dealer.
4-8
Black plate (257,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Defrosting
& Type A
Select the “ ” mode by pressing the
defroster button, or select the “
” mode
by turning the airflow mode selection dial
to defrost or to dehumidify the windshield
and front door windows.
& Type B
Select the “ ” mode by pressing the
defroster button, or select the “
” mode
by pressing the airflow mode selection
button to defrost or to dehumidify the
windshield and front door windows.
NOTE
When the “ ” or “ ” mode is se-
lected, the air conditioner compressor
operates automatica lly regardless of
the position of the ai r conditi oner
button to defrost the windshield more
quickly. However the indicator on the
air conditioner button will not illumi-
nate. At the same time, the air inlet
selection is automatically set to the
outside air mode. After defrosting the
windshield by pressing the defroster
button “
”, pressing the button again
returns the system to the setting that
had been selected before the defroster
was activated.
Operating tips for heater and
air conditioner
& Cleaning ventilation grille
1) Front ventilation inlet grille
Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
on the condenser.
Climate control/Defrosting
– CONTINUED –
4-9
4
Black plate (258,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Climate control/Operating tips for heater and air conditioner
& Efficient cooling after parking
in direct sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes to
allow outside air to circulate into the
heated interior. This results in quicker
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
windows closed during the operation of
the air conditioner for maximum cooling
efficiency.
& Lubrication oil circulation in
the refrigerant circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving
speeds) a few minutes each month during
the off-season to circulate its oil.
& Checking air conditioning
system before summer sea-
son
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-
ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
operation each spring. Have the air con-
ditioning system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Cooling and dehumidifying in
high humidity and low tem-
perature weather conditions
Under certain weather conditions (high
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
any probl em with the air conditioni ng
system.
& Air conditioner compressor
shut-off when engine is
heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
the air conditioner compressor is designed
to temporarily shut off during air condi-
tioner operation whenever the accelerator
is fully depressed such as during rapid
acceleration or when driving up a steep
incline.
& Refrigerant for your climate
control system
1) Air conditioner label
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
refrigerant HFC134a (as shown on the air
conditioner label). Therefore, the method
of adding, changing or checking the
refrigerant is different from the method
for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU
dealer for service. Repairs needed as a
result of using the wrong refrigerant are
not covered under warranty.
4-10
Black plate (259,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Air filtration system
Replace the filter element according to the
replacement schedule as follows. This
schedule should be followed to maintain
the filter’s dust collection ability. Under
extremely dusty conditions, the filter
should be replaced more frequently. It is
recommended that you have your filter
checked or replaced by your SUBARU
dealer. For replacement, use only a
genuine SUBARU air filter kit. For the
replacement schedule, refer to the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
following occurs, even if it is not yet
time to change the filter:
. Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air condi-
tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
mance if not properly maintained.
& Replacing an air filter
1. Remove the glove box.
NOTE
We recommend that you take mea-
sures to protect the center console
with masking tape first, so that you
avoid scratching the center console
with the glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the
glove box.
1) Stopper
(3) Push both sides of the glove box
inside to unlock the stoppers and then
pull down the glove box as far as it will
go.
(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally
Climate control/Air filtration system
– CONTINUED –
4-11
4
Black plate (260,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Climate control/Air filtration system
and remove the hinge portion. When
doing this, be careful not to damage
the hinge.
2. Remove the air filter according to the
following procedure in order to prevent
dust on the air cleaner from falling to the
inside of its housing.
(1) Push in the four stoppers to
unlock, and then slowly pull out the
air filter 4 in (10 cm) from the housing.
(2) Completely pull out the air filter by
gently tilting the front side of the air
filter downward.
3. Replace the air filter element with a
new one.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect
the damper shaft.
5. Close the glove box.
6. Attach the service label to the driver’s
side door pillar.
4-12
Black plate (11,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Antenna system .................................................. 5-2
Roof antenna ...................................................... 5-2
FM reception....................................................... 5-2
Installation of accessories.................................. 5-3
Audio set ............................................................. 5-3
Audio set ............................................................ 5-4
Basic information before use ............................. 5-5
Initial screen ....................................................... 5-5
Loading and unloading a disc.............................. 5-5
Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/
portable device ................................................. 5-6
Touch screen gestures ........................................ 5-7
Touch screen operation ....................................... 5-7
Entering letters and numbers/list screen
operation .......................................................... 5-8
Screen adjustment .............................................. 5-9
Other settings..................................................... 5-10
Basic operation .................................................. 5-12
Some basics ...................................................... 5-12
Audio/visual remote controls ............................ 5-18
Steering switches............................................... 5-18
Tips for operating the audio/visual system...... 5-21
Operating information......................................... 5-21
Useful information.............................................. 5-28
SiriusXM Data Service*....................................... 5-28
STARLINK .......................................................... 5-30
Radio operation.................................................. 5-33
AM/FM radio....................................................... 5-33
SiriusXM Satellite Radio ..................................... 5-45
Media operation ................................................. 5-50
CD .................................................................... 5-50
USB memory ..................................................... 5-53
iPod .................................................................. 5-56
Bluetooth audio ................................................. 5-60
aha
TM
by HARMAN ............................................ 5-64
AUX .................................................................. 5-73
Pandora
®
........................................................... 5-76
Bluetooth
®
settings ........................................... 5-81
Registering/connecting Bluetooth
®
device .......... 5-81
Setting Bluetooth details.................................... 5-84
Phone operation (Hands-free system for
cellular phones) .............................................. 5-87
Quick reference ................................................. 5-87
Some basics...................................................... 5-88
Calling on the Bluetooth phone .......................... 5-91
Receiving on the Bluetooth phone...................... 5-98
Talking on the Bluetooth phone.......................... 5-99
Setup ................................................................ 5-101
Phone settings ................................................ 5-101
What to do if..................................................... 5-103
Troubleshooting............................................... 5-103
Voice command system operation ................. 5-107
Voice command system ................................... 5-107
Command list................................................... 5-110
Appendix .......................................................... 5-114
Certification..................................................... 5-114
Certification for the Hands-free system............. 5-115
Certification for Mexico models........................ 5-115
Audio
5
Black plate (264,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Antenna system
Antenna system
& Roof antenna
The shark-fin type roof antenna is installed
in the center at the rear of the roof.
& FM reception
Although FM is normally static free,
reception can be affected by the surround-
ing area, atmospheric conditions, station
strength and transmitter distance. Build-
ings or other obstructions may cause
momentary static, flutter or station inter-
ference. If reception continues to be
unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.
5-2
Black plate (265,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing a citizen band radio or
other transmitting device in your vehicle.
Such devices may cause the electronic
control system to malfunction if they are
incorrectly installed or if they are not
suited for the vehicle.
Audio set
Your SUBARU may be equipped with one
of the following audio sets. Refer to the
pages indicated in this section for operat-
ing details.
NOTE
If a cell phone is placed near the audio
set, it may cause the audio set to emit
noise when the phone receives calls.
This noise does not indicate an audio
set malfunction. Note that a cell phone
should be placed as far as possible
from the audio set.
Audio/Installation of accessories
– CONTINUED –
5-3
5
Black plate (266,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Audio set
& Audio set
The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
NOTE
HD Radio Technology should be in-
cluded as feature.
5-4
Black plate (267,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Basic information before use
& Initial screen
! Initial screen
1. When the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position, the initial screen
will be displayed and the system will begin
operating.
. When using the STARLINK function,
the display screen may be different
from the screen above.
. After a few seconds, the “Caution
(Caution)” screen will be displayed.
. After about 5 seconds, the “Caution
(Caution)” screen automatically
switches to the next screen.
WARNING
When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running, always apply the
parking brake for safety.
& Loading and unloading a disc
! Loading a disc
CAUTION
Never try to disassemble the audio
kit or lubricate any part of the CD
player. Do not insert anything other
than a disc into the slot.
1. Insert a disc into the disc slot.
. After insertion, the disc is automati-
cally loaded.
Audio/Basic information before use
– CONTINUED –
5-5
5
Black plate (268,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Basic information before use
NOTE
. For compatible discs, refer to “CD
player and disc” F5-22.
. When inserting a disc, gently insert
it with the label facing up.
! Unloading a disc
1. Press
and remove the disc.
& Connecting and disconnect-
ing a USB memory/portable
device
! Connecting a device
Connect a device to the USB port.
Turn on the power of the device when it is
not turned on.
NOTE
. This device has a USB port for USB
memory/portable device.
. For compatible USB memory de-
vices, refer to “USB memory device”
F5-24.
. For compatible iPod models, refer to
“iPod” F5-24.
. Even if a USB hub is used to
connect more than two USB devices,
only the last connected device will be
recognized.
5-6
Black plate (269,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Touch screen gestures
Operations are performed by touching the touch screen directly with your finger.
Operation method Outline Main use
Touch
Quickly touch and release
once.
Changing and selecting various
settings
Drag*
Touch the screen with your
finger, and move the screen
to the desired position.
Scrolling the lists
Flick*
Quickly move the screen by
flicking with your finger.
Scrolling the main screen page
*: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.
NOTE
There may be a delayed response to
flick operation that are performed at
high altitudes.
& Touch screen operation
This system is operated mainly by the
buttons on the screen. (These are referred
to as screen buttons in this manual.)
. When a screen button is touched, a
beep sounds. (You can set the beep
sound.) Refer to “Other settings” F5-10.
CAUTION
. To prevent damaging the screen,
touch the screen buttons with
your finger lightly.
. Do not use objects other than
your finger to touch the screen.
. W ipe off finge rprints using a
glass cleaning cloth. Do not use
chemical cleaners to clean the
screen, as they may damage the
touch screen.
NOTE
. If the system does not respond to
touching a screen button, move your
finger away from the screen and touch
Audio/Basic information before use
– CONTINUED –
5-7
5
Black plate (270,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Basic information before use
it again.
. Grayed-out screen buttons cannot
be operated.
. The displayed image may become
darkerandmovingimagesmaybe
slightly distorted when the screen is
cold.
. In extremely cold conditions, the
map may not be displayed and the data
input by a user may be deleted. Also,
the screen buttons may be harder than
usual to press.
. When you look at the screen
through polarized material such as
polarized sunglasses, the screen may
be dark and hard to see. If so, look at
the screen from different angles, adjust
the screen settings on the “Display
Settings (Display Settings)” screen or
take off your sunglasses.
& Entering letters and num-
bers/list screen operation
! Entering letters and numbers
When entering the Bluetooth device name
or PIN-code, or the phone number, letters
and numbers can be entered via the
screen.
In-Car-Device setting
No. Function
&
1
Enter the desired characters (alpha-
bet key mode).
&
2
Display the number keys (change to
number key mode).
&
3
Enter a space.
&
4
Set the characters/numbers entered
into the window.
&
5
Delete a character/number entered
into the window.
Dialpad
No. Function
&
1
Enter the desired numbers.
&
2
Delete a number entered into the
window.
5-8
Black plate (271,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! List screen
Two types of list are available on this
device.
. Multimedia playlists
. Contacts list
Multimedia playlists (Example: iPod play-
list)
No. Function
&
1
Graphic tab: Select a category that
wants to play back.
&
2
Return to the playback display of
each mode.
&
3
Select to skip to the next or previous
page.
Contacts list (Example: phone book)
No. Function
&
1
Alphabet button: Jump to list entries
that begin with the same letter.
&
2
Return to the PHONE (Menu)
screen.
&
3
Select to skip to the next or previous
page.
& Screen adjustment
The contrast and brightness of the screen
display and the image of the camera
display can be adjusted.
1. Select
.
2. Select
SETTINGS
(SETTINGS).
3. Select the items to be set.
In setting display, the Day/Night Mode and
the Brightness can be changed.
SETTINGS display
Audio/Basic information before use
– CONTINUED –
5-9
5
Black plate (272,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Other settings
No. Function
&
1
Select “Day/Night Mode”.
“Auto”, “Day”,or“Night” can be se-
lected on the pop-up screen.
When “Auto” is selected, the screen
changes to day or night mode de-
pending on the position of the head-
light switch.
&
2
Select “Brightness”.
Press “+” or “-” to adjust the bright-
ness.
NOTE
. When the screen is viewed through
polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pat-
tern may appear on the screen due to
optical characteristics of the screen. If
this is disruptive, please operate the
screen without polarized sunglasses.
. If the screen is set to “Day” mode
with the headlight switch turned on,
this condition is memorized even with
the engine turned off.
In Camera display, the brightness, tint,
color, and black level of the screen can be
adjusted.
1. Set the selector lever in the R range.
2. Touch the items to be set after the rear
camera monitor is displayed.
NOTE
The Camera display can be accessed
when the rear camera monitor is dis-
played.
Camera display
Other settings
1. Select .
2. Select
SETTINGS
(SETTINGS).
3. Select the items to be set.
5-10
Black plate (273,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Gear wheel symbol tab
Item Function
System
Language
Select to change the language.
Button
Beeps
Select to set the sound beeps
on/off.
System
Software
Select to update software ver-
sions. This menu is not used in
usual operation.
Reset to
Factory
Setting
Select to reset the device to
factory settings. This menu is not
used in usual operation.
When reset to factory setting,
turn ignition off and on again.
Bluetooth symbol tab
Item Function
BT De-
vices Con-
nection
Select to pair/connect the Blue-
tooth devices.
In-Car-De-
vice setting
Select to enter the Bluetooth
device name or PIN-code.
Note symbol tab
Item Function
Balance/
Fader
Select to adjust speaker volume
balance (right/left and front/rear).
Speed Vo-
lume Con-
trol
Select to adjust speaker volume
coupled to vehicle speed.
Graphic
Equalizer
Select to adjust sound quality in
each frequency band.
Sound Re-
storer
Select to add high-pitched tone
to the compressed audio file.
Volume
Smoother
Select to adjust volume differ-
ence between audio sources.
Virtual
Bass
Select to add harmonic tone so
that low-pitched tone is
strengthened.
Audio/Other settings
– CONTINUED –
5-11
5
Black plate (274,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Basic operation
Item Function
Vocal Im-
age Con-
trol
Select to pick-up vocal sound
signal from the sound data, and
adjust it to right/left or front/rear.
Monitor symbol tab
Item Function
Day/Night
Mode
Select “Day/Night Mode”.
“Auto”, “Day”,or“Night” can be
selected on the pop-up screen.
When “Auto” is selected, the
screen changes to day or night
mode depending on the position
of the headlight switch.
Brightness
Select “Brightness”.
Spanner symbol tab
Item Function
Browser
cache
Select to initialize cache files
that the browser stores.
Basic operation
& Some basics
This section describes some of the basic
features of the audio/visual system. Some
information may not pertain to your sys-
tem.
Your audio/visual system works when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
CAUTION
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the audio/
visual system on longer than neces-
sary when the engine is not running.
5-12
Black plate (275,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Turning the system on and off
“POWER/VOLUME” knob: Press to turn
the audio/visual system on and off. When
the system turns on, the last mode is
displayed. Press and hold the knob
approx. 1.5 seconds or more, turn the
display to off.
Turn this knob to adjust the volume.
“AUDIO/TUNE” knob: Press to display
screen buttons for the audio/visual sys-
tem.
! Selecting an audio source
1. Press the “AUDIO/TUNE” knob.
. The audio control screen can also
be displayed by pressing HOME fol-
lowed by “AUDIO”.
Audio/Basic operation
– CONTINUED –
5-13
5
Black plate (276,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Basic operation
. If the audio control screen appears,
select
Source
(Source) on the audio
screen or press the “AUDIO/TUNE”
knob again.
. Press the “AUDIO/TUNE” knob dur-
ing lists are displayed, the audio play
back screen appears. Press and hold
the “AUDIO/TUNE” knob approx. 1.5
seconds or more, the graphic equal-
izer screen is displayed.
2. Select the desired source.
Source select display (for USA)
Source select display (for CANADA)
! Audio settings
1. Select
.
2. Select
SETTINGS
(SETTINGS).
3. Select the note symbol tab.
4. Select the desired item to be adjusted.
5-14
Black plate (277,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Setting ranges
Item Step Default
Audio volume 0-40 15
Balance L9-R9 0 (Center)
Fader F9-R9 0 (Center)
Vocal Image Control
Left/Right: R9-L9
Front/Rear: R9-F9
Left/Right: R3
Front/Rear: 0 (Center)
Speed Volume Control OFF, Low, High Low
Graphic Equalizer, SET1-3 −6-+6 0 (Flat)
Sound Restorer ON, OFF ON
Volume Smoother OFF, Low, Mid, High Mid
Virtual Bass OFF, Low, Mid, High
Mid
! “Balance/Fader”
A good balance of the left and right stereo
channels and of the front and rear sound
levels is important for good quality audio
program listening.
Keep in mind that when listening to a
stereo recording or broadcast, changing
the right/left balance will increase the
volume of 1 group of sounds while
decreasing the volume of another.
1. Touch the “Set” button of the Balance/
Fader function.
2. Select the “Volume Balance Control”
menu.
Audio/Basic operation
– CONTINUED –
5-15
5
Black plate (278,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Basic operation
3. Adjust the balance by pressing “ ”
or “
” button.
4. Adjust the fader by pressing “
” or
“
” button.
5. Select the “Vocal Image Control”
menu.
6. Adjust the balance by pressing “ ”
or “
” button.
7. Adjust the fader by pressing “
” or
“
” button.
! “Speed Volume Control”
The system adjusts to the optimum
volume and tone quality according to
vehicle speed to compensate for in-
creased vehicle noise.
1. Tou ch the right side button of the
Speed Volume Control function, and se-
lect “OFF”, “Low”,or“High” menu. “High”
comes to have a bigger effect.
2. When select “OFF”, speed volume
control function is cancelled.
! “Graphic Equalizer”
1. Touch the “Set” button of the Graphic
Equalizer function.
2. In this mode, 6 preset equalizer
patterns and 3 customized patterns are
available.
6 preset patterns: “Bass”, “ Tre bl e”,
“Acoustic”, “Impact”, “Smooth”, “Flat”
3 customized patterns: “SET 1” - “SET 3”
3. When customizing the equalizer pat-
tern, press one of SET button and then
press “Adjust” button.
5-16
Black plate (279,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
4. Adjust the level of each frequency
band by pressing “
” or “ ” button.
! “Sound Restorer”
Select “ON” or “OFF” by the right side
button of the Sound Restorer function.
! “Volume Smoother”
1. Tou ch the right side button of the
Volume Smoother function, and select
“OFF”, “Low”, “Mid” or “High” menu. “High”
comes to have a bigger effect.
2. When select “OFF”, volume smoother
function is cancelled.
! “Virtual Bass ”
1. Touch the right side button of the
Virtual Bass function, and select “OFF”,
“Low”, “Mid” or “High” menu. “High” comes
to have a bigger effect.
2. When select “OFF”, virtual bass func-
tion is cancelled.
Audio/Basic operation
– CONTINUED –
5-17
5
Black plate (280,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Audio/visual remote controls
! Voice command system
1. Press this switch to operate the voice
command system.
&
1
Talk switch
. The voice command system and its
list of commands can be operated.
Refer to “Voice command system
operation” F5-107.
Audio/visual remote controls
& Steering switches
Some parts of the audio/visual system can
be adjusted using the switches on the
steering wheel.
No. Switch
&
1
“+/−” switch
&
2
“<>” switch
&
3
Mute/Enter switch
&
4
List switch
&
5
Back switch
&
6
“Source” switch
5-18
Black plate (281,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
“+/-” switch
Mode Operation Function
Except list screen
Press Volume up/down
Press and hold Volume up/down continuously
List screen Press
Move cursor up/down
“<>” switch
Mode Operation Function
AM/FM Radio, SiriusXM
Press Preset channel up/down
Press and hold
Seek up/down continuously
while the switch is being
pressed
aha
Press Content up/down
Press and hold
Reverse the current content
item for 15 seconds/Fast for-
ward the current content item
for 30 seconds
Audio CD, MP3/WMA/AAC
disc, USB, iPod, BT audio
Press Select a track/file
Press and hold Fast forward/rewind
Pandora Press and hold Thumbs up
List screen Press
Move cursor left/right
Audio/Audio/visual remote controls
– CONTINUED –
5-19
5
Black plate (282,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Audio/visual remote controls
Mute/Enter switch
Mode Operation Function
Except list screen Press Audio ON/OFF
List screen Press
Select cursor entry
Back switch
Mode Operation Function
All (except STARLINK) Press Return to the previous screen
All Press and hold
Return to the HOME screen
List switch
Mode Operation Function
All (except STARLINK) Press
Show list screen
“Source” switch
Mode Operation Function
All Press
Change audio modes
NOTE
In the aha, Pandora and STARLINK mode, some operation may be done on the
screen depend on the selected APPS.
5-20
Black plate (283,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Tips for operating the audio/
visual system
& Operating information
CAUTION
. To avoid damage to the audio/
visual system:
– Be careful not to spill bev-
erages over the audio/visual
system.
– Do not put anything other than
an appropriate disc into the
disc slot.
NOTE
The use of a cellular phone inside or
near the vehicle may cause a noise
from the speakers of the audio/visual
system which you are listening to.
However, this does not indicate a
malfunction.
! Radio
Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with the
radio — it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain
can interfere with FM reception. Power
lines or phone wires can interfere with AM
signals. And of course, radio signals have
a limited range. The farther the vehicle is
from a station, the weaker its signal will
be. In addition, reception conditions
change constantly as the vehicle moves.
Here, some common reception problems
that probably do not indicate a problem
with the radio are described.
! FM
Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the
effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40
km). Once outside this range, you may
notice fading and drifting, which increase
with the distance from the radio transmit-
ter. They are often accompanied by
distortion.
Static and fluttering: These occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees or
other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping: If the FM signal being
listened to is interrupted or weakened, and
there is another strong station nearby on
the FM band, the radio may tune in the
second station until the original signal can
be picked up again.
! AM
Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by
the upper atmosphere — especially at
night. These reflected signals can inter-
fere with those received directly from the
radio station, causing the radio station to
sound alternately strong and weak.
Station interference: When a reflected
signal and a signal received directly from
a radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each
other, making it difficult to hear the broad-
cast.
Static: AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high
tension power lines, lightening or electrical
motors. This results in static.
! SiriusXM
. Cargo loaded on th e roof lu ggage
carrier, especially metal objects, may
adversely affect the reception of SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
. Alternation or modifications carried out
without appropriate authorization may in-
validate the user’s right to operate the
equipment.
Audio/Tips for operating the audio/visual system
– CONTINUED –
5-21
5
Black plate (284,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Tips for operating the audio/visual system
! CD player and disc
. This CD player is intended for use with
4.7 in. (12 cm) discs only.
. Extremely high temperatures can keep
the CD player from working. On hot days,
use the air conditioning system to cool the
inside of the vehicle before using the
player.
. Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
make the CD player skip.
. If moisture gets into the CD player, the
discs may not be able to be played.
Remove the discs from the player and
wait until it dries.
WARNING
CD players use an invisible laser
beam which could cause hazardous
radiation exposure if directed out-
side the unit. Be sure to operate the
player correctly.
Audio CDs
. Use only discs marked as shown
above. The following products may not
be playable on your player:
– SACD
– dts CD
– Copy-protected CD
– Video CD
Special shaped discs
Transparent/translucent discs
Low quality discs
5-22
Black plate (285,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Labeled discs
CAUTION
. Do not use special shaped, trans-
parent/translucent, low quality or
labeled discs such as those
shown in the illustrations. The
use of such discs may damage
the player, or it may be impossi-
ble to eject the disc.
. This system is not designed for
use of Dual Discs. Do not use
Dual Discs because they may
cause damage to the player.
. Do not use discs with a protec-
tion ring. The use of such discs
may damage the player, or it may
be impossible to eject the disc.
. Do not use printable discs. The
use of such discs may damage
the player, or it may be impossi-
ble to eject the disc.
. Handle discs carefully, especially when
inserting them. Hold them on the edge and
do not bend them. Avoid getting finger-
prints on them, particularly on the shiny
side.
. Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or
other disc damage could cause the player
to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To
see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the
light.)
. Remove discs from the players when
not in use. Store them in their plastic
cases away from moisture, heat and direct
sunlight.
To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-
free cloth that has been dampened with
water. Wipe in a straight line from the
center to the edge of the disc (not in
circles). Dry it with another soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use a conventional record
cleaner or anti-static device.
! CD-R/RW discs
. CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been
subject to the “fin alizing proce ss” (a
process that allows discs to be played
on a conventional CD player) cannot be
played.
. It may not be possible to play CD-R/
CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD
recorder or a personal computer because
of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on
the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the
Audio/Tips for operating the audio/visual system
– CONTINUED –
5-23
5
Black plate (286,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Tips for operating the audio/visual system
lens of the unit.
. It may not be possible to play discs
recorded on a personal computer depend-
ing on the application settings and the
environment . Record with the co rrect
format. (For details, contact the appropri-
ate application manufacturers of the ap-
plications.)
. CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged
by direct exposure to sunlight, high tem-
peratures or other storage conditions. The
unit may be unable to play some damaged
discs.
. If you insert a CD-RW disc into the
player, playback will begin more slowly
than with a conventional CD or CD-R disc.
. Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot
be playe d using the DDCD (Double
Density CD) system.
! USB memory device
. USB communication formats: USB
1.1/2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)
. File formats: FAT 16/32
. Correspondence class: Mass storage
class
! iPod
The following iPod
®
, iPod nano
®
, iPod
classic
®
, iPod touch
®
and iPhone
®
de-
vices can be used with this system.
Made for
. iPod touch (5th generation)*
. iPod touch (4th generation)
. iPod touch (3rd generation)
. iPod touch (2nd generation)
. iPod touch (1st generation)
. iPod classic
. iPod nano (7th generation)*
. iPod nano (6th generation)*
. iPod nano (5th generation)
. iPod nano (4th generation)
. iPod nano (3rd generation)
. iPod nano (2nd generation)*
. iPod nano (1st generation)*
. iPhone 5S*
. iPhone 5C*
. iPhone 5*
. iPhone 4S
. iPhone 4
. iPhone 3GS
. iPhone 3G
. iPhone
*: iPod video not supported
Depending on differences between mod-
els or software versions etc., some mod-
els might be incompatible with this sys-
tem.
! File information
Compatible compressed files (Audio)
Item USB DISC
Compatible
file format
MP3/WMA/AAC
Folders in the
device
Maximum
512
Maximum
255
Files in the
device
Maximum
8000
Maximum
512
Files per
folder
Maximum
255
—
Corresponding sampling frequency
(Audio)
File type Frequency (kHz)
MP3 files:
MPEG 1 LAYER 3
32/44.1/48
MP3 files:
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3
16/22.05/24
WMA files:
Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2)
32/48/64/80/96/128/
160/192
AAC files:
MPEG4/AAC-LC
48/44.1/32/24/22.05/
16/12/11.025/8
5-24
Black plate (287,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Corresponding bit rates (Audio)
File type Bit rate (kbps)
MP3 files:
MPEG 1 LAYER 3
32 - 320
MP3 files:
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3
8 - 160
WMA files: Ver. 7, 8 CBR 48 - 192
WMA files:
Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2)
CBR 32 - 192
AAC files:
MPEG4/AAC-LC
16 - 320
(Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compatible)
. MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA
(Windows Media Audio) and AAC (Ad-
vanced Audio Coding) are audio compres-
sion standards.
. This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC
files on CD-R, CD-RW discs, USB mem-
ory, and Bluetooth device.
. This system can play disc recordings
compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level
2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file
system.
. When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file,
add an appropriate file extension (.mp3/
.wma/.m4a).
. This system plays back files with .mp3/
.wma/.m4a file extensions as MP3/WMA/
AAC files respectively. To prevent noise
and playback errors, use the appropriate
file extension.
. This system can play only the first
session when using multi-session compa-
tible CDs.
. MP3 files are compatible with the ID3
Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3
formats. This system cannot display disc
title, track title and artist name in other
formats.
. WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/
AAC tag that is used in the same way as
an ID3 tag. WMA/AAC tags carry informa-
tion such as track title and artist name.
. The emphasis function is available only
when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at
32, 44.1 and 48 kHz.
. This system can play back AAC files
encoded by iTunes.
. The sound quality of MP3/WMA files
generally improves with higher bit rates. In
order to achieve a reasonable level of
sound quality, discs recorded with a bit
rate of at least 128 kbps are recom-
mended.
. The MP3/WMA player does not play
back MP3/WMA files from discs recorded
using packet write data transfer (UDF
format). Discs should be recorded using
“pre-mastering” software rather than
“packet write” software.
. M3u playlists are not compatible with
the audio device.
. MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO
formats are not compatible with the audio
device.
. The player is com patible with VBR
(Variable Bit Rate).
. When playing back files recorded as
VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time
will not be correctly displayed if the fast
forward or reverse operations are used.
. It is not possible to check folders that
do not include MP3/WMA/AAC files.
. MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8
levels deep can be played. However, the
start of playback may be delayed when
using discs containing numerous levels of
folders. For this reason, we recommend
creating discs with no more than 2 levels
of folders.
Audio/Tips for operating the audio/visual system
– CONTINUED –
5-25
5
Black plate (288,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Tips for operating the audio/visual system
. The play order of the compact disc with
the structure shown above is as follows:
. The order changes depending on the
personal computer and MP3/WMA/AAC
encoding software you use.
! Terms
! Packet write
. This is a general term that describes
the process of writing data on-demand to
CD-R, etc., in the same way that data is
written to floppy or hard discs.
! ID3 tag
. This is a method of embedding track-
related information in an MP3 file. This
embedded information can include the
track number, track title, the artist’s name,
the album title, the music genre, the year
of production, comments, cover art and
other data. The contents can be freely
edited using software with ID3 tag editing
functions. Although the tags are restricted
to a number of characters, the information
can be viewed when the track is played
back.
! WMA tag
. WMA files can contain a WMA tag that
is used in the same way as an ID3 tag.
WMA tags carry information such as track
title and artist name.
! ISO 9660 format
. This is the international standard for
the formatting of CD-ROM folders and
files. For the ISO 9660 format, there are 2
levels of regulations.
. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format
(8 character file names, with a 3 character
file extension. File names must be com-
posed of one-b yte ca pital l etter s and
numbers. The “_” symbol may also be
included.)
. Level 2: The file name can have up to
31 characters (including the separation
mark “.” and file extension). Each folder
must contain fewer than 8 hierarchies.
! MP3
. MP3 is an audio compression standard
determined by a working group (MPEG) of
the ISO (International Standard Organiza-
tion). MP3 compresses audio data to
about 1/10 the size of that on conventional
discs.
! WMA
. WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an
audio compression format developed by
Microsoft
®
. It compresses files into a size
smaller than that of MP3 files. The
decoding formats for WMA files are Ver.
7, 8 and 9.
. This product is protected by certain
intellectual property rights of Microsoft
Corporation and thir d partie s. Use or
distribution of such technology outside of
this product is prohibited without a license
from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft
subsidiary and third parties.
! AAC
. AAC is short for Advanced Audio
Coding and refers to an audio compres-
sion technology standard used with
5-26
Black plate (289,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
MPEG2 and MPEG4.
! Error messages
Mode Message Explanation
CD
“Disc read error.”
. This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files
are included in the disc.
. This indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged,
or it was inserted upside down. Clean the
disc or insert it correctly. It indicates a disc
which is not playable is inserted.
“Please eject disc.”
There is a trouble inside the system.
Eject the disc.
USB
“Media not connected. Press
AUDIO/TUNE knob to exit.”
This indicates a problem in the USB memory or
its connection. Refer to “Connecting and dis-
connecting a USB memory/portable device”
F5-6.
“No audio file.”
This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are
included in the USB memory.
“Unplayable file”
This indicates that the accessed file cannot play
back.
iPod
“Media not connected”
This indicates that a USB device/iPod is not
connected to the system.
“No audio file”
This indicates that there is no audio file in the
connected iPod.
“Unplayable file”
This indicates that the accessed file cannot play
back.
NOTE
If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your SUBARU dealer.
Audio/Tips for operating the audio/visual system
5-27
5
Black plate (290,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Useful information
Useful information
& SiriusXM Data Service*
Data service information, which is com-
prised of traffic information and weather
information, can be received via the
SiriusXM Radio.
To receive the data service information in
the vehicle, a subscription to the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio service is necessary. Refer
to “SiriusXM Satellite Radio” F5-45.
Content set to use the SiriusXM data
service is reset when personal information
is initialized.
No. Function
&
1
Option key: Perform the SXM
setting. See below.
&
2
Scan key: Search for a channel
which the direction of higher fre-
quency from current frequency. Re-
produce the channel that can re-
ceive by five seconds.
&
3
List key: A list is displayed. There
are three types of lists (“Presets”,
“Categories”,or“All Channels”) are
available.
“Presets”: Preset channels are dis-
played in a list.
“Categories”: The channels of the
selected category are displayed in a
list.
“All Channels”: All selectable chan-
nels are displayed in a list.
&
4
Info key: Display the contents in-
formation of a channel receiving.
No. Function
&
5
Presets tab: Presets list (30 chan-
nels max.) is displayed.
&
6
Categories tab: Categories list is
displayed.
&
7
All Channels tab: All channels list is
displayed.
&
8
Direct Tune tab: Change to the
Direct Tune display. See below.
&
9
Return to the previous display.
&
10
Return to the playback display.
! SXM setting option
1. A option menu screen is displayed
when touch the Option key.
5-28
Black plate (291,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Option menu screen
No. Function
&
1
Channel Lock: Set the lock function
of each channel. Input the password
is necessary for operation.
&
2
Channel Lock Password: Set the
password of the lock function.
2. A password input screen is displayed
when touch the “Set” button of the
Channel Lock function.
Password input screen
3. When the input password is approved,
change to the lock channel selection
screen.
Lock channel selection screen
4. In the channel list, touch the channel
that should be locked.
Audio/Useful information
– CONTINUED –
5-29
5
Black plate (292,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Useful information
! Direct Tune
1. A channel input screen is displayed
when touch the Direct Tune tab.
2. Input any nu mber an d press OK,
receive the channel which input.
& STARLINK
The STARLINK function allows the system
to link with a smartphone using Bluetooth.
! Displaying STARLINK information
1. Press APPS key on the home screen,
or press APPS button, the APPS screen is
displayed.
2. If you press “STARLINK” on the APPS
screen, the STARLINK disclaimer screen
or the error screen is displayed.
No. Function
&
1
Check: Go to APPS screen.
&
2
Cancel: STARLINK disclaimer
screen is disappeared and return to
the previous screen.
5-30
Black plate (293,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
STARLINK disclaimer error screen
The error screen will be displayed due to
one of the following possible reasons.
. Your smartphone and the system
has not been connected via USB (for
iPhone) or Bluetooth (for Android).
. STARLINK APPS has not been
activated.
3. If you press
Check
(Check) on the
STARLINK disclaimer screen, the APPS
main screen will be displayed.
No. Function
&
1
Select to go to the Music APPS
screen.
&
2
Select to go to the News APPS
screen.
&
3
Select to go to the Calendar APPS
screen.
&
4
Select to go to the Weather APPS
screen.
&
5
Select to go to the iHeartRadio
APPS screen.
Error screen that is displayed while using
STARLINK
The error screen will be displayed while
using STARLINK due to one of the
following possible reasons.
. When your smartphone has no service
or the Bluetooth communication is not
possible.
. When your smartphone is turned off.
. When the STARLINK APPS is quit.
. When connection to the STARLINK
server is not possible.
. When a problem occurs other than a
server error.
NOTE
When using the STARLINK function, a
disclaimer screen will be displayed. Be
sure to fully read the contents before
Audio/Useful information
– CONTINUED –
5-31
5
Black plate (294,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Useful information
using the function.
NOTE
Connection method
iPhone: USB
Android: Bluetooth
Supported devices
iPhone: iPhone 4/iPhone 4S/iPhone 5
(iOS Ver. 5.1 or later)
Android: (OS Ver. 4.0 or later)
5-32
Black plate (296,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Radio operation
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen.
&
2
Select to change the FM band.
&
3
HD Radio indicator.
The indicator on the top right of the
screen changes according to the
reception condition of HD Radio.
&
4
Select to display a station list.
&
5
Select to scan radio channels.
This function enables searching for
receivable stations automatically,
and tunes in to a frequency for 5
seconds if a station is found. When
the 5-second period has elapsed, the
system searches for the next recei-
vable station again, and tunes in to
the frequency for 5 seconds.
&
6
Option key. Select to open the
Option screen.
&
7
If you press a key for less than 1.5
seconds, the system tunes to the
stored frequency.
If you press a key for more than 1.5
seconds, the system stores the
frequency to the selected preset
channel. Refer to “Presetting a sta-
tion” F5-37.
&
8
Select to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Basic operation”
F5-12.
&
9
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/
off.
No. Function
&
10
Turn to step up/down frequencies.
Press to select an audio mode.
&
11
Select to seek for a station/channel.
Select and hold for continuous seek.
NOTE
. The radio automatically changes to
stereo reception when a stereo broad-
cast is received.
. The radio automatically blends to an
HD Radio signal in AM or FM where
available.
. Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio
Technology enables local radio stations to
broadcast a cl ean dig ital sig nal. A M
sounds like today’s FM and FM sounds
like a CD.
5-34
Black plate (297,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! HD caution list
The following caution messages appear.
The message “Acquiring” appears in the following situations.
Caution Contents Case
Conditions when caution
disappears
This caution message appears
when the system tries the
digital reception.
When acquiring digital data
while receiving a digital broad-
cast and SPS station.
. When the reception in digital
of the SPS station is con-
firmed.
. When the system deter-
mined that the SPS station
could not be received.
. When the SPS broadcast is
ended (stopped) by the
radio station while receiv-
ing SPS.
Audio/Radio operation
– CONTINUED –
5-35
5
Black plate (298,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Radio operation
The message “HD Channel is unavailable” appears in the following situations.
Caution Contents Case
Conditions when caution
disappears
This caution message appears
when the digital reception is not
possible.
. When the system
determined that the SPS
station could not be re-
ceived while receiving a
digital broadcast and SPS
station.
. When the SPS broadcast
is ended (stopped) by the
radio station while receiv-
ing SPS.
. When the status is changed
to acquiring digital data
because the reception
condition of SPS station
has improved.
. When the received station is
changed.
5-36
Black plate (299,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Presetting a station
The AM band can store up to 12 stations
(AM1 and AM2, 6 stations each).
The FM band can store up to 18 stations
(FM1, FM2 and FM3, 6 stations each).
. AM2andFM3canstoreupto6
stations when performing the auto store
function.
The SAT band can store up to 30 stations.
Refer to “Presetting a channel” F5-48.
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. If you press a key for more than 1.5
seconds, the system stores the frequency
to the selected preset channel.
. To change the preset station to a
different one, select and hold the
preset station.
! Selecting a station from the list
A station list can be displayed.
1. Select
.
2. Select the desired station and then
select
Back
(Back) or
Close
(Close).
! Update the station list
1. Select
Update Station List
(Update
Station List) on the station list screen and
the following screen will be displayed.
.
Cancel
(Cancel): Select to cancel
the manual update.
.
OK
(OK): Select to execute the
manual update.
NOTE
. The audio system sound is muted
during refresh operation.
. In some situations, it may take some
time to update the station list.
! Bookmark the list
1. Select
Bookmark
(Bookmark) on the
station list screen and the following screen
will be displayed.
Audio/Radio operation
– CONTINUED –
5-37
5
Black plate (300,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Radio operation
2. If you select an item from the book-
mark list, the following image will be
displayed.
3. When you call up bookmark informa-
tion, a QR code converted from the
bookmark information will be displayed
on the screen. You can access a URL by
reading the QR code using a smartphone,
etc.
! Delete bookmark from the list
1. Select
Delete Bookmark
(Delete
Bookmark) on the station list screen and
the following screen will be displayed.
2. If you select an item from the book-
mark list, the item will be deleted from the
bookmark list.
3. If you select
Delete All
(Delete All), all
bookmark items in the bookmark list will
be deleted.
. FM stations can provide additional
digital-only audio programming on HD2/
HD3 Channels.
! Radio broadcast data system
This audio system is equipped with Radio
Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS). RBDS
mode allows text messages to be received
from radio stations that utilize RBDS
transmitters.
When RBDS is on, the radio can
. only select stations of a particular
program type,
. display messages from radio stations,
. search for a stronger signal station.
5-38
Black plate (301,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Selecting a desired program type
list
1. Select
Option
(Option).
2. FM radio only: Select a desired pro-
gram type list of station and select a
desired station.
3. The program type list is in the following
order:
. All PTY (All program type)
. Info
. Rock
. Soft
. Top 40
. Country
. Oldies
. Jazz
. Classical
. R & B (Rhythm and Blues)
. Religious
. Misc
. Weather
! Selecting a desired auto store
1. Select
Start
(Start) on the option
screen and the following screen will be
displayed.
2. If you press a key for less than
OK
(OK), this function enables searching for
receivable stations automatically, and pre-
set of 6 stations whose signal strength is
best, sorted by frequencies.
Audio/Radio operation
– CONTINUED –
5-39
5
Black plate (302,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Radio operation
! About HD Radio
TM
technology
HD Radio Technology manufactured un-
der license from iBiquity Digital Corpora-
tion. Foreign Patents. HD Radio
TM
and the
HD, HD Radio, a nd “Arc” logos are
proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corp.
HD Radio
TM
Technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
radio product has a special receiver which
allows i t to receive digital broadcasts
(where available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts it already receives. Digital
broadcasts have better sound quality than
analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts
provide free, crystal clear audio with no
static or distortion. For more information,
and a guide to available radio stations and
programming, refer to www.hdradio.com.
! Available HD Radio
TM
technology
! Multicast
On the FM radio frequency most digital
stations have “multiple” or supplemental
programs on one FM station.
1. Select
Sub CH
(Sub CH) on the
control screen and the following screen
will be displayed.
5-40
Black plate (303,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
2. The indication that shows whether the
current broadcast is digital or analog is
displayed on the top right of the control
screen.
3. Select the desired channel.
. Turning the “AUDIO/TUNE” knob
can also select the desired multicast
channel.
! Preserving a music information
Tag information in the music broadcasting
is preserved in the system and transmits
to an iPod.
1. If you select a tag in the control screen
while receiving HD Radio, the tag setting
screen will be displayed.
2. Connect an iPod. Refer to “Connecting
and disconnecting a USB memory/porta-
ble device” F5-6.
. Turn on the power of the iPod if it is
not turned on.
. Once an iPod is connect ed, the
music tag moves from the radio into
the iPod.
. When the iPod is connected to
iTunes, the “tagged” information of
the songs which were tagged while
listening to the radio can be viewed.
Then a user may decide to purchase
the song or CD/Album which had been
listened to on their radio.
Audio/Radio operation
– CONTINUED –
5-41
5
Black plate (304,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Radio operation
In addition, the following caution messages appear.
Caution Contents Display Message
If there is not enough memory in the digital audio “Tag storage full”
If the same information is stored in the digital
audio
“Already Stored”
If the store process in the digital audio failed “Storing Failed”
If there is not enough memory in the iPod “iPod full Tags cannot be stored”
If the system starts to transmit music information
to an iPod
“Starting to transfer the Tag files.”
If the transmitting process of music information
to an iPod failed
“Transferring Failed”
If the transmitting process of music information
to an iPod is successful
“X Tag(s) Sent” (X = number of transmitted
information) will be displayed.
NOTE
. The tag information can not be
preserved while scanning or caching
the radio station.
. If taggi ng the music information
fails, “Saving the HD Radio tag was
unsuccessful. (Saving the HD Radio
tag was unsuccessful.)” will be dis-
played on the screen. If this occurs, tag
the information again.
. HD Radio
TM
stations can be preset.
. An orange
HD)
(HD)) will be dis-
played on the screen when in digital.
The
HD)
(HD)) will first appear in a gray
color indicating the station is indeed
(an analog and) a digital station. Once
the digital signal is acquired, the logo
will change to a bright orange color.
. The song title and artist name will
appear on the screen when available by
the radio station. The radio station can
send album pictures when available.
. As a user works through the analog
radio stations, (where applicable) the
radio receiver will automatically tune
from an analog signal to a digital signal
within 5 seconds.
5-42
Black plate (305,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
. Program Service Data: Presents song
name, artist, station IDs, and other rele-
vant data streams.
. iTunes Tagging provides you the op-
portunity to discover a wide range of
content and the means to “tag” that
content for later review and purchase from
the iTunes Store. Also refer to the Apple
Automotive specifications for implement-
ing iTunes Tagging.
. Visual information related to content
being played on your HD Radio receiver,
such as Album Art, historical photographs,
still art from live broadcasts, among other
related content.
Audio/Radio operation
– CONTINUED –
5-43
5
Black plate (306,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Radio operation
! Troubleshooting guide
Experience Cause Action
Mismatch of time alignment - a user may hear
a short period of programming replayed or an
echo, stutter or skip.
The radio stations analog and digital volume is
not properly aligned or the station is in ballgame
mode.
None, radio broadcast issue. A user can contact
the radio station.
Sound fades, blending in and out.
Radio is shifting between analog and digital
audio.
Reception issue, may clear-up as the vehicle
continues to be driven. Turning the indicator of the
“HD Radio
TM
” button off can force radio in an
analog audio.
Audio mute condition when an HD2/HD3
multicast channel had been playing.
The radio does not have access to digital
signals at the moment.
This is normal behavior, wait until the digital signal
returns. If out of the coverage area, seek a new
station.
Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/
HD3 multicast channel preset.
The digital multicast content is not available until
HD Radio
TM
broadcast can be decoded and
make the audio available. This takes up to 7
seconds.
This is normal behavior, wait for the audio to
become available.
Text information does not match the present
song audio.
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio
_station_experiences.
No text information shown for the present
selected frequency.
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio
_station_experiences.
5-44
Black plate (308,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Radio operation
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen.
&
2
Display the contents information of a
channel receiving.
&
3
Select to display each list.
&
4
Search for a channel from the
direction of a higher frequency than
the current frequency and play each
channel that can be received for five
seconds.
&
5
Option key. Select to open the
Option screen.
&
6
Return to the control screen.
&
7
Select to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Basic operation”
F5-12.
&
8
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/
off.
&
9
Turn right to step up channels and
turn left to step down channels.
&
10
Select to step up/down channels.
Select and hold to step up/down
channels fast.
No. Function
&
1
Return to the previous screen.
&
2
Return to the control screen.
&
3
Press each tab key to switch the list
screen.
Presets tab: Presets list is displayed.
Categories tab: Categories list is
displayed.
All Channels tab: All channels list is
displayed.
Direct Tune tab: Change to the
Direct Tune display.
! How to subscribe to SiriusXM Sa-
tellite Radio
To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in
the vehicle, a subscription to the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio service is necessary.
A SiriusXM Satellite Radio is a tuner
designed exclusively to receive broad-
casts provided under a separate subscrip-
tion.
! How to subscribe
It is necessary to enter into a separate
service agreement with SiriusXM Satellite
Radio in order to receive satellite broad-
cast programming in the vehicle. Addi-
tional activation and service subscription
fees apply that are not included in the
purchase price of the vehicle and digital
satellite tuner.
. For complete information on subscrip-
tion rates and terms, or to subscribe to
SiriusXM Satellite Radio:
Refer to www.siriusxm.ca or call
1-877-209-0079.
5-46
Black plate (309,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
WARNING
. SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services
— Legal Disclaimers and Warn-
ings
– Fees and Taxes — Subscrip-
tion fee, taxes, one time acti-
vation fee, and other fees may
apply. Subscription fee is con-
sumer only. All fees and pro-
gramming subject to change.
Subscriptions subject to Cus-
tomer Agreement available at
www.siriusxm.ca XM service
only available in Canada.
Explicit Language Notice —
Channels with frequent expli-
cit l anguage are indicated
with an “XL” preceding the
channel name. Channel block-
ing is available for SiriusXM
Satellite Radio receivers by
notifying XM at;
Visit www.siriusxm.ca or call-
ing
1-877-209-0079
CAUTION
. It is prohibited to copy, decom-
pile, disassemble, reverse engi-
neer, hack, manipulate, or other-
wise make available any technol-
ogy or software incorporated in
receivers compatible with the
SiriusXM Satellite Radio System
or that support the XM website,
the Online Service or any of its
content. Furthermore, the
AMBE
®
voice compression soft-
ware included in this product is
protected by intellectual property
rights includ ing patent rights,
copyrights, and trade secrets of
Digital Voice Systems, Inc.
. Note: this applies to SiriusXM
Satellite Radio receivers o nly
and not XM Ready devices.
NOTE
. SiriusXM Satellite Services — De-
scriptions
– Only SiriusXM Satellite Radio
®
brings you more of what you love,
all in one place. Get ove r 175
channels, including commercial-
free music, plus the best sports,
news, talk, comedy and entertain-
ment. Welcome to the world of
satellite radio. More information
about SiriusXM Satellite Radio is
available online at www.siriusxm.
ca.
. SiriusXM Satellite Services — Sub-
scription Instructions
– For SiriusXM Services requiring
a subscription (such as SiriusXM
Satellite Radio, and some Infotain-
ment & data services), the following
applies.
Required SiriusXM Satellite Radio
and some Infotainment & data ser-
vices monthly subscri ptions sold
separately after trial period. Sub-
scription fee is consumer only. All
fees and programming subject to
change. Subscriptions are subject
to the Customer Agreement avail-
able at www.siriusxm.ca. Sirius, XM
and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
All other marks, channel names and
logos are the property of their
respective owners.
For more information, program
schedules, and to subscribe or
extend subscription after compli-
mentary trial period; more informa-
tion is available at:
Visit www.siriusxm.ca or calling
Audio/Radio operation
– CONTINUED –
5-47
5
Black plate (310,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Radio operation
1-877-209-0079
. SiriusXM Satellite Radio is solely
responsible for the quality, availability
and content of the satellite radio ser-
vices provided, which are subject to
the terms and conditions of the
SiriusXM Satellite Radio customer ser-
vice agreement.
. Customers should have their radio
ID ready; the radio ID can be found by
tuning to “Ch 000” on the radio. For
details, see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO
ID” below.
. All fees and programming are the
responsibility of SiriusXM Satellite
Radio and are subject to change.
! Displaying the Radio ID
Each SiriusXM tuner is identified with a
unique radio ID. The radio ID is required
when activating an SiriusXM Satelli te
Services or when reporting a problem.
1. If “Ch 000” is selected using the
“AUDIO/TUNE” knob, the ID code, will
be displayed.
2. If you touch the Option key, the Radio
ID will be displayed on the Option screen.
! Presetting a channel
1. The Presets list is displayed via either
of the following procedures.
. When you press the List key in the
SiriusXM main screen (if the list that
was displayed the last time is Presets).
. When you select the Categories tab
(star icon) in each list screen.
2. The current channel is stored if you
press and hold the Preset list key for 1.5
seconds. You can store up to 30 channels
(A beep sounds when a channel stored).
. The “Playing” icon is displayed for
the currently selected channel.
5-48
Black plate (311,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Selecting a channel from the list
1. The Categories list is displayed via
either of the following procedures.
. When you press the List key in the
SiriusXM main screen (if the list that
was displayed the last time is Cate-
gories).
. When you select the Categories tab
(folder icon) in each list screen.
2. Each channel list is displayed when
you select each category item.
In addition, the following caution messages appear.
Caution Contents Display Message
An update to your SiriusXM subscription has
been received by the SiriusXM tuner. Press any
button to continue.
Subscription Update
Press OK to Continue
This channel is not a valid SiriusXM channel.
The channel number has been entered incor-
rectly, or the channel was removed from the
SiriusXM channel lineup.
Channel XXX Not Available
(“XXX” refers to the selected channel number.)
This channel is not included in your SiriusXM
subscription plan.
Channel XXX not subscribed.
Call SiriusXM to subscribe.
(“XXX” refers to the selected channel number.)
The selected channel has been locked by the
parental controls.
A prompt to enter the unlock code will appear.
Ch Locked
Lock Code?
Ensure the SiriusXM antenna cable is connected
to the SiriusXM tuner correctly.
Check the SiriusXM antenna wire for breaks or
sharp bends.
Replace the antenna if necessary.
Check Antenna
The vehicle must be outside, and the antenna
must have a clear view of the southern sky.
No Signal
NOTE
Contact the SiriusXM Listener Care Center at 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
Audio/Radio operation
5-49
5
Black plate (312,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Media operation
Media operation
& CD
! Overview
The CD operation screen can be reached
by the following methods:
. Insert a disc. Refer to “Loading and
unloading a disc” F5-5.
. Select
DISC
(DISC) on the “Select
Audio Sou rce (Sel ect Audi o Sou rce)”
screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio
source” F5-13.
5-50
Black plate (313,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Control screen
Left: Audio CD, Right: MP3/WMA/AAC disc
Control panel
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen.
&
2
Select to display Trick Play Settings
screen.
&
3
Audio CD
Select to display a track list.
MP3/WMA/AAC disc
Select to display a folder list
&
4
Shows progress.
&
5
The tracks in the disc are played
back for ten seconds each from the
beginning of the track.
&
6
MP3/WMA/AAC disc
Select to choose a folder.
&
7
Select to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Basic operation”
F5-12.
&
8
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/
off.
&
9
Press to eject a disc.
&
10
Disc slot
&
11
Turn to select a track/file.
Press to select an audio mode.
&
12
Select to select a track/file.
Select and hold to fast forward/
rewind.
Audio/Media operation
– CONTINUED –
5-51
5
Black plate (314,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Media operation
Control screen (Trick Play)
Left: Audio CD, Right: MP3/WMA/AAC disc
No. Function
&
1
Select to start 1 Track Repeat.
&
2
Select to start Repeat All.
&
3
Select to start Shuffle All.
&
4
Return to the control screen.
&
5
Select to start Folder Repeat.
&
6
Select to start Shuffle Folder.
NOTE
. If a disc contains CD-DA files and
MP3/WMA/AAC files, only the CD-DA
files can be played back.
. If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the
title of the disc and track will be
displayed. Up to 32 characters can be
displayed.
. If the disc contains no CD-TEXT,
only the track number would be dis-
played on the screen.
. If you press the “Mute” switch on
the steering wheel during playback, the
track pauses. If you press the “Mute”
switch once again, the playback will
resume.
5-52
Black plate (315,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& USB memory
Audio files on the USB memory can be
played back.
! Overview
The USB Audio playback screen can be
reached by the following methods:
. Connect a USB memory. Refer to
“Connect ing and disconnecting a USB
memory/portable device” F5-6.
. Select
USB/iPod
(USB/iPod) on the
“Select Audio Source (Select Audio
Source)” screen. Refer to “Selecting an
audio source” F5-13.
Audio/Media operation
– CONTINUED –
5-53
5
Black plate (316,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Media operation
Control screen
Control panel
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen.
&
2
Select to display Trick Play Settings
screen.
&
3
Select to display Folders List.
&
4
Shows progress.
&
5
The tracks in the disc are played back
ten seconds each from the beginning
of the track.
&
6
Select to choose a folder.
&
7
Select to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Basic operation”
F5-12.
&
8
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/off.
&
9
Turn to select a file/track.
Press to select an audio mode.
&
10
Select to select a file/track.
Select and hold to fast forward/re-
wind.
5-54
Black plate (317,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Control screen (Trick Play)
No. Function
&
1
Select to start 1 Track Repeat.
&
2
Select to start Folder Repeat.
&
3
Select to start Repeat All.
&
4
Return to the control screen.
&
5
Select to start Shuffle All.
&
6
Select to start Shuffle Folder.
WARNING
Do not operate the player’s controls
or connect the USB memory while
driving.
Audio/Media operation
– CONTINUED –
5-55
5
Black plate (318,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Media operation
CAUTION
. Do not leave your portable player
in the car. In particular, high
temperatures inside the vehicle
may damage the portable player.
. Do not push down on or apply
unnecessary pressure to the por-
table player while it is connected
as this may damage the portable
player or its terminal.
. Do not insert foreign objects into
the port as this may damage the
portable player or its terminal.
NOTE
If you press the “Mute” switch on the
steering wheel during pl ayback, the
track pauses. If you press the “Mute”
switch once again, the playback will
resume.
& iPod
! Overview
TheiPodoperationscreencanbe
reached by the following methods:
. Connect an iPod. Refer to “Connecting
and disconnecting a USB memory/porta-
ble device” F5-6.
. Select
USB/iPod
(USB/iPod) on the
“Select Audio Source (Select Audio
Source)” screen. Refer to “Selecting an
audio source” F5-13.
5-56
Black plate (319,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Control screen
Control panel
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen.
&
2
Select to display Trick Play Settings
screen.
&
3
Select to display iPod List.
&
4
Shows progress.
&
5
Select to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Basic operation” F5-
12.
&
6
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/off.
&
7
Turn to select a track/file.
Press to select an audio mode.
&
8
Select to select a track/file.
Select and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Audio/Media operation
– CONTINUED –
5-57
5
Black plate (320,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Media operation
Control screen (Trick Play)
No. Function
&
1
Select to start 1 Track Repeat.
&
2
Select to start Repeat All.
&
3
Return to the control screen.
&
4
Select to start Shuffle Track.
&
5
Select to start Shuffle Album.
&
6
Select to turn off Shuffle.
5-58
Black plate (321,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Control screen (Play List)
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the Playlist.
&
2
Select to display Song List.
&
3
Select to display Artists List.
&
4
Select to display Albums List.
&
5
Select to open Others List.
&
6
Select to open Genres List.
&
7
Select to open Composers List.
&
8
Select to open Audiobooks List.
&
9
Select to open Podcasts List.
Audio/Media operation
– CONTINUED –
5-59
5
Black plate (322,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Media operation
WARNING
Do not operate the player’s controls
or connect the iPod while driving.
CAUTION
. Do not leave your portable player
in the car. In particular, high
temperatures inside the vehicle
may damage the portable player.
. Do not push down on or apply
unnecessary pressure to the por-
table player while it is connected
as this may damage the portable
player or its terminal.
. Do not insert foreign objects into
the port as this may damage the
portable player or its terminal.
NOTE
. When an iPod is connected using a
genuine iPod cable, the iPod starts
charging its battery.
. When an iPod is connected and the
audio source is changed to iPod mode,
the iPod will resume playing from the
same point it was last used.
. Depending on the iPod that is con-
nected to the system, certain functions
may not be available.
. Files/tracks selected by operating a
connected iPod may not be recognized
or displayed properly.
. If you press the “Mute” switch on
the steering wheel during playback, the
track pauses. If you press the “Mute ”
switch once again, the playback will
resume.
& Bluetooth audio
The Bluetooth audio system enables
users to enjoy listening to music that is
played on a portable player on the vehicle
speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth, a
wireless data system capable of playing
portable audio music without cables. If
your device does not support Bluetooth,
the Bluetooth audio system will not func-
tion.
! Overview
Select
BT Audio
(BT Audio) on the “Select
Audio Sourc e (Sel ect Au dio So urce)”
screen. Refer to “Selecting an au dio
source” F5-13.
Depending on the type of portable player
connected, some functions may not be
available and/or the screen may look
differently than shown in this manual.
5-60
Black plate (323,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Control screen
Control panel
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen.
&
2
Select to display Trick Play Settings
screen.
&
3
Select to display as a list (for the
models with AVRCP Ver. 1.4 or high-
er).
&
4
Select to play back or pause a track.
The track pauses when pressed dur-
ing playback and plays back when
pressed during pause.
&
5
Select to open Bluetooth Settings.
&
6
Select to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Basic operation” F5-
12.
&
7
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/off.
&
8
Turn to select a track.
Press to select an audio mode
&
9
Select to select a track.
Select and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Audio/Media operation
– CONTINUED –
5-61
5
Black plate (324,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Media operation
Control screen (Play List)
No. Function
&
1
Select to start 1 Track Repeat.
&
2
Select to start Repeat All.
&
3
Return to the control screen.
&
4
Select to start Shuffle Track.
&
5
Select to start Group Shuffle.
&
6
Select to turn off Shuffle.
5-62
Black plate (325,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
WARNING
. Do not operate the player’s con-
trols or connect to the Bluetooth
audio system while driving.
. Your audio unit is fitted with
Bluetooth antennas. People with
implantable cardiac pacemakers,
cardiac resynchronization ther-
apy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should
maintain a reasonable distance
between themselves and the
Bluetooth antennas. The radio
waves may affect the operation
of such devices.
. Before using Bluetooth devices,
users of any electrical medical
device other than i mplantable
cardiac pacemakers, cardiac re-
synchronizatio n thera py-pace-
makers or implantable cardiover-
ter defibrillators should consult
the manufacturer of the device
for information about its opera-
tion under the influence of radio
waves. Radio waves could have
unexpected effects on the opera-
tion of such medical devices.
CAUTION
Do not leave your portable player in
the vehicle. In particular, high tem-
peratures inside the vehicle may
damage the portable player.
NOTE
. Depending on the Bluetooth device
that is connected to the system, the
music may start playing when selecting
while it is paused. Conversely, the
music may pause when selecting
while it is playing.
. In the following conditions, the sys-
tem may not function:
– The Bluetooth device is turned
off.
– The Bluetooth device is not con-
nected.
– The Bluetooth device has a low
battery.
. Itmaytaketimetoconnectthe
phone when Bluetooth audio is being
played.
. For operating the portable player,
see the instruction manual that comes
with it.
. If the Bluetooth device is discon-
nected due to poor reception from the
Bluetooth network when the ignition
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-
tion, the system will automatically
reconnect to the portable player.
. If the Bluetooth device is discon-
nected on purpose, such as it was
turned off, this does not happen.
Reconnect the portable player manu-
ally.
. Bluetooth device information is re-
gistered when the Bluetooth device is
connected to the Bluetooth audio sys-
tem. When selling or disposing of the
vehicle, remove the Bluetooth audio
information from the system. Refer to
“Other settings” F5-10.
! Connecting a Bluetooth device
To use the Bluetooth audio system, it is
necessary to register a Bluetooth device
with the system.
Registering an additional device
1. Select the Bluetooth Setting Key on
the BT Audio menu screen.
2. Select
Add
(Add) on the BT Devices
Connection screen.
3. Register a Bluetooth device.
4. For more information: Refer to “Regis-
tering a Bluetooth device” F5-84.
Selecting a registered device
1. Select the Bluetooth Setting Key on
the BT Audio menu screen.
Audio/Media operation
– CONTINUED –
5-63
5
Black plate (326,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Media operation
2. Select
Select
(Select) on the BT
Devices Connection screen.
3. For more information: Refer to “Con-
necting a Bluetooth device” F5-85.
& aha
TM
by HARMAN
aha is a cloud-based application that
connects to the system and gives you
access to your favorite web content safely
and easily. There are over 30,000 stations
spanning internet radio, personalized mu-
sic, audiobooks, Facebook, Twitter, res-
taurant and hotel searches, weather and
more. For more information about aha, go
to the aha site (http://www.aharadio.com).
aha
TM
and the aha logo are the trade-
marks of HARMAN International Indus-
tries, Incorporated
When connecting iPhone and iPod touch
or Android devices with the aha applica-
tion installed, you can control, view, and
hear aha content through the system.
In order to connect to this system, use a
USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and
Bluetooth for Android devices.
In this chapter, iPhone and iPod touch or
Android devices will be referred to as a
smartphone.
5-64
Black plate (327,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Overview
Control screen
Control panel
Audio/Media operation
– CONTINUED –
5-65
5
Black plate (328,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Media operation
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen.
&
2
Select to open Station List.
&
3
Select to fast forward the current con-
tent item by 30 seconds.
&
4
Select to display the Contents List of
the selected station.
&
5
Select to make a phone call to the
current content item.
A phone number is distributed depend-
ing on content items.
This feature is available only in these
cases.
&
6
Select to play back or pause a track.
The track pauses when pressed during
playback and plays back when pressed
during pause.
&
7
Select to set “Like”.
&
8
Select to set “Dislike”.
&
9
Select to start the playback from the
beginning of the content in the target
station.
&
10
Select to rewind the current content
item by 15 seconds.
&
11
To display the APPS menu screen,
select the “STARLINK”.
Or, to display the aha screen, select
“aha” or to display the Pandora screen,
select “Pandora”.
No. Function
&
12
Select to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Basic operation” F5-
12.
&
13
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/off.
&
14
Turn to display the next/previous con-
tent item.
Press to select an audio mode
&
15
Select to display the next/previous
content item.
5-66
Black plate (329,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Control screen (Station Display)
No. Function
&
1
Select to display Preset List.
&
2
Return to the control screen.
&
3
Select to display Nearby List.
Audio/Media operation
– CONTINUED –
5-67
5
Black plate (330,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Media operation
WARNING
. Do not connect or operate the
smartphone while driving.
. Be sure to park the vehicle in a
safe location before connecting
or operating the smartphone.
CAUTION
. Do not leave your smartphone in
the car. In particular, high tem-
peratures inside the vehicle may
damage the smartphone.
. Do not push down on or apply
unnecessary pressure to the
smartphone while it is connected
as this may damage the smart-
phone or its terminal.
. Do not insert foreign objects into
the port as this may damage the
smartphone or its terminal.
NOTE
. For safety reasons, certain func-
tions are not available while your
vehicle is in motion.
. In order to maximize signal recep-
tion, performance and precision of the
smartphone, please ensure the smart-
phone is placed as close to the system
as possible, while ensuring it is stowed
and secure while driving.
. Use USB cables of iPhone/iPod
touch accessories.
. When the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position, the battery of
the connected iPhone/iPod touch is
charged.
. iPhone/iPod touch may not be re-
cognized when the ignition switch is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position. In this
case, remove the iPhone/iPod touch
and reconnect it.
. The accuracy of the displayed in-
formation or the signal reception per-
formance depends on the smartphone
or the connected device, and it’s wire-
less connection.
. Since the aha application uses sig-
nals from GPS satellites and wireless
communication lines, it may not work
properly in the following locations.
– In a tunnel
– In underground parking lots
– Outside wireless communication
range, such as some countryside
areas
– Where the wireless communica-
tion network is congested, or where
communications are restricted
. Depending o n the circumstances
and environment, the signal may be
weak or not be received. In such cases,
an error may occur.
. Top 35 entries in the preset station
list on the smartphone are displayed.
When there are more than 35 entries in
the preset station list, change the order
of the entries in the list on the smart-
phone. You can change the priority of
your preset st ations within the aha
application (after disconnected from
this system) to modify the station list
shown on the screen. Please see your
smartphone aha application “Edit Pre-
sets (in Main menu)” to modify this list.
. For operating the smartphone, see
the instruction manual that comes with
it.
. If there are multiple music files
stored on your iPhone or iPod touch,
it may take some time until playback
starts.
. Playback may be intermittent when
youswitchtostreamingBluetooth
audio from aha on your smartphone
device.
. When conne cting the device via
Bluetooth, the communication speed
may become slower than via USB.
5-68
Black plate (331,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Before using aha application
In order to use the aha application on this
system, the application must be installed
on the smartphone.
! Settings required to use aha
application
. Search and download the aha applica-
tion from your smartphone app store.
– iPhone and iPod touch: Apple App
Store via iTunes
– Android device: Google Play Store
. Create an account and login to the aha
application on the smartphone.
NOTE
Please use the latest version of the aha
application.
! About app-based connected con-
tent
Requirements for using the connected
content services of the aha application
on this system.
. Latest version of the system is compa-
tible with connected content application(s)
for the smartphone, available from aha,
downloaded to your smartphone.
. A c urrent account with a wireless
content service provider.
. A smartphone data plan: If the data
plan for your smartphone does not provide
for unlimited data usage, additional
charges from your carrier may apply for
accessing app-based connected content
via 3G, 4G, Wi-Fi, or 4G LTE wireless
networks.
. Connection to the internet via 3G, 4G,
Wi-Fi, or 4G LTE networks.
NOTE
. Changes to product specifications
may result in differences between the
content of the manual and features of
the product.
. Be careful not to exceed the data
usage limits for your smartphone.
Doing so will result in additional data
usage charges from your phone car-
rier.
. Access to app-based connected
content will depend on the availability
of wireless cellular and/or Wi-Fi net-
work coverage for the purpose of
allowing your smartphone to connect
to the internet.
. Service availability may be geogra-
phically limited by region. Consult the
wireless connected content service
provider for additional information.
. Ability of this product to access
connected content is subject to change
without notice and could be affected by
any of the following: compatibility
issues with future firmware versions
of the smartphone; compatibility is-
sues with future versions of the con-
nected content application(s) for the
smartphone; changes to or disconti-
nuation of the connected content ap-
plication(s) or service by its provider.
. Communi cation and p hone c all
charges for smartphones should be
paid by the wireless subscriber.
. If you lose the data in a smartphone
or other device while using it with the
system, no compensation will be given
for the lost data.
. Fuji Heavy Industries makes no
guarantee regarding the content pro-
vided by aha.
. aha may not work due to factors on
smartphones, smartphone applications
or stations. Fuji Heavy Industries is not
responsible for it.
Audio/Media operation
– CONTINUED –
5-69
5
Black plate (332,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Media operation
! About the supported devices
This system supports the following devices.
For iPhone/iPod touch users
Type Generation Firmware version or OS
iPhone
iPhone 3G iOS 4.2.x
iPhone 3GS iOS 6.1.x
iPhone 4 iOS 7.0.x
iPhone 4S iOS 7.0.x
iPhone 5 iOS 7.0.x
iPhone 5C iOS 7.0.x
iPhone 5S iOS 7.0.x
iPod touch
iPod touch iOS 3.1.x
iPod touch 2 iOS 4.2.x
iPod touch 3 iOS 5.1.x
iPod touch 4 iOS 6.1.x
iPod touch 5
iOS 7.0.x
NOTE
Note that the warranty does not apply if an unsupported iPhone/iPod touch is connected.
5-70
Black plate (333,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
For Android device users
Android OS Specification Profile
Android Ver. 2.2 or Ver. 2.3
Bluetooth Specification Ver. 1.1 or higher
(Ver. 2.0 + EDR or higher is recommended)
. aha Connect Binary API over SPP
. Digital audio by A2DP
NOTE
The available functions may vary depending on the type of Android device.
Audio/Media operation
– CONTINUED –
5-71
5
Black plate (334,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Media operation
! Using aha application
Ifyouconnectasmartphonetothis
system after starting a supported aha
application on the smartphone, you can
display and operate the aha application
displayed on the smartphone on the
system screen.
NOTE
. Connect a smartphone to the USB
port before turning the ignition switch
to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
. When it is not played back normally,
press the POWER/VOLUME knob twice
while a USB cable is connected.
1. Run the aha application on your
smartphone.
2. Connect the iPhone/iPod touch to the
USB port or connect the Android device
by utilizing the Bluetooth connection (SPP
and A2DP profile).
. For details about connecting an
iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to “Connect-
ing and disconnecting a USB memory/
portable device” F5-6.
. For details about registering or con-
necting an Android device: Refer to
“Registering/connecting Bluetooth
®
device” F5-81.
Press AUDIO/TUNE knob twice to switch
between iPhone and Android.
3. Select “aha” on the “Select Audio
Source (Select Audio Source)” screen.
Refer to “Basic operation” F5-12.
Select “aha” on the “Apps (APPS)” screen.
Refer to “STARLINK” F5-30.
4. Check that the top screen is displayed.
5. Select the desired station.
6. Check that the station operation
screen is displayed.
. Main functions of the station opera-
tion screen button: Refer to “Station
operation screen buttons” F5-73.
. For details on the services or the
operations, check the aha site
(http://www.aharadio.com) on the in-
ternet.
NOTE
. When iPhone/iPod touch and An-
droid devices ar e connecte d at the
same time, iPhone/iPod touch is prior-
itized.
. The following operations are not
available on this system. Perform these
operations on the smartphone.
– Add/Reorder/Delete stations
– Login to Facebook/Twitter
5-72
Black plate (335,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
. For the aha function, the following
touch screen gestures are not avail-
able.
– Multi-touch operation
– Double-tap
! Station operation screen buttons
Button Function
Select to start playback.
Select to pause playback.
Select to stop playback.
Select to upload “Like” informa-
tion to the application server. To
cancel “Like” information that is
being uploaded to the server,
select this button again.
Select to upload “Dislike” infor-
mation to the application server.
To cancel “Dislike” information
that is being uploaded to the
server, select this button again.
Select to make a phone call to
the current content item.
Select to start the playback from
the beginning of the content in
the target station.
Select to rewind the current
content item by 15 seconds.
Select to fast forward the current
content item by 30 seconds.
NOTE
The button display will vary depending
on each station or content item.
& AUX
! Overview
The AUX operation screen can be
reached by the following methods:
. Connect a portable audio device. Refer
to “Connecting and disconnecting a USB
memory/portable device” F5-6.
. Select
AUX
(AUX) on the “Select
Audio Source (Select Audio Source)”
screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio
source” F5-13.
Audio/Media operation
– CONTINUED –
5-73
5
Black plate (336,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Media operation
Control screen
Control panel
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen.
&
2
Select to open the Options screen.
&
3
Select to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Basic operation”
F5-12.
&
4
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/off.
&
5
Press to select an audio mode.
5-74
Black plate (337,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Control screen (Option Display)
No. Function
&
1
Select to adjust the audio gain level.
&
2
Select High, Mid, or Low for the audio
gain level.
The High setting has greater effect.
&
3
Select to close the list.
Audio/Media operation
– CONTINUED –
5-75
5
Black plate (338,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Media operation
WARNING
Do not operate the player’s controls
or connect the portable audio device
while driving.
CAUTION
. Do not leave portable audio de-
vice in the vehicle. The tempera-
ture inside the vehicle may be-
come high, resulting in damage
to the player.
. Do not push down on or apply
unnecessary pressure to the por-
table audio device while it is
connected as this may damage
the portable audio device or its
terminal.
. Do not insert foreign objects into
the port as this may damage the
portable audio device or its term-
inal.
& Pandora
®
Pandora is an application for a smart-
phone. This can automatically select and
play recommended tracks.
By rating the track currently playing, tracks
that better match your preference will be
recommended.
In order to connect to this system, use a
USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and
Bluetooth for Android devices.
Depending on differences between mod-
els or software version etc., some models
might be incompatible with this system.
This function is not available if the
Pandora application has not been in-
stalled on the smartphone.
NOTE
. Connect a smartphone to the USB
port before turning the ignition switch
to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
. When it is not played back normally,
press the POWER/VOLUME knob twice
while a USB cable is connected.
! Overview
The Pandora operation screen can be
reached by the following methods:
. Connecting a Pandora device. Refer to
“Connecting a Bluetooth device” F5-85 or
“Connect ing and disconnecting a USB
memory/portable device” F5-6.
. Select
Pandora
(Pandora) on the
“Select Audio Source (Select Audio
Source)” screen. Refer to “Selecting an
audio source” F5-13.
. Select
Pandora
(Pandora) on the
“ APPS (APPS)” screen. Refer to
“STARLINK” F5-30.
5-76
Black plate (339,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Control screen
Control panel
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen.
&
2
Select to open Station List.
&
3
Select to skip the current track.
&
4
Select to play back or pause a track.
The Pause icon is displayed in the
“Play/Pause” key during playback and
the Playback icon is displayed in the
“Play/Pause” key during pause.
&
5
Select to set Thumbs Up.
This gives a high rating to the current
song.
All other similar songs will be played
back more frequently.
&
6
Select to set Thumbs Down.
This gives a low rating to the current
song.
All other similar songs will be played
back less frequently.
When you select Thumbs Down, the
current track is skipped.
&
7
During playback of a station, you can
use the “Bookmark Key” to bookmark a
song or artist.
The Bookmark Type Selection screen is
displayed.
&
8
Select to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Basic operation” F5-
12.
&
9
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/off.
Audio/Media operation
– CONTINUED –
5-77
5
Black plate (340,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Media operation
No. Function
&
10
Turn clockwise to skip to the next track.
&
11
Select to skip to the next track/
cover art.
Bookmark Type Selection screen
No. Function
&
1
When selected after the Bookmark key
is pressed, the current track is book-
marked.
&
2
When selected after the Bookmark key
is pressed, the current artist is book-
marked.
&
3
Select to cancel the bookmark opera-
tion.
5-78
Black plate (341,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Control screen (Station list)
Control screen (New station)
No. Function
&
1
Select to sort the list in the chronologi-
cal order of when the Station List was
created.
&
2
Select to create a station.
The station can be created using track
names or artist names.
&
3
Select to delete a station.
&
4
Return to the control screen.
&
5
Select to sort the list based on the
alphabetical order of the station names.
&
6
Select to create a station using a track
name.
&
7
Select to create a station using an artist
name.
&
8
Select to cancel the operation to create
a station.
Audio/Media operation
– CONTINUED –
5-79
5
Black plate (342,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Media operation
Control screen (Delete Station)
No. Function
&
1
Select to delete the selected item from
the list.
&
2
Select to cancel the operation to delete
a station.
WARNING
Do not operate the player’s controls
or connect the smartphone while
driving.
CAUTION
Do not leave your smartphone in the
car. In particular, high temperatures
inside the vehicle may damage the
smartphone.
NOTE
Follow the specific operation proce-
dures for the smartphone application.
5-80
Black plate (343,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Bluetooth
®
settings
& Registering/connecting
Bluetooth
®
device
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
! Registering a Bluetooth phone for
the first time
To use the hands-free system, it is
necessary to register a Bluetooth phone
with the system.
Once the phone has been registered, it is
possible to use the hands-free system.
This operation cannot be performed while
driving.
For details about registering a Bluetooth
device: Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth
device” F5-84.
1. Turn the Bluetooth connection setting
of your cellular phone on.
. This function is not available when
Bluetooth connection setting of your
cellular phone is set to off.
2. Select
and select
SETTINGS
(SETTINGS) to display the SETTINGS
screen.
Settings (When selecting the “BT” tab)
3. To register a device, select “Add” on
“BT Devices Connection”.
“BT Devices Connection” screen (At the
initial startup and when no device is
registered.)
4. When this screen is displayed, search
for the device name displayed on this
screen on the screen of your Bluetooth
device.
Audio/Bluetooth
®
settings
– CONTINUED –
5-81
5
Black plate (344,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Bluetooth
®
settings
When “Add” is selected (Waiting for the
connection request from a device).
. For details about operating the Blue-
tooth device, see the manual that
comes with it.
. To cancel the registration, select
Cancel
(Cancel).
5. Register the Bluetooth device using
your Bluetooth device.
. A PIN-code is not required for SSP
(Secure Simp le Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth devices. Depending on the
type of Bluetooth device being con-
nected, a message confirming regis-
tration may be displayed on the Blue-
tooth device ’s screen. Respond and
operate the Bluetooth device accord-
ing to the confirmation message.
6. Check that the screen is displayed
when registration is complete.
. The system waits for connection
requests coming from the registered
device.
. At this stage, the Bluetooth func-
tions are not yet available.
! Registering a Bluetooth Audio de-
vice for the first time
To use the Bluetooth Audio, it is necessary
to register an audio devi ce with the
system.
Once the player has been registered, it is
possible to use the Bluetooth Audio.
This operation cannot be performed while
driving.
For details about registering a Bluetooth
device: Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth
device” F5-84.
The device registration procedure is the
same for both the hands-free system and
Bluetooth audio.
5-82
Black plate (345,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Profiles
This system supports the following services.
Bluetooth Device Spec. Function Requirements Recommendations
Bluetooth Phone/Bluetooth
Audio Device
Bluetooth Specification
Registering a Bluetooth de-
vice
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 2.1 + EDR
Bluetooth Device Profile Function Requirements Recommendations
Bluetooth Phone
HFP (Hands-Free Profile) Hands-free system Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.5
OPP (Object Push Profile)
Transferring the contacts
Ver. 1.1 Ver. 1.1
PBAP (Phone Book Access
profile)
Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.0
MAP (Message Access
Profile)
Bluetooth phone message — Ver. 1.0
SPP (Serial Port Profile)
Connecting a Bluetooth
phone
— Ver. 1.1
Bluetooth Audio Device
A2DP (Advanced Audio
Distribution Profile)
Bluetooth audio system
Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.2
AVRCP (Audio/Video Re-
mote Control Profile)
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.4
NOTE
. If your cellular phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth phone or using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles
individually will not be possible.
. If the connected Bluetooth device version is older than recommended or incompatible, the Bluetooth device function may
not work properly.
. For USA customers, please visit www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the USA customers, contact your local dealer to
arrange a demonstration in order to confirm whether or not the device can be paired with the vehicle.
Audio/Bluetooth
®
settings
– CONTINUED –
5-83
5
Black plate (346,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Bluetooth
®
settings
& Setting Bluetooth details
1. Select .
2. Select
SETTINGS
(SETTINGS).
3. To register a device, select “Add” on
“BT Devices Connection”.
! BT Devices Connection screen
“BT Devices Connection” scre en (One
device is registered.)
No. Function
&
1
“Add” key: Registers the device.
&
2
“Select” key: Makes the connection to
the registered device.
&
3
This shows the status of the device
connection profile. (The icon illuminates
while connected.)
&
4
“Delete (Trash box)” key: Deletes the
registered device.
&
5
Bluetooth ON/OFF key: Switches to
connect/disconnect the Bluetooth com-
munication.
Function Page
Registering a Bluetooth device 5-84
Deleting a Bluetooth device 5-85
Connecting a Bluetooth device
5-85
! Registering a Bluetooth device
You can register up to five devices,
regardless of whether they are Bluetooth
phones or audio devices.
This operation cannot be performed while
driving.
1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”
screen. Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth
phone for the first time” F5-81.
2. Select
Add
(Add).
The “Add” button is not displayed when
five devices are already registered.
To add another device, you need to delete
one of the registered devices.
Press and hold the Trash box icon for the
device to be deleted, and then select
“OK”.
3. Register the Bluetooth device using
your Bluetooth device.
. A PIN-code is not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pai ring) compatible
Bluetooth devices. Depending on the
type of Bluetooth device being con-
nected, a message confirming regis-
5-84
Black plate (347,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
tration may be displayed on the Blue-
tooth device ’s screen. Respond and
operate the Bluetooth device accord-
ing to the confirmation message.
4. Check that the screen is displayed
when registration is complete.
. The system waits for connection
requests coming from the registered
device.
. At this stage, the Bluetooth func-
tions are not yet available.
! Deleting a Bluetooth device
1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”
screen. Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth
phone for the first time” F5-81.
2. Select the desired device.
Press and hold the Trash box icon for the
device to be deleted, and then select
“OK”.
NOTE
When deleting a Bluetooth phone, the
contact data will be deleted at the same
time.
! Connecting a Bluetooth device
Up to 5 Bluetooth devices (Phones (HFP)
and audio devices (AVP)) can be regis-
tered.
If more than 1 Bluetooth device has been
registered, select which device to connect
to.
1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”
screen. Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth
phone for the first time” F5-81.
2. Select the device to be connected.
. Supported profile icons will be dis-
played.
–
: Phone
–
: Audio device
–
: Smartphone Application
. Supported profile icons for currently
connected devices will illuminate.
. The Audio icon illuminates only
when in the Bluetooth audio mode.
. All icons are dimmed when Blue-
tooth is set to OFF or when the
connection cannot be made with the
device.
NOTE
. It may take time if the device con-
nection is carried out during Bluetooth
audio playback.
. Depending on the type of Bluetooth
device being connecte d, it may be
necessary to perform additional steps
on the device.
. It is not possible to establish a
Bluetooth connection with iOS devices
currently connected with a USB cable.
! Bluetooth ON/OFF
1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”
screen. Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth
phone for the first time” F5-81.
2. Select the “Bluetooth ON/OFF” key.
. Select “ON” or “OFF” to connect/
disconnect the Bluetooth communica-
tion. “ON” establishes a connection,
and “OFF” disconnects the connec-
tion.
. The setting is fixed as “OFF” when
no device is registered.
! “In-Car-Device setting” screen
The Bluetooth settings can be confirmed
and changed.
1. Display the “SETTINGS” screen. Refer
to “Registering a Bluetooth phone for the
first time” F5-81.
2. On the SETTINGS for In-Car-Device
setting select “set” key.
Audio/Bluetooth
®
settings
– CONTINUED –
5-85
5
Black plate (348,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Bluetooth
®
settings
No. Function
&
1
BT device address: Displays the
Bluetooth device address of the in-
vehicle equipment.
&
2
BT device name: Displays the Blue-
tooth device name of the in-vehicle
equipment. The default name is
“SUBARU BT”, which can be changed
by selecting it and entering alphanu-
meric characters.
&
3
PIN code: Displays the PIN code of
the in-vehicle equipment. The default
code is “1234”, which can be changed
by selecting it and entering numbers.
&
4
“ABC” key: Switches the screen to
input alphabet characters. This key
cannot be selected when entering the
PIN code.
&
5
“Set” key: Saves the current BT
device name and PIN code.
No. Function
&
6
“123” key: Switches the screen to
input numbers.
&
7
Numeric input keys.
&
8
Alphabet input keys. The up arrow
key toggles the input between upper
case and lower case characters.
&
9
“Delete” key: Deletes one character
from the currently selected item (BT
device name or the PIN code).
! Editing the Bluetooth Name
1. Select a BT device name.
2. Enter a name and then select “Set”.
! Editing the PIN-Code
1. Select “PIN-Code”.
2. Enter a PIN-code and then select
“Set”.
! Common operations
. Press the “Alphabet” key or “Number”
key to make the changes.
. Press the “Set” key to set the entered
value. The screen changes to the “Set-
tings Bluetooth” screen.
. Press the “Back” key to discard the
entered value. The screen returns to the
“Settings Bluetooth” screen.
5-86
Black plate (349,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! When the cursor is at the “Device
Name Display Area”
. Thedevicenamecanbesetor
changed.
. Press the “PIN” key to enter a pass-
code.
. If the “PIN” key is already selected, the
“Alphabet” key is cross-hatched and dis-
abled.
! When the cursor is at the “Pass-
code Display Area”
. The passcode can be set/changed.
. Press the “Name” key to enter a device
name.
Phone operation (Hands-free
system for cellular phones)
& Quick reference
The phone top screen can be used to
make a phone call. To display the hands-
free operation screen, select
and then
select
PHONE
(PHONE), or press the
switch on the steering wheel.
Several functions are available to operate
on each screen that is displayed by
selecting the 4 tabs.
PHONE (Menu) screen
PHONE (Dialpad) screen
Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)
– CONTINUED –
5-87
5
Black plate (350,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)
No. Function
&
1
“Incoming Calls” key: Opens the
Incoming Calls screen.
&
2
“Outgoing Calls” key: Opens the Out-
going Calls screen.
&
3
“Contacts” key: Opens the Contacts
screen.
&
4
“Dialpad” key: Changes the screen
from the Menu screen to the Dialpad
screen.
&
5
“Option” key: Opens the phone vo-
lume setting screen.
&
6
“OFF Hook” key: Use to make a
phone call. You cannot press this key
until you open the Dialpad screen and
enter a phone number.
&
7
“Bluetooth Setting” key: Opens the BT
Devices Connection screen.
&
8
Enter the phone number that you
want to call.
&
9
“Switch Screen” key: Switches the
screen to the Phone (Menu) screen.
&
10
&
11
If no device is registered, a message
is displayed instead of menu items.
& Some basics
The hands-free system enables calls to be
made and received without having to take
your hands off the steering wheel.
This system supports Bluetooth. Bluetooth
is a wireless data system that enables
cellular phones to be used without being
connected by a cable or placed in a
cradle.
The operating procedure of the phone is
explained here.
WARNING
. While driving, do not use a cel-
lular phone or connect the Blue-
tooth phone.
. Your au dio u nit i s fitted with
Bluetooth antennas. People with
implantable cardiac pacemakers,
cardiac resynchronization ther-
apy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should
maintain a reasonable distance
between themselves and the
Bluetooth antennas. The radio
waves may affect the operation
of such devices.
. Before using Bluetooth devices,
users of any electrical medical
device other than implantable
cardiac pacemakers, cardiac re-
synchronization therapy-pace-
makers or implantable cardiover-
ter defibrillators should consult
the manufacturer of the device
for information about its opera-
5-88
Black plate (351,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
tion under the influence of radio
waves. Radio waves could have
unexpected effects on the opera-
tion of such medical devices.
CAUTION
Do not leave your cellular phone in
the vehicle. The temperature inside
mayrisetoalevelthatcould
damage the phone.
NOTE
. If your cell ular phone does not
support Bluetooth, this system cannot
function.
. In the following conditions, the sys-
tem may not function:
– The cellular phone is turned off.
– The current position is outside
the communication area.
– The cellular phone is not con-
nected.
– The cellular phone has a low
battery.
. When using the hands free function
and other Bluetooth functions at the
same time, the following problems may
occur:
– The Bluetooth connection may
be cut.
– Noise may be heard when play-
ing back voice with the Bluetooth
function.
! Registering/connecting a Bluetooth
phone
To use the hands-free system for cellular
phones, it i s neces sary to re gister a
cellular phone with the system. Refer to
“Registering/connecting Bluetooth
®
de-
vice” F5-81.
! Bluetooth phone condition dis-
play
The condition of the Bluetooth phone
appears on the upper right side of the
screen. Refer to “Bluetooth phone condi-
tion display” F5-89.
! Using the phone switch/micro-
phone
Steering switch
By pressing the phone switch, a call can
be received or ended without taking your
hands off the steering wheel.
&
1
Volume control switch
. Pre ss the “+” side to increase the
volume.
. Press the “-” side to decrease the
volume.
&
2
Off hook switch
&
3
On hook switch
Microphone
The microphone is used when talking on
the phone.
Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)
– CONTINUED –
5-89
5
Black plate (352,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)
Type A
Type B
! Voice command system
Press this switch to operate the voice
command system.
&
1
Talk switch
. The voice command system and its list
of commands can be operated. Refer to
“Voice command system operation” F5-
108.
NOTE
. The other party’s voice will be heard
from the front speakers. The audio/
visual system will be muted during
phone calls or when hands-free voice
commands are used.
. Talk alternately with the other party
on the phone. If both parties speak at
the same time, the other party may not
hear what has been said. (This is not a
malfunction.)
. Keep call volume down. Otherwise,
the other party’s voice may be audible
outside the vehicle and voice echo may
increase. When talking on the phone,
speak clearly towards the microphone.
. The other party may not hear you
clearly when:
– Drivingonanunpavedroad.
(Making excessive traffic noise.)
– Driving at high speeds.
– The roof or windows are open.
– The air conditioning vents are
pointed towards the microphone.
– The sound of the air conditioning
fan is loud.
– Thereisanegativeeffecton
sound quality due to the phone
and/or network being used.
! About the contacts in the contact
list
. The following data is stored for every
registered phone. When another phone is
connected, the following registered data
cannot be read:
– Contact data
NOTE
When a phone’s registration is deleted,
the above-mentioned data is also de-
5-90
Black plate (353,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
leted.
! When selling or disposing of the
vehicle
A lot of personal data is registered when
the hands-free system is used. When
selling or disposing of the vehicle, initialize
the data. Refer to “Other settings” F5-10.
. The following data in the system can
be initialized:
– Contact data
NOTE
Once initialized, the data and settings
will be erased. Pay much attention
when initializing the data.
& Calling on the Bluetooth
phone
After a Bluetooth phone has been regis-
tered, a call can be made using the hands-
free system. There are several methods
by which a call can be made, as described
below.
1. Select
.
2. Select
PHONE
(PHONE).
3. Select the desired tab to call from.
. On the PHONE screen, select “Incom-
ing Calls” to open the Incoming Calls
screen. Refer to “Quick reference ” F5-87.
Incoming Calls screen
Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)
– CONTINUED –
5-91
5
Black plate (354,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)
. On the PHONE screen, select “Out-
going Calls” to open the Outgoing Calls
screen. Refer to “Quick reference” F5-87.
Outgoing Calls screen
. On the PHONE screen, select “Con-
tacts” to open the Contacts screen. Refer
to “Quick reference” F5-87.
Contacts screen
. On the PHONE screen, select “Dia-
lpad” to open the Dialpad screen. Refer to
“Quick reference” F5-87.
PHONE (Dialpad) screen
How to make a call list Page
By call history 5-93
By contacts list 5-95
By dialpad
*1
5-97
By off hook switch 5-98
By voice command system
5-108
*1
: The operation cannot be performed while
driving.
5-92
Black plate (355,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! By call history
! Incoming Calls
. On the PHONE screen, select “Incom-
ing Calls” to open the Incoming Calls
screen.
. Up to ten items in the incoming call
history are listed. Scroll the screen to see
items that are not on the screen.
. You can make a call by selecting an
item in the incoming call history list.
Incoming Calls screen
. If there is no incoming call history, a
message appears to indicate that there is
no incoming call history data.
Incoming Calls screen (No incoming call
history)
Incoming Calls screen (Confirmation to
delete incoming call history)
No. Function
&
1
“Outgoing Calls” key: Opens the Out-
going Calls screen.
&
2
“Contacts” key: Opens the Contacts
screen.
&
3
“Delete All” key: Deletes all incoming
call history data. The “Delete All” key
is disabled when there is no incoming
call history.
&
4
“OK” key: Deletes incoming call his-
tory.
&
5
“Cancel” key: Cancels the deletion of
incoming call history. The screen
returns to the Incoming Calls screen.
NOTE
. When making a call to the same
number continuously, only the most
recent call is listed in call history.
. When a phone number registered in
the contact list is received, the name is
displayed.
. Number-withheld calls are also
memorized in the system.
. International phone calls may not be
made depending on the type of cellular
phone you have.
. The list should group together con-
secutive entries with the same phone
number and same call type.
Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)
– CONTINUED –
5-93
5
Black plate (356,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)
! Outgoing Calls
. On the PHONE screen, select “Out-
going Calls” to open the Outgoing Calls
screen.
. Up to ten items in the outgoing call
history are listed. Scroll the screen to see
items that are not on the screen.
. You can make a call by selecting an
item in the outgoing call history list.
. If there is no outgoing call history, a
message appears to indicate that there is
no outgoing call history data.
Outgoing Calls screen
Outgoing Calls screen (No outgoing call
history)
Outgoing Calls screen (Confirmation to
delete outgoing call history)
No. Function
&
1
“Incoming Calls” key: Opens the
Incoming Calls screen.
&
2
“Contacts” key: Opens the Contacts
screen.
&
3
“Delete All” key: Deletes all outgoing
call history data. The “Delete All” key
is disabled when there is no outgoing
call history.
&
4
“OK” key: Deletes outgoing call his-
tory.
&
5
“Cancel” key: Cancels to delete out-
going call history. The screen will go
back to the Outgoing Calls screen.
NOTE
. When making a call to the same
number continuously, only the most
recent call is listed in call history.
. When a phone number registered in
the contact list is received, the name is
displayed.
. Number-withheld calls are also
memorized in the system.
. International phone calls may not be
made depending on the type of cellular
phone you have.
. The list should group together con-
secutive entries with the same phone
number and same call type.
5-94
Black plate (357,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! By contacts list
. Up to 1000 items in the contact data
are listed. Scroll the screen to see items
that are not on the screen.
. Select an item in the contact list to
open the Phone Number List screen.
. You can make a call by selecting an
item in the phone number list (up to five
phone numbers are listed).
. If there is no contact data, a message
is displayed to indicate that there is no
contact data.
Contacts screen
Phone Number List screen (Example when
“Adam” is selected)
Contacts screen (When there is no data)
No. Function
&
1
“Incoming Calls” key: Opens the
Incoming Calls screen.
&
2
“Outgoing Calls” key: Opens the Out-
going Calls screen.
&
3
“Download Contacts” key: Opens a
pop-up screen for starting the down-
load of contact data.
&
4
“Delete All” key: Deletes all contact
data. The “Delete All” key is disabled
when there is no contact data.
&
5
“Search” key: Opens a list of contacts
that starts with the selected character.
This key is cross-hatched and cannot
be selected if there is no contact data
that starts with the selected character,
Select the up/down arrow key to scroll the
“Search” key.
! When the contact is empty
For PBAP incompatible but OPP com-
patible Bluetooth phones
. On the Contacts screen, select “Down-
load Contacts”. A screen where you can
select how to download contacts opens.
. You can select to download all items or
download one item.
*: To download all items, you may need to
change the settings in your cellular phone
beforehand.
Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)
– CONTINUED –
5-95
5
Black plate (358,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)
Contacts screen (Download selection)
Contacts screen (Download confirmation)
Contacts screen (Download confirmation)
Contacts screen (Download in progress)
No. Function
&
6
“Download Contacts” key: Opens the
Download Confirmation screen. Con-
firm whether or not to download. If the
downloaded contact(s) already
exist(s), confirm whether or not to
overwrite the existing data.
&
7
“Download 1 Entry” key: Downloads
one set of contact data. To download
the data, you need to operate from the
connected device.
&
8
“OK” key: Starts downloading all
contacts.
&
9
“Cancel” key: Cancels the download.
The screen returns to the Contacts
screen. (The pop-up screen disap-
pears.)
. All contact data downloaded into the in-
vehicle equipment will be deleted.
5-96
Black plate (359,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Contacts screen (Confirmation to delete
contact data)
No. Function
&
10
“OK” key: Deletes all downloaded
contact data.
&
11
“Cancel” key: Cancels the deletion.
The screen returns to the Contacts
screen.
NOTE
. Manual transfer operation cannot be
performed while driving.
. If your cellular phone is nei ther
PBAP nor OPP compatible, the con-
tacts cannot be transferred.
. Depending on the type of Bluetooth
phone:
– It may be necessary to perform
additional steps on the phone when
transferring contact data.
! By Dialpad
The Outgoing Call screen opens when
you perform the following operations.
. When you enter a phone number on
the PHONE (Dialpad) screen and select
the “OFF_Hook” key, the Outgoing Call
screen opens.
. When you select an item in the incom-
ing call history list on the Incoming Calls
screen, the Outgoing Call screen opens.
. When you select an item in the out-
going call history list on the Outgoing Call
screen, the Outgoing Call screen opens.
. When you select a phone number on
the Contacts (Phone Number List) screen,
the Outgoing Call screen opens.
Outgoing Call screen
No. Function
&
1
“Option” key: Opens the Options
(volume settings) screen.
&
2
“ON_Hook” key: Aborts the call. The
screen returns to the Phone (Menu)
screen. This is the same as pressing
the “ON_Hook” switch on the steering
wheel.
NOTE
Depending on the type of Bluetooth
phone being connected, it may be
necessary to perform additional steps
on the phone.
Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)
– CONTINUED –
5-97
5
Black plate (360,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)
! By off hook switch
1. Press the
switch on the steering
wheel to display the phone top screen.
2. Check that the “Call (Call)” screen is
displayed.
& Receiving on the Bluetooth
phone
! Incoming calls
When a call is received, the incoming call
screen is displayed with a sound.
. When you are on the Outgoing Call
screen, the screen changes to the Call
screen when the other party answers the
call.
. The “Mute”, “Speaker”, and “Bluetooth”
keys are disabled on the Outgoing Call
screen.
. When you receive a phone call while
the cellular phone is connected, the
screen changes to th e Incoming Call
screen.
Incoming Call screen
Unable to put call on hold screen
No. Function
&
1
“Option” key: Opens the Options
(volume settings) screen.
No. Function
&
2
“Hold” key: Puts the incoming call on
hold. This function may not work on
some cell phone models. This func-
tion is the same as pressing the
“ON_Hook” switch on the steering
wheel for a short period of time.
&
3
“OFF_Hook” key: Opens the Call
screen. This function is the same as
pressing the “OFF_Hook” switch on
the steering wheel.
&
4
“ON_Hook” key: Rejects the incoming
call. This function is the same as
pressing and holding the “ON_Hook”
switch on the steering wheel.
NOTE
. During international phone calls, the
other party’s name or number may not
be displayed correctly depending on
the type of cellular phone you have.
. The call and ringtone volume that
has been adjusted in the
Sound Set-
tings
(Sound Settings) screen sounds
when there is an incoming call. De-
pending on the type of Bluetooth
phone, both the system and Bluetooth
phone m ay sound simultaneously
when there is an incoming call. Refer
to ““Sound Settings (Sound Settings)”
screen” F5-101.
5-98
Black plate (361,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Talking on the Bluetooth
phone
While talking on the phone, this screen is
displayed. The operations outlined below
can be performed on this screen.
. When the Incoming Cal l screen is
displayed and you accept the call, the
screen changes to the Call screen. The
screen stays on the Incoming Call screen
if you reject the call.
. The “Dialpad” and “Bluetooth Setting”
keys are disabled on the Incoming Call
screen.
The Call screen opens when you perform
the following operations.
. When you accept a call on the Incom-
ing Call screen (by selecting the
“OFF_Hook” key), the Call screen opens.
. When you are on the Outgoing Call
screen, the screen changes to the Call
screen when the other party answers the
call.
Call screen
Call screen (Your voice Mute ON)
Call screen (Private ON)
Call (Dialpad) screen (DTMF)
No. Function
&
1
“Option” key: Opens the Options
(volume settings) screen.
Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)
– CONTINUED –
5-99
5
Black plate (362,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Phone operation (Hands–free system for cellular phones)
No. Function
&
2
“Mute” key: Mutes your voice to the
other party. Press the “Mute” key
again to deactivate the Mute mode.
This key is disabled in the Private
mode.
&
3
“Speaker” key: Changes the mode to
Private mode. The other party’s voice
emits from the cell phone. Press the
“Speaker” key again to deactivate the
Private mode.
&
4
“ON_Hook” key: Ends the call. You
return to the Phone (Menu) screen
when ending outgoing calls and the
previous screen when ending incom-
ing calls. This function is the same as
pressing and holding the “ON_Hook”
switch on the steering wheel.
&
5
“Dialpad” key: Opens the Call (Dia-
lpad) screen.
&
6
“Switch Screen” key: Switches the
screen to the Phone (Menu) screen.
&
7
“Dialpad” key: Allows you to make
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency)
calls. The numbers you enter are sent
as tone signals.
NOTE
. When cellular phone call is changed
to hands-free call, the hands-free
screen will be displayed and its func-
tions can be operated on the screen.
. Changing between cellular phone
call and hands-free call can be per-
formed by operating the cellular phone
directly.
. Transferring methods and opera-
tions will be different depending on
the type of cellular phone you have.
. For the operation of the cell ular
phone, see the manual that comes with
it.
. On the PHONE (Menu) screen, the
screen changes to the Phone (Dialpad)
screen when you select “Dialpad”.
. After entering the phone number on the
keypad, the call is made when you select
the “OFF_Hook” key.
Phone (Dialpad) screen
No. Function
&
1
“Dialpad” keys: Allows you to enter
numbers from 0 to 9 and *, #, and +.
To enter “+”, press and hold the “0”
key.
&
2
“Delete” key: Deletes one character
from the entered characters.
&
3
“Switch Screen” key: Switches the
screen to the Phone (Menu) screen.
&
4
“OFF_Hook” key: Opens the Outgoing
Calls screen and dials the entered
phone number. This is the same as
pressing the “OFF_Hook” switch on
the steering wheel. This key is cross-
hatched and cannot be selected until
the phone number is entered.
&
5
“Option” key: Opens the Options
(volume settings) screen.
&
6
“Bluetooth Setting” key: Opens the BT
Devices Connection screen.
NOTE
The sound quality of the voice heard
from the other party’s speaker may be
negatively impacted.
5-100
Black plate (363,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Setup
& Phone settings
! “Sound Settings (Sound Settings)”
screen
The call and ringtone volume can be
adjusted. A ringtone can be selected.
1. Display the “PHONE” screen. Refer to
“Quick reference” F5-87.
2. Select
Option
(Option).
3. Select the desired item to be set.
. Select to adjust the volume of the
telephone function.
. On the PHONE screen, the screen
changes to the Options screen when you
select the “Option” key.
Options (volume settings) screen
No. Function
&
1
Phone Ringer Volume +/- keys: Ad-
justs the ringtone volume. The “-” key
lowers the volume, and the “+” key
increases the volume. (Default vo-
lume: 4 out of a total of 16 volume
levels)
&
2
Phone Incoming Volume +/- keys:
Adjusts the receive volume. The “ -”
key lowers the volume, and the “+”
key increases the volume. (Default
volume: 4 out of a total of 16 volume
levels)
&
3
Phone Outgoing Volume +/- keys:
Adjusts the transmit volume. The “-”
key lowers the volume, and the “+”
key increases the volume. (Default
volume: 3 out of a total of 5 volume
levels)
NOTE
. Depending on the type of phone,
certain functions may not be available.
. Contact data is managed indepen-
dently for every registered phone.
When one phone is connected, another
phone’s registered data cannot be
read.
! Update contacts from phone
Operation methods differ between PBAP
compatible and PBAP incompatible but
OPP compatible Bluetooth phones.
If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor
OPP compatible, the contacts cannot be
transferred.
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth
phones
1. Select
Download Contacts
(Down-
load Contacts).
. Contacts are transferred automati-
cally.
2. Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
. This operation may be unnecessary
depending on the type of cel lular
phone.
Audio/Setup
– CONTINUED –
5-101
5
Black plate (364,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Setup
. If another Bluetooth device is con-
nected when transferring contact data,
depending on the phone, the con-
nected Bluetooth device may need to
be disconnected.
. Depending on the type of Bluetooth
phone being connected, it may be
necessary to perform additional steps
on the phone.
For PBAP incompatible but OPP com-
patible Bluetooth phones
This operation cannot be performed while
driving.
1. Select
Download Contacts
(Down-
load Contacts).
Select Download 1 Entry.
2. Transfer the contact data to the sys-
tem using a Bluetooth phone.
. This operation may be unnecessary
depending on the type of c ellular
phone.
. To cancel this function, select
Can-
cel
(Cancel).
3. Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
! Deleting the contact data
1. Select
Delete All
(Delete All).
2. Select
OK
(OK) when the confirma-
tion screen appears.
Refer to “By contacts list” F5-95.
NOTE
For deleting data, all items are deleted.
5-102
Black plate (365,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
What to do if...
& Troubleshooting
If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth device, first check the table below.
When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth device
Symptom Likely cause Solution
Page
Cellular
phone
This
system
The hands-free system or Bluetooth
device does not work.
The connected device may not be a
compatible Bluetooth cellular phone.
For USA customers, please visit
www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the
USA customers, contact your local dealer to
arrange a demonstration in order to confirm
whether or not the device can be paired with
the vehicle.
* —
The Bluetooth version of the connected
cellular phone may be older than the
specified version.
Use a cellular phone with Bluetooth version
1.1 or higher (recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR
or higher).
*
5-83
*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cellular phone.
Audio/What to do if...
– CONTINUED –
5-103
5
Black plate (366,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/What to do if...
When registering/connecting a cellular phone
Symptom Likely cause Solution
Page
Cellular
phone
This
system
A cellular phone cannot be regis-
tered.
An incorrect passcode was entered
on the cellular phone.
Enter the correct passcode on the cellular phone. * —
The registration operation has not
been completed on the cellular phone
side.
Complete the registration operation on the cellular
phone (approve registration on the phone).
* —
Old registration information remains
on either this system or the cellular
phone.
Delete the existing registration information from
both this system and the cellular phone, then
register the cellular phone you wish to connect to
this system.
*5-84
A Bluetooth connection cannot be
made.
Another Bluetooth device is already
connected.
Manually connect the cellular phone you wish to
use to this system.
— 5-84
Bluetooth function is not enabled on
the cellular phone.
Enable the Bluetooth function on the cellular phone. * —
Automatic Bluetooth connection on
this system is set to off.
Set automatic Bluetooth connection on this system
to on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
— 5-84
“Unable to dial. Please check your
phone. (Unable to dial. Please
check your phone.)”
Bluetooth function is not enabled on
the cellular phone.
Enable the Bluetooth function on the cellular phone. * —
Old registration information remains
on either this system or the cellular
phone.
Delete the existing registration information from
both this system and the cellular phone, then
register the cellular phone you wish to connect to
this system.
*
5-84
*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cellular phone.
5-104
Black plate (367,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
When making/receiving a call
Symptom Likely cause Solution
Page
Cellular
phone
This
system
A call cannot be made/received.
Your vehicle is in a “No Service (No
Service)” area.
Move to where “No Service (No Service)” no
longer appears on the display.
—
—
When using the phonebook
Symptom Likely cause Solution
Page
Cellular
phone
This
system
Phonebook data cannot be trans-
ferred manually.
The profile version of the connected
cellular phone may not be compatible
with transferring phonebook data.
For USA customers, please visit
www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the
USA customers, contact your local dealer to
arrange a demonstration in order to confirm
whether or not the device can be paired with
the vehicle.
* —
Transfer operation on the cellular phone
has not completed.
Complete transfer operation on the cellular
phone (approve transfer operation on the
phone).
* —
Phonebook data cannot be edited.
Editing function is not available on this
system.
——
5-102
*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cellular phone.
Audio/What to do if...
– CONTINUED –
5-105
5
Black plate (368,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/What to do if...
In other situations
Symptom Likely cause Solution
Page
Cellular
phone
This
system
Even though all conceivable mea-
sures have been taken, the symptom
status does not change.
The cellular phone is not close enough
to this system.
Bring the cellular phone closer to this system. ——
The cellular phone is the most likely
cause of the symptom.
Turn the cellular phone off, remove and
reinstall the battery pack, and then restart the
cellular phone.
* —
Enable the cellular phone’s Bluetooth con-
nection.
* —
Stop the cellular phone’s security software
and close all applications.
* —
Before using an application installed on the
cellular phone, carefully check its source and
how its operation might affect this system.
*
—
*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cellular phone.
5-106
Black plate (369,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Voice command system op-
eration
& Voice command system
The voice command system enables the
audio, hands-free systems, etc. to be
operated using voice commands.
Refer to the “Command list” F5-110 for
samples of voice commands.
! Using the voice command system
! Steering switch
&
1
Talk switch
. Press the talk switch to start the voice
command system.
. To cancel voice recognition, press and
hold the talk switch.
! Microphone
Type A
Type B
. It is unnecessary to speak directly into
the microphone when giving a command.
NOTE
. Wait for the confirmation beep be-
fore speaking a command.
. Voice commands may not be recog-
nized if:
– Spoken too quickly.
– Spoken at a low or high volume.
– The roof or windows are open.
– Pass engers are talking w hile
voice commands are spoken.
– The air conditioning speed is set
high.
– The air conditioning vents are
turned towards the microphone.
. In the following conditions, the sys-
tem may not recognize the command
properly and using voice commands
may not be possible:
– The command is incorrect or
unclear. Note that certa in words,
accents or speech patterns may be
difficult for the system to recognize.
– There is excessive background
noise, such as wind noise.
Audio/Voice command system operation
– CONTINUED –
5-107
5
Black plate (370,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Voice command system operation
! Voice command system operation
1. Press the talk switch.
. After the voice command top screen
has been displayed, speech guidance
will commence.
NOTE
When the voice command mode is
audio mode, voice guidance for the
voice command system can be skipped
by pressing the talk switch.
2. Say the command.
. Say “Help” or “Phone”.
. Say “Audio”.
. Commands related with each func-
tion are displayed on the screen of the
each function tab. Some commonly
used commands are displayed on the
screen of the main tab. Even if any tab
is selected, all commands can be
operated.
. Saying
Help
(Help) prompts gui-
dance to offer examples of commands
and operation methods.
. To cancel voice recognition, select
“6”, or press and hold the talk switch.
NOTE
If the system does not respond or the
confirmation screen does not disap-
pear, press the talk switch and try
again.
! Voice command example: Call
name
1. Press the talk switch.
2. Say
“Call <contacts>”
.
. A confirmation screen will be dis-
played showing the recognition re-
sults. If multiple matching items are
found, a selection screen will be
displayed. Say
“<number>”
or select
the number.
NOTE
. In the same manner as it is dis-
played on the scr een, “Call <con-
tacts>” (Call <contacts>), after saying
5-108
Black plate (371,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
“Call a contact”
say the name of a
contact. For example:
“Call a contact”
,
“John Smith”
or
“Cal l a contact”
,
“Mary Davis”
. Short or abbreviated names in the
contacts list may not be recognized.
Change names in the contacts list to
full names.
. Sometimes a voice recognition re-
sult confirmation screen will be dis-
played. After confirming the result, say
“Yes”
or
“No”
.
. When the system recognizes multi-
ple names from the contacts list, a
name candidate list will be displayed
on the screen. If the desired name is
not displayed on the top of the screen,
say or select the number of the name
from the candidate list (number 1,
number 2, etc.) to select a name from
the candidate list.
. When a contact has multiple phone
numbers registered in the contacts list,
a candidate list will be displayed. If the
desired phone number is not displayed
on the top of the screen, say or select
the number of the desired phone
number from the candidate list (num-
ber 1, number 2, etc.) to select a phone
number from the candidate list.
! Voice command example: Dial
number
1. Press the talk switch.
2. Say the phone number.
. In the same manner as it is dis-
played on the screen, “Dial <number> ”
(Dial <number>), after saying
“Dial a
number”
say the phone number.
. Say the phone number one digit at a
time.
For example, if the phone number is
2345678:
Say
“two three four five six seven
eight”
Do not say
“twenty three forty five
sixty seven eight”
Calling to the following phone numbers
– 3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)
– 7 digit numbers (Local phone num-
bers)
– 1 0 digit n umbers (Area code +
Local phone number)
– 11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area
code + Local phone number)
. As the system cannot recognize
additional numbers, say the complete
number without stopping.
Calling to other phone numbers
3. Say
“Call”
or press the switch on
the steering wheel.
. When the system recognizes multi-
ple phone numbers, a phone number
candidate list will be displayed on the
screen. Pressing the
switch on the
steering wheel makes a call to the top
entry on the list. If the desired phone
number is not displayed on the top of
the screen, say the number of the
desired phone number from the candi-
date list to select a phone number from
the candidate list.
! Casual speech recognition
Due to natural language speech recogni-
tion technology, this system enables re-
cognition of a command when spoken
naturally. However, the system can not
recognize every variation of each com-
mand. In some situations, it is possible to
omit the command for the procedure and
directly state the desired operation. Not all
voice commands are displayed in the
function menu.
Audio/Voice command system operation
– CONTINUED –
5-109
5
Black plate (372,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Command list
NOTE
If the command cannot be recognized
completely, the command input screen
will be displayed. (Search results will
be shown based on the part of the
command that was recognized.)
! Expression examples for each
function
Command Expression examples
“Dial <phone num-
ber>”
Phone <phone num-
ber>.
Command list
Recognizable voice commands and their
actions are shown below.
. Frequently used commands are listed
in the following tables.
. For devices that are not installed in the
vehicle, the related commands will not be
displayed in the screen. Also, according to
conditions, other commands may not be
displayed in the screen.
. The functions available may vary ac-
cording to the system installed.
. Voice recognition language can be
changed. Refer to “Other settings” F5-10.
NOTE
. The notations used in the com-
mands are as follows.
– [
]: Commands that need not
to be spoken
– <
>: Numbers, titles, or
names to be spoken
Basic command
Voice
command
Phrase Function
System back Back
Go back one
hierarchy or
cancel the
voice recogni-
tion (voice
command top
screen)
System help Help
Ask for help
with the cur-
rent task
System can-
cel (Close)
Cancel, Close
Cancel the
current task
Yes Yes
No No
Display OFF Display OFF
Turns the dis-
play off
Audio ON Audio ON
Turns the
audio system
on
Audio OFF Audio OFF
Turns the
audio system
off
STARLINK
mode change
STARLINK
Switch to
APPS mode
5-110
Black plate (373,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Commands for changing the radio mode
Voice
command
Phrase Function
AM mode
change
Change to
AM
Switch to AM
mode
Change to
AM1
Switch to AM
mode band 1
Change to
AM2
Switch to AM
mode band 2
FM mode
change
Change to
FM
Switch to FM
mode
Change to
FM1
Switch to FM
mode band 1
Change to
FM2
Switch to FM
mode band 2
Change to
FM3
Switch to FM
mode band 3
XM radio
mode change
Change to
SiriusXM
Switch to XM
mode
Bluetooth
Audio mode
change
Change to BT
Audio
Switch to
Bluetooth
Audio mode
CD mode
change
Change to
CD
Switch to CD
mode
USB mode
change
Change to
USB
Switch to
USB mode
iPod mode
change
Change to
iPod
Switch to iPod
mode
Aha radio
mode change
Change to
Aha
Switch to Aha
radio mode
Voice
command
Phrase Function
Pandora
mode change
Change to
Pandora
Switch to
Pandora
mode
AUX mode
change
Change to
AUX
Switch to
AUX mode
Commands for Hands Free
Voice
command
Phrase Function
Dial number
calling
Dial Number
? <0-9, +, *,
#> ? Change
number, Dial
Places a call
to the said
phone num-
ber
Dial <0-9, +,
*, #> ?
Change num-
ber, Dial
Contacts
(Phonebook)
Contacts,
Phonebook
? <Name>
? <1-5> ?
Dial
Make a call
by using the
phonebook
Call <Name>
Call <Name>
? <1-5> ?
Dial
Voice
command
Phrase Function
Recent calls
Call History
? Incoming
call, Outgoing
call ? Next
(page), Pre-
vious (page)
? <1-5> ?
Dial
Make a call
by using the
call history
Incoming
calls
Incoming
Calls
Display the
call history
screen
Outgoing
calls
Outgoing
Calls
Display the
call history
screen
Redial Redial
Places a call
to the phone
number of the
latest out-
going call
Callback Callback
Places a call
to the phone
number of the
latest incom-
ing call
Select phone
Select Phone
? <1-5>
Display the
phone select
screen
Show phone
menu
Phone Menu
Display the
hands free
top screen
Audio/Command list
– CONTINUED –
5-111
5
Black plate (374,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Command list
Commands for Pandora
Voice
command
Phrase Function
Like Like
Mark “Like”
flag
Dislike Dislike
Mark “Dislike”
flag
Skip Skip, Next
Skip to the
next song
Commands for aha
Voice
command
Phrase Function
Thumbs up
Thumbs Up,
Heart, Like
Mark “Like”
flag
Thumbs
down
Thumbs
Down, Ban,
Dislike
Mark “Dislike”
flag
Update Refresh
Refresh the
selected sta-
tion to get the
latest infor-
mation
Content up Content Up
Playback next
Content
Content down
Content
Down
Playback pre-
vious Content
Commands for AM/FM control
Voice
command
Phrase Function
Seek up Seek Up
Tunes in the
higher fre-
quency direc-
tion
Seek down Seek Down
Tunes in the
lower fre-
quency direc-
tion
Scan Scan
Switch to the
scan mode
Direct fre-
quency tuning
Tune to <Fre-
quency>
Designate the
frequency to
switch to a
specific radio
station
Preset num-
ber tuning
Preset <pre-
set number>
Designate the
preset chan-
nel to switch
to specific
radio station
Tag Ta g
iTunes Tag-
ging for HD
Radio
Commands for SiriusXM radio control
Voice
command
Phrase Function
Preset num-
ber tuning
Preset <pre-
set number>
Designate the
preset chan-
nel to switch
to specific
radio station
Scan Scan
Switch to the
scan mode
Channel
number tun-
ing
Channel
<Channel
number>
Designate the
channel to
switch to spe-
cific radio sta-
tion
Category Category
Displays the
category list
screen
5-112
Black plate (375,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Commands for CD control
Voice
command
Phrase Function
Track up,
next track
Track Up
Select the
next track
Track down,
previous track
Track Down
Select the
current track
Scan Scan
Switch to the
scan mode
1 Track Re-
peat
1 Track Re-
peat
Repeat single
track
Repeat All Repeat All
Repeat all
tracks
Shuffle Shuffle
Plays ran-
domly
Commands for MP3/WMA/AAC, USB
control
Voice
command
Phrase Function
Track up,
next track
Track Up
Select the
next track
Track down,
previous track
Track Down
Select the
current track
Folder up Folder Up
Plays from
the start of the
next folder
Voice
command
Phrase Function
Folder down Folder Down
Plays from
the start of the
previous
folder
Scan Scan
Switch to the
scan mode
1 track repeat
1 Track Re-
peat
Repeat single
track
Repeat folder
Repeat
Folder
Repeat of the
folder
Repeat all Repeat All
Repeat all
tracks
Shuffle folder Shuffle Folder
Plays ran-
domly of the
folder
Shuffle all Shuffle All
Plays ran-
domly
Commands for iPod control
Voice
command
Phrase Function
Track up,
next track
Track Up
Select the
next track
Track down,
previous track
Track Down
Select the
current track
Repeat one Repeat One
Repeat single
track
Repeat all Repeat All
Repeat all
tracks
Shuffle track Shuffle Track
Shuffle all
tracks
Shuffle album Shuffle Album
Shuffle all
tracks
Shuffle OFF Shuffle OFF
Turn off shuf-
fle
Audio/Command list
– CONTINUED –
5-113
5
Black plate (376,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Audio/Appendix
Commands for Bluetooth audio control
Voice
command
Phrase Function
Pause Pause Pause play
Track up,
next track
Track Up
Select the
next track
Track down,
previous track
Track Down
Select the
current track
1 Track re-
peat
1 Track Re-
peat
Repeat single
track
Repeat all Repeat All
Repeat all
tracks
Group repeat
Group Re-
peat
Repeat tracks
on group
Shuffle all Shuffle All
Shuffle all
tracks
Group shuffle Group Shuffle
Shuffle tracks
on group
Shuffle OFF Shuffle OFF
Turn off shuf-
fle
Appendix
& Certification
. Bluetooth
The Bluetooth word mark and logo are
registered trademarks of Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and any use of such marks by Clarion
Co., Ltd. is under license.
. SiriusXM Satellite Radio
SiriusXM
TM
and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio
Inc. All rights reserved.
. Pandora
Pandora, the Pandora logo, and other
Pandora marks are trademarks or regis-
tered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc.,
or its subsidiaries worldwide.
If you have any issues with the Pandora
application on your mobile phone, please
direct them to
. iPod
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone”
mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to
iPod or iPhone respectively, and has been
certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards. Apple is not
responsible for the operation of this device
or its compliance with safety and regula-
tory standards. Please note that the use of
this accessory with iPod or iPhone may
affect wireless performance.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,
iPod touch, and iTunes are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
. How to get the source code using
the open source
This system implements software using
the open source. For customers who
would like to get the source code of the
software, it is available by downloading it
from the web site of Clarion Co., Ltd.
For details, refer to the following web site.
http://www.clarion.com/us/en/support/in-
dex.html
5-114
Black plate (377,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Certification for the Hands-
free system
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC
Rules and Industry Canada licence-ex-
empt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la
partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appa-
reils radio exempts de licence. L’exploita-
tion est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas
produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur
de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage
est sus cept ible d’en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the
FCC radi o freque ncy (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65
and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has
very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply wi thout maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées
pour un environnement non contrôlé et
respecte les règles les radioélectriques
(RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’expo-
sition dans le Supplément C à OET65 et
d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectri-
ques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipe-
ment émet une énergie RF très faible qui
est considérée conforme sans évaluation
de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or
operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
& Certification for Mexico mod-
els
. IFETEL RCPCLPF14-0253-A2
Clarion PF-3678
. IFETEL RCPCLPF14-0253-A3
Clarion PF-3755
Audio/Appendix
5-115
5
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (13,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Interior lights ....................................................... 6-2
Dome light .......................................................... 6-2
Map lights........................................................... 6-2
OFF delay timer .................................................. 6-3
Sun visors ........................................................... 6-3
Sun visor extension plate (models with the
EyeSight system) .............................................. 6-4
Vanity mirror with light ........................................ 6-4
Storage compartment ......................................... 6-5
Glove box ........................................................... 6-5
Center console.................................................... 6-5
Cup holders ......................................................... 6-6
Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-6
Rear passenger’s cup holder ............................... 6-7
Bottle holders ...................................................... 6-7
Accessory power outlets .................................... 6-8
Use with a cigarette lighter (if equipped)............... 6-9
Ashtray (if equipped)......................................... 6-10
Floor mat (if equipped)...................................... 6-10
Coat hook........................................................... 6-11
Under-floor storage compartment .................... 6-12
Rear view camera (if equipped)........................ 6-12
How to use the rear view camera ....................... 6-13
Viewing range on the screen.............................. 6-14
Help line............................................................ 6-15
Interior equipment
6
Black plate (382,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Interior equipment/Interior lights
Interior lights
CAUTION
When leaving your vehicle, make
sure the light s are turned off to
avoid battery discharge.
& Dome light
1) ON
2) DOOR
3) OFF
The dome light switch has the following
three positions.
ON: The light remains on continuously.
OFF: The light remains off.
DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-
matically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors is opened.
. The doors are unlocked using the
keyless access function (if equipped).
Refer to “Locking and unlocking with
“keyless access” entry function” F2-13.
. The doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry system. Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-21.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
tion.
& Map lights
Type A
Type B
To turn on the map light, push the switch.
To turn it off, push the switch again.
6-2
Black plate (383,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the
lights are turned off to avoid battery
discharge.
! Automatic illumination (type A map
lights)
The map lights illuminate automatically in
the following cases.
. Any of the doors is opened.
. The door s are unl ocked us ing the
keyless access function (if equipped).
Refer to “Locking and unlocking with
“keyless access” entry function” F2-13.
. The door s are unl ocked us ing the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
tion.
& OFF delay timer
The following lights have an automatic
illumination function.
. dome light (when the dome light switch
is in the “DOOR” position)
. map light (type A)
After be ing illuminated automatically,
these lights remain on for several seconds
and then gradually turn off after all doors
are closed.
While the lights are illuminated, if any of
the following operations are performed,
the lights turn off immediately.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position to the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
. All doors are locked using the keyless
access function (if equipped).
. All doors are locked using the remote
keyless entry system.
The setting for the period of time in which
the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can
be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for details. Also,
the setting can be changed by operating
the multi function display. For details, refer
to “Interior light off delay timer setting” F3-
87.
Sun visors
To block out glare, swing down the visors.
To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
Interior equipment/Sun visors
– CONTINUED –
6-3
6
Black plate (384,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Interior equipment/Sun visors
& Sun visor extension plate
(models with the EyeSight
system)
With the sun visor positioned over the side
window, y ou can use the sun visor
extension plate to prevent glare through
the gap between the sun visor and center
pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it
toward the rear of the vehicle. When you
have finished using it, stow it by pushing it
toward the front of the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not pull out the extension plate
with the sun visor positioned over
the windshield. The extension plate
would obstruct your view of the rear
view mirror.
& Vanity mirror with light
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the vehicle is being driven to
avoid being temporarily blinded by
the glare of bright light.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
The light beside the vanity mirror illumi-
nates when the mirror cover is opened.
NOTE
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
6-4
Black plate (385,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Storage compartment
CAUTION
. Always keep the storage com-
partment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment.
& Glove box
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
close it, push the lid firmly upward. When
the light control switch is in the “
” or
“
” position (or when the headlight
indicator light
illuminates in the
combination meter if the light control
switch is in the “AUTO” position), the
glove box light will illuminate if the lid is
opened.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,
insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.
& Center console
To open the lid, pull up the lock release.
Interior equipment/Storage compartment
6-5
6
Black plate (386,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Interior equipment/Cup holders
Cup holders
CAUTION
Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,
if hot, might burn you and/or your
passengers. Spilled beverages may
also damage upholstery, carpets or
audio equipment.
& Front passenger’s cup holder
CAUTION
Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an accident.
! Except STI
Type A
Type B
A dual cup holder is built into the center
console.
! STI
The dual cup holder is built into the center
console near the parking brake lever.
To access the cup holder, pull the lid
toward the rear.
6-6
Black plate (387,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
The divider in the cup holder can be pulled
out and inserted in a different position
(further toward the front or rear) to enable
cups of different sizes to be held.
NOTE
With the divider taken out, the cup
holder can be used as a storage box.
& Rear passenger’s cup holder
CAUTION
When not in use, always keep the
cup holder stored while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a sudden stop or an accident.
A dual cup holder is located at the back of
the center console. To use the cup holder,
open the lid by pulling its upper edge.
Bottle holders
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
bottle holder, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could burn
you and/or your passengers.
The bottle holder equipped on each door
Interior equipment/Bottle holders
– CONTINUED –
6-7
6
Black plate (388,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets
trim can be used to hold a beverage bottle
and other items.
Accessory power outlets
Power outlet below the climate control
dials
Power outlet in the center console
Accessory power outlets are provided
below the climate control dials and in the
center console. Electrical power (12V DC)
from the battery is available at any of the
outlets when the ignition switch is in either
the “ACC” or “ON” position.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical
appliance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is 120W.Do
not use an appliance which exceeds the
indicated wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances connected to two
or more outlets simultaneously, the total
power consumed by them must not
exceed 120W.
CAUTION
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter in the accessory power
outlets.
. Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Al-
ways put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not
in use.
. Use only electrical appliances
which are designed for 12V DC.
The maximum power rating of an
6-8
Black plate (389,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
appliance that can be connected
is 120W. Do not use an appliance
which exceeds the indicated wat-
tage for each outlet.
When using appliances con-
nected to two or more outlets
simultaneously, the total power
consumed by them must not
exceed 120W. Overloading the
accessory power outlet can
cause a short circuit. Do not use
double adapters or more than
one electrical appliance.
. If the plug on your electric appli-
ance is either too loose or too
tight for the accessory power
outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly.
. Use of an electric appliance in the
accessory power outlet for a long
period of time while the engine is
not running can cause battery
discharge.
. Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord
on your electrical appliance will
not interfere with your shifting
gears and operating the accel-
erator and brake pedals. If they
do, do not use the electrical
appliance while driving.
& Use with a cigarette lighter (if
equipped)
To use the accessory power outlet as a
cigarette lighter socket, pu rchase the
cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional
accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is
available from your SUBARU dealer.
The cigarette lighter operates only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”
position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the
knob and wait a few moments. It will
automatically spring up when ready for
use.
WARNING
To avoid being burned, never grasp
the lighter by the end with the
heating element. Doing so could
result in injur y and could also
damage the heating element.
CAUTION
. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,
because it will overheat.
. The electrical power socket is
originally designed to use a gen-
uine SUBARU cigarette lighter
plug. Do not use a non-genuine
cigarette lighter plug in the sock-
et. Doing so may cause a short-
circuit and overheating, resulting
in a fire.
. If the socket is ever used for a
plug-in accessory such as a cell
phone, that may damage the
portion of the socket ’s internal
mechanism that causes a cigar-
ette lighter plug to “pop out”
after its lighter element is heated.
Therefore, do not place a cigar-
ette lighter plug in a socket that
has been used, even once, to
power a plug-in accessory. Doing
so may cause the plug to stick
and overheat, creating a potential
fire hazard.
Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets
6-9
6
Black plate (390,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Interior equipment/Ashtray
Ashtray (if equipped)
CAUTION
. Do not use ashtrays as waste
receptacles or leave a lighted
cigarette i n an ashtray. This
could cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep
the ashtray open, the fire of the
cigarette may spread to another
cigarette butt and start a fire.
. Do not put flammable material in
the ashtray.
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette
butts in the ashtray.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
mulate around the hinges of the ash-
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended
implement.
The portable ashtray can be installed in
each cup holder or bottle holder. For the
locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup
holders” F6-6. For the locations of the
bottle holders, refer to “Bottle holders” F6-
7.
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the
ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the
ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.
Floor mat (if equipped)
CAUTION
If the floor mat slips forward and
interferes with the movement of the
pedals during driving, it could cause
an accident. Observe the following
precautions to prevent the floor mat
from slipping forward.
. Be sure to use a genuine
SUBARU floor mat or an equiva-
lent designed with grommets in
the correct locations.
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed in its proper loca-
tion and is correctly secured on
its retaining pins.
6-10
Black plate (391,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
. Do not use more than one floor
mat.
Retaining pins are located on the driver’s
side floor.
The floor mat should be properly secured
using the built-in grommets, by placing the
grommets over the pins and pushing them
downward.
Coat hook
The coat hook is attached to each rear
passenger’s hand grip.
WARNING
Do not place hangers or other hard
objects on the coat hooks. If such
items were hanging on the coat
hooks duri ng deployment of the
SRS curtain airbags, they could
cause serious injuries by coming
off the coat hooks and being thrown
through the cabin or by preventing
correct airbag deployment. Before
hanging clothing on the coat hooks,
make sure there are no pointed
objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-
ing directly on the coat hooks with-
out using hangers.
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the driver’s
view or that could cause injury in
sudden stops or in a collision. And
do not hang items on the coat hook
that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.
Interior equipment/Coat hook
6-11
6
Black plate (392,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Interior equipment/Under–floor storage compartment
Under-floor storage compart-
ment
The storage compartment is located under
the floor of the trunk and can be used to
store small items. Pull the strap to open
the trunk floor lid, and then remove the lid.
NOTE
. The shape of the storage compart-
ment may be different depending on
the model.
. When storing a flat tire, put the
storage tray in the trunk.
CAUTION
. Always keep the lids closed while
driving to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of a sudden
stop or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment.
Rear view camera (if
equipped)
A rear view camera is attached to the
trunk lid. When the ignition switch is “ON”
and the shift lever (MT models) or select
lever (CVT models) is set to “R”, the rear
view camera automatically displays the
rear view image behind the vehicle on the
monitor of the navigation system or the
audio display.
WARNING
. Since the rear view camera uses
a wide-angle lens, the image on
the monitor is different from the
actual view in terms of distance.
. Since the range and field of view
6-12
Black plate (393,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
of the image on the monitor is
limited, you should always check
the rear view and the surround-
ing area with y our eyes and
mirrors, and move backward at
a slow speed. Moving backward
only by checking the rear view
image from the camera could
cause an accident.
. Do not disassemble or modify the
camera, switch or wiring. If
smoke comes out or you smell
a strange odor, stop using the
rear view camera immediately.
Contact your S UBARU deale r
for an inspection. Continued use
may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
CAUTION
. If your vehicle is washed with a
high-pressure washer, do not
allow water to contact the camera
directly. Entry of water into the
camera lens may result in con-
densation, malfunction, fire or
electric shock.
. Since the camera is a precision
device, do not subject it to strong
impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,
fire or electric shock may occur.
. If mud or snow sticks to or is
frozen on the camera, you must
be very careful when removing it.
Otherwise, damage to the camera
may cause a fire or electric
shock. Pour water or lukewarm
water over the camera to remove
mud and ice, and wipe it with a
soft, dry cloth.
. Do not put a flame close to the
camera or wiring. Otherwise, da-
mage or fire may occur.
. When replacing the fuse, be sure
to use a fuse with the specified
rating. Use of a fuse with a
different rating may result in a
malfunction.
. If the rear view camera is used for
a long time while the engine is
not operated, the battery may
become completely discharged.
NOTE
. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,
benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,
discoloration may occur. To remove
contamination, wipe the camera with a
cloth moistened with a diluted neutral
detergent and then wipe it with a soft,
dry cloth.
. When waxing the vehicle, be careful
not to apply the wax to the camera. If it
comes in contact with the camera,
moisten a clean cloth with a diluted
neutral detergent to remove the wax.
. The camera lens has a hard coating
to help prevent scratches. However,
when washing the vehicle or cleaning
the camera lens , be careful not to
scratch the camera lens. Do not use a
washing brush directly on the camera
lens. The image quality of the rear view
camera may deteriorate.
. Strong light shined on the camera
lens may develop vertical lines around
the light source. This is not a malfunc-
tion.
. Under fluorescent light, the display
may flicker. However, this is not a
malfunction.
. The image of the rear view camera
may be s lightly different from the
actual color of the objects.
& How to use the rear view
camera
When the shift lever/select lever is set to
“R”, the rear view camera automatically
displays the rear view image from the
vehicle. When the lever is set to other
positions, the image before setting to “R”
Interior equipment/Rear view camera
– CONTINUED –
6-13
6
Black plate (394,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Interior equipment/Rear view camera
is displayed.
1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Set the shift lever/select lever to “R”.
NOTE
. For models with the genuine
SUBARU navigation or audio system,
the image of the rear view camera has
priority over other screen displays.
Therefore, while the rear view camera
is in operation, the operations of other
screens are disabled. To operate other
screens, set the shift lever or select
lever to a position other than “R”.
. The image of the rear view camera
has priority over other screen displays.
. The image of the rear view camera is
horizontally reversed as is the case
with the vehicle rearview mirror or the
side view mirror.
. It may be difficult to see the image of
the rear view camera in the following
cases. This is not a malfunction of the
camera.
– The vehicle is in a dark place (at
night, in a tunnel, etc.).
– The vehicle is in an extremely hot
or cold place.
– An object (such as raindrops,
snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the
view of the rear view camera sticks
to the lens of the camera.
– Strong light shined directly on
the camera lens (occasionally, there
are vertical lines on the screen).
& Viewing range on the screen
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly.
Range of view
Range of view
6-14
Black plate (395,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Image from camera
The area from the rear end of the bumper
can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the
bumper and areas just under the bumper
cannot be viewed.
Also, the image from the rear view camera
looks shorter than the actual distance.
Range of view
Image from camera
The area above the camera cannot be
viewed. If there is an object that has a
wide projection on its upper part such as a
sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec-
tion cannot be seen on the screen.
& Help line
The help line (distance marker and vehicle
width line) is a guide to help you realize
the actual distance from the screen image.
1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line)
5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
6) Vehicle centerline
When the shift lever/select lever is set to
position “R”, the monitor screen displays
the help lines together with the rear view
image.
Interior equipment/Rear view camera
– CONTINUED –
6-15
6
Black plate (396,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Interior equipment/Rear view camera
CAUTION
. When moving backward, always
check the back with your eyes
without relying on the help lines.
. The actual position may be dif-
ferent from the indication of the
help lines.
. Differences may occur due to
number of passengers or loaded
cargo.
. When the vehicle is on a slope or
when the vehicle is inclined
against the road, the indication
is different from the actual posi-
tion.
. Be sure to observe the displayed
warning message of “Check Sur-
roundings Before Backing Up”.
! Difference between screen image
and actual road
The distance markers show the distance
for a level road when the vehicle is not
loaded. It may be different from the actual
distance depending on the loading condi-
tions or road conditions.
! When there is an upward slope at
the back
1) 3 feet (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance.
! When there is a downward slope
at the back
1) 3 feet (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks nearer
than the actual distance.
NOTE
When cargo is loaded, the rear view
distance on the screen looks farther
thantheactualdistanceasinan
upward slope.
6-16
Black plate (397,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Feature of distance marker
1) 3 feet (1 m) line
2) 6.5 feet (2 m) line
3) 10 feet (3 m) line
The distance marker shows the distance
on the road. If there is a car or other object
close behind, distance cannot be correctly
displayed.
Interior equipment/Rear view camera
6-17
6
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (15,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Fuel ...................................................................... 7-3
Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-3
Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-5
State emission tes ting (U.S. only)...................... 7-7
Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-8
Starting and stopping the engine (models
without push-button start system).................. 7-9
Starting engine.................................................... 7-9
Stopping the engine ........................................... 7-11
Starting and stopping engine (models with
push-button start system) .............................. 7-12
Safety precautions ............................................. 7-12
Operating range for push-button start
system............................................................. 7-12
Starting engine................................................... 7-12
Stopping engine................................................. 7-14
When access key does not operate properly ....... 7-14
Remote engine start system (dealer
option).............................................................. 7-14
Models with “keyless access with push-button
start system” ................................................... 7-15
Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote
start................................................................. 7-16
Entering the vehicle following remote engine start
shutdown......................................................... 7-16
Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the
vehicle ............................................................. 7-16
System maintenance .......................................... 7-16
Manual transmission.......................................... 7-17
Shifting speeds .................................................. 7-18
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-18
Driver’s Con trol Center Differential (C.DIFF/
DCCD) (STI)..................................................... 7-19
To change mode of driver’s control center
differential ....................................................... 7-20
Auto mode ........................................................ 7-20
Manual mode..................................................... 7-21
Temporary release ............................................. 7-23
Continuously variable transmission................. 7-23
Select lever ....................................................... 7-24
Selection of manual mode.................................. 7-26
Shift lock function ............................................. 7-27
Driving tips........................................................ 7-28
SI-DRIVE (STI) .................................................... 7-29
Intelligent (I) mode ............................................. 7-29
Sport (S) mode .................................................. 7-30
Sport Sharp (S#) mode....................................... 7-30
SI-DRIVE selector .............................................. 7-30
SI-DRIVE (except STI: CVT models) ................. 7-31
Intelligent (I) mode ............................................. 7-31
Sport (S) mode .................................................. 7-31
Sport Sharp (S#) mode....................................... 7-32
SI-DRIVE switches ............................................. 7-32
Limited slip differential (LSD) (STI) .................. 7-33
Power steering................................................... 7-33
STI .................................................................... 7-33
Except STI......................................................... 7-34
Braking ............................................................... 7-35
Braking tips....................................................... 7-35
Brake system .................................................... 7-35
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-36
Starting and operating
7
Black plate (16,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .......................... 7-36
ABS self-check................................................... 7-36
ABS warning light .............................................. 7-37
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
system ............................................................. 7-37
Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions........... 7-37
Vehicle Dynamics Control system .................... 7-38
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor .......... 7-40
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch................. 7-40
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(U.S.-spec. models) ......................................... 7-42
Parking your vehicle .......................................... 7-44
Parking brake (models without electronic parking
brake system) .................................................. 7-44
Electronic parking brake (models with electronic
parking brake system)...................................... 7-44
Parking tips ....................................................... 7-48
Hill start assist system (models with out
electronic parking brake system) .................. 7-49
To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist
system ............................................................ 7-51
Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF
indicator light .................................................. 7-52
Cruise control .................................................... 7-52
To set cruise control .......................................... 7-53
To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-54
To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-54
To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-54
Cruise control indicator ..................................... 7-55
Cruise control set indicator ................................ 7-55
BSD/RCTA (if equipped) .................................... 7-56
System features................................................. 7-56
System operation............................................... 7-57
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning
buzzer ............................................................. 7-59
BSD/RCTA warning indicator.............................. 7-60
BSD/RCTA OFF switch ....................................... 7-61
Certification for the BSD/RCTA........................... 7-62
Handling of radar sensors.................................. 7-63
Black plate (401,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Fuel
CAUTION
Use of a fuel which is low in quality
or use of an inappropri ate fuel
additive may cause engine damage.
& Fuel requirements
! STI
The engine is designed to operate at
maximum performance using unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI
(98 RON) or higher. If 93 AKI (98 RON)
fuel is not readily available in your area,
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
91 AKI (95 RON) may be used with no
detriment to engine durability or driveabil-
ity. However, you may notice a slig ht
decrease in maximum engine perfor-
mance while using 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel.
Use of 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel will not affect
your warranty coverage.
! Except STI
The engine is designed to operate using
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher. If 91 AKI
(95 RON) fuel is not readily available,
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87 AKI (90 RON) may be used.
Regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher may
also be used. Using regular unleaded
gasoline will not be detrimental to engine
durability, nor will it affect your warranty
coverage. However, depending on your
driving habits and conditions, you may
notice a decrease in maximum engine
performance, fuel economy or slight en-
gine vibration or knocking. If you experi-
ence any of these conditions while using a
lower octane rated fuel, you may want to
return to using 91 AKI (95 RON) octane
rated fuel as soon as possible. Addition-
ally, if your vehicle knocks heavily or
persistently, the use of 91 AKI (95 RON)
or higher grade u nlead ed gasol ine is
required.
! Fuel octane rating
This octane rating is the average of the
Research Octane and Motor Octane
numbers and is commonly referred to as
the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
Using a gasoline with a lower octane
rating can cause persistent and heavy
knocking, which can damage the engine.
Do not be concerned if your vehicle
sometimes knocks lightly when you drive
up a hill or when you accelerate. Contact
your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with
the specified octane rating and your
vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
! Unleaded gasoline
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
nozzle. Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used because it will
damage the emission control system and
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
! Gasoline for California-certified
LEV
If your vehicle was certified to California’s
low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as
indicated on the underhood tune-up label,
it is designed to optimize engine and
emission performance with gasoline that
meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-
fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in
any other state t han California, your
vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting
Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-
side California is permitted to have higher
sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-
mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter
and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or
smell. SUBARU recommends that you try
a different brand of unleaded gasoline
having lower sulfur to determine if the
problem is fuel related before returning
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service.
Starting and operating/Fuel
– CONTINUED –
7-3
7
Black plate (402,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Fuel
! MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane-en-
hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
you use such fuels, your emission control
system performance may deteriorate and
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
function indicator light may turn on. If this
happens, r eturn to your authorized
SUBARU Deal er for service. If it is
determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not
be covered by your warranty.
! Gasoline for cleaner air
Your u se of gasoline with detergent
additives will help prevent deposits from
forming in your engine and fuel system.
This helps keep your engine in tune and
your emi ssion control system working
properly, and is a way of doing your part
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
and other additives, you should never
need to add any fuel system cleaning
agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with
materials called oxygenates. Use of these
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in
your vehicle, but should contain no more
than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the
proper operation of your SUBARU.
Do not use any gasoline that contains
more than 10% ethanol, including from
any pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85
(which are only some examples of fuel
containing more than 10% ethanol).
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station
operators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-
sions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
following description.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that specified
in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Methanol can be used in your vehicle
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
mixture AN D if it is accompani ed by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
under these conditions.
. If undesirable driveability problems are
experienced and you suspect they may be
fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
line before seeking service at your
SUBARU dealer.
. Fuel system damage or driveability
problems which result from the use of
improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con-
taining alcohol may cause paint
damage, which is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
7-4
Black plate (403,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Fuel filler lid and cap
! Refueling
Only one person should be involved in
refueling. Do not allow others to approach
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Be sure to observe any other precautions
that are posted at the service station.
1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid
release lever up. The lever is on the floor
at the left of the driver’s seat.
WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap,
first touch the vehicle body or a
metal portion of the fuel pump or
similar object to discharge any
static electricity that may be present
on your body. If your body is carry-
ing an electrostatic charge, there is
a possibility that an electric spark
could ignite the fuel, which could
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
static electric charge, do not get
back into the vehicle while refueling
is in progress.
1) Open
2) Close
2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it
slowly counterclockwise.
WARNING
. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-
mable. Before refueling, always
first stop the engine and close all
vehicle doors and windows.
Make sure that there a re no
lighted cigarettes, open flames
or electrical sparks in the adja-
cent area. Only handle fuel out-
doors. Quickly wipe up any
spilled fuel.
. When opening the cap, grasp it
firmly and turn it slowly to the
Starting and operating/Fuel
– CONTINUED –
7-5
7
Black plate (404,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Fuel
left. Do not remove the cap
quickly. Fuel may be under pres-
sure and spray out of the fuel
filler neck, especially in hot
weather. If you hear a hissing
sound while you are removing
the cap, wait for the sound to
stop and then slowly open the
cap to prevent fuel from spraying
out and creating a fire hazard.
3. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder
inside the fuel filler lid.
WARNING
. When refueling, insert the fuel
nozzle securely into the fuel filler
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
fully inserted, its automatic stop-
ping mechanism may not func-
tion, causing fuel to overflow the
tank and creating a fire hazard.
. Stop refueling whe n the auto-
matic stop me chanism on the
fuel nozzle activates. If you con-
tinue to add fuel, temperature
changes or other conditions
may cause fuel to overflow from
the tank and create a fire hazard.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler
pump automatically stops. Do not add any
more fuel.
5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain
not to catch the tether under the cap while
tightening.
CAUTION
Make sure that the cap is tightened
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage
in the event of an accident.
6. Close the fuel filler lid completely.
CAUTION
If you spill any fuel on the painted
surface, rinse it off imme diately.
Otherwise, the painted surface
could be damaged.
NOTE
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
door (lid) is located on the right side of
the vehicle.
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened
until it clicks or if the tether is caught
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE
warning light/malfunction indicator
light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK
ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in-
dicator light” F3-16.
CAUTION
. Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause da-
mage to the fuel system.
. After refueling, turn the cap
clockwise until it clicks to ensure
that it is fully tightened. If the cap
is not securely tightened, fuel
may leak out while the vehicle is
being driven or fuel spillage
could occur in the event of an
accident, creating a fire hazard.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
7-6
Black plate (405,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 23
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
quickly. Paint damage caused by
spilled fuel is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
. Always use a genuine SUBARU
fuel filler cap. If you use the
wrong cap, it may not fit or have
proper venting and your fuel tank
and emission control system
may be damaged. It could also
lead to fuel spillage and a fire.
. Immediately put fuel in the tank
whenever the low fuel warning
light illuminates. Engine misfires
as a result o f an empty tank
could cause damage to the en-
gine. Continuing to operate your
vehicle at an extremely low fuel
level may result in a reduction of
engine performance.
State emission testing (U.S.
only)
WARNING
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive model
must NEVER be performed on a
single two-wheel dynamometer. At-
tempting to do so will result in
uncontrolled vehicle movement and
may cause an accident or injuries to
persons nearby.
CAUTION
. At state inspection time, remem-
ber to tell your inspection or
service station in advance not to
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle
on a two-wheel dynamometer.
Otherwise, serious transmission
damage will result.
. Resultant vehicle damage due to
improper testing is not covered
under the SUBARU Limited War-
ranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or
its contractors or licensees.
California and a number of federal states
have Inspection/Maintenance programs to
inspect your vehicle’s emission control
system. If your vehicle does not pass this
test, some states may deny renewal of
your vehicle’s registration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
that monitors the performance of the
engine’s emission control system. Certi-
fied emission inspectors will inspect the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as
part of the state emission inspection
process. The OBDII system is designed
to detect engine and transmission pro-
blems that might cause the vehicle emis-
sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII
inspections apply to all 1996 model year
and newer passenger cars and trucks.
Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-
bia have implemented emission inspec-
tion of the OBDII system.
. The inspection of the OBDII system
consists of a visual operational check of
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-
function indicator light (MIL) and an
examination of the OBDII system with an
electronic scan tool.
. A vehicle
passes the OBDII system
inspection if proper operation of the
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-
served, there are no stored diagnostic
trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness
monitors are all complete.
Starting and operating/State emission testing (U.S. only)
– CONTINUED –
7-7
7
Black plate (406,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Preparing to drive
. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not
properly operating (light is illuminated or is
not working due to a burned out bulb) or
there is one or more diagnostic trouble
codes stored in the vehicle’s computer.
. A state emission inspection may reject
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT
READY” is greater than on e. If the
vehicle’s battery has been recently re-
placed or disconnected, the OBDII system
inspection may indicate that the vehicle is
not ready for the emission test. Under this
condition, the vehicle driver should be
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few
days to reset the readiness monitors and
return for an emission re-inspection.
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
service.
Some states still use dynamometers in
their emission inspection program. A
dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
testing device that allows your vehicle’s
wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
one place. Prior to your vehicle being put
on a dynamometer, tell you r emission
inspector
not to place your SUBARU
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-
ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-
sion damage will result.
The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
dynamometers in their emission testing
program have EXEMPTED SUBARU
AWD vehicles from the portion of the
testing program that involves a two-wheel
dynamometer. There are some states that
use four-wheel dynamometers in their
testing program. When properly used, this
equipment should not damage a SUBARU
AWD vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
should the driveshaft be disconnected for
state emission testing.
Preparing to drive
You should perform the following checks
and adjustments every day before you
start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition
of the tires. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks, and check that no small animal is
under the vehicle.
4. Check that no small animal enters the
engine compartment.
5. Check that the hood and trunk lid are
fully closed.
6. Check the adjustment of the seat.
7. Check the adjustment of the inside
and outside mirrors.
8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
9. Check the operation of the warning
and indicator lights when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
ing lights after starting the engine.
7-8
Black plate (407,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
CAUTION
Trapping small animals in the cool-
ing fan and belts of the engine may
result in a malfunction. Check that
no small animal enters the engine
compartment and under the vehicle
before starting the engine.
NOTE
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,
washer fluid and other fluid levels
should be checked daily, weekly or at
fuel stops.
Starting and stopping the
engine (models without
push-button start system)
& Starting engine
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter motor
continuously for more than 10 sec-
onds. If the engine fails to start after
operating the st arter for 5 to 10
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
more before trying again.
NOTE
It may be difficult to start the engine
when the battery has been discon-
nected and reconnected (for mainte-
nance or other purposes). This diffi-
culty is caused by the electronically
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosi s
function. To overcome it, k eep the
ignition switch in the “ON” position
for approximately 10 seconds before
starting the engine.
! General precautions when starting
engine
WARNING
. Never start the engine from out-
side the vehicle. It may result in
an accident.
. Do not leave the engine running
in locations with poor ventilation,
such as a garage and indoors.
The exhaust gas may enter the
vehicle or indoors, and it may
result in carbon monoxide poi-
soning.
. Do not start the engine near dry
foliage, paper, or other flam-
mable substances. The exhaust
pipe and exhaust emissions can
create a fire hazard at high
temperatures.
CAUTION
. If the engine is stopped during
driving, the catalyst may over-
heat and burn.
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button start system)
– CONTINUED –
7-9
7
Black plate (408,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button start system)
. When starting the engine, be sure
to sit in the driver’s seat (except
when using the remote engine
start system).
NOTE
. Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel-
eration immediately after the engine
has started.
. For a short time after the engine has
started, the engine speed is kept high.
When the warm-up is completed, the
engine speed lowers automatically.
. On rare occasions, it may be difficult
to start the engine depending on the
fuel and the usage condition (repeated
driving of a distance in which the
engine has not warmed up sufficiently).
In such a case, it is recommended that
you change to a different brand of fuel.
. On rare occasions, transient knock-
ing may be heard from the engine when
the accelerator is operated rapidly
such as a rapid start-up and a rapid
acceleration. This is not a malfunction.
. The engine starts more easily when
the headlights, air conditioner and rear
window defogger are turned off.
. After the engine starts, the engine
speed will be kept high until the engine
has warmed up sufficiently.
! MT models
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-
cessories.
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor
and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting
the engine.
The starter motor will only operate when
the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the
floor.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-13.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, try the
following.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is firmly set, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
erator pe dal and turn the ignitio n
switch to the “START” position. If the
engine starts, quickly release the
accelerator pedal.
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”
position. After waiting for 10 seconds
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still refuses to start,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system auto-
matically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
! CVT models
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-
cessories.
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”
position (preferably the “P” position).
The starter motor will only operate when
the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
7-10
Black plate (409,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-13.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, try the
following.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is firmly set, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
erator peda l and turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position. If the
engine s tarts, qu ickly r elease the
accelerator pedal.
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”
position. After waiting for 10 seconds
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still refuses to start,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system auto-
matically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make
sure that the select lever is at the “P” or
“N” position and that the parking brake is
applied.
CAUTION
If you restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, shift the select
lever into the “N” position. Do not
attempt to place the select lever of a
moving vehicle into the “P” posi-
tion.
& Stopping the engine
The ignition switch should be turned off
only when the vehicle is stopped and the
engine is idling.
WARNING
Do not stop the engine when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause
loss of power to the power steering
and the brake booster, making steer-
ing and braking more difficult. It
could also result in accidental acti-
vation of the “LOCK” position on the
ignition switch, causing the steering
wheel to lock.
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button start system)
7-11
7
Black plate (410,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system)
Starting and stopping engine
(models with push-button
start system)
& Safety precautions
Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-10.
& Operating range for push-
button start system
Refer to “Operating range for push-button
start system” F3-6.
& Starting engine
WARNING
. There are some general precau-
tions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the pr ecautions
described in “General precau-
tions when starting engine” F7-
9.
. If the indicator on the push-
button ignition switch flashes in
green after the engine has
started, never drive the vehicle.
The steering is still locked, and it
may result in an accident.
CAUTION
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch is
flashing in orange, there may be
a malfunction with the vehicle.
Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-
diately.
. If the indicator on the push-
button ignition switch is flashing
in green after the engine has
started, it means that the steering
is still locked. Depress the brake
pedal while moving the steering
wheel to the right and left, and
press the push-button ignition
switch.
. Do not continue pushi ng the
push-button ignition switch for
more than 10 seconds. Doing so
could cause a malfunction. If the
engine does not start, stop push-
ing the push-button ignition
switch and turn off the engine.
Wait 10 seconds, and then push
the push-button ignition switch
to start the engine.
NOTE
. When the push-button ignition
switch is pressed while depressing
the clutch pedal (MT models) or the
brake pedal (CVT models), the engine
starter operates for a maximum of 10
seconds and after starting the engine,
the starter stops automatically.
. Wh en the pus h-button i gnition
switch is pressed while depressing
the clutch pedal (MT models) or the
brake pedal (CVT models), the engine
can be started regardless of the status
of the push-button ignition switch.
. If the security indicator light illumi-
nates when you attempt to start the
engine but the engine does not start,
press the push-button ignition switch
to switch the power to “OFF” and then
try to start the engine again.
. If the engine does not start, press
the push-button ignition switch without
depressing the clutch pedal (MT mod-
els) or the brake pedal (CVT models) to
switch the power to “OFF”. Then, while
depressing the clutch pedal (MT mod-
els) or the brake pedal (CVT models)
more forcefully, press the push-button
ignition switch.
. The engine start procedures may
not function depending on the radio
wave conditions around the vehicle. In
such a case, refer to “Starting engine”
F9-17.
. If the vehicle battery is discharged,
the steering cannot be unlocked.
7-12
Black plate (411,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Charge the battery.
. After the engine starts, the engine
speed will be kept high until the engine
has warmed up sufficiently.
1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch
When the push-button ignition switch is
pressed while depressing the clutch pedal
(MT models)/brake pedal (CVT models),
the engine will start. The start procedure
of the engine is as follows.
! MT models
1. Carry the access key, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Shift the shift lever in neutral.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Depress the clutch pedal until the
indicator on t he pu sh-button ignition
switch turns green.
6. While depressing the clutch pedal,
press the push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
In case the engine does not start by the
normal engine start procedure, move
the shift lever to the neutral position,
and switch the power to “ACC”. De-
press the clutch pedal, and press the
push-button ignition switch for at least
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only
use this engine start procedure in case
of emergency.
! CVT models
1. Carry the access key, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Shift the select lever in the “P” posi-
tion. The engine can also start when the
select lever is in the “N” position, however,
for safety reasons, start in the “P” position.
4. Depress the brake pedal until the
operation i ndicator on the push-button
ignition switch turns green. When starting
with the select lever in the “N” position, the
indicator does not turn green.
5. While depressing the brake pedal,
press the push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
. While pressing the select lever but-
ton in, the indicator on the push-button
ignition switch will not turn green even
when the select lever is in the “P”
position.
. In case the engine does not start by
the normal engine start procedure,
move the select lever to the “P” posi-
tion, and switch the power to “ACC”.
Depress the brake pedal, and press the
push-button ignition switch for at least
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only
use this engine start procedure in case
of emergency.
. When the engine is not started, the
brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a
case, depress the brake pedal more
forcefully than usual. Check that the
operation indicator on the push-button
ignition switch turns green, and press
the push-button ignition switch to start
the engine.
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system)
– CONTINUED –
7-13
7
Black plate (412,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
& Stopping engine
1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Mo ve the select lever to the “P”
position (CVT models).
3. Press the push-button ignition switch.
The engine will stop, and the power will be
switched to “OFF”.
WARNING
. Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch during driving.
When the push-button ignition
switch is operated as follows,
the engine will stop.
– The switch is pressed and held
for 3 seconds or longer.
– The switch is pressed briefly 3
times or more in succession.
When the engine stops, the brake
booster will not function. A great-
er foot pressure will be required
on the brake pedal.
The power steering system will
not operate either. A greater
force will be required to steer,
and it may result in an accident.
. If the engine stops during driving,
do not operate the push-button
ignition switch or open any of the
doors until the vehicle is stopped
in a safe location. It is dangerous
because the steering lock may be
activated. Stop the vehicle in a
safe location, and contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
CAUTION
For CVT models:
. Do not stop the engine while the
select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
. If the engine is stopped while the
select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position, the power
will be in “ACC ”. If the vehicle is
left in this condition, the battery
may be discharged.
NOTE
Although you can stop the engine by
operating the push-button igni tion
switch, do not stop the engine during
driving except in an emergency.
& When access key does not
operate properly
Refer to “Access key – if access key does
not operate properly” F9-16.
Remote engine start system
(dealer option)
WARNING
. There are some general precau-
tions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the pr ecautions
described in “Gene ral p recau-
tions when starting engine” F7-
9.
. Do not remote start a vehicle in
an enclosed environment (e.g.
closed garage). Prolonged opera-
tion of a motor vehicle in an
enclosed environment can cause
a harmful build-up of Carbon
Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is
harmful to your health. Exposure
to high levels of Carbon Monox-
ide can cause headaches, dizzi-
ness or in extreme cases uncon-
sciousness and/or death.
. Before performing any servicing
of the vehicle, temporarily place
the remote engine start system in
service mode to prevent the
system from unexpectedly start-
ing the engine.
The remote engine start system allows
7-14
Black plate (413,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
you to start the engine from outside the
vehicle. In addition, the remote engine
start system can activate the heater or air
conditioner, providing you with a comfor-
table cabin upon entry.
NOTE
The length of time for which i t is
acceptable to allow the engine to
remain idling may be governed by local
laws and regulations. Check the local
rules when using the remote engine
start system.
& Models with “keyless access
with push-button start sys-
tem”
NOTE
For more details, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the remote
engine start system.
Access key
1) Lock button
An access key can be used as the remote
engine start transmitter. Operate the lock
button to start or stop the engine as
follows.
! Before starting the engine
Before using the remote engine start
system to start the engine, confirm the
following conditions.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
. All doors are closed.
. The engine hood is closed.
. The push-button ignition switch is in the
“OFF” position.
! Starting the engine
To start the engine with remote engine
start system, briefly press the lock button
twice within 2 seconds, then press and
hold the lock button for 3 seconds.
1. Press t he lock button briefly. The
hazard warning flashers then flash once.
2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock
button briefly again. The hazard warning
flashers then flash once again.
3. After step 2, immediately press and
hold the lock button. The hazard warning
flashers then flash once.
4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,
release the lock button. The engine will
then start successfully.
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
– CONTINUED –
7-15
7
Black plate (414,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
! Stopping the engine
Press and hold the lock button to stop the
engine with remote engine start system.
! Automatic engine shutdown
The remote engine start system will
automatically shut down or will not start
the engine under the following conditions.
. The total run-time has exceeded 20
minutes.
. Any door is opened.
. The select lever is moved t o any
position other than “P”.
. The engine hood is opened.
. Thepush-buttonignitionswitchis
pressed.
. The brake pedal is depressed.
. The engine speed is 3,000 rpm or
more.
The time setting until the engine auto-
matically stops can be changed. To
change it, please contact your SUBARU
dealer. Note that s ome setti ngs may
violate state, provincial, or local laws and
regulations. Check the laws in your area to
determine which setting is permitted.
& Entering the vehicle while it
is running via remote start
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
keyless access function. If the vehicle’s
doors are unlocked manually using the
key, the vehicle’s alarm system will trigger
(if the alarm system is armed prior to
activating the remote engine start system)
and the engine will turn off. Perform either
of the following procedures to disarm the
alarm system. Refer to “Alarm system”
F2-25.
. Switch the ignition to the “ACC” or
“ON” state by pressing the push-button
ignition switch once or twice, respec-
tively.
. Press any button on the access key/
transmitter.
2. Enter the vehicle.
3. The engine will shut down when any
door is opened.
4. Press the push-button ignition switch
while depressing the brake pedal to restart
the engine.
& Entering the vehicle follow-
ing remote engine start shut-
down
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is
opened by the remote keyless entry
transmitter within a few seconds immedi-
ately following remote engine start shut-
down.
& Pre-heating or pre-cooling
the interior of the vehicle
Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-
perature controls to the desired setting
and operation. After the system starts the
engine, the heater or air conditioning will
activate and heat or cool the interior to
your setting.
& System maintenance
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
Perform the procedure described in “Re-
placing battery of access key” F11-50.
7-16
Black plate (415,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Manual transmission
This manual transmission is a completely
synchromesh, 6-forward-speed and 1-re-
verse-speed transmission.
The shift pattern is shown on the shift
lever knob.
1) Slider
You must raise the slider and hold it in that
position before you can move the shift
lever to the “R” position.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch
pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually
let up on the clutch pedal.
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the
transmission in neutral, release the clutch
pedal momentarily, and then try again.
WARNING
. Do not drive the vehicle with the
clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
clutch pedal is depressed) or
with the shift lever in the neutral
position. Engine braking has no
effect in either of these condi-
tions and the risk of an accident
is consequently increased.
. Do not engage the clutch (i.e.,
release the clutch pedal) sud -
denly when starting the vehicle.
By doing so the vehicle might
unexpectedly accelerate or the
transmission could malfunction.
CAUTION
Shift into reverse ONLY when the
vehicle has completely stopped. It
may cause damage to the transmis-
sion to try shifting into reverse when
the vehicle is moving.
Starting and operating/Manual transmission
– CONTINUED –
7-17
7
Black plate (416,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Manual transmission
& Shifting speeds
! Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel econ-
omy and vehicle performance during
normal driving is ensured by shifting up
at the speeds listed in the following table.
Shift up mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
3rd to 4th 40 (64)
4th to 5th 45 (72)
5th to 6th
50 (80)
! Shift-up indicator (STI)
The shift-up indicator appears to inform
the driver about the upshift timing.
The shift-up indicator can be activated or
deactivated. For details, refer to “Shift-up
indicator (STI)” F3-34.
! Maximum allowable speeds
The following table shows the maximum
speeds that are possible with each differ-
ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will
enter the red area if these speeds are
exceeded.
With the exception of cases where sudden
acceleration is required, the vehicle
should not be driven with the tachometer’s
needle inside the red area. Failure to
observe this preca ution can lead to
excessive engine wear and poor fuel
economy.
Gear
STI
mph (km/h)
Except STI
mph (km/h)
1st 31 (50) 31 (49)
2nd 51 (82) 55 (88)
WARNING
When shifting down a gear, ensure
that the vehicle is not travelling at a
speed exceeding the Maximum Al-
lowable Speed for the gear which is
about to be selected. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
engine over-revving and this in turn
can result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of
engine brakes when the vehicle is
travelling on a slippery surface can
lead to wheel locking; as a conse-
quence, control of the vehicle may
be lost and the risk of an accident
increased.
NOTE
Never exceed the posted speed limit.
& Driving tips
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
upgrade. Either of those actions may
cause clutch damage.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
shift lever. This may cause wear on the
transmission components.
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
lower gear before the engine starts to
labor.
On steep downgrades, downshift the
transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear
7-18
Black plate (417,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
speed and to extend brake pad life.
In this way, the engine provides a braking
effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
the brakes while descending a hill, they
may overheat and not work properly.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
phenomenon is not an indication of a
problem in your vehicle.
Driver’s Control Center Dif-
ferential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)
WARNING
Always use the utmost care when
driving. Being overconfident be-
cause you are driving a vehicle with
a driver ’s control center differential
could easily lead to a serious acci-
dent.
CAUTION
. All the indicators will flash in the
event that the driver’s control
center differential has a malfunc-
tion. Have the vehicle inspected
by your SUBARU dealer.
. If a malfunction occurs in the
vehicle (for example, when the
rear differential oil temperature
warning light illuminates), all of
the indicators may disappear and
the setting value for the initial
limited slip differential (LSD) tor-
que of the driver’s control center
differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) may
be cancelled. However, it does
not indicate a malfunction of the
C.DIFF/DCCD itself.
The driver ’s control center differential
allows you to freely change the degree
of limitation of the differential action
(limited slip differential (LSD) torque) of
your vehicle’s center differential.
By using the center differential control
switch, you can set an initial LSD torque to
match the road surface conditions, driving
conditions and your driving style.
Starting and operating/Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)
– CONTINUED –
7-19
7
Black plate (418,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)
1) LSD torque
2) Traction torque
3) Initial LSD torque (maximum)
4) Initial LSD torque (minimum)
A) Initial LSD torque (adjustable)
B) Mechanical LSD torque
The driver’s control center differential has
an auto mode and a manual mode. In the
auto mode, the system automatically
adjusts the initia l LSD torque. In the
manual mode, you can change to the
desired mode manu ally by using the
center differential control switch.
NOTE
If you rapidly depress and release the
accelerator pedal while driving at low
speed, you may hear a knocking sound
from the vicinity of the center differen-
tial and rear differential. This sound
occurs because of the structure of the
center differential. It does not indicate a
problem.
& To change mode of driver’s
control center differential
Press the “AUTO-MANU” switch on the
center console to switch from auto mode
to manual mode or vice versa. When you
select the auto mode, the “AUTO” indica-
tor appears. When you select the manual
mode, the “AUTO” indicator disappears.
& Auto mode
In the auto mode, the system estimates
the driving and r oad conditions using
signals from t he wheel speed sensor,
throttle position sensor, steering angle
sensor and brake switch, etc. According
to the result, it electronically and auto-
matically controls the degree of limitation
of the differential action (LSD torque) to
optimize the differential action of the
center differential. When the igniti on
switch is turned ON, the “AUTO” indicator
on the combination meter appears.
7-20
Black plate (419,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
The auto mode has 3 modes as follows.
Mode Operation
AUTO [+] This mode emphasizes traction
control and strengthens the
limitation of differential action
that is suitable for driving on
slippery roads for vehicle stabi-
lity.
AUTO This mode is suitable for most
driving situations.
AUTO [−] This mode is suitable when you
seek quick response from the
steering wheel and smooth
driving.
! Mode setting method
In most situations, it is recommended that
the “AUTO” mode is selected.
Push the control switch forward to select
the “AUTO [+]” mode. After setting the
mode, “AUTO [+]” appears.
Pull the control switch rearward to select
the “AUTO [−]” mode. After setting the
mode, “AUTO [−]” appears.
When the “AUTO [+]” mode is selected,
pull the control switch rearward to change
to the “AUTO” mode. When the “AUTO
[−]” mode is set, push the control switch
forward to change to the “AUTO” mode.
& Manual mode
In the manual mode, you can use the
center differential control switch to adjust
the initial LSD torque as desired. When
this mode is selected, the “AUTO” indica-
tor disappears.
Starting and operating/Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)
– CONTINUED –
7-21
7
Black plate (420,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Driver’s Control Center Differential (C.DIFF/DCCD) (STI)
! Center differential control switch
and indicator
The control switch is located beside the
parking brake lever. By pushing the
control switch forward or pulling it rear-
ward, it is possible to change the initial
LSD torque.
The center differential indicator on the
combination meter gives s ix levels of
indication. The indicator and control
switch are linked; when the switch is
pushed or pulled to change the initial
LSD torque, the indicator changes accord-
ingly.
Push the switch forward to increase the
initial LSD torque; when the “LOCK”
indicator appears, the initial LSD torque
setting is maximum. The center differential
will then be almost completely locked.
Pull the switch rearward to reduce the
initial LSD torque. When the lowest posi-
tion of the driver’s control center differen-
tial indicator is displayed, the initial LSD
torque will be minimum. Under this condi-
tion, only the Mechanical LSD torque will
limit the differential action.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the control switch
when a wheel slippage occurs.
Wait until the wheelspin has been
brought under control.
. Under any of the following con-
ditions after setting to the man-
ual mode, pull the center differ-
ential control switch to minimize
the initial LSD torque:
7-22
Black plate (421,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
– When a temporary spare tire
is installed
– When your vehicle is towed
– When the vehicle is stopped
with the manual mode se-
lected
NOTE
. A higher initial LSD torque setting
gives the vehicle greater traction when
driving straight ahead but makes cor-
nering more difficult. Remember this
when adjusting the initial LSD torque.
In general, higher initial LSD torque
settings assist driving on slippery
roads and lower settings for non-slip-
pery roads. When the vehicle is stuck
in snow or mud, setting the initial LSD
torque to the maximum will help to free
the vehicle.
. The setting of the initial LSD torque
will remain even when the auto mode is
selected or the ignition switch is turned
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position. How-
ever, the initial LSD torque will be
minimized when the battery is discon-
nected and reconnected.
. During cornering or when making
turns (especially when going into the
garage), the rotational difference be-
tween the front and rear wheels may
cause a braking effect accompanied by
vibration and noise. This does not
indicate a problem. The phenomenon
will disappear when setting the initial
LSD torque to the minimum.
In the auto mode, it controls the initial
LSD torque automatically. While in the
auto mode, this phenomenon some-
times occurs depending on the driving
condition, however, it does not indicate
a problem.
. Use the center differential indicator
only as a rough indication of the initial
LSD torque.
. If you operate the center differential
control switch while quickly accelerat-
ing or turning a tight corner, you may
feel slight shocks. This is due to
differential action by the center differ-
ential and does not indicate a problem.
& Temporary release
When the driver stops the vehicle and
pulls the parking brake lever after manu-
ally setting the initial LSD torque, the LSD
torque is temporarily minimized. However
the indicator on the combination meter
continues to show the driver’s selected
initial LSD torque. When the driver re-
leases the parking brake lever, the initial
LSD torque set by the driver is restored.
Continuously variable trans-
mission
The continuously variable transmission is
electronically controlled and provides an
infinite number of forward speeds and 1
reverse speed. It also has a manual mode.
WARNING
Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
position into the “D” or “R” position
while depressing the accelerator
pedal. This may cause the vehicle
to jump forward or backward.
CAUTION
. Shift into the “P” or “R” position
only after the vehicle is comple-
tely stopped. Shifting while the
vehicle is moving may cause
damage to the transmission.
. Do not race the engine for more
than 5 seconds in any position
except the “N” or “P” position
when the brake is applied or
when chocks are used in the
wheels. This may cause the
transmission fluid to overheat.
. Never move the vehicle rearward
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
– CONTINUED –
7-23
7
Black plate (422,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
by inertia with the select lever set
in a forward position or move the
vehicle forward by inertia with
the select lever set in the reverse
position. Doing so may result in
an unexpected accident or mal-
function.
. Do not shift from the “D” position
into the “ R” position or vice
versa until the vehicle has com-
pletely stopped. Such shifting
may cause damage to the trans-
mission.
. When parking the vehicle, first
securely apply the parking brake
and then place the select lever in
the “P” position. Do not park for
a long time with the select lever
in any other position as doing so
could result in a dead battery.
NOTE
. When the engine coolant tempera-
ture is still low, the transmission will
upshift to higher engine speeds than
when the coolant temperature is suffi-
ciently high in order to shorten the
warm-up time and improve driveability.
The gearshift timing will automatically
shift to the normal timing after the
engine has warmed up.
. Immediately after transmission fluid
is replaced, you may feel that the
transmission operation is somewhat
unusual. This results from invalidation
of data which the on-board computer
has collected and stored in memory to
allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current
condition of your vehicle. Optimized
shifting will be restored as the vehicle
continues to be driven for a while.
. When driving a CVT model under
continuous heavy load conditions such
as when climbing a long, steep hill, the
engine speed or the vehicle speed may
automatically be reduced. This is not a
malfunction. This phenomenon results
from the engine control function main-
taining the cooling performance of the
vehicle. The engine and vehicle speed
will return to a normal speed when the
engine is able to maintain the optimum
cooling performance after the heavy
load decreases. Driving under a heavy
load must be performed with extreme
care.
. The continuously variable transmis-
sion is a chain type system that
provides superior transmission effi-
ciency for maximum fuel economy. At
times, depending on varying driving
conditions, a chain operating noise
may be heard that is characteristic of
this type of system.
& Select lever
1) Select lever button
7-24
Black plate (423,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
: With the brake pedal depressed, shift
while pressing the select lever button
in.
: Shift while pressing the select lever
button in.
: Shift without pressing the select lever
button.
The select lever has four positions, “P”,
“R”, “N”, “D” and it also has an “M” position
for using the manual mode.
NOTE
For some models, to protect the engine
while the select lever is in the “P” or
“N” position, the engine is controlled
so that the engine speed may not
become too high even if the accelerator
pedal is depressed hard.
! P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and
starting the engine. In this position, the
transmission is mechanically locked to
prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first apply the
parking brake firmly, then shift into the “P”
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the mechanical friction of the transmis-
sion.
To shift the select lever from the “P”
position to any other position, you should
depress the brake pedal fully then move
the select lever. This prevents the vehicle
from lurching when it is started.
! R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle. To
shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the
vehicle completely then move the lever to
the “R” position while pressing the select
lever button in.
When the ignition switch has been turned
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, movement
of the select lever from the “N” to “R”
position is possible for a limited time
period by depressing the brake pedal,
and then it becomes impossible. For
details, refer to “Shift lock function” F7-27.
! N (Neutral)
This position is for restarting a stalled
engine. In this position, the transmission is
neutral, meaning that the wheels and
transmission are not locked. Therefore,
the vehicle will roll freely, even on the
slightest incline unless the parking brake
or foot brake is applied.
Avoid coasting with the transmission in
neutral. Engine braking has no effect in
this condition.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
select lever in the “N” (neutral)
position. Engine braking has no
effect in this condition and the risk
of an accident is consequently in-
creased.
NOTE
If the select lever is in the “N” position
when you stop the engine for parking,
you may not subsequently be able to
move it to the “R” and “P” positions. If
this happens, turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position. You will then be able
to move the select lever to the “P”
position.
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
– CONTINUED –
7-25
7
Black plate (424,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
! D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving. The
transmission shifts automatically and con-
tinuously into a suitable gear according to
the vehicle speed and the acceleration
you require. Also, while driving up and
down a hill, the transmission assists and
controls the driving performance and
engine braking while corresponding to
the road grade.
When more acceleration is required in the
“D” position, depress the accelerator
pedal fully to the floor and hold that
position. The transmission will automati-
cally downshift. If the Intelligent (I) mode
or the Sport (S) mode has been selected,
the transmission will operate like a con-
ventional automatic transmission. When
you release the pedal, the transmission
will return to the original gear position.
If one of the shift paddles behind the
steering wheel is operated while driving in
the “D” position, the transmission will
temporarily switch to the manual mode.
In this mode, you can shift into any gear
position using the shift paddles. For de-
tails about the manual mode, refer to
“Selection of manual mode” F7-26. Once
the vehicle speed stabilizes, the transmis-
sion will switch from the manual mode
back to the “D” position for normal driving.
& Selection of manual mode
With the vehicle either moving or station-
ary, move the select lever from the “D”
position to the “M” position to select the
manual mode.
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator and upshift indica-
tor and/or downshift indicator on the
combination meter appear.
The gear position indicator shows the
currently selected gear in the following
range.
. 1st-to-8th-gear range (when the Sport
Sharp (S#) mode is selected)
. 1st-to-6th-gear range (in other situa-
tions)
The upshift and downshift indicators show
when a gear shift is possible. When the
upshift indicator “
” appears, upshifting is
possible. When the downshift indicator
7-26
Black plate (425,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
“ ” appears, downshifting is possible.
When both indicators appear, upshifting
and downshifting are both possible. When
the vehicle stops (for example, at traffic
signals), the downshift indicator turns off.
Gearshifts can be performed using the
shift paddle behind the steering wheel.
To upshift to the next higher gear position,
pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated
on it. To downshift to the next lower gear
position, pull the shift paddle that has “–”
indicated on it.
To deselect the manual mode, return the
select lever to the “D” position from the “M”
position.
CAUTION
Do not place or hang anything on
the shift p addles. Doing so may
result in accidental gear shifting.
NOTE
Please read the following points care-
fully and bear them in mind when using
the manual mode.
. If you attempt to shift down when
the engine speed is too high, i.e., when
a downshift would push the tachometer
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
be emitted to warn you that the down-
shift is not possible.
. If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-
sion will not respond.
. You can perform a skip-shift (for
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating
the shift paddle twice in rapid succes-
sion.
. The transmission automatically se-
lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
moving.
. If the temperature of the transmis-
sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT
OIL TEMP” warning light on the combi-
nation meter will illuminate. Immedi-
ately stop the vehicle in a safe location
and let the engine idle until the warning
light turns off.
. By selecting the Sport Sharp (S#)
mode, upshifting will not occur auto-
matically. According to the road condi-
tions, shift change manually so that the
tachometer needle does not enter the
red zone. Also, if the engine revolu-
tions reach the specified number, the
fuel supply will be cut. In this case,
perform shift up operation.
& Shift lock function
The shift lock function helps prevent the
improper operation of the select lever.
. The select lever cannot be operated
unless the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
. The select lever cannot be moved from
the “P” position to any other position
before the brake pedal is depressed.
Depress the brake pedal first, and then
operate the select lever.
. Only the “P” position allows you to turn
the ignition switch from the “ACC” position
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and remove
the key from the ignition switch.
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position while the select
lever is in the “N” position, the select lever
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
– CONTINUED –
7-27
7
Black plate (426,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
may not be moved to the “P” position after
a period of time. Therefore, move the
select lever to the “ P” position with the
brake pedal depressed soon after the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
! Shift lock release
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
the ignition switch back to the “ON”
position then move the select lever to the
“P” position with the select lever button
pressed and brake pedal depressed.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, perform
the following steps.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “P” to “N”:
Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button” F7-28.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:
Within 60 seconds after placing the igni-
tion switch in the “ACC” position, move the
select lever to the “ P” position with the
select lever button pressed and brake
pedal depressed.
If you must perform the above procedure,
the shift lock system (or the vehicle control
system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a
SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon
as possible.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, refer to
“Shift lock release using the shift lock
release button” F7-28.
! Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button
Perform the following procedure to release
the shift lock.
1. Apply the parking brake and stop the
engine.
2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to
remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock
release button is located under the shift
lock cover.
3. While depressing the brake pedal,
insert a screwdriver into the hole, press
the shift lock release button using a
screwdriver, and then move the select
lever.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, the shift
lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-
tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection
as soon as possible.
& Driving tips
. Always apply the foot or parking brake
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or
“R” position.
. Always apply the parking brake when
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
vehicle with only the mechanical friction
of the transmission.
7-28
Black plate (427,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade by using the
“D” position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
This phenomenon does not indicate a
malfunction.
SI-DRIVE (STI)
SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intel ligent Drive)
works to maximize engine performance,
control and efficiency.
This system consists of three modes:
Intelligent (I), Sport (S), and Sport Sharp
(S#). By adjusting the SI-DRIVE selector,
the character of the power unit changes.
& Intelligent (I) mode
! For smooth, efficient performance
driving
The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-
balanced performance with greater fuel
efficiency and smooth driveability without
stress. Power delivery is moderate during
acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.
This is ideal for around-town driving and
situations that do not require full power
output. It provides better control in difficult
driving conditions, such as slippery roads
or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle
response.
When the Intelligent (I) mode is selected,
a shift-up indicator “
” on the combina-
tion meter will blink to signal the best time
to shift gears for maximum fuel efficiency.
Starting and operating/SI–DRIVE (STI)
– CONTINUED –
7-29
7
Black plate (428,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/SI–DRIVE (STI)
& Sport (S) mode
! For all-around performance driving
The Sport (S) mode provides the engine
power desired by those who want to make
the driving experience their own personal
adventure.
The linear acceleration characteristic of
this versatile mode is ideal for normal
driving use.
& Sport Sharp (S#) mode
! For maximum performance driving
For sports-minded drivers, the S port
Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating
level of engine performance and control.
The throttle becomes more responsive
regardless of the engine speed. Delivering
maximum driving enjoyment, this mode is
ideal for tackling twisting roads and for
merging or overtaking other vehicles on
the freeway with confidence.
& SI-DRIVE selector
When you rotate the SI-DRIVE selector to
the left, the current SI-DRIVE mode
changes to the Sport (S) mode. When
yourotateittotheright,themode
changes to the Sport Sharp (S#) mode,
and when you push it, the mode changes
to the Intelligent (I) mode. After performing
this operation, the switch returns to its
original location.
NOTE
. Thenexttimeyouturnonthe
engine, after you turned off the engine
in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, the SI-
DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S)
mode.
. Thenexttimeyouturnonthe
engine, after you turned off the engine
in the Sport (S) mode or Intelligent (I)
7-30
Black plate (429,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
mode, the SI-DRIVE mode will stay in
the same mode as when the engine
was turned off.
. While the engine is running, if the
CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc-
tion indicator light illuminates, the SI-
DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S)
mode. In this case, it is not possible to
change to the Sport Sharp (S#) mode or
Intelligent (I) mode.
. If there is a possibility that the
engine could overheat because of a
temperature increase of the engine
coolant, it is not possible to change to
the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. While the
vehicle is in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode,
it changes to the Sport (S) mode when
the engine coolant temperature in-
creases.
. If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators
blin k, the SI-DRIVE s ystem may be
malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU
dealer.
. While the engine is cool, you cannot
change to Sport Sharp (S#) mode.
SI-DRIVE (except STI: CVT
models)
SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intel ligent Drive)
works to maximize engine performance,
control and efficiency.
This system consists of three modes:
Intelligent (I), Sport (S), and Sport Sharp
(S#). By operating the SI-DRIVE switches,
the character of the power unit changes.
& Intelligent (I) mode
! For smooth, efficient performance
driving
The linear acceleration characteristic of
the Intelligent (I) mode is ideal for normal
driving usage.
The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-
balanced performance with greater fuel
efficiency and smooth driveability without
stress. Power delivery is moderate during
acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.
This is ideal for around-town driving and
situations that do not require full power
output. It provides better control in difficult
driving conditions, such as slippery roads
or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle
response.
& Sport (S) mode
! For all-around performance driving
The Sport (S) mode provides the engine
power desired by those who want to make
the driving experience their own personal
adventure.
Starting and operating/SI–DRIVE (except STI: CVT models)
– CONTINUED –
7-31
7
Black plate (430,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/SI–DRIVE (except STI: CVT models)
& Sport Sharp (S#) mode
! For maximum performance driving
For sports-minded drivers, the Sport
Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating
level of engine performance and control.
The throttle becomes more responsive
regardless of the engine speed. Delivering
maximum driving enjoyment, this mode is
ideal for tackling twisting roads and for
merging or overtaking other vehicles on
the freeway with confidence.
When you select the Sport Sharp (S#)
mode while the select lever is in the “D”
position, the transmission gear ratio will
shift from variable speed to eight-speed.
The select lever/gear position indicator
display will change from “D” to the gear
position.
When selecting Sport Sharp (S#) mode,
the following controls will be applied.
Uphill control: Prevents unnecessary
shift-up/shift-down during ascent.
Cornering control: While turning, if there
is a large centrifugal force, shift-up will not
occur: during re-acceleration.
Braking control: At the beginning of
corners etc., heavy application of the
brake pedal will cause automatic down-
shift and gently re-accelerate.
Sudden acceleration return control:
During acceleration, if acceleration pedal
is returned suddenly (for example, at
corners etc.), shift-up will not be applied.
& SI-DRIVE switches
NOTE
If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators blink,
the SI-DRIVE system may be malfunc-
tioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer.
SI-DRIVE switches
To select the Intelligent (I) mode, perform
either of the following procedures.
. Press the “S/I” switch when the Sport
(S) mode is selected
. Press the “S#/I” switch when the Sport
Sharp (S#) mode is selected
To select the Sport (S) mode, press the “S/
I” switch when any mode other than Sport
(S) mode is selected.
To select the Sport Sharp (S#) mode,
press the “S#/I” switch when any mode
7-32
Black plate (431,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
other than Sport Sharp (S#) mode is
selected.
NOTE
. The ne xt time you turn on the
engine, after you turned off the engine
in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, the SI-
DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S)
mode.
. The ne xt time you turn on the
engine, after you turned off the engine
in the Sport (S) mode or Intelligent (I)
mode, the SI-DRIVE mode will stay in
the same mode as when the engine
was turned off.
. While the engine is running, if the
CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc-
tion indicator light illuminates, the SI-
DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S)
mode. In this case, it is not possible to
change to another mode.
. If there is a possibility that the
engine could overheat because of a
temperature increase of the engine
coolant, it is not possible to change to
the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. While the
vehicle is in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode,
it changes to the Sport (S) mode when
the engine coolant temperature in-
creases.
. While the engine is cool, you cannot
change to Sport Sharp (S#) mode.
Limited slip differential (LSD)
(STI)
The LSD provides optimum distribution of
power according to t he difference in
revolutions between the right and left
wheels that may be caused by certain
driving conditions, thereby improving driv-
ing stability on snow-covered, muddy or
other slippery roads or when high speed
driving.
CAUTION
. Never start the engine while a tire
on one side is jacked up, as the
vehicle may move.
. If one tire is spinning in mud,
avoid continued spinning at high
speed as this could adversely
affect the LSD.
. If you use a temporary spare tire
to replace a flat tire, be sure to
use the original temporary spare
tire stored in the vehicle. Using
other sizes will adversely affect
the LSD.
Power steering
& STI
The vehicle is equipped with a hydraulic
power steering system. The power steer-
ing system operates only when the engine
is running.
If you lose power steering assist because
the engine stops or the system fails to
function, you can steer but it will take
much more effort.
CAUTION
Do not hold the steering wheel at the
fully locked position left or right for
more than 5 seconds. This may
damage the power steering pump.
NOTE
Right after the engine has been started
and before it has warmed up, you may
hear a noise coming from areas adja-
cent to the power steering pump which
is located at the right-front area of the
engine compartment. This noise is
normal. It does not indicate power
steering system trouble.
Starting and operating/Limited slip differential (LSD) (STI)
– CONTINUED –
7-33
7
Black plate (432,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Power steering
& Except STI
Power steering warning light
The vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering system. The power steer-
ing system operates only while the engine
is running. When the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position, the power
steering warning light on the combination
meter illuminates to inform the driver that
the warning system is functioning properly.
Then, if the engine started, the warning
light turns off to inform the driver that the
steering power assist is operational.
CAUTION
While the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the vehicle inspected immedi-
ately.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following w ays, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from
overheating.
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
quently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
speeds, such as while frequently turn-
ing the steering wheel during parallel
parking.
. The steering wheel remains in the
fully turned position for a long period
of time.
At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
an opportunity to cool down. However,
if the power steering is operated in a
non-standard way which causes power
assist limitation to occur too fre-
quently, this may result in a malfunc-
tion of the power steering control
system.
7-34
Black plate (433,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Braking
& Braking tips
WARNING
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
dangerous overheating of the
brakes and needless wear on the
brake pads and linings.
! When the brakes get wet
When driving in rain or after washing the
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
result, brake stopping distance will be
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle
at a safe speed while lightly depressing
the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
! Use of engine braking
Remember to make use of engine braking
in addition to foot braking. When descend-
ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
the brakes may start working improperly
because of brake fluid overheating,
caused by overheated brake pads. To
help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to
get stronger engine braking.
! Braking when a tire is punctured
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep
driving straight ahead while gradually
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
& Brake system
! Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has two separate circuit
brake systems. Each circuit works diag-
onally across the vehicle. If one circuit of
the brake system should fail, the other half
of the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer
to the floor than usual and you will need to
press it down much harder. And a much
longer distance will be needed to stop the
vehicle.
! Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine manifold
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not
turn off the engine while driving because
that will turn off the brake booster, result-
ing in poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even
when the brake booster completely stops
functioning. If this happens, however, you
will have to depress the pedal much
harder than normal and the braking dis-
tance will increase.
! Brake assist system
WARNING
Do not be overconfident about the
brake assist. It is not a system that
brings more braking ability to the
vehicle beyond its braking capabil-
ity. Always use the utmost care
when driving regarding vehicle
speed and safe distance.
CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly,
continue depressing the brake pedal
strongly to obtain the effect of the
brake assist.
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
and the brake power is insufficient.
Brake assist generates the brake power
according to the speed at which the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
NOTE
When you depress the b rake pedal
strongly or suddenly, the following
phenomena occur. However, even
though these occur, they do not indi-
Starting and operating/Braking
– CONTINUED –
7-35
7
Black plate (434,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/ABS (Anti–lock Brake System)
cate any malfunctions, and the brake
assist system is operating properly.
. You might feel that the brake pedal
is applied by lighter force and gener-
ates a greater braking force.
. You might hear an ABS operating
noise from the engine compartment.
& Disc brake pad wear warning
indicators
The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
tors on the disc brakes give a warning
noise when the brake pads are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
from the disc brakes while braking, im-
mediately have your vehicle checked by
your SUBARU dealer.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
tem)
The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels
which may occur during sudden braking or
braking on slippery road surfaces. This
helps prevent the loss of steering control
and directional stability caused by wheel
lock-up.
When the ABS is operating, you may hear
a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration
in the brake pedal. This is normal when
the ABS operates.
The ABS will not operate when the vehicle
speed is below approximately 6 mph (10
km/h).
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because
you are driving a vehicle with the
ABS could easily lead to a serious
accident.
CAUTION
. The ABS does not always de-
crease stopping distance. You
should always maintain a safe
following distance from other
vehicles.
. When driving on badly surfaced
roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or
over deep newly fallen snow,
stopping distances may be long-
er for a vehicle with the ABS than
one without. When driving under
these conditions, therefore, re-
duce your speed and leave ample
distance from other vehicles.
. When you feel the ABS operating,
you should maintain constant
brake pedal pressure. Do not
pump the brake pedal since
doing so may defeat the opera-
tion of the ABS system.
& ABS self-check
Just after the vehicle is started, you may
feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar
to when the ABS operates, and you may
also hear the sound of the ABS working
from the engine compartment. This is
caused by an automatic functional test of
the ABS being carried out and does not
indicate any abnormal condition.
7-36
Black plate (435,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& ABS warning light
Refer to “ABS warning light” F3-20.
Electronic Brake Force Dis-
tribution (EBD) system
The EBD system maximizes the effective-
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
brakes to supply a greater proportion of
the braking force. It functions by adjusting
the distribution of braking force to the rear
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the
ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-
nents to perform its function of optimizing
the distribution of braking force. If any of
the ABS components used by the EBD
system malfunction, the EBD system also
stops working.
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction.
& Steps to take if EBD system
malfunctions
Brake and ABS warning light
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
the system stops working and the brake
system warning light and ABS warning
light illuminate simultaneously.
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the brake system warning light and ABS
warning l ight illuminate simultan eously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the
conventional braking system will still func-
tion. However, the rear wheels will be
more prone to locking when the brakes
are applied harder than usual and the
vehicle’s motion may therefore become
somewhat harder to control.
Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system
– CONTINUED –
7-37
7
Black plate (436,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warni ng light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps.
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat location.
2. Apply the parking brake and turn off
the engine.
3. Restart the engine.
4. Release the parking brake.
Even if both warning lights turn off:
The EBD system may be malfunctioning.
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after restarting
the engine:
1. Turn off the engine again.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Check the brake fluid level. For details
about checking the brake fluid level, refer
to “Checking the fluid level” F11-25.
. If the brake fluid level is not below the
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Drive c arefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light illuminated is dan-
gerous. This indicates your brake
system may not be working
properly. If the light remains
illuminated, have the brakes in-
spected by a SUBARU dealer
immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating prop-
erly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
pair.
Vehicle Dynamics Control
system
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because
you are driving a vehicle with the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
could easily lead to a serious acci-
dent.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with Vehicle Dynamics Control
system, winter tires should be
used when driving on snow-cov-
ered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having a
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem does not guarantee that the
vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system is an
indication that the road being
travelled on has a slippery sur-
face; since having Vehicle Dy-
7-38
Black plate (437,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
namics Control is no guarantee
that full vehicle control will be
maintained at all times and under
all conditions, its activation
should be seen as a sign that
the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension compo-
nents, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a
vehicle, have an inspection of
that system performed by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. The following precautions should
be observed in order to ensure
that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system is operating properly:
– All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Further-
more, the amount of wear
should be the same for all
four tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
vehicle placard attached to
the driver’s side door pillar.
– Use only the specified tem-
porary spare tire to replace a
flat tire. With a temporary
spare tire, the effectiveness
of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system is reduced and
this should be taken into ac-
count when driving the vehi-
cle in such a condition.
. If non-matching tires are used,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system may not operate cor-
rectly.
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control
system helps prevent unstable
vehicle motion such as skidding
using control of the brakes and
engine power. Do not turn off the
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem unless it is absolutely ne-
cessary. If you must turn off the
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem, drive very carefully accord-
ing to the road surface condition.
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
on a slippery road surface and/or during
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
adjusts the engine’s output and the
wheels’ respective braking forces to help
maintain traction and directional control.
. Traction Control Function
The traction control function is designed to
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
maintain traction and directional control.
Activation of this function is shown by
flas hing the Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light.
. Skid Suppression Function
The skid suppression function is designed
to help maintain directional stability by
suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide
sideways during steering operations. Acti-
vation of this function is shown by flashing
of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light.
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indi-
cator light
NOTE
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem may be considered normal when
Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
– CONTINUED –
7-39
7
Black plate (438,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
the following conditions occur.
– Slight twitching of the brake
pedal is felt.
– The vehicle or steering wheel
shakes to a small degree.
– An operating sound from the
engine compartment is heard
briefly when starting the engine
and when driving off after starting
the engine.
– The brake pedal seems to jolt
when driving off after starting the
engine.
. In the circumstances shown in the
following list, the vehicle may be less
stable than it feels to the driver. The
Vehicle Dynamics Control System may
therefore operate. Such operation does
not indicate a system malfunction.
– on gravel-covered or rutted
roads
– on unfinished roads
– when the vehicle is fitted with
snow tires or winter tires
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will cause operation of
the steering wheel to feel slightly
different compared to that for normal
conditions.
. It is always important to reduce
speed when approaching a corner,
even if your vehicle is equipped with
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
. Always turn off the engine before
replacing a tire. Failure to do so may
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system unable to operate correctly.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
system monitor
Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-
ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light” F3-26 and “Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light/
Traction mode indicator light” F3-27.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF switch
1) Traction mode indicator light
2) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator
light
7-40
Black plate (439,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
When the switch is pressed briefly or for
more than approximately 2 seconds dur-
ing engine operation, the mode of the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be
changed.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control mode
When the ignition switch is on, this mode
is selected.
This mode enables all controls for ABS,
the Traction Control System, and the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Select
this mode for most driving situations.
When this mode is selected, both indicator
lights on the combination meter turn off.
! Traction mode
This mode restricts the functions of the
Traction Co ntrol System and Veh icle
Dynamics Control system and thus delays
utilizing their functions as a reaction to
vehicle behavior in comparison with the
Vehicle Dynamics Control mode. This
mode should be used in driving situations
where the vehicle dynamic performance
will improve without decreasing engine
torque control.
When the switch is pressed briefly during
engine operation, the traction mode in-
dicator light and the Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator light on the combi-
nation meter illuminate. When the switch
is pressed again to reactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system, the traction
mode indicator li ght and the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light turn
off.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
mode
This mode allows only the ABS control.
This mode should be used in an emer-
gency situation such as getting out of
snow or mud.
When the switch is pressed for more than
approximately 2 seconds during engine
operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light on the combination
meter illuminates. When the switch is
pressed again to reactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control sy stem, the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
turns off.
NOTE
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position with the Vehi-
cle Dynamics Control system deacti-
vated, the system will be automatically
reactivated the next time the engine is
started.
. If the switch is held down for 30
seconds or l onger, the Vehicle D y-
namics Control OFF indicator light
turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is activated, and the system
ignores any further pressing of the
switch. To ma ke the switch usable
again, turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the
engine.
. When the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF mode is selected, the vehicle’s
running performance is compa rabl e
with that of a vehicle that does not
have a Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem. Do not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except when
absolutely necessary.
. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF mode is selected, compo-
Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
– CONTINUED –
7-41
7
Black plate (440,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.–spec. models)
nents of the brake control system may
still activate. When the brake control
system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control operation indicator
light illuminates.
Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.
models)
Low tire pressure warning light
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message
by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,
this system may not react immediately to a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
a blow-out caused by ru nning over a
sharp object).
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead,
perform the following procedure.
Otherwise, an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and ser-
ious personal injury could occur.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
safe place.
(3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure
to the COLD tire pressure
shown on the vehicle placard
on the door pillar on the
driver’s side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a
very short distance, the tires get
warm and their pressures in-
crease accordingly. Be sure to
let the tires cool thoroughly be-
fore adjusting their pressures to
the standard values shown on
the tire placard. Refer to “Tires
and wheels” F11-31. The tire
pressure monitoring system
does not function when the ve-
7-42
Black plate (441,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
hicle is stationary. After adjusting
the tire pressures, increase the
vehicle speed to at least 20 mph
(32 km/h) to start the TPMS
rechecking of the tire inflation
pressures. If the tire pressures
are now above the severe low
pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning light should
turn off a few minutes later.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the TPMS is un-
able to monitor all four road
wheels. Contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible for
tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
. When a tire is repaired with liquid
sealant, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid sea-
lant is used, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer or other qualified
service shop as soon as possi-
ble. Make sure to replace the tire
pressure warning va lve and
transmitter when replacing the
tire. You may reuse the wheel if
there is no damage to it and if the
sealant residue is properly
cleaned off. Do not inject any tire
liquid or aerosol tire sealant into
the tires, as this may cause a
malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors. If the light illuminates
steadily after blink ing for a p-
proximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU
dealer to have the system in-
spected.
CAUTION
Do not place metal film or any metal
parts in the trunk. This may cause
poor reception of the signals from
the tire pressure sensors, and the
tire pressure monitoring system will
not function properly.
FCC ID: CWTWD1U781
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, includi ng
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.–spec. models)
7-43
7
Black plate (442,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle
Parking your vehicle
WARNING
. Never leave unattended children
or pets in the vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, the tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to them.
. Do no t p ark the veh icle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as
they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust sys-
tem parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If
engine exhaust gas enters the
passenger compartment, occu-
pants in the vehicle could die
from carbon monoxide (CO) con-
tained in the exhaust gas.
& Parking brake (models with-
out electronic parking brake
system)
To set the parking brake, depress the
brake pedal firmly and hold it down until
the parking brake lever is fully pulled up.
To release the parking brake, perform the
following procedure.
1. Pull the lever up slightly.
2. Press the release button.
3. Lower the lever while keeping the
button pressed.
When the parking brake is set while the
engine is running, the parking brake
warning light illuminates. A fter starting
the vehicle, be sure that the warning light
has turned off before the vehicle is driven.
Refer to “Parking brake indicator (models
without electronic parking brake system)”
F3-21.
CAUTION
Never drive while the parking brake
is set because this will cause un-
necessary wear on the brake lin-
ings. Before starting to drive, always
make sure that the parking brake
has been fully released.
& Electronic parking brake
(models with electronic
parking brake system)
1) Parking brake switch
2) Indicator light
3) Release the electronic parking brake
4) Apply the electronic parking brake
7-44
Black plate (443,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
WARNING
. Before exiting the vehicle, make
sure that you turn off the engine.
Otherwise, the parking brake
may be released and an accident
may occur.
. If the brake system warning light
turns on, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunc-
tioning. Immediately stop your
vehicle in a safe location, use
tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving
and contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
. If the electronic parking brake is
operated when the brake is over-
heated or the vehicle is on a
steep slope, the electronic park-
ing brake indicator l ight may
flash. In this case, the vehicle
may start to move and it may lead
to an accident. Always use the
tire stops.
CAUTION
. When the electronic parking
brake system has a malfunction
and the parking brake cannot be
applied, contact your SUBARU
dealer immediately for an inspec-
tion. If you have to park your
vehicle in such conditions, per-
form the following procedure.
– Stop your vehicle in a flat
location.
– Shift the select lever in the “P”
position. When the select le-
ver cannot be shifted into the
“P” position, you must re-
lease shift lock. Refer to “Shift
lock function” F7-27.
– Use tire stops under the tires
to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
. Never drive while the parking
brake is applied because this will
cause unnecessary wear on the
brake linings. Before starting to
drive, always make sure that the
parking brake has been released
and the brake system warning
light has turned off.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
parking brake. You can apply/release the
parking brake by operating the parking
brake switch.
To apply: Depress the brake pedal and
pull up the parking brake switch.
To release: Press the parki ng brake
switch firmly while the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
When the parking brake is applied while
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the electronic parking brake indicator light
and the indicator light on the parking brake
switch illuminate. Refer to “Brake system
warning light” F3-21.
NOTE
. If the par king br ake swi tch is
pressed with the ignition switch in the
“ACC” or “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the
parking brake is not released.
. If the par king br ake swi tch is
pressed without depressing the brake
pedal, the parking brake is not re-
leased.
. The electronic parking brake system
uses motors to apply the parking
brake. Therefore, operating sounds
from the motors will be heard when
applying or releasi ng the parking
brake. Make sure that the m otor
sounds are heard when applying or
releasing the parking brake.
. When the electronic parking brake
system has a malfunction or the elec-
tronic parking brake operation is pro-
hibited temporarily, if the parking brake
Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle
– CONTINUED –
7-45
7
Black plate (444,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle
switch is operated, a chirp sound is
heard and the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes.
. When you cannot release the park-
ing brake due to, for example, a system
malfunction, contact your SUBARU
dealer and have your SUBARU dealer
release the parking brake.
. If the operation of the electronic
parking brake switch is stopped mid-
way or performed extremely slowly, the
system may detect an error and turn on
the brake system warning light. How-
ever, this does not indicate a malfunc-
tion if the brake system warning light
turns off after operating the switch.
. When the electronic parking brake
has not been used for a long period of
time, the electronic parking brake may
operate automatically after the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”
position. This occurs due to checking
the proper operation of the electronic
parking brake and does not indicate a
malfunction.
. If the electronic parking brake
switch is malfunctioning and the elec-
tronic parking brake cannot be re-
leased, refer to the instructions de-
scribed in “Automatic release function
by accelerator pedal” F7-46.
After activating the EPB, you may hear
a short sound several minutes after the
electronic parking brake indicator light
illuminates as the system confirms
proper engagement. This sound is
different from the apply and release
sound.
This can occur:
– If the brakes are extremely hot.
– If the car is parked on a steep
incline.
– If the electronic parking brake is
applied after the ignition switch is
turned OFF.
This is a normal operating sound under
any of these conditions.
! Automatic release function by ac-
celerator pedal
The electronic parking brake system has
an automatic release function. The park-
ing brake will be automatically released by
depressing the accelerator pedal. How-
ever, the automatic release function does
not operate under the following conditions.
. Any door (other than the trunk lid) is
open.
. The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.
If the parking bra ke is automatically
released, the electronic parking brake
indicator light and the indicator light on
the parking brake switch turn off.
NOTE
Even if you have applied the parking
brake, the parking brake will be auto-
matically released when the accelera-
tor pedal is depressed.
! Hill Holder function
The electronic parking brake system has a
Hill Holder function. If the Hill Holder
function is activated, the parking brake
will be automatically applied when stop-
ping on an uphill slope with the brake
pedal depressed. In this case, the electro-
nic parking brake indicator light and the
indicator light on the parking brake switch
illuminate.
The Hill Holder function also operates
while driving uphill in reverse.
NOTE
. The Hill Holder function may not
activate on a gentle uphill slope. In this
case, manually apply the electronic
parking brake.
. If you do not depress the brake
pedal sufficiently, the Hill Holder func-
tion may not operate properly. How-
ever, this is not a malfunction. When
stopping on an uphill slope, depress
the brake pedal firmly and release it
after the electronic parking brake in-
7-46
Black plate (445,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
dicator light illuminates.
. Depending on the condition of the
road surface and braking force, the
brakes operate temporarily and feel
different than usual.
. When the electronic parking brake
system has a malfunction while the Hill
Holder function is activated, a chirp
sound is heard, the Hill Holder indica-
tor light turns off and the brake system
warning light turns on.
. When the hill holder activates on a
slope, the electronic parking brake is
engaged. The electronic parking brake
will release when you accelerate from
the stop. If you manually release the
electronic parking brake while the hill
holder is acti vated, the hill holder
function is cancelled and will not re-
engage until the vehicle has moved
some distance. In that case, you will
need to manually engage the electronic
parking brake if needed.
! Hill Holder switch
WARNING
When stopping on an uphill slope
with the Hill Holder function acti-
vated, release the brake pedal after
the electronic parking brake indica-
tor light has illuminated. Otherwise,
the Hill Holder function may not
operate properly and an accident
may occur.
You can activate/deactivate the Hill Holder
function by pressing the Hill Holder switch.
To activate: Press the Hill Holder switch.
To deactivate: Press the Hill Holder
switch again.
Deactivate the Hill Holder function under
the following conditions.
. When towing a trailer
. When carrying a heavy load
. When you do not frequently use the
parking brake when stopping on an uphill
slope
NOTE
. If the Hill Holder switch is pressed
for mo re than 30 seconds, the Hill
Holder indicator light turns off, and
the system ignores any further press-
ing of the switch. To activate the switch
again, turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the
engine.
. When the Hill Holder function is
deactivated while the Hill Holder func-
tion has a malfunction, if you press the
Hill Holder switch, a chirp sounds.
Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle
– CONTINUED –
7-47
7
Black plate (446,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle
! Hill Holder indicator light
When the Hill Holder function is activated,
the Hill Holder indicator light illuminates.
Refer to “Hill Holder indicator light (models
with electronic parking brake system)”
F3-24.
! Emergency brake
CAUTION
Use the emergency brake only in
case of an emergency. If the emer-
gency brake is excessively used,
the brake parts will wear down
faster or the brake may not work
sufficiently due to brake overheat-
ing.
NOTE
. While using the emergency brake,
the electronic parking brake indicator
light and the indicator li ght on the
parking brake switch illuminate and a
chirp sounds.
. While using the emergency brake, a
sound may be heard from the engine
compartment. This is the operating
sound of the brake that is activated by
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system,
and does not indicate a malfunction.
If the foot brake has a malfunction, you
can stop the vehicle by pulling the parking
brake switch continuously.
While applying the emergency brake, the
electronic parking brake indicator light and
the indicator light on the parking brake
switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
CAUTION
If the brake system warning light
turns on, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunction-
ing. Immediately stop your vehicle
in the nearest safe location and
contact your SUBARU dealer.
If a malfunction occurs in the electronic
parking brake system, the brake system
warning light turns on. Refer to “Electronic
parking brake indicator light (models with
electronic parking brake system)” F3-23.
& Parking tips
When parking your vehicle, always per-
form the following items.
. Apply the parking brake firmly.
. For MT models, put the shift lever in the
“1” (1st) for upgrade or “ R” (Reverse) for a
downgrade.
. For CVT models, put the select lever in
the “P” (Park) position.
Never rely on the mechanical friction of
the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, always turn the
steering wheel. When the vehicle is
7-48
Black plate (447,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
headed up the hill, the front wheels should
be turned away from the curb.
When facing downhill, the front wheels
should be turned into the curb.
WARNING
. Never leave unattended children
or pets in the vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, the tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to people.
. Do no t p ark the veh icle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as
they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust sys-
tem parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If
engine exhaust gas enters the
passenger compartment, occu-
pants in the vehicle could die
from carbon monoxide (CO) con-
tained in the exhaust gas.
CAUTION
If your vehicle has a front under-
spoiler and rear underspoiler (both
optional), pay attention to blocks
and other obstructions on the
ground when parking. The under-
spoilers could be damaged by con-
tact with them.
Hill start assist system
(models without electronic
parking brake system)
WARNING
. The Hill start assist system is a
device only for helping the driver
to START the vehicle on an uphill
grade. To prevent accidents
when the vehicle is parked on a
slope, be sure to firmly set the
parking brake. When setting the
parking brake, make sure that the
vehicle remains stationary when
the clutch pedal (MT models) and
brake pedal (both MT and CVT
models) are released.
. Do not turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
the Hill start assist system is
operating. The Hill start assist
system will be deactivated, caus-
ing an accident.
The Hill start assist system is a device to
make the foll owing vehicle operations
easier.
Starting and operating/Hill start assist system (models without electronic parking brake system)
– CONTINUED –
7-49
7
Black plate (448,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Hill start assist system (models without electronic parking brake system)
1) Starting forward facing uphill
2) Starting backward facing downhill
A) Brake pedal (both MT models and CVT
models)
B) Clutch pedal (MT models only)
In both these cases, the Hill start assist
system operates under the following con-
ditions.
. when the clutch pedal is depressed
while the brake pedal is also depressed
(MT models)
. when the vehicle has stopped with the
brake pedal depressed (CVT models)
Braking power is maintained temporarily
(for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill
start assist system after the brake pedal is
released. The driver is therefore able to
start the vehicle in the same way as on a
level grade, just using the clutch pedal
(MT models only) and accelerator pedal
(all models).
If the braking power of the Hill start assist
system is insufficient after the brake pedal
is released, apply more braking power by
depressing the brake pedal again.
The Hill start assist system m ay not
operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill
start assist system does not operate in the
following cases.
. when starting backward facing uphill
. when starting forward facing downhill
. while the parking brake is applied
. while the ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “LOCK”/“OFF” position
. while the Hill start assist warning light/
7-50
Black plate (449,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Hill start assist OFF indicator light is
illuminated
When using the Hill start assist system, a
braking effect may be felt even after the
brake pedal has been released. However,
this braking effect should disappear once
the clutch pedal is released.
NOTE
A sl ight jolt may be felt when the
vehicle begins to move forward after
being reversed.
& To activate/deactivate the Hill
start assist system
CAUTION
While the Hill start assist system is
deactivated, when starting on an
uphill grade, braking power is not
maintained if the brake pedal is
released. Start on an uphill grade
by using the parking brake.
You can activate/deactivate the Hill start
assist system according to the following
procedure.
NOTE
If you make an error when performing
any steps in the following procedure,
place the ignition switch in the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position once and then
start over again.
! To deactivate
1. Park your vehicle in a flat and safe
location and apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
3. Restart the engine.
4. Confirm the following items.
(1) The Brake system warning light
illuminates.
(2) The Vehicle Dynami cs Control
warning light turns off.
(3) The Vehicle Dynami cs Control
OFF indicator light turns off.
(4) The ABS warning light turns off.
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
5. Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF switch and hold it until the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light “
”
on the combination meter illuminates for
several seconds and then turns off.
6. Within 5 seconds after the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
turns off, release the Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF switch.
Starting and operating/Hill start assist system (models without electronic parking brake system)
– CONTINUED –
7-51
7
Black plate (450,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Cruise control
Hill start assist OFF indicator light
7. Within 2 seconds after releasing the
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch,
press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
switch once again. Then the Hill start
assist OFF indicator light illuminates.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position. The hill start assist system
has now been deactivated.
NOTE
While the Hill start assist system is
deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF
indicator light illuminates continuously.
! To activate
When the procedure to deactivate the Hill
start assist system is performed again, the
system is activated. When the Hill start
assist system is activated, the Hill start
assist OFF indicator light turns off.
& Hill start assist warning light/
Hill start assist OFF indicator
light
Refer to “Hill start assist warning light/Hill
start assist OFF indicator light (models
without electronic parking brake system)”
F3-24.
Cruise control
NOTE
For models with EyeSight system:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.
Cruise control enables you to maintain a
constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 25
mph (40 km/h) or more.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions.
These may cause loss of vehicle
control.
. driving up or down a steep grade
. driving on sli ppery or winding
roads
. driving in heavy traffic
NOTE
. On uphill and downhill slopes, de-
pending on the degree of the slope and
the load of the vehicle, there may be
cases when a constant speed cannot
be guaranteed.
. If the cruise control indicator does
7-52
Black plate (451,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
not appear even after pressing the
cruise control main button, it is possi-
ble that there is a malfunction in the
system. We recommend that you con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for an in-
spection.
. Make sure the cruise control system
is turned off when the cruise control is
not in use t o avoid unintentionally
setting the cruise control.
& To set cruise control
Cruise control main button
1. Press the cruise control main button.
Cruise control indicator
The cruise control indicator on the combi-
nation meter will appear.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side and release it. Then release
the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control set indicator
At this time, the cruise control set indicator
appears in the combination meter.
The vehicle will maintain the desired
speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-
creased while driving with the cruise
control activated. Simply depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-
cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-
leased, the vehicle will return to and
maintain the previous cruising speed.
NOTE
For CVT models, when you set the
desired speed while the Sport Sharp
Starting and operating/Cruise control
– CONTINUED –
7-53
7
Black plate (452,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/Cruise control
(S#) mode is selected, the select lever/
gear position indicator will c hange
from the current gear position indica-
tion to the “D” indication.
& To temporarily cancel the
cruise control
The crui se control can be temporarily
canceled in the following ways.
. Press the “CANCEL” button.
. Depress the brake pedal.
. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models
only).
WARNING
For CVT models, you can cancel the
cruise control by shifting the select
lever into the “N” position. However,
do not shift the lever into the “N”
position while driving except in case
of emergency. If the select lever is
shifted into the “N” position, the
engine brake will no longer work.
This could result in an accident.
The cruise control set indicator in the
combination meter disappears when the
cruise control is canceled.
To resume the cruise control after it has
been temporarily canceled and with vehi-
cle speed of approximately 20 mph (30
km/h) or more, press the “RES/SET”
switch to the “RES” side to return to the
original cruising speed automatically.
The cruise control set indicator in the
combination meter will automatically ap-
pear at this time.
& To turn off the cruise control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise
control:
. Press the cruise control main button
again.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or
“LOCK”/“OFF” position (but only when the
vehicle is completely stopped).
& To change the cruising speed
! To increase the speed (by the “RES/
SET” switch)
Press the “RES/SET ” switch to the “RES”
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Then, release the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
will be memorized and treated as the new
set speed.
7-54
Black plate (453,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
U.S.-spec. models
The set speed can be increased 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the
“RES/SET” switch to the “RES” side
quickly.
Except U.S.-spec. models
The set speed can be increased 1 km/h
each time by pressing the “RES/SET”
switch to the “RES” side quickly.
! To increase the speed (by accel-
erator pedal)
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to
accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side once. Now the desired speed
is set and the vehicle will keep running at
that speed without depressing the accel-
erator pedal.
NOTE
CVT models:
. If you depress the accelerator pedal
while the Sport Sharp (S#) mode is
selected, the select lever/gear position
indicator may change from the “D”
indication to the current gear position
indication.
. If you depress the accelerator pedal
fully while the Intelligent (I) mode or the
Sport (S) mode is selected, the trans-
mission will operate like a conventional
automatic transmission.
! To decrease the speed (by the
“RES/SET” switch)
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Then, release the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
will be memorized and treated as the new
set speed.
U.S.-spec. models
The set speed can be lowered 1 mph (1.6
km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/
SET” switch to the “SET” side quickly.
Except U.S.-spec. models
The set speed can be lowered 1 km/h
each time by pressing the “RES/SET”
switch to the “SET” side quickly.
! To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release
cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the
desired spe ed, press the “RES/SET”
switch to the “SET” side once. Now the
desired speed is set and the vehicle will
keep running at that speed without de-
pressing the accelerator pedal.
& Cruise control indicator
Refer to “Cruise control indicator” F3-35.
& Cruise control set indicator
Refer to “Cruise control set indicator” F3-
35.
Starting and operating/Cruise control
7-55
7
Black plate (454,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
BSD/RCTA (if equipped)
The BSD/RCTA consists of rear radar with
Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert.
These functions of BSD/RCTA are the
systems that detect objects and vehicles
to the rear and draw attention to the driver
when changing a lane or when driving in
reverse.
WARNING
The driver is responsible for driving
safely. Always be sure to check the
surroundings with your eyes when
changing la nes or rev ersing the
vehicle.
The system is designed to assist the
driver by monitoring the rear and
side areas of the vehicle during a
lane change or reversing. However,
you cannot rely on this system
alone in assuring the safety during
a lane change or reversing. Over-
confidence in this system could
result in an accident and lead to
serious injury or death. Since the
system operation has various limita-
tions, the flashing or illumination of
the BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light may be delayed or it may not
operate at all even when a vehicle is
present in a neighboring lane or
approaching from either side.
The driver is responsible for paying
attention to the rear and side areas
of the vehicle.
& System features
BSD/RCTA has a function that detects an
invisible vehicle in a blind spot on an
adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at
high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind
Spot Detection). It also has a function that
detects a vehicle approaching from the
right or left while driving the vehicle in
reverse (Rear Cross Traffic Alert).
The system uses radar sensors for the
following features.
NOTE
The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been
certified by the radio wave related laws
of the U.S. and Canada. When driving
in other countries, certification of the
country where the vehicle is driven
must be obtained. For certification in
the U.S. and Canada, refer to “Certifica-
tion for the BSD/RCTA” F7-62.
! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)
1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of vehicles
existing in the blind area. If the system
detects a vehicle existing in the blind area,
it warns the driver of dangers by illuminat-
ing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light(s) on the outside mirror(s). If the
driver operates the turn signal lever in the
direction where the BSD/RCTA approach
indicator light is illuminating, the system
warns the driver of dangers by flashing the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.
7-56
Black plate (455,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Lane Change Assist (LCA)
1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of vehicles
approaching a t a high speed in the
neighboring lanes. If the system detects
a vehicle approaching at a high speed in
the neighboring lanes, it warns the driver
of dangers by illuminating the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light(s) on the outside
mirror(s). If the driver operates the turn
signal lever in the direction where the
BSD/RCTA approach i ndicato r light is
illuminating, the system warns the driver
of dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light.
! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of another
vehicle approaching from either side when
driving in reverse. This feature helps the
driver check the rear and side areas of the
vehicle when moving backward.
If the system detects a vehicle approach-
ing from either side while moving back-
ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the
following way.
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
. A warning buzzer sounds.
& System operation
! Operating conditions
The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of
the following conditions are met.
. The ignition switch is in the “ON ”
position.
. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.
. The vehicle is driven at speeds above
6 mph (10 km/h) (except when reversing).
. The shift lever/select lever is in the “R”
position (when reversing).
The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the
following situations.
. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator ap-
pears.
. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10
km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF
indicator does not appear (except when
reversing).
NOTE
. In the following cases, the BSD/
RCTA wil l stop operating and the
BSD/RCTA warning indicator will ap-
pear. If the BSD/RCTA warning indica-
tor appears, have your vehicle in-
spected at a SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible.
– When a malfunction occurs in the
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
– CONTINUED –
7-57
7
Black plate (456,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 3/ 6
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
system, including the BSD/RC TA
approach indicator light
. In the following cases, the BSD/
RCTA will temporarily stop operating
(or may stop operating) and the BSD/
RCTA warning indicator will appear.
The BSD/RCTA will resume operation
once these conditions are corrected,
and the BSD/RCTA warning indicator
will disappear. However, if the BSD/
RCTA warning indicator has appeared
for a prolonged time, have the system
inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible.
– When the radar sensor becomes
significantly misaligned (If the or-
ientation of the radar sensor is
shifted for any reason, readjust-
ment is required. Have the sensor
adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)
– When a large amount of snow or
ice sticks to the rear bumper sur-
face around the radar sensors
– When the vehicle is driven on a
snow-covered road or in an envir-
onment in which there are no
objects around (such as in a desert)
for a long time
– When the temperature around
the radar sensors increased exces-
sively due to long driving on uphill
grades in summer, etc.
– When the temperature around
the radar sensors becomes extre-
mely low
– When the vehicle battery voltage
lowers
– When the vehicle battery be-
comes overvoltage
. The detectability of the radar sen-
sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de-
tection may be impaired and the sys-
tem may not operate properly under the
following conditions.
– When the rear bumper around
the radar sensors is distorted
– When ice, snow or mud adheres
to the rear bumper surface around
the radar sensors
– When stickers, etc. are affixed on
the areas of the radar sensors on
the rear bumper
– During adverse weather condi-
tions such as rain, snow or fog
– When driving on wet roads such
as snow-covered roads and
through puddles
. The radar sensors may not detect or
may have difficulty detecting the fol-
lowing vehicles and objects.
– Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-
destrians, stationary objects on the
road or road side and etc.
– Vehicles with body shapes that
the radar may not reflect (vehicles
with lower body height such as a
trail er with no cargo an d sports
cars)
– Vehicles that are not approach-
ing your vehicle even though they
are in the detection area (either on a
neighboring lane to the rear or
beside your vehicle when rever-
sing) (The system determines the
presence of approaching vehicles
based on data detected by the radar
sensors.)
– Vehicles traveling at significantly
different speeds
– Vehicles driving in parallel at
almost the same speed as your
vehicle for a prolonged time
– Oncoming vehicles
– Vehicles in a lane beyond the
neighboring lane
– Vehicles travelling at a signifi-
cantly lower speed that you ar e
trying to overtake
. On a road with extremely narrow
lanes, the system may detect vehicles
driving in a lane next to the neighbor-
ing lane.
7-58
Black plate (457,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& BSD/RCTA approach indica-
tor light/warning buzzer
When the BSD/RCTA is active, the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light and warn-
ing buzzer will operate to alert the driver to
the presence of the following vehicles.
. Vehicles in the neighboring lanes
. Vehicles approaching from the left or
right rear side when reversing
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
It is mounted in each side of the outside
mirrors and will illuminate when a vehicle
approaching from behind is detected. If a
light illuminates and the turn signal lever is
operated toward the side in which this light
turned on, the indicator light flashes to
warn the driver of dangers. When rever-
sing the vehicle, the indicator light flashes
when the system detects a vehicle ap-
proaching from either side.
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light dimming function
When the headlights are turned on, the
brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach
indicator light will be reduced.
NOTE
. When affected by direct sunlight,
you may have difficulty recognizing
the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.
. W hen affected by the headlight
beams from the vehicles behind, you
may have difficulty recognizing the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.
. While the illumination brightness
control dial is in t he fully upward
position, even if the headlights are
turned on, the brightness of the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light will not
be reduced. For details about the
illumination brightness control dial,
refer to “Illumination brightness con-
trol” F3-98.
! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz-
zer (only when reversing)
A wa rning buzzer sounds along with
flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in-
dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.
The setting of the warning buzzer volume
can be changed by operating the multi
information display of the combination
meter. For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA”
F3-48.
! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light/warning
buzzer
. In the following cases, operation of the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and
the warning buzzer may be delayed or the
system may fail to issue these warnings.
– When a vehicle moves to the
neighboring lane from a lane next to
the neighboring lane
– When driving on a steep incline or
on repeated sharp uphill and downhill
grades
– When going beyond a pass
– When both your vehicle and a
vehicle driving on a neighboring lane
are driving on the far side of each lane.
– When several narrowly-spaced ve-
hicles are approaching in a row
– In low radius bends (tight bends or
when making turns at an intersection)
– When there is a difference in height
between your lane and the neighbor-
ing lane
– Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
– CONTINUED –
7-59
7
Black plate (458,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
activated by pressing the BSD/RCTA
OFF switch
– Immediately after the shift lever/
select lever is shifted to the “R”
position
– When extremely h eavy car go is
loaded in the trunk
. During reversing, operation of the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light and the
warning buzzer may be delayed or the
system may fail to issue these warnings
under the following conditions.
– When backing out of an angled
parking space
– When a large-sized vehicle is
parked next to your vehicle (That
vehicle prevents the propagation of
radar waves.)
– When reversing on sloped roads
– When reversing at a high speed
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light may illuminate when driving close to
solid objects on the road or road side
(such as guardrails, tunnels and side-
walls).
. When turning at an intersection in
urban areas, or a multilane intersection,
the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
may flash.
. If a building or a wall exists in the
reversing direction, the BSD/RCTA ap-
proach indicator light may flash and the
warning buzzer may sound.
. In the following cases, the system may
detect a vehicle driving two lanes away
from your vehicle.
– When your vehicle drives on the
near side of its lane from the corre-
sponding vehicle
– When the vehicle driving two lanes
away drives on the near side of its lane
from your vehicle
& BSD/RCTA warning indicator
! System temporary stop indicator
System temporary stop indicator
This indicator appears when the system is
used at extremely high or low tempera-
tures or when abnormal voltage exists.
Once these conditions are corrected, the
system will recover from the temporary
stop conditio n and the indicator will
disappear. If the indicator remains dis-
played for a prolonged time, have the
system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
7-60
Black plate (459,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! System temporary stop indicator
due to reduced radar sensitivity
System temporary stop indicator due to
reduced radar sensitivity
This indicator appears when the detect-
ability of the radar sensors is reduced.
Once the condition is corre cted, the
system will recover from the temporary
stop conditi on and the indicator will
disappear. If the indicator remains dis-
played for a prolonged time, have the
system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
! System malfunction indicator
System malfunction indicator
1) At first, this message will appear
2) Then this message will appear
This indicator appears when a malfunction
occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
& BSD/RCTA OFF switch
BSD/RCTA OFF switch
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
If the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed,
the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears on
the multi information display of the combi-
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
– CONTINUED –
7-61
7
Black plate (460,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
nation meter, and the BSD/RCTA is
deactivated.
Press the switch again to activate the
BSD/RCTA. The BSD/RCTA OFF indica-
tor disappears.
NOTE
. In the following cases, press the
BSD/RCTA OFF switch to deactivate
the system. The system may not oper-
ate properly due to blocked radar
waves.
– When towing a trailer
– When a bicycle carrier or other
item is fitted to the rear of the
vehicle
– When using a chassis dynam-
ometer or free roller device, etc.
– When running the engine and
makingthewheelsrotatewhile
lifting up the vehicle
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last known
status of the system is maintained. For
example, if the ignition switch is turned
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the
BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA
remains deactivated the next time the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
. If the vehicle battery is disconnected
due to situations such as battery
terminal or fuse replacement, after the
battery is reconnected, the BSD/RCTA
will be activated.
& Certification for the BSD/
RCTA
. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: OAYSRR2A
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
. Canada-spec. models
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard
(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est co nforme aux
CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L’ex-
ploitation est autorisée aux deux condi-
tions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas
produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur
de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage
est susceptible d’en compromet tre l e
fonctionnement.
7-62
Black plate (461,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Handling of radar sensors
Radar sensors
The radar sensors, one on each side of
the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear
bumper.
To ensure correct operation of the BSD/
RCTA, observe the following precautions.
. Always keep the bumper surface near
the radar sensors clean.
. Do not affix any stickers or other items
on the bumper surface near the radar
sensors.
. Do not modify the bumper near the
radar sensors.
. Do not paint the bumper near the radar
sensors.
. Do not expose the bumper near the
rad ar sensors to strong impacts. If a
sensor becomes misaligned, a system
malfunction may occur, including the
inability to detect vehicles entering the
detection areas. If any strong shock is
applied to the bumper, be sure to contact
your SUBARU dealer for inspection.
. Do not disassemble the radar sensors.
NOTE
If the radar sensors require repair or
replacement, or the bumper area
around the radar sensors requires
repair, paintwork or replacement, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-
tance.
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
7-63
7
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (17,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
New vehicle break-in driving – the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4
Driving tips for AWD models.............................. 8-5
Driving precaution............................................... 8-6
Winter driving...................................................... 8-6
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-6
Driving on snowy and icy roads ........................... 8-8
Corrosion protection............................................ 8-9
Snow tires ........................................................... 8-9
Tire chains ........................................................ 8-10
Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-10
Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-10
Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-11
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-12
Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-12
Driving tips
8
Black plate (464,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Driving tips/New vehicle break–in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
New vehicle break-in driving
– the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km)
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
Follow these instructions during the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
. Do not race the engine. And do not
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm
except in an emergency.
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
slow.
. Avoi d star ting suddenly an d rapi d
acceleration, except in an emergency.
. Avoid hard braking, except in an
emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be
applied to an overhauled engine, newly
mounted engine or when brake pads or
brake linings are replaced with new ones.
Fuel economy hints
The following suggestions will help to save
fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the
speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-
tion. Always accelerate gently until you
reach the desired speed. Then try to
maintain that speed for as long as
possible.
. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid
racing the engine.
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
. Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the tire placard, which
is located under the door latch on the
driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
tire wear and fuel consumption.
. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
. Keep the f ront and rear wheels in
proper alignment.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo.
. The indication of the ECO ga uge
shows a reference for saving fuel. For
details, refer to “ECO gauge” F3-12.
Engine exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxi de, a c olorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from enter-
ing the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked
vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the venti-
lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
8-2
Black plate (465,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction
of the metals used in the manufacture
of the exhaust system, you may hear a
crackling sound coming from the ex-
haust system for a short time after the
engine has been shut off. This sound is
normal.
Catalytic converter
STI
Except STI
The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-
ter:
. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or in complete combustion), have
your vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
tem.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
near flammable materials (e.g.,
grass, paper, rags or leaves),
because the catalytic converter
Driving tips/Catalytic converter
– CONTINUED –
8-3
8
Black plate (466,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Driving tips/Periodic inspections
operates at very high tempera-
tures.
. Keep everyone and flammable
materials away from the exhaust
pipe while the engine is running.
The exhaust gas is very hot.
Periodic inspections
To keep your vehicle in the best condition
at all times, always have the recom-
mended maintenance services listed in
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-
formed at the specified time or mileage
intervals.
Driving in foreign countries
When planning to use your vehicle in
another country:
. Confirm the availability of the correct
fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-3.
. Comply with all regulations and re-
quirements of each country.
8-4
Black plate (467,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Driving tips for AWD models
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – ove rconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. When you replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the
same for following items.
(a) Size
(b) Circumference
(c) Speed symbol
(d) Load index
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For the items (a) to (d), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire placard. The
tire placard is located on the
bottom of driver’s door pillar.
If all of four tires are not the same
for items (a) to (h), there is a
possibility that serious mechan-
ical damage could occur to the
drive train of your car, and affect
the following.
— Ride
— Handling
— Braking
— Speedometer/Odometer
calibration
— Clearance between the body
and tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
CAUTION
If you use a temporary spare tire to
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
original temporary spare tire stored
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may
result in severe mechanical damage
to the drive train of your vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine
power to all four wheels. AWD models
provide better traction when driving on
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and
when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.
By shifting power between the front and
rear whee ls, SUBARU AWD can also
provide added traction during acceleration
and added engine braking force during
deceleration.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
some features unique to AWD. For safety
purposes as well as to avoid damaging
the AWD system, you should keep the
following tips in mind.
. An AWD model is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
Driving tips/Driving tips for AWD models
– CONTINUED –
8-5
8
Black plate (468,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Driving tips/Driving precaution
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
There is little difference in handling,
however, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
down a slope or turning corners, be sure
to reduce your speed and maintain an
ample distance from other vehicles.
. Always check the cold tire pressure
before starting to drive. The recom-
mended tire pressure is provided on the
tire placard, which is located under the
door latch on the driver’s side.
. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
under hard-drivi ng conditions such as
steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate
more frequent replacement of the follow-
ing i tems than that specified in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet ” .
– Engine oil
– Brake fluid
– Rear differential gear oil
– Manual transmission oil (MT mod-
els)
– Continuously variable transmission
fluid (CVT models)
– Front differential gear o il (CVT
models)
. There are some precautions that you
must observe when towing your vehicle.
For detailed information, refer to “Towing”
F9-12.
Driving precaution
Water entering the engine air intake or the
exhaust pipe or w ater splashing onto
electrical parts may damage your vehicle
and may cause it to stall. Never attempt to
drive through rushing water; regardless of
its depth, it can wash away the ground
from under your tires, resulting in possible
loss of traction and even vehicle rollover.
Winter driving
& Operation during cold
weather
Carry some emergency equipment, such
as a window scraper, a bag of sand,
flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold
temperatures reduce battery cap acity.
The battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter
starts.
It normally takes longer to start the engine
in very cold weather conditions. Use an
engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity
for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil
will make it harder to start the engine.
Keep the door locks from freezing by
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage
or separate the rubber weather strips
around the door. If the door is frozen,
use hot water to melt the ice, and after-
wards thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of
the vehicle.
8-6
Black plate (469,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-
tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
perature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Washer Fluid Con-
centration
Freezing Temperature
30% 10.48F(−128C)
50% −48F(−208C)
100%
−498F(−458C)
In order to prevent freezing of washer
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
thepipingistoolowfortheoutside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should b e used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
! Before driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle, remove any
snow or ice from your shoes because that
could make the pedals slippery and
driving dangerous.
While war min g up the v ehi cl e be fore
driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
brake pedal, and all other controls operate
smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has
accumulated under the fenders to avoid
making steering difficult. During severe
winter driving, stop when and where it is
safe to do so and check under the fenders
periodically.
! Parking in cold weather
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle if you park
the vehicle in snow with the engine
running.
CAUTION
. Do not use the parking brake
when parking for long periods in
cold weather since it could freeze
in that position.
. When the vehicle is parked in
snow or when it snows, raise the
wiper blades off the glass to
prevent damage to them.
. When the vehicle has been left
parked after use on roads heavily
covered with snow, or has been
left parked during a snowstorm,
icing may develop on the brake
system, which could cause poor
braking action. Check for snow
Driving tips/Winter driving
– CONTINUED –
8-7
8
Black plate (470,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Driving tips/Winter driving
or ice buildup on the suspension,
disc brakes and b rake hoses
underneath the vehicle. If there
is caked snow or ice, remove it,
being careful not to damage the
disc brakes and brake hoses and
ABS harness.
When parking for long periods in cold
weather, you should observe the following
tips.
1. For MT models, place the shift lever in
the “1” or “R” position. For CVT models,
place the select lever in the “P” position.
2. Use t ire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving.
! Refueling in cold weather
To help prevent moisture from forming in
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
tank is recommended during cold weather.
Use only additives that are specifically
designed for this purpo se. When an
antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used
for an extended period, it is best to have
the fuel tank filled to capacity.
& Driving on snowy and icy
roads
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
speed driving, and sharp turning when
driving on snowy or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the
engine brake effectively to control the
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-
hances your vehicle’s braki ng perfor-
mance on snowy and icy roads. For
information on braking on slippery sur-
faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System)” F7-36 and “Vehicle Dynamics
Control system” F7-38.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads such as snowy or icy
roads. This may cause loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION
Avoid prolonged continuous driving
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
engine’s intake system and may
hinder the airflow, which could re-
sult in engine shutdown or even
breakdown.
! Wiper operation when snowing
Before driving in cold weather, make sure
the wiper blades are not frozen to the
windshield or rear window.
If the wiper blades are f rozen to the
windshiel d, use the defroster and the
temperature set for maximum warmth until
the wiper blades are completely thawed.
Refer to “Climate control” F4-1.
If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper
deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the
windshield wiper blades. Refer to “Defog-
ger and deicer” F3-112.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
to stick on the surface of the windshield
despite wiper operation, use the defroster
and the temperature set for maximum
warmth. After the windshield gets warmed
enough to melt the frozen snow on it,
wash it away using the windshield washer.
Refer to “Windshield washer” F3-103.
8-8
Black plate (471,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
wiper from working effectively. If snow is
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
the vehicle at road side, use the hazard
warning flasher to alert other drivers.
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-8.
We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
seasons you could have snow and freez-
ing temperatures. Blades of this type give
superior wiping performance in snowy
conditions. Be sure to use blades that
are suitable for your vehicle.
CAUTION
During high-speed driving, non-
freezing type wiper blades may not
perform as well as standard wiper
blades. If this happens, reduce the
vehicle speed.
NOTE
When the season requiring non-freez-
ing type wiper blades is over, replace
them with standard wiper blades.
& Corrosion protection
Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.
& Snow tires
WARNING
. When you replacing or installing
winter tire(s), all four tires must
be the same for following items.
(a) Size
(b) Circumference
(c) Speed symbol
(d) Load index
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For the items (a) to (d), you must
obey the specificati on that i s
printed on the tire placard. The
tire placard is located on the
bottom of driver’s door pillar.
If all of four winter tires are not
the same for items (a) to (h), there
is a possibility that serious me-
chanical damage could occur to
the drive train of your car, and
affect the following.
— Ride
— Handling
— Braking
— Speedometer/Odometer
calibration
— Clearance between the body
and tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
. Do not use a combination of
radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with “ summer
tires” as original equipment, which are
inadequate for driving on slippery roads
such as on snow-covered or icy roads.
When you choose to install winter tires on
your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire
size and type. You must install four winter
tires that are of the same size, construc-
tion, brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
since this may result in dangerous hand-
ling characteristics. When you choose a
tire, make sure that there is enough
clearance between the tire and vehicle
body.
Remember to drive with care at all times
regardless of the type of tires on your
vehicle.
Driving tips/Winter driving
– CONTINUED –
8-9
8
Black plate (472,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
& Tire chains
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on your
vehicle because of the lack of
clearance between the tires and
vehicle body.
NOTE
When tire chains cannot be used, use
of another type of traction device (such
as spring chains) may be acceptable if
use on your vehicle is recommended
by the device manufacturer, taking into
account tire size and road conditions.
Follow the device manufacturer’s in-
structions, especially regarding max-
imum vehicle speed.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle,
and do not spin your wheels. Damage
caused to your vehicle by use of a
traction device is not covered under
warranty.
Make certain that any traction device
you use is an SAE class S device, and
use it on the front wheels only. Always
use the utmost care when driving with
a traction device. Overconfidence be-
cause you are using a traction device
could easily lead to a serious accident.
& Rocking the vehicle
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
erator pedal slightly and move the shift
lever/select lever back and forth between
“1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
engine. For the best possible traction,
avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
free the vehicle.
When th e road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than in 1st (MT models and CVT
models).
If your vehicle is a CVT model, for
information about holding the transmission
in the 2nd position, refer to “Selection of
manual mode” F7-26.
Loading your vehicle
WARNING
Never allow passengers to ride on a
folded rear seatback or in the trunk.
Doing so may result in serious
injury.
WARNING
. Never s tack luggage or other
cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble
forward and injure passengers in
the event of a sudden stop or
accident. Keep luggage or cargo
low, as close to t he floor as
8-10
Black plate (473,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
possible.
. Stow cargo and luggage in the
trunk whenever possible.
. To prevent cargo and luggage
from sliding forward during brak-
ing, do not stack anything in the
enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and
luggage low, as close to the floor
as possible.
. When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it whenever
you can to prevent it from being
thrown around inside the vehicle
during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
. Do not pile heavy loads on the
roof. These loads raise the vehi-
cle’s center of gravity and make it
more prone to tip over.
. Secure lengthy items properly to
prevent them from shooting for-
ward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop.
. Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehic le
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
. Do not place cargo or luggage in
or on the following locations as
the item may get under the
clutch, brake, or accelerator ped-
al and prevent the pedals from
being depressed properly, block
the driver’s vision, or hit the
driver or passenge rs, causing
an accident:
– At the feet of the driver
– On the front passenger or rear
seats (when stacking items)
– On the rear shelf
– On the instrument panel
– On the dashboard
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers
with flammable or corrosive liquids
or any other dangerous items inside
the vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.
& Vehicle capacity weight
Vehicle placard
The load capacity of you r vehicle is
determined by weight, not by available
cargo space. The maximum load you can
carry in your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s
side door pillar. It includes the total weight
of the driver and all passengers and their
belongings, any optional equipment such
as a roof rack or bike carrier, etc.
Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
– CONTINUED –
8-11
8
Black plate (474,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Driving tips/Trailer towing
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating and
Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Certification label
The certification label attached to the
driver’s side doorjamb shows GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR
(Gross Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
combined total of weight of the vehicle,
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, and
any optional equipment. Therefore, the
GVW changes depending on the situation.
The GVWR equals Curb Weight (actual
weight of your vehicle – including standard
equipment, fluids, emergency tools and
spare tire assembly) plus the vehicle
capacity weight.
In addition, the total weight applied to
each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
should confirm that GVW and front and
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a
vehicle scale, found at a commercial
weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower
load range than the originals because they
may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
range than the originals do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is neither designed nor
intended to be used for trailer towing.
Therefore, never tow a trailer with your
vehicle.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that may result
from trailer towing, from any trailer towing
equipment or from any errors or omissions
in the instructions accompanying such
equipment. SUBARU warranties do not
apply to vehicle damage or malfunction
caused by trailer towing.
8-12
Black plate (19,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
If you park your vehicle in case of an
emergency ........................................................ 9-2
Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2
Maintenance tools ............................................... 9-3
Flat tires............................................................... 9-4
Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-4
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(U.S.-spec. models) ........................................... 9-8
Jump starting ...................................................... 9-9
How to jump start................................................ 9-9
Engine overheating ............................................ 9-11
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment.................................................... 9-11
If no steam is coming from the engine
compartment.................................................... 9-11
Towing ................................................................ 9-12
Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-12
Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-14
Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-15
Electronic parking brake – if the electronic
parking brake cannot be released
(models with electronic parking brake
system)............................................................ 9-16
Access key – if access key does not
operate properly ............................................. 9-16
Locking and unlocking....................................... 9-16
Switching power ................................................ 9-16
Starting engine .................................................. 9-17
Moonroof (if equipped) – if the moonroof
does not close ................................................ 9-18
If your vehicle is involved in an accident ........ 9-18
In case of emergency
9
Black plate (478,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
In case of emergency/If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency
If you park your vehicle in
case of an emergency
The hazard warning flasher should be
used in day or night to warn other drivers
when you have to park your vehicle under
emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be acti-
vated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it
off by pushing the switch again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Temporary spare tire
WARNING
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) is unable to monitor all four
road wheels. Contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible for tire
and sensor replacement and/or sys-
tem resetting.
CAUTION
. Never use any temporary spare
tire other than the original. Using
other sizes may result in severe
mechanical damage to the drive
train of your vehicle.
. Always conform to the following
instructions when using the tem-
porary spare tire. Otherwise, a
seriously dangerous situation
may occur.
9-2
Black plate (479,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
The temporary spare tire is smaller and
lighter than a conventional tire and is
designed for emergency use only. Re-
move the temporary spare tire and re-
install the conventional tire as soon as
possible because the spare tire is de-
signed only for temporary use.
Check the inflation pressure of the tem-
porary spare tire periodically to keep the
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is
as follows.
Mexico models: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3
kgf/cm
2
)
Other models: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2
kgf/cm
2
)
When using the temporary spare tire, note
the following.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
is reduced.
1) Tread wear indicator bar
2) Indicator location mark
. When the wear indicator appears on
the tread, replace the tire.
. The temporary spare tire must be used
only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
rear wheel and install the temporary spare
tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
. Always set the driver’s control center
differential to the manual mode and adjust
the initial LSD torque to the minimum.
Maintenance tools
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
maintenance tools.
. Jack
. Jack handle
. Screwdriver
. Towing hook (eye bolt)
. Wheel nut wrench
In case of emergency/Maintenance tools
– CONTINUED –
9-3
9
Black plate (480,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
In case of emergency/Flat tires
1) Jack handle
1) Under-floor storage compartment (if
equipped) (Refer to “Under-floor storage
compartment” F6-12.)
2) Tool bucket
3) Spare tire
1) Wheel nut wrench
2) Screwdriver
3) Jack
4) Towing hook (eye bolt)
A jack handle is stored under the floor of
the trunk. A jack and a towing hook are
stored in the tool bucket that is located in
the recess of the spare tire wheel. A
screwdriver and a wheel nut wrench are
stored in the vinyl bag. These tools can
also be stored in the tool bucket.
NOTE
For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat
tires” F9-4.
Flat tires
If you have a flat tire while driving, never
brake suddenly; keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
& Changing a flat tire
WARNING
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an
incline or a loose road surface.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in a
severe accident.
. Use only the jack provided with
your vehicle. The jack supplied
with the vehicle is designed only
for changing a tire. Never get
under the vehicle while support-
ing the vehicle with this jack.
9-4
Black plate (481,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
. Always turn off the engine before
raising the flat tire off the ground
using the jack. Never swing or
push the vehicle supported with
the jack. The jack can come out
of the jacking point due to a jolt
and this can result in a severe
accident.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Set the parking brake securely and
shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)
or the select lever to the “P” (Park)
position (CVT models).
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
wheel nut wrench.
The tools and the spare tire are stored
under the floor of the trunk. Refer to
“Maintenance tools” F9-3.
NOTE
Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
cated before using it.
6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the
attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take
the spare tire out.
NOTE
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
“Temporary spare tire” F 9-2 and
strictly follow the instructions.
7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
Jack-up points
8. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat
tire.
In case of emergency/Flat tires
– CONTINUED –
9-5
9
Black plate (482,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
In case of emergency/Flat tires
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
9. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
screw, and turn the handle until the tire
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.
11. Before putting the spare tire on, per-
form the following steps.
. Clean the mounting surface of the
wheel and hub with a cloth.
. Clean the threaded parts with a
cloth and check the conditions there.
CAUTION
If the threaded part was damaged,
you should immediately contact
your SUBARU dealer.
12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts when the spare
tire is installed. This could cause the
nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.
13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to lower the vehicle.
9-6
Black plate (483,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely
tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in the
illustration.
For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer
to “Tires” F12-8. Never use your foot on
the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension
on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut
torque checked at the nearest automotive
service facility.
Except STI
15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire
compartment. For except STI models, put
in the spacer and tighten the attaching bolt
firmly.
Also store the jack, jack handle and wheel
nut wrench in their storage locations.
WARNING
. Never place a tire or tire changing
tools in the passenger compart-
ment after changing wheels. In a
sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike occu-
pants a nd cause injury. Store
the tire and all tools in the proper
place.
. When you store a flat tire, be sure
to set the rear seatback to the
upright position. If you fold down
the seatback, an accident or
injury may occur when the flat
tire suddenly moves.
In case of emergency/Flat tires
– CONTINUED –
9-7
9
Black plate (484,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
In case of emergency/Flat tires
& Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.
models)
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with the warning message
indicated by sending a signal from a
sensor that is installed in each wheel
when tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven.
Also, this system may not react immedi-
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a blow-out caused by running
over a sharp object).
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead,
perform the following procedure.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
safe place. Otherwise an acci-
dent involving serious vehicle
damage and serious personal
injury could occur.
(3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure
to the COLD tire pressure
shown on the vehicle placard
on the door pillar on the
driver’s side.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the TPMS is un-
able to monitor all four road
wheels. Contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible for
tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
. When a tire is repaired with liquid
sealant, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid sea-
lant is used, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer or other qualified
service shop as soon as possi-
ble. Make sure to replace the tire
pressure warning valve and
transmitt er when replacing the
tire. You may reuse the wheel if
there is no damage to it and if the
sealant residue is properly
cleaned off.
If the light illuminates steadily
after blinking for approximately
one minute, promptly contact a
SUBARU dealer to have the sys-
tem inspected.
9-8
Black plate (485,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Jump starting
WARNING
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the
vehicle.
If battery fluid g ets on you,
thoroughly flush the exposed
area with water immediately. Get
medical help if the fluid h as
entered your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and obta in immediate medical
help.
Keep everyone including chil-
dren away from the battery.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is
brought near it. Do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
. Never attempt jump starting if the
discharged battery is frozen. It
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around
a battery, always wear suitable
eye protectors, and remove metal
objects such as rings, bands or
other metal jewelry.
. Be sure the jumper cables and
clamps on them do not have
loose or missing insulation.
Do not jump start unless cables
in suitable condition are avail-
able.
. A running engine can be danger-
ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
Removing ring s, watches and
ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it
done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure
for jump starting, consult a com-
petent mechanic.
When your vehicle does not start due to a
run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.
& How to jump start
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
volts and the negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
the sequence illustrated.
In case of emergency/Jump starting
– CONTINUED –
9-9
9
Black plate (486,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
In case of emergency/Jump starting
A) Booster battery
B) Strut mounting nut
(1) Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on the discharged
battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) term-
inal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of th e other
cable to the negative (−) terminal of
the booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable
to the strut mounting nut of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When fin ished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
9-10
Black plate (487,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Engine overheating
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radia-
tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has fully cooled down.
When the engine is hot, the coolant
is under pressure. Removing the
cap while the engine is still hot
could release a spray of boiling hot
coolant, which could burn you very
seriously.
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the
road and stop the vehicle in a safe
location.
& If steam is coming from the
engine compartment
. Turn off the engine and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down.
. Contact an authorized SUBARU deal-
er.
& If no steam is coming from
the engine compartment
1. Keep the en gine r unni ng at id ling
speed.
2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the
engine compartment. Refer to “Engine
hood” F11-9.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
the engine and contact an authorized
SUBARU dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature
has dropped, turn off the engine.
If temperature gauge stays in the over-
heated zone, turn off the engine. Refer to
“Temperature gauge” F3-11.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
check the coolant level in the reserve
tank. If the coolant level is below the
“LOW” mark, add coolant up to the “FULL”
mark.
NOTE
For details about how to check the
coolant level or how to add coolant,
refer to “Engine coolant” F11-18.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.
Then remove the radiator cap and fill the
radiator with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
clockwise slowly without pressing down
until it stops. Release the pressure from
the radiator. After the pressure has been
fully released, remove the cap by pressing
down and turning it.
In case of emergency/Engine overheating
9-11
9
Black plate (488,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
In case of emergency/Towing
Towing
If towing is necessary, it is best done by
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial
towing service. Observe the following
procedures for safety.
WARNING
Never tow AWD models (both CVT
and MT models) with the front
wheels raised off the ground while
the rear wheels are on the ground,
or with the rear wheels raised off the
ground while the front wheels are on
the ground. This w ill cause the
vehicle to spin awa y due to the
operation or deterioration of the
center differential.
& Towing and tie-down hooks
The towing hooks should be used only in
an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle
from mud, sand or snow).
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hook and tie-down hook. Never
use suspension parts or other
parts of the body for towing or
tie-down purposes.
. To prevent deformation to the
front bumper and the towing
hook, do not apply excessive
lateral load to the towing hook.
Front towing hook:
1. Take the towing hook, screwdriver and
wheel nut wrench out of the tool bucket.
2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head
screwdriver into the cutout of the cover
and pry open the cover.
9-12
Black plate (489,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook se curely
using the wheel nut wrench.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. D o not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
Rear towing hook:
1. Take the towing hook, screwdriver and
wheel nut wrench out of the tool bucket.
2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper
using a screwdriver, and you will find a
threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook.
3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely
using the wheel nut wrench.
In case of emergency/Towing
– CONTINUED –
9-13
9
Black plate (490,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
In case of emergency/Towing
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
Do not use the towing hook except
when towing your vehicle.
Be sure to remove the towing hook
after towing. Leaving the towing
hook mounted on the vehicle could
interfere with proper operation of
the fuel pump shut off function
when the vehicle is struck from
behind.
Front tie-down hooks:
The front tie-down hooks are located
between each of the front tires and the
front bumper.
Rear tie-down holes:
1) Rear tie-down hole
The rear tie-down holes are located near
each of the jack-up reinforcements.
There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.
To use the rear tie-down holes, remove
the plugs. After using the rear tie-down
holes, return the plugs to their original
places.
WARNING
Use the rear tie-down holes only for
downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip out
of the holes, possibly causing a
dangerous situation.
& Using a flat-bed truck
This is the best way to transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the select lever into the “P”
9-14
Black plate (491,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
position for CVT models. Shift the shift
lever into the “1st” position for MT models.
2. Apply the parking brake firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
properly with safety chains. Each safety
chain should be equally tightened and
care must be taken not to pull the chains
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
CAUTION
If your vehicle has a front under-
spoiler and rear underspoiler (both
optional), be careful not to scrape
them when placing the vehicle on
the carrier and when removing the
vehicle from the carrier.
& Towing with all wheels on the
ground
1. Release the parking brake and put the
transmission in the “N”/neutral position.
2. The ignition switch should be in the
“ON” position while the vehicle is being
towed.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
the vehicle is being towed be-
cause the steering wheel and the
direction of the wheels will be
locked.
. Remember that the brake booster
and power steering do not func-
tion when the engine is not
running. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take gr eater
effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
CAUTION
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
. For CVT models, the traveling
speed must be limited to less
than 20 mph (30 km/h) and the
traveling distance to less than 31
miles (50 km). For greater speeds
and distances, transport your
vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
In case of emergency/Towing
9-15
9
Black plate (492,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
In case of emergency/Electronic parking brake – if the electronic parking brake cannot be released (models with electronic parking
brake system)
Electronic parking brake – if
the electronic parking brake
cannot be released (models
with electronic parking brake
system)
Contact your SUBARU dealer and have
your SUBARU dealer release the electro-
nic parking brake.
Access key – if access key
does not operate properly
CAUTION
Keep metallic objects, magnetic
sources and signal transmitters
away from the area between the
access key and the push-button
ignition switch. They may interfere
with the communication between
the access key and the push-button
ignition switch.
If the locking/unlocking procedures, power
switch procedures or engine start proce-
dures cannot be operated because of
strong radio signals in the surrounding
area or a low battery condition of the
access key, perform the following proce-
dure. When the battery of the access key
is discharged, replace it with a new one.
Refer to “Replacing battery of access key”
F11-50.
& Locking and unlocking
1) Release button
2) Mechanical key
While pressing the release button of the
access key, take out the mechanical key.
Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the
mechanical key.
NOTE
After locking or unlocking, be sure to
reinsert the mechanical key into the
access key.
& Switching power
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the shift lever into neutral (MT
models) or the select lever into the “P”
position (CVT models).
9-16
Black plate (493,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
3. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models)
or brake pedal (CVT models).
4. Hold the access key with the buttons
facing you, and touch the push-button
ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key and the vehicle is completed,
a chime (ding) will sound. At the same
time, the status of the push-button ignition
switch changes to either of the following.
. When the keyless access with push-
button start system is deactivated:
“ACC”
. Under other conditions: “ON”
5. When the keyless access with push-
button start system is deactivated, press
the push-button ignition switch with the
clutch pedal (MT models) or brake pedal
(CVT models) released. The status of the
push-button ignition switch then changes
to “ON”.
NOTE
If the power does not switch even
though the above procedure was fol-
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
& Starting engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the shift lever into neutral (MT
models) or the select lever into the “P”
position (CVT models).
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models).
5. Hold the access key with the buttons
facing you, and touch the push-button
ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key and the vehicle is completed,
a chime (ding) will sound. At the same
time, the push-button ignition switch turns
to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
6. Within 5 seconds after the push-button
ignition switch turns to the “ACC” or “ON”
position, while depressing the brake pedal
(all models) and the clutch pedal (MT
models), press the push-button ignition
switch.
NOTE
If the engine does not start even
though the above procedure was fol-
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
In case of emergency/Access key – if access key does not operate properly
9-17
9
Black plate (494,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
In case of emergency/Moonroof – if the moonroof does not close
Moonroof (if equipped) – if
the moonroof does not close
If the moonroof does not close, we
recommend that you have the system
checked by a SUBARU dealer.
If your vehicle is involved in
an accident
CAUTION
If your vehicle is involv ed in an
accident, be sure to inspect the
ground under the vehicle before
restarting the engine. If you find that
fuel has leaked on the ground, do
not try to restart the engine. The fuel
system has been damaged and is in
need of repair. Immediately contact
the nearest automotive service facil-
ity. We recommend that you consult
your SUBARU dealer.
Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off
system. To minimize the risk of fire due to
fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an
airbag inflates upon collision, the system
stops supplying fuel to the engine.
Perform the following procedures to re-
start t he en gine after the system is
activated.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
or “ACC” position.
2. Restart the engine.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
2. Restart the engine.
9-18
Black plate (21,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2
Washing............................................................. 10-2
Waxing and polishing......................................... 10-3
Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3
Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4
Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4
To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4
Cleaning the interi or.......................................... 10-5
Seat fabric......................................................... 10-5
Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5
Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5
Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
panel, console panel, and switches .................. 10-5
Monitor.............................................................. 10-6
Appearance care
10
Black plate (498,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Appearance care/Exterior care
Exterior care
& Washing
CAUTION
. When washing the vehicle, the
brakes may get wet. As a result,
the brake stopping distance will
be longer. To dry the brakes,
drive the vehicle at a safe speed
while lightly depressing the
brake pedal to heat up the
brakes.
. Do not wash the engine compart-
ment and area adjacent to it. If
water enters the engine air intake
or electrical parts, it will cause
engine trouble or a malfunction
of electrical equipment.
. Do not use any organic solvents
when washing the surface of the
bulb assembly cover. However, if
a detergent with organic solvents
is used to wash the cover sur-
face, completely rinse off the
detergent with water. Otherwise,
the cover surface may be da-
maged.
NOTE
When having your vehicle washed in
an automatic car wash, make sure
beforehand that the car was h is of
suitable type.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
vehicle at least once a month to avoid
contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash
the vehicle with hot water and in direct
sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree
sap, and bird droppings should be washed
off by using a light detergent, as required.
If you use a light detergent, make certain
that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
cleaning agents should be promptly
flushed from the surface and not allowed
to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
remaining water off with a chamois or soft
cloth.
! Washing the underbody
Chemicals, sa lts and gravel used for
deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
derbody components, such as the exhaust
system, fuel and brake lines, brake
cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-
pension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-
side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
water at frequent intervals to reduce the
harmful effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
components may accelerate their corro-
sion.
After driving off-road or on muddy or
sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off
the underbody. Carefully flush the suspen-
sion and axle parts, as they are particu-
larly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do
not use a sharp-edged tool to remove
caked mud.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to damage brake
hoses, sensor ha rnesses, and
other parts when washing sus-
pension components.
. Be careful not to flush the engine
bottom for a long time. It may
cause damage of some electrical
parts.
10-2
Black plate (499,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Using a warm water washer
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
or more between the washer nozzle and
the vehicle.
. Do not wash the same area continu-
ously.
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash
by hand. Some warm water washers are
of the high temperature, high pressure
type, and they can damage or deform the
resin parts such as moldings, or cause
water to leak into the vehicle.
& Waxing and polishing
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and
apply them according to the manufac-
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recom-
mended that a coat of wax be applied at
least once a month, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has dimin-
ished to the point where the luster or tone
cannot be restored, lightly pol ish the
surface with a fine-grained compound.
Never polish just the affected area, but
include the surrounding area as well.
Always polish in only one direction. A
No. 2000 grain compound is recom-
mended. Never use a coarse-grained
compound. Coa rse-grained compounds
have a smaller grain-size number and
could damage the paint. After polishing
with a compound, coat with wax to restore
the original luster. Frequent polishing with
acompoundoranincorrectpolishing
technique will result in removing the paint
layer and exposing the undercoat. When
in doubt, it is always best to contact your
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-
list.
CAUTION
Do not use any agents with organic
solvents on the surface of the bulb
assembly cover. However, if a polish
or wax w ith organic solvents is
applied to the cover surface, com-
pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
Otherwise, the cover surface may be
damaged.
NOTE
Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
the vehicle.
& Cleaning aluminum wheels
. Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
is left on too long, it may be difficult to
clean off.
. Do not use soap containing grit to
clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
washing device.
. Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-
num whe els) with water as soon as
possible when it has been splashed with
sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
driven on roads treated with salt or other
agents.
Appearance care/Exterior care
10-3
10
Black plate (500,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Appearance care/Corrosion protection
Corrosion protection
Your SUBARU has been designed and
built to resist corrosion. Special materials
and protective finishes have been used on
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
fine appearance, strength, and reliable
operation.
& Most common causes of
corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
are:
. The accumulation of moisture retaining
dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle
when:
. It is exposed to road salt or dust control
chemicals, or used in coastal areas where
there is more salt in the air, or in areas
where there is considerable industrial
pollution.
. It is driven in areas of high humidity,
especially when temperatures range just
above freezing.
. Dampness in certain parts of the
vehicle remains for a long time, even
though other parts of the vehicle may be
dry.
. High temperatures will cause corrosion
to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry
quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.
& To help prevent corrosion
Wash the vehicle regu larly to prevent
corrosion of the body and suspension
components. Also, wash the vehicle
promptly after driving on any of t he
following surfaces.
. roads that have been salted to prevent
them from freezing in winter
. mud, sand, or gravel
. coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recom-
mended that the underbody be given a
very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the
condition of underbody components, such
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should
be given an appropriate rust prevention
treatment or should be replaced. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind
of maintenance and treatment if you need
assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water
and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
because that could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to
make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
vehicle in a damp, poorly ventil ated
garage. In such a garage, corrosion can
be caused by dampness. If you wash the
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
into the garage when wet or covered with
snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and other
corrosive materials are used, the door
hinges and locks, and hood latch should
be inspected and lubricated periodically.
10-4
Black plate (501,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Cleaning the interior
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
organic solvents.)
& Seat fabric
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabri c surface with a tightly
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe
using a solution of mild soap and luke-
warm water then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a
commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use
the cleaner on a hidden place and make
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.
Use the cleaner according to its instruc-
tions.
CAUTION
When cleaning the seat, do not use
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
materials. Doing so could damage
the surface and cause the color to
deteriorate.
& Leather seat materials
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
quality natural product which will retain its
distinctive appearance and feel for many
years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the
surface can cause the material to become
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular
cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber
cloth should be performed monthly, taking
care not to soak the leather or allow water
to penetrate the stitched seams.
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning
woolen fabrics may be used to remove
difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry
cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and head restraints be
covered, or the w indows shaded, to
prevent fading or shrinkage.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches
may be treated with a commercial leather
spray lacquer. You will discover that each
leather seat section will develop soft folds
or wrin kles, which is characteristi c of
genuine leather.
& Synthetic leather upholstery
The synthetic leather material used on the
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
leather materials may be used when
necessary.
CAUTION
Strong cleaning agents such as
solvents, paint thinners, window
cleaner or fuel must never be used
on leather or synthetic interior ma-
terials. Doing so could damage the
surface and cause the color to
deteriorate.
& Climate control panel, audio
panel, instrument panel,
console panel, and switches
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches.
Appearance care/Cleaning the interior
– CONTINUED –
10-5
10
Black plate (502,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Appearance care/Cleaning the interior
CAUTION
. Do not use organic solvents such
as paint thinners or fuel, or
strong cleaning agents that con-
tain those s olvents. Doing so
could damage the surface and
cause the color to deteriorate.
. Do not use c hemical solvents
that contain silicone on the vehi-
cle audio system, electrical com-
ponents of the air-conditioner or
any switches. If silicone adheres
to these p arts, it may cause
damage to electrical compo-
nents.
& Monitor
To clean the audio/navigation/multi func-
tion display monitor, wipe it with a silicone
cloth or with a soft cloth. If the monitor is
extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth
moistened with neutral detergent then
carefully wipe off any remaining detergent.
CAUTION
. Do not spray neutral detergent
directly onto the monitor. Doing
so could damage the monitor’s
components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a
hard cloth. Doing so could
scratch the monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that
contains thinner, fuel, o r any
other volatile substance. Su ch
cleaning fluid could erase the
lettering on the switches at the
bottom of the monitor.
10-6
Black plate (23,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3
Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3
Before checking or servicing in the engine
compartment.................................................... 11-4
When checking or servicing in the engine
compartment.................................................... 11-5
When checking or servicing in the engine
compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-5
Maintenance tips ................................................ 11-6
Removing and reinstalling clips.......................... 11-6
Engine hood ....................................................... 11-9
Engine compartment overview........................ 11-11
STI................................................................... 11-11
Except STI ....................................................... 11-12
Engine oil.......................................................... 11-13
Engine oil consumption.................................... 11-13
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-13
Changing the oil and oil filter............................ 11-15
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-16
Synthetic oil..................................................... 11-16
Cooling system ................................................ 11-17
Cooling fan, hose and connections ................... 11-17
Engine coolant ................................................. 11-18
Air cleaner elemen t .......................................... 11-19
Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-19
Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-21
Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-21
Drive belts ........................................................ 11-22
Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-23
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-23
Continuously variable transmission fluid ...... 11-23
Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and
rear differential gear oil................................ 11-23
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-23
Power steering fluid (STI) ............................... 11-24
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-24
Recommended fluid......................................... 11-24
Brake fluid........................................................ 11-25
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-25
Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-25
Clutch fluid (MT models)................................. 11-26
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-26
Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-26
Brake booster .................................................. 11-27
Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-27
Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-27
Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-28
Clutch pedal (MT models) ............................... 11-28
Checking the clutch function............................ 11-28
Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-28
Hill start assist system.................................... 11-29
Replacement of bra ke pad and lining ............ 11-29
Breaking-in of new brake pads (models with
electronic parking brake system).................... 11-29
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings
(models without electronic parking brake
system) ......................................................... 11-30
Parking brake stroke (models without
electronic parking brake system) ................ 11-30
Maintenance and service
11
Black plate (24,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service
Tires and wheels .............................................. 11-31
Types of tires ................................................... 11-31
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if
equipped)....................................................... 11-31
Tire inspection ................................................. 11-32
Tire pressures and wear ................................... 11-33
Wheel balance.................................................. 11-35
Wear indicators................................................ 11-35
Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-36
Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-36
Tire replacement .............................................. 11-36
Wheel replacement........................................... 11-37
Aluminum wheels............................................. 11-38
Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-38
Replacement of wiper blades.......................... 11-39
Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-40
Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-40
Battery .............................................................. 11-41
Fuses ................................................................ 11-42
Installation of accessories .............................. 11-44
Replacing bulbs............................................... 11-44
Headlights (models with LED headlights).......... 11-44
High beam headlight........................................ 11-44
Low beam headlight (models without LED
headlights), front side marker light (if
equipped), parking light (models without LED
headlights) and front turn signal light............. 11-46
Front fog light (if equipped).............................. 11-47
Rear combination lights ................................... 11-48
License plate light ........................................... 11-49
Other bulbs ..................................................... 11-49
Replacing battery............................................. 11-50
Replacing battery of access key....................... 11-50
Replacing transmitter battery ........................... 11-51
Black plate (507,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance schedule
The scheduled maintenance items re-
quired to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Main-
tenance Booklet”.
For details of your maintenance schedule,
read the separate “Warranty and Main-
tenance Booklet”.
NOTE
For models with a multi function dis-
play, you can set a reminder to be
displayed when a scheduled mainte-
nance item is almost due. For details,
refer to “Maintenance settings” F3-79.
Maintenance precautions
When maintenance and service are re-
quired, it is recommended that all work be
done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service
by yourself, you should familiarize yourself
with the information provided in this
section on general maintenance and
service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could
cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-
tion. Any problems caused by improper
maintenance and service performed by
you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
. Testing of an All-W heel Drive
model must NEVER be per-
formed on a single two-wheel
dynamometer or similar appara-
tus. Attempting to do so will
result in transmission damage
and in uncontrolled vehicle
movement and may cause an
accident or injuries to persons
nearby.
. Always select a safe area when
performing maintenance on your
vehicle.
. Always be very careful to avoid
injury when working on the vehi-
cle. Remember that some of the
materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or
handled, for example, battery
acid.
. Your vehicle should only be ser-
viced by persons fully competent
to do so. Serious personal injury
may result to persons not experi-
enced in servicing vehicles.
. Always use the proper tools and
make certain that they are well
maintained.
. Never get under the vehicle sup-
ported only by a jack. Always use
safety stands to support the
vehicle.
. Never keep the engine running in
a poorly ventilated area, such as
a garage or other closed areas.
. Do not smoke or all ow open
flames around the fuel or battery.
This will cause a fire.
. Because the fuel system is under
pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only
by your SUBARU dealer.
. Wear adequate eye protection to
Maintenance and service/Maintenance schedule
– CONTINUED –
11-3
11
Black plate (508,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Maintenance precautions
guard against getting oil or fluids
in your eyes. If something does
get in your eyes, thoroughly
wash them out with clean water.
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seat-
belt pretensioner system, or at-
tempt to take its connectors
apart, as that may activate the
system or it can render it inop-
erative. NEVER use a circuit
tester for this wiring. If your
SRS airbag or seatbelt preten-
sioner needs service, consult
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
SUBARU does not endorse the use of
non-SUBARU approved flushing sys-
tems and strongly advises agai nst
performing these services on a
SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap-
proved flushing systems use chemi-
cals and/or solvents which have not
been tested or approved by SUBARU.
SUBARU warranties do not cover any
part of the vehicle which is damaged by
adding or applying chemicals and/or
solvents other than those approved or
recommended by SUBARU.
& Before checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
WARNING
. Always stop the engine and apply
the parking brake to prevent the
vehicle from moving.
. Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot
when the engine is running and
remain hot for some time after
the engine has stopped.
. Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
. When the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position, the cooling fan
may operate suddenly even
when the engine is stopped. If
your body or clothes come into
contact with a rotating fan, that
could result in serious injury. To
avoid risk of injury, perform the
following precautions.
– Models with push-button start
system:
Always turn the push-button
ignition switch to the “OFF”
position and confirm that the
operation indicator on the
switch is turned off. Then take
the access key out from the
vehicle.
– Models without push-button
start system:
Always remove the key from
the ignition switch.
. Before performing any servicing
on a vehicle equipped with a
remote engine start system (a
dealer option) temporarily place
that system in the service mode
to prevent it from unexpectedly
starting the engine.
11-4
Black plate (509,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& When checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
CAUTION
. Do not contact the drive belt
cover while checking the compo-
nents in the engine compart-
ment. Doing so may cause your
hand to slip off the cover and
result in an unexpected injury.
. Do not touch the oil filter until the
engine has cooled down comple-
tely. Doing so may result in a
burn or other injury. Note that the
oil filter becomes very hot when
the engine i s running and re-
mains hot for some time after
the engine has stopped.
. Do not apply force on the fender
insulator by placing your hands
on it, etc. Deformation of the
insulator and its mount may
occur.
& When checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
while the engine is running
WARNING
A running engine can be dangerous.
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from the cooling
fan, drive belt and any other moving
engine parts. Removing rings,
watches and ties is advisable.
Maintenance and service/Maintenance precautions
11-5
11
Black plate (510,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips
Maintenance tips
Some clips and fender linings must be
removed before replacing the air cleaner
elements or specific bulbs.
& Removing and reinstalling
clips
! Removing clips
There are several types of clips used for
your vehicle.
! Type A clips
1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using
a flat-head screwdriver until the center
portion of the clip is raised.
2.Removetheclipswithaflat-head
screwdriver using leverage.
3. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
! Type B clips
! Type C clips
1. Pull out the center portion of the clip
using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in
the illustration.
2. Pull the protruded center portion to
remove the entire body of the clip.
! Type D clips
1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a
Phillips screwdriver until the center portion
of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
11-6
Black plate (511,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Type E clips
1. Push the center portion of the clip
using a Phillips screwdriver until the clip is
raised.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
! Type F clips
1. Pull out the head of the clip using a
flat-head screwdriver as shown in the
illustration.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
! Reinstalling clips
! Type A clips
! Type B clips
Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips
– CONTINUED –
11-7
11
Black plate (512,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips
! Type C clips
! Type D clips
! Type E clips
Insert the clip without the center portion
first and then push the center portion of
the clip into the hole.
! Type F clips
Insert the clip without the head first and
then push the head of the clip into the
hole.
11-8
Black plate (513,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Engine hood
To open the hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
position.
2. Pull the hood release knob under the
instrument panel.
3. Release the secondary hood release
by moving the lever between the front
grille and the hood toward the left.
4. Lift up the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-
mately 11.8 in (30 cm) above its closed
position and then let it drop.
2. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position. Do not push
the hood forcibly to close it. It could
deform the metal.
WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
CAUTION
. When you open the engine hood,
do not stand the wiper blades up.
Furthermore, while the hood is
open, do not operate the wind-
shield wipers. Doing so could
result in damage to the engine
hood and wiper blades.
. Be extremely careful not to catch
fingers or other objects when
closing the engine hood.
. Do not push the hood forcibly to
close it. It could deform the
metal.
. Be extremely careful opening the
engine hood when the wind is
strong. The engine hood could
close suddenly, possibly causing
injuries from slamming.
. Do not install accessories other
Maintenance and service/Engine hood
– CONTINUED –
11-9
11
Black plate (514,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Engine hood
than genuine SUBARU parts to
the engine hood. If the engine
hood becomes too heavy, the
stay may not be able to support
holding it open.
11-10
Black plate (515,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Engine compartment overview
& STI
1) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-24)
2) Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir
(page 11-25)
3) Fuse box (page 11-42)
4) Battery (page 11-41)
5) Windshield washer tank (page 11-38)
6) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-13)
7) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-18)
8) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-13)
9) Coolant filler tank cap (page 11-18)
10) Air cleaner case (page 11-19)
Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview
– CONTINUED –
11-11
11
Black plate (516,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview
& Except STI
1) Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir
(MT models) (page 11-25)
2) Fuse box (page 11-42)
3) Battery (page 11-41)
4) Windshield washer tank (page 11-38)
5) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-13)
6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-18)
7) Radiator cap (page 11-18)
8) Engine oil filter (page 11-15)
9) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-13)
10) Air cleaner case (page 11-19)
11-12
Black plate (517,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-B" EDITED: 2015/ 7/ 9
Engine oil
CAUTION
. If the level gauge is not pulled out
easily, twist the level gauge right
and left, then pull it out. Other-
wise, you may be injured acci-
dentally straining yourself.
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis-
cosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
& Engine oil consumption
Some engine oil will be consumed while
driving. The rate of consumption can be
affected by such factors as transmission
type, driving style, terrain and tempera-
ture. Under the following conditions, oil
consumption can be increased and thus
require refilling between maintenance
intervals:
. When the engine is new and within the
break-in period
. When the engine oil is of lower quality
. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used
. When engine braking is employed
(repeatedly)
. When the engine is operated at high
engine speeds (for extended periods of
time)
. When the engine is operated under
heavy loads (for extended periods of time)
. When the engine idles for extended
periods of time
. When the vehicle is operated in stop
and go and/or heavy traffic situations
. When the vehicle is used under severe
thermal conditions
. When the vehicle acc elerate s and
decelerates frequently
Under these or similar conditions, you
should check your oil at least every 2nd
fuel fill-up and change your engine oil
more frequently. Different drivers in the
same car may experience different results.
If your oil consumption rate is greater than
expected, contact your authorized
SUBARU retailer who may perform a test
under controlled conditions.
& Checking the oil level
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine. If you check the oil level
just after stopping the engine, wait a few
minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
pan before checking the level.
STI
1) Oil level gauge
2) Oil filler cap
Maintenance and service/Engine oil
– CONTINUED –
11-13
11
Black plate (518,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Engine oil
Except STI
1) Oil level gauge
2) Oil filler cap
3) Oil filter
CAUTION
If the level gauge is not pulled out
easily, twist the level gauge right
and left, then pull it out. Otherwise,
you may be injured accidentally
straining yourself.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
inserted until it stops.
STI
1) Notch
2) Full level
3) Low level
4) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9
Imp qt) from low level to full level
Except STI
1) Full level
2) Low level
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9
Imp qt) from low level to full level
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.
5. STI:
Check the oil level on the gauge. If the oil
level is below the low level mark, add oil
so that the full level is reached.
Except STI:
Check the oil levels on both sides of the
level gauge. The engine oil level must be
judged by the lowest of the two levels. If
the oil level is below the low level mark,
add oil so that the full level is reached.
11-14
Black plate (519,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
CAUTION
. For models except STI, be careful
not to touch the engine oil filter
when removing the oil filler cap.
Doing so may result in a burn, a
pinched finger, or may c ause
some other injury.
. Use only engine oil with t he
recommended grade and vis-
cosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. I f
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil
filler cap and slowly po ur en gine oi l
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
into the engine, you must use the level
gauge to confirm t hat the oil leve l is
correct.
For models STI, just after driving or while
the engine is warm, the engine oil level
reading may be in a range between the
upper level and the notch mark. This is
caused by thermal expansion of t he
engine oil.
NOTE
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do
not add any additional oil above the
upper level when the engine is cold.
& Changing the oil and oil filter
Change the oil and oil filter according to
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
NOTE
. Changing the engine oil and oil filter
should be performed by a well-trained
expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for changing the engine oil and oil filter.
Fully trained mechanics are on standby
at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the
special tools, spare parts and recom-
mended oil for this work, and also,
used oils are properly disposed of.
. If performing oil replacement your-
self, observe the local regulations and
dispose of waste oil properly.
The engine oil and oil f ilter must be
changed more frequently than listed in
the maintenance schedule when driving
on dusty roads, when short trips are
frequently ma de, or when driv ing in
extremely cold weather.
! Changing the oil filter
It may be difficult to change the oil filter.
Have the oil filter chang ed by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
! Changing the oil
1. Warm up the engine by letting the
engine idle for approximately 10 minutes
to ease draining the engine oil.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
3. Remove the oil filler cap.
STI
Maintenance and service/Engine oil
– CONTINUED –
11-15
11
Black plate (520,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Engine oil
Except STI
4. Drain out the engine oil by removing
the drain plug while the engine is still
warm. The used oil should be drained into
an appropriate container and disposed of
properly.
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself with
hot engine oil.
5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain
plug with a clean cloth and tighten it
securely with a new sealing washer after
the oil has completely drained out.
CAUTION
Thoroughly wipe off any engine oil
that has spilled over the exhaust
pipe and/or under-cover. If spilled oil
is not promptly wiped up, the oil
could cause a fire.
6. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.
For the oil capacity (guideline), refer to
“Engine oil” F12-4.
The oil quantity indicated above is only
guideline.
The necessary quantity of oil depends on
the quantity of oil that has been drained.
The quantity of drained oil differs slightly
depending on the temperature of the oil
and the time the oil is left flowing out. After
refilling the engine with oil, therefore, you
must use the level gauge to confirm that
the level is correct.
7. Start the engine and make sure that no
oil leaks appear around the drain plug.
8. Run the engine until it reaches the
normal operating temperature. Then stop
the engine and wait a few minutes to allow
the oil drain back. Check the oil level
again and if necessary, add more engine
oil.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recom-
mended grade and viscosity.
Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4.
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity
provide better fuel economy. However,
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
required to properly lubricate the en-
gine.
& Synthetic oil
You must follow the oil and filter changing
intervals shown in the Warranty and
Maintenance booklet.
NOTE
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
noted in chapter 12 is the recom-
mended engine oil for optimum engine
performance. Conventional oil may be
11-16
Black plate (521,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
Cooling system
WARNING
. Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap until the engine has
been shut off and has cooled
down completely. Since the cool-
ant is under pressure, you may
suffer serious burns from a spray
of boiling hot coolant when the
cap is removed.
. Be careful of the rotating cooling
fan when the engine hood is
open. When the engine tempera-
ture is high, the cooling fan in the
engine compartment may oper-
ate when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position, even
if the engine is stopped. Touch-
ing the cooling fan while it is
rotating may result in injury.
CAUTION
. Vehicles are filled at the factory
with SUBARU Super Coolant that
does not require the first change
for 11 years/137,500 miles (11
years/220,000 km). This coolant
should not be mixed with any
other brand or type of coolant
during this period. Mixing with a
different coolant will reduce the
life of the coolant. Should it be
necessary to top up the coolant
for any reason, use only
SUBARU Super Coolant.
If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
diluted w ith another brand or
type, the maintenance interval is
shortened to that of the mixing
coolant.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
& Cooling fan, hose and con-
nections
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the engine coolant tempera-
ture gauge exceeds the normal operating
range, the cooling fan circuit may be
defective. Refer to “Temperature gauge”
F3-11.
Maintenance and service/Cooling system
– CONTINUED –
11-17
11
Black plate (522,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Cooling system
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
Refer to “Fuses” F11-42 and “Fuses and
circuits” F12-10.
If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling
system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is neces-
sary, there may be a leak in the engine
cooling system. It is recommended that
the cooling system and connections be
checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
& Engine coolant
! Checking the coolant level
1) “FULL” level mark
2) “LOW” level mark
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside
of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
coolant up to just below the filler neck as
shown in the following illustration.
STI
1) Fill up to this level
Except STI
1) Fill up to this level
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the
radiator, reinstall the cap and check that
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.
11-18
Black plate (523,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
! Changing the coolant
It may be difficult to change the coolant.
Have the coolant changed by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
The coolant should be changed according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet ” .
Air cleaner element
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the
air cleaner element removed. The air
cleaner el ement not only filters
intake air but also stops flames if
the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner element is not installed
when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner ele-
ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used,
there is the possibility of causing a
negative effect to the engine.
The air cleaner element functions as a
filter screen. When the element is perfo-
rated or removed, engine wear will be
excessive and engine life shortened.
It is not necessary to clean or wash the air
cleaner element.
& Replacing the air cleaner
element
Replace the air cleaner element according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-
der extremely dusty conditions, replace it
more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
! STI
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on
the air intake duct, then remove the air
intake duct.
Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element
– CONTINUED –
11-19
11
Black plate (524,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element
1) Connector cable
2) Guides
3) Clips
2. Remove the connector cable from the
guides of the air cleaner case.
3. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case cover.
4. Open the air cleaner case and remove
the air cleaner element.
5. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
and case cover with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
6. Install the removed or loosened parts
in the reverse order of removal.
! Except STI
1) Clips
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case cover.
11-20
Black plate (525,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
1) Air cleaner case
2) Air cleaner case cover
2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the
cover rearward while lifting it up.
3. Remove the air cleaner element.
4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
and case cover with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
5. To install the air cleaner case cover,
insert the projections on the air cleaner
case cover into the slits on the air cleaner
case. The illustration above shows an
example in which the projections are not
fitted into the slits correctly.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Spark plugs
It may be difficult to replace the spark
plugs. It is recommended that you have
the spark plugs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”.
& Recommended spark plugs
For the recommended spark plugs, refer
to “Electrical system” F12-8.
Maintenance and service/Spark plugs
11-21
11
Black plate (526,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Drive belts
Drive belts
NOTE
For models except STI, it is unneces-
sary to check the deflection of the drive
belt periodically because this engine is
equipped with an automatic belt ten-
sion adjuster. However, replacement of
the belt should be done according to
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for replace-
ment.
If the drive belt is loose, cracked or
worn, contact your SUBARU dealer.
STI
1) Power steering oil pump pulley
2) Front side belt
3) Alternator pulley
4) Air conditioner compressor pulley
5) Rear side belt
6) Crank pulley
A) 22 lbf (98 N, 10 kgf)
CAUTION
The front side belt, which runs in
conjunction with the following com-
ponents, must be used within the
specified deflection.
. Power steering oil pump pulley
. Alternator pulley
. Crank pulley
Check the deflection of the front
side belt and if there is any loosen-
ess, cracks, wear or unusual noise
on the front side belt, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Continuing to use the vehicle with
the belt outside of the specification
may cause the engine to malfunc-
tion and the above components to
malfunction.
To check the deflection of the front side
belt, place a straightedge (ruler) across
two adjacent pulleys (alternator pulley and
crank pulley) and apply a force of 22 lbf
(98 N, 10 kgf) midway between the pulleys
by using a spring scale. The belt deflec-
tion should be the amount specified. If the
front side belt is loose, cracked or worn,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
in (mm)
Deflection
New belt
Used belt
A
0.28 – 0.35
(7.0 – 9.0)
0.35 – 0.43
(9.0 – 11.0)
The rear side belt is a stretch-type belt,
therefore the deflection does not need to
be checked. If there are cracks or wear
confirmed on the belts and a squeaking
noise is heard from them, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
11-22
Black plate (527,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Manual transmission oil
It is not necessary to check the transmis-
sion oil level. Check that there are no
cracks, damage or leakage. However, the
oil inspection should be performed ac-
cording to the maintenance schedule in
the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-6.
Continuously variable trans-
mission fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmis-
sion fluid level. Check that there are no
cracks, damage or leakage. However, the
fluid inspection should be perfor med
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
details.
Front differential gear oil
(CVT models) and rear differ-
ential gear oil
It is not necessary to check the gear oil
level. Check that there are no cracks,
damage or leakage. However, the oil
inspection should be performed according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenanc e Bookle t”.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands t ogether. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-6.
CAUTION
Using a differential gear oil other
than the specified oil may cause a
decline in vehicle performance.
Maintenance and service/Manual transmission oil
11-23
11
Black plate (528,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Power steering fluid (STI)
Power steering fluid (STI)
& Checking the fluid level
The power steering fluid expands greatly
as its temperature rises; the fluid level
differs according to fluid temperature.
Therefore, the reservoir t ank has two
different checking ranges for hot and cold
fluids.
Check the power steering fluid level
monthly.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface,
and stop the engine.
2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir
tank.
When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has
been run: Check that the oil level is
between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on
the surface of the reservoir tank.
When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is
run: Check that the oil level is between
“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the
surface of the reservoir tank.
3. If the fluid level is lower than the
applicable “MIN” line, add the recom-
mended fluid as necessary to bring the
level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.
If the fluid level is extremely low, it may
indicate possible leakage. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself
because the fluid may be hot.
CAUTION
. When power steering fluid is
being added, use only clean fluid,
and be careful not to allow any
dirt into the tank. And never use
different brands together.
. Be careful not to spill power
steering fluid when adding it. If
power steering fluid touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
power steering fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
& Recommended fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-7.
11-24
Black plate (529,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Brake fluid
& Checking the fluid level
WARNING
. Never let brake fluid contact your
eyes because brake fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If brake
fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with
clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
eye protection is advisable.
. Brake flui d absor bs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
. When adding brake fluid, be care-
ful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the brake
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
when adding it. If brake fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
1) “MAX” level line
2) The brake fluid level must be checked in
this area.
3) “MIN” level line
Check the fluid level monthly.
Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. Because this reservoir is used
for both the brake and clutch systems and
has chambers for each system, be sure to
check the fluid level for the brake system
at the front part of the reservoir (shaded
area in the illustration). If the fluid level is
below “MIN”, add the recommended brake
fluid to “MAX”.
Use o nly bra ke fluid from a sealed
container.
& Recommended brake fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-7.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of brake
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand.
Maintenance and service/Brake fluid
11-25
11
Black plate (530,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Clutch fluid (MT models)
Clutch fluid (MT models)
& Checking the fluid level
WARNING
Never let clutch fluid contact your
eyes because clutch fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid
gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
For safety, when performing this
work, wearing eye protection is
advisable.
CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
. When clutch fluid is added, be
careful not to allow any dirt into
the tank.
. Never splash the clutch fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the clutch
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid
when adding it. If clutch flui d
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
. The fluid level for t he clutch
system must be checked at the
inboard side of the reservoir. It
cannot be checked at the out-
board side of the reservoir.
1) “MAX” level line
2) The clutch fluid level must be checked in
this area.
3) “MIN” level line
Check the fluid level monthly.
Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. Because this reservoir is used
for both the brake and clutch systems and
has chambers for each system, be sure to
check the fluid level for the clutch system
at the inboard side of the reservoir
(shaded area in the illustration). If the fluid
level is below “MIN”,addtherecom-
mended clutch fluid to “MAX”.
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed
container.
& Recommended clutch fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-7.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of clutch
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand.
11-26
Black plate (531,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Brake booster
If the brake booster does not operate as
described in the following, have it checked
by your SUBARU dealer.
1. With the engine off, depress the brake
pedal several times, applying the same
pedal force each time. The distance the
pedal travels should not vary.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
the engine. The pedal should move
slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for
approximately one minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression.
NOTE
When you dep ress the br ake pedal
strongly or suddenly, you might feel
that lighter depression of the brake
pedal gene rates a greater braking
force. However, even though these
occur, they do not indicate any mal-
functions, and the brake assist system
is operating properly.
Brake assist is not a system that brings
more braking ability to the vehicle
beyond its breaking capability.
Brake pedal
Check the brake pe dal free play and
reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the brake pedal
free play
1) 0.02 – 0.11 in (0.5 – 2.7 mm)
Stop the engine and firmly depress the
brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the
brake pedal up with one finger to check
the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf
(10 N, 1 kgf).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
Maintenance and service/Brake booster
– CONTINUED –
11-27
11
Black plate (532,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Clutch pedal (MT models)
& Checking the brake pedal
reserve distance
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)
Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-
mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than
the specification, or when the pedal does
not operate smoothly, contact with your
SUBARU dealer.
Clutch pedal (MT models)
Check the clutch pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the clutch function
Check the clutch engagement and disen-
gagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
slowly to check that the engine and
transmission smooth ly couple without
any sign of slippage.
& Checking the clutch pedal
free play
1) 0.16 – 0.43 in (4.0 – 11.0 mm)
Lightly depress the clutch pedal down with
your finger until you feel resistance, and
check the free play.
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
11-28
Black plate (533,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Hill start assist system
Ensure that the Hill start assist system
operates properly under the following
circumstances.
1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by
depressing the brake pedal (all models)
and clutch pedal (MT models only), with
the engine running.
2. Make sure that the vehicle does not
move backward for several seconds after
the brake pedal is released.
3. Then make sure the vehicle starts
climbing the grade by following the normal
starting procedures.
If the Hill start assist system does not
operate as described above, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Replacement of brake pad
and lining
The disc brakes have audible wear
indicators on the brake pads. If the brake
pads wear close to their service limit, the
wear indicator makes a very audible
scraping noise when the brake pedal is
applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
. It is recommended that you dis-
connect the vehicle battery be-
fore replacing the brake pad.
However, it is dangerous to dis-
connect the vehicle battery. We
recommend that you have your
SUBARU dealer replace the
brake pad.
. If you continue to drive despite
the scraping noise from the audi-
ble brake pad wear indicator, it
will result in the need for costly
brake rotor repair or replace-
ment.
& Breaking-in of new brake
pads (models with electronic
parking brake system)
When replacing the brake pad, use only
genuine SUBARU parts. After replace-
ment, the new parts must be broken in as
follows.
! Brake pad
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40
mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more
times. Also, apply and release the electro-
nic parking brake five or more times.
Maintenance and service/Hill start assist system
– CONTINUED –
11-29
11
Black plate (534,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Parking brake stroke (models without electronic parking brake system)
& Breaking-in of new brake
pads and linings (models
without electronic parking
brake system)
When replacing the brake pad or lining,
use only genuine SUBARU parts. After
replacement, the new parts must be
broken in as follows.
! Brake pad and lining
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40
mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more
times.
! Parking brake lining
1.Drivethevehicleataspeedof
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).
2. With the parking brake release button
pushed in, pull the parking brake lever
SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a
force of approximately 33.7 lbf [150 N,
15.3 kgf]).
3. Drive the vehicle for approximately
220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking
brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-
dure.
5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the
parking brake stroke is out of the specified
range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut
located on the parking brake lever.
Parking brake stroke:
7 – 8 notches / 45 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf)
WARNING
A safe location and situation should
be selected for break-in driving.
CAUTION
Pulling the parking brake lever too
forcefully may cause the rear
wheels to lock. To avoid this, be
certain to pull the lever up slowly
and gently.
Parking brake stroke (models
without electronic parking
brake system)
Check the parking brake stroke according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenanc e Bookle t”.
When the parking brake is properly
adjusted, braking power is fully applied
by pulling the lever up 7 to 8 notches
gently but firmly (approximately 45 lbf [200
N, 20.4 kgf]). If the parking brake lever
stroke is not within the specified range,
have the brake system checked and
adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.
11-30
Black plate (535,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Tires and wheels
& Types of tires
You should be familiar with type of tires
present on your vehicle.
! All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide
an adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving including snowy and icy road
conditions. However all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by “ALL
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
the tire sidewall.
! Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed capability
tires best suited for highway driving under
dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving
on slippery roads such as on snow-
covered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to
replace all four tires.
! Winter (snow) tires
Winter tires are best suited for driving on
snow-covered and icy roads. However
winter tires do not perform as well as
summer tires and all season tires on roads
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
& Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message
by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-
ing system will activate only when the
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may
not react immediately to a sudden drop in
tire pressure (for example, a blow-out
caused by running over a sharp object).
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm
garage and will then drive the vehicle in
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
pressures may cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate. To avoid this
problem when adjusting the tire pressures
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to
pressures higher than those shown on the
tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an
extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm
2
) for
every difference of 108F (5.68C) between
the temperature in the garage and the
temperature outside. By way of example,
the following table shows the required tire
pressures that correspond to various out-
side temperatures when the temperature
in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
Example:
Tire size: 245/40R18 97W
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm
2
)]
Front Rear
308F(− 18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)
108F(−128C) 38 (260, 2.6) 37 (255, 2.55)
−108F(−238C) 40 (275, 2.75)
39 (270, 2.7)
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
cold outside air after adjusting the tire
pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
tire pressures using the method described
above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to
see that the low tire pressure warning light
turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire
pressure warning light does not turn off,
the tire pressure monitoring system may
not be functioning normally. In this event,
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
– CONTINUED –
11-31
11
Black plate (536,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
go to a SUBARU dealer to have the
system inspected as soon as possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction be-
tween tires and the road surface causes
the tires to warm up. After illumination of
the low tire pressure warning light, any
increase in the tire pressures caused by
an increase in the outside air temperature
or by an increase in the temperature in the
tires can cause the low tire pressure
warning light to turn off.
System resetting is necessary when the
wheels are changed (for example, a
switch to snow tires) and new TPMS
valves are installed on the newly fitted
wheels. Have this work performed by a
SUBARU dealer following wheel replace-
ment.
It may not be possible to install TPMS
valves on certain wheels that are on the
market. Therefore, if you change the
wheels (for example, a switch to snow
tires), use wheels that have the same part
number as the standard-equipment
wheels. Without four operational TPMS
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
will not fully function and the warning light
on the combination meter will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute.
When a tire is replaced, adjustments are
necessary to ensure continued normal
operation of the tire pressure monitoring
system. As with wheel replacement, there-
fore, you should have the work performed
by a SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
does not illuminate briefly after the
ignition switch is turned ON or the
light illuminates steadily after blink-
ing for approximately one minute,
you should have your Tire Pressure
Monitoring S ystem checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradu-
ally reducing speed. Then slowly
pull off the road to a safe place.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
& Tire inspection
Check on a daily basis that the tires are
free from serious damage, nails, and
stones. At the same time, check the tires
for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately if you find any problem.
NOTE
. When the wheels and tires strike
curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-
ment as when the vehicle is driven on a
rough surface, they can suffer damage
11-32
Black plate (537,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
that cannot be seen with the naked eye.
This type of damage does not become
evident until time has passed. Try not
to drive over curbs, potholes or on
other rough surfaces. If doing so is
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed
down to a walking pace or less, and
approach the curbs as squarely as
possible. Also, make sure the tires are
not pressed against the curb when you
park the vehicle.
. If you feel unusual vibration while
driving or find it difficult to steer the
vehicle in a straight line, one of the
tires and/or wheels may be damaged.
Drive slowly to the nearest authorized
SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle
inspected.
& Tire pressures and wear
Maintaining the correct tire pressures
helps to maximize the tires’ service lives
and is essential for good running perfor-
mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust
the pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month (for example,
during a fuel stop) and before any long
journey.
Tire placard
Check the tire pressures when the tires
are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust
the tire pressures to the values shown on
the tire placard. The tire placard is located
on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
Driving even a short distance warms up
the tires and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
outside temperature. It is best to check tire
pressure outdoors before driving the
vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside
it expands, causing the tire pressure to
increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
release air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure.
NOTE
. The air pressure in a tire increases
by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3
kgf/cm
2
) when the tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold when
the vehicle has been parked for at least
three hours or has been driven less
than one mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to
adjust pressure. Doing so will result
in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-
trollability and ride comfort, and they
cause the tires to wear abnormally.
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
– CONTINUED –
11-33
11
Black plate (538,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
. Correct tire pressure (tread worn
evenly)
Roadholding is good, a nd steering is
responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so
fuel consumption is also lower.
. Abnormally low tire pressure (tread
worn at shoulders)
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-
sumption is also higher.
. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread
worn in center)
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire
magnifies the effects of road-surface
bumps and dips, possibly resulti ng in
vehicle damage.
If the tire placard shows tire pressures for
the vehicle when fully loaded, adjust the
tire pressures to the values that match
current loading conditions.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become ho t. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
11-34
Black plate (539,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
& Wheel balance
Each wheel was correctly balanced when
your vehicle was new, but the wheels will
become unbalanced as the tires become
worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes
the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts from
the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can
also cause steering and suspension sys-
tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If
you s uspect that the wheels are not
correctly balanced, have them checked
and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire repairs
and after tire rotation.
CAUTION
Loss of correct wheel alignment
causes the tires to wear on one side
and reduces the vehicle’s running
stability. Contact your SUBARU
dealer if you notice abnormal tire
wear.
NOTE
The suspension system is designed to
hold each wheel at a certain alignment
(relative to the other wheels and to the
road) for optimum straight-line stability
and cornering performance.
& Wear indicators
1) New tread
2) Worn tread
3) Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear
indicator, which becomes visible when
the depth of the tread grooves decreases
to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be
replaced when the tread wear indicator
appears as a solid band across the tread.
WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indicator
becomes visible, the tire is worn
beyond the acceptable limit and
must be replaced immediately. With
a tire in this condition, driving at
high speeds in wet weather can
cause the vehi cle to hydroplane.
The resulting loss of vehicle control
can lead to an accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their tread
wear indicators become visible.
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
– CONTINUED –
11-35
11
Black plate (540,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
& Tire rotation direction mark
Example of tire rotation direction mark
1) Front
If the tire has the rotation direction
specification, the tire rotation direction
mark is placed on its sidewall.
When you install a tire that has the tire
rotation direction mark, install the tire with
the direction mark facing forward.
& Tire rotation
Veh icles equipped with 4 non-unidirec-
tional tires
1) Front
Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires
1) Front
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel.
Move the tires to the positions shown in
the illustration each time they are rotated.
For the tire rotation schedule, refer to the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn
tires at the time of rotation. After tire
rotation, adjust the tires pressures and
make sure the wheel nuts are correctly
tightened.
After driving approximately 600 miles
(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again
and retighten any nut that has become
loose.
& Tire replacement
The wheels and tires are important and
integral parts of your vehicle’s design;
they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The
tires fitted as standard equipment are
optimally matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and were selected to give
the best possible combination of running
performance, ride comfort, and service
life. It is essential for every tire to have a
size and construction matching those
shown on the tire placard and to have a
speed symbol and load index matching
those shown on the tire placard.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
11-36
Black plate (541,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
from controllability, ride comfort, braking
performance, speedometer accuracy and
odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-
rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-
priately changes the vehicle’sground
clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-
struction, and size. You are advised to
replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard equip-
ment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
recommends replacing all four tires at
the same time.
WARNING
. When replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the
same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Circumference
(c) Speed symbol
(d) Load index
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (d), you must
obey the specificati on that i s
printed on the tire placard. The
tire placard is located on the
driver’s door pillar.
If all four tires are not the same in
items (a) to (h), there is a possi-
bility that it may lead to serious
mechanical damage to the drive
train of your car and affect the
following factors.
— Ride
— Handling
— Braking
— Speedometer/Odometer
calibration
— Clearance between the body
and the tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
. Use only radial tires. Do not use
radial tires together with belted
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
Doing so can dangerously re-
duce controllability, resulting in
an accident.
& Wheel replacement
When replacing wheels due, for example,
to damage, make sure the replacement
wheels match the specifications of the
wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
ment. Replacement wheels are available
from SUBARU dealers.
WARNING
Use only those wheels that are
specified for your vehicle. Wheels
not meeting specifications could
interfere with brake caliper opera-
tion and may cause the tires to rub
against the wheel well housing dur-
ing turns. The resulting l oss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
NOTE
When any of the wheels are removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to
change a flat tire, always check the
tightness of the wheel nuts after driv-
ing approximately 600 miles (1,000 km).
If any nut is loose, tighten it to the
specified torque.
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
11-37
11
Black plate (542,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Aluminum wheels
Aluminum wheels
Aluminum wheels can be scratched and
damaged easily. Handle them carefully to
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety.
. When any of the wheels are removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to change
a flat tire, always check the tightness of
the wheel nuts after driving approximately
600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
tighten it to the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
wheel.
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp
protrusions or curbs.
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap is replaced, be sure to
replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
designed for aluminum wheels.
Windshield washer fluid
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
When there is only a small amount of
washer fluid remaining, the windshield
washer fluid warning indicator will illumi-
nate. When this occurs, refill the washer
fluid as follows.
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then
add windshield w asher fluid until it
reaches the “FULL” mark on the tank. If
windshield washer fluid is unavailable use
clean water.
In areas where water freezes in winter,
use an anti-freeze type windshield washer
fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
perature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
11-38
Black plate (543,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Washer Fluid
Concentration
Freezing
Temperature
30%
10.48F(−128C)
50% −48F(−208C)
100% −498F(−458C)
In order to prevent freezing of washer
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
thepipingistoolowfortheoutside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should b e used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
Replacement of wiper blades
Grease, wax, insects, or other material on
the windshield or the wiper blade results in
jerky wiper operation and streaking on the
glass. If you cannot remove the streaks
after operating the windshield washer or if
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the
outer surface of the windshield (or rear
window) and the wiper blades using a
sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
blades with clean water. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when you rinse
the windshield with water.
CAUTION
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
. When you wish to raise the
passenger-side wiper arm, first
raise the driver-side wiper arm.
Otherwise, the passenger-side
wiper assembly and driver-side
wiper assembly will touch each
other, possibly resulting in
scratches.
Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
– CONTINUED –
11-39
11
Black plate (544,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
. Return the passenger-side wiper
arm to its original position before
returning the driver-side wiper
arm to its original position.
Otherwise, the passenger-side
wiper assembly and driver-side
wiper assembly will touch each
other, possibly resulting in
scratches.
. While removing the wiper blades
from the wiper arms, do not
return the wiper arms to the
original posi tions. Otherwise,
the windshield surface may be
scratched.
. When returning the raised wiper
arms to the original positions,
carefully return the wiper arms
on the windshield by hand. You
should not return the wiper arms
to the windshield only by the
return spring. Otherwise, the wi-
per arms may be deformed and/
or the windshield surface may be
scratched.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following proce-
dures.
& Windshield wiper blade as-
sembly
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
1) Stopper
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by
holding its pivot area and pushing it in the
direction shown by the arrow while de-
pressing the wiper blade stopper.
3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
& Windshield wiper blade rub-
ber
1) Metal support
1. Grasp the locked end of the blade
rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
stoppers on the rubber are free of the
metal support.
11-40
Black plate (545,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
1) Metal spines
2. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
3. Align the claws of the metal support
with the grooves in the rubber and slide
the blade rubber assembly into the metal
support until it locks.
1) Stopper
4. Be sure to position the claws at the
end of the metal support between the
stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the
rubber is not retained properly, the wiper
blade may scratch the windshield.
Battery
WARNING
. Before beginning work on or near
any battery, be sure to extinguish
all cigarettes, matches, and light-
ers. Never expose a battery to an
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is
highly flammable and explosive.
. For safety, in case an explosion
does occur, wear eye protection
or shield your eyes when work-
ing near any battery. Never lean
over a battery.
. Do not let battery fluid contact
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-
cause battery fluid is a corrosive
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately
flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help imme-
diately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im-
mediately.
. To lessen the risk o f sparks,
Maintenance and service/Battery
– CONTINUED –
11-41
11
Black plate (546,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Fuses
remove rings, metal watchbands,
and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and any-
thing connected to it WHILE you
are at the same time in contact
with any other metallic portion of
the vehicle because a short cir-
cuit will result.
. Keep everyone including children
away from the battery.
. Charge the battery in a well-
ventilated area.
. Battery posts, terminals and re-
lated accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Batteries als o contain
other chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer.
Wash hands after handling
.
1) Cap
2) Upper level
3) Lower level
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
However, if the battery fluid level is below
the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the
upper level with distilled water.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life.
Fuses
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one hav-
ing a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an
overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver ’s
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
11-42
Black plate (547,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
1) Spare fuses
The other one (main fuse box) is housed
in the engine compartment. Also, the
spare fuses are stored in the fuse box
cover.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
box in the engine compartment.
1) Good
2) Blown
If any lights, accessories or other electrical
controls do not operate, inspect the
corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,
replace it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and turn off all electrical
accessories.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”
F12-10.
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same
rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this
indicates that its system has a problem.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
Maintenance and service/Fuses
11-43
11
Black plate (548,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Installation of accessories
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing fog lights or any other
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic
system to malfunction if they are incor-
rectly installed or if they are not suited for
the vehicle.
Replacing bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
a risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
. Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage.
Using a bulb of different wattage
could result in a fire. For the
specified wattage of each bulb,
refer to “Bulb chart” F12-16.
. Do not touch the glass portion of
the light bulb with bare hands.
When holding the glass portion
is unavoidable, hold it using with
a clean dry cloth to avoid getting
moisture and grease on the bulb.
If there is any fingerprints or
grease on the bulb surface, wipe
them away with a soft cloth
moistened with alcohol. Also, if
the bulb is scratched or dropped,
it may blow out or crack.
& Headlights (models with LED
headlights)
The LED headlight warning light illumi-
nates if the LED headlights malfunction.
Have your vehicle inspected at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
& High beam headlight
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
Perform the following steps to replace the
bulbs.
11-44
Black plate (549,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Left-hand side
1. Left-hand side: Use a screwdriver to
remove the secured clip of the washer
tank. To make it easy to access the bulb,
turn the neck of the washer fluid filler pipe
as illustrated.
Right-hand side
Right-hand side: Use a screwdriver to
undo the clips on the air intake duct, then
remove the air intake duct.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb as pushing the tab.
Left-hand side
Right-hand side
3. Left-hand side: Remove the bulb
from the headlight assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
Right-hand side: Remove the bulb from
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
– CONTINUED –
11-45
11
Black plate (550,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
the headlight assembly by turning it clock-
wise.
4. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
time , use care not to touch the bu lb
surface.
5. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it to the reverse direction
until it clicks.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Left-hand side: Set the washer fluid
filler pipe to the original place and secure it
by clip.
Right-hand side: Install the air intake
duct with clips.
& Low beam headlight (models
without LED headlights),
front side marker light (if
equipped), parking light
(models without LED head-
lights) and front turn signal
light
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
1. Start the engine and turn the steering
wheel fully in the opposite direction of the
bulb to be replaced.
2. Stop the engine.
3. Remove the clips from the mud guard.
4. Pull off the mud guard.
! Low beam headlight
1. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb as pushing the tab.
11-46
Black plate (551,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
2. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Replace the bulb with a new one. At
this time, use care not to touch the bulb
surface.
4. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
6. Reattach the mud guard.
! Front side marker light, parking
light and front turn signal light
1) Front side marker light
2) Parking light
3) Front turn signal light
1. Turn the socket counterclockwise and
pull it out.
2. Pull out the bulb from the socket and
replace the bulb with a new one.
3. After replacing the bulb, reattach the
mud guard.
& Front fog light (if equipped)
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
– CONTINUED –
11-47
11
Black plate (552,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
1. Remove the clips.
2. Turn over the mud guard.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb as pushing the tab.
4. Remove the bulb by turning it counter-
clockwise.
5. Replace the bulb with a new one.
6. After replacing the bulb, reattach the
mud guard.
& Rear combination lights
1. Remove the clips from the trunk trim
with a flat-head screwdriver.
11-48
Black plate (553,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
2. Open the rear portion of the trunk trim
panel as illustrated.
NOTE
Make sure that the “*” part of the trunk
trim in the illustration does not contact
the trunk lid stay. If the “
*” part is bent,
the trunk trim may be torn.
1) Rear side marker light
2) Backup light
3) Rear turn signal light
3. Remove the bulb socket from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
5. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
6. Secure the rear trunk trim panel with
the clips.
NOTE
When replacing a bulb of the rear side
marker light, detach the bulb socket of
the backup light in adva nce. After
replacing the bulb, first attach the side
marker light, and then attach the back-
up light.
& License plate light
1. Open the trunk and remove the clips
from the trunk lid trim with a flat-head
screwdriver.
2. Turn over the trunk lid trim.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and pull out the socket.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
5. Install a new bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb socket and the trunk
lid trim.
& Other bulbs
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
11-49
11
Black plate (554,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Replacing battery
Replacing battery
The access key / transmitter battery may
be discharged under the following condi-
tions.
. The operation of the keyless access
function is unstable
. The operating distance of the remote
keyless entry system is unstable
. The transmitter does not operate prop-
erly when used within the standard dis-
tance
Replace the battery with a new one.
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the access key/transmitter
when replacing battery.
. Be careful not to touch or da-
mage the printed circuit board in
the access key/transmitter when
replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; chil dren could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of an explosion
if the battery is incorrectly re-
placed. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of the
battery.
. Do not expose batteries to ex-
cessive heat such as bright sun-
light, fire or the like.
NOTE
. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type of battery recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
. Dispose of used batteries according
to local laws.
. Mount the battery in the correct
orientation to pre vent fl uid leakage.
Be careful not to bend the terminals. It
may result in a malfunction.
. It is recommended that the battery
should be replaced by a SUBARU
dealer.
. Use a new battery.
. After replacing the battery, confirm
that the access key/transmitter func-
tions properly.
& Replacing battery of access
key
CAUTION
When removing or reinstalling the
access key cover, make sure that
the plastic part does not come off or
become misaligned.
Battery: Button battery CR2032
1) Release button
2) Mechanical key
1. Take out the mechanical key.
11-50
Black plate (555,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl
tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to
remove the cover.
3. Take out the battery using a flat-head
screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.
4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)
side facing upward as shown in the figure.
5. Attach the cover to the access key by
fitting the projections and recesses to-
gether.
& Replacing transmitter battery
1. Open the key head using a flat-head
screwdriver.
2. Remove the transmitter case from the
key head.
Maintenance and service/Replacing battery
– CONTINUED –
11-51
11
Black plate (556,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Maintenance and service/Replacing battery
3. Open the transmitter case by releasing
the hooks.
1) Negative (−) side facing up
4. Replace the old battery with a new
battery (type CR1620 or equivalent) mak-
ing sure to install the new battery with the
negative (−) side facing up.
5. Put together the transmitter case by
fitting the hooks on the case.
6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
key head.
7. Refit the removed half of the key head.
After the battery is replaced, the trans-
mitter must be synchronized with the
remote keyless entry system’s control
unit. Press either the “
” or “ ” button
six times to synchronize the unit.
11-52
Black plate (25,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Specifications ..................................................... 12-2
Dimensions........................................................ 12-2
Engine ............................................................... 12-3
Fuel ................................................................... 12-3
Engine oil .......................................................... 12-4
Manual transmission, front differential and rear
differential gear oil ........................................... 12-6
Fluids ................................................................ 12-7
Engine coolant ................................................... 12-7
Electrical system................................................ 12-8
Tires .................................................................. 12-8
Temporary spare tires ........................................ 12-8
Brake disc ......................................................... 12-9
Fuses and circuits ........................................... 12-10
Fuse panel located in the passenger
compartment ................................................. 12-10
Fuse panel located in the engine
compartment ................................................. 12-12
Bulb chart......................................................... 12-16
Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-18
Specifications
12
Black plate (560,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Specifications/Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
Item STI Except STI
Overall length 180.9 (4,595)
Overall width 70.7 (1,795)
Overall height
58.1 (1,475)
Wheel base 104.3 (2,650)
Tread
Front 60.2 (1,530)
Rear 60.6 (1,540)
Ground clearance
4.9 (125)
12-2
Black plate (561,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Engine
Model
STI Except STI
Engine model
EJ257
(2.5 L, DOHC, turbo)
FA20
(2.0 L, DOHC, turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke petrol engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 150 (2,457) 122 (1,998)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.92 6 3.11 (99.5 6 79.0) 3.39 6 3.39 (86.06 86.0)
Compression ratio 8.2 : 1 10.6 : 1
Firing order
1 – 3 – 2 – 4
& Fuel
NOTE
The engine is designed to operate using unleaded gasoline.
Model Fuel Fuel tank capacity
STI
93 AKI (98 RON) or higher*
1
15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)
Except STI
91 AKI (95 RON) or higher*
2
*1: If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI (98 RON) is not available, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) may be
used with no detriment to engine durability or driveability.
*2: If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) is not available, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher
may be used.
Specifications/Specifications
– CONTINUED –
12-3
12
Black plate (562,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Specifications/Specifications
& Engine oil
For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” F11-13.
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Oil filter
Model STI Except STI
Oil filter color Black Black
Part number 15208AA100 15208AA170
Amount of rotation 1 rotation
3/4 rotation
! Approved engine oil
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.
12-4
Black plate (563,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Alternative engine oil
If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
. Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on
the temperature and other factors.
. In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower
viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the
engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.
. When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity
as those recommended by SUBARU.
Oil grade
SAE viscosity No. and
applicable temperature
Engine oil capacity
API (American Petroleum Insti-
tute) classification SN with the
words “RESOURCE CONSER-
VING”
or
ILSAC (International Lubricant
Specification Advisory Commit-
tee) GF-5, which can be identi-
fied with the ILSAC certification
mark (Starburst mark)
5W-30 synthetic oil is the required oil
for optimum engine performance and
protection. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
*: If 5W-30 synthetic oil is not available,
5W-40 conventional oil may be used if
replenishment is needed but should be
changed to 5W-30 synthetic oil at the
next oil change.
STI:
· Adding the oil from L to F level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
· Changing the oil and oil filter:
4.5 US qt (4.3 liters, 3.8 Imp qt)
· Changing the oil:
4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
Except STI:
· Adding the oil from L to F level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
· Changing the oil and oil filter:
5.4 US qt (5.1 liters, 4.5 Imp qt)
· Changing the oil:
5.2 US qt (4.9 liters, 4.3 Imp qt)
Specifications/Specifications
– CONTINUED –
12-5
12
Black plate (564,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Specifications/Specifications
& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil
Oil Manual transmission oil
Front differential gear oil (CVT
models)
Rear differential gear oil
Oil grade
STI
. API classification GL-5
(75W-90)*
3
—
API classification GL-5
Except
STI
. SUBARU Extra MT*
3
. API classification GL-5
(75W-90)*
4
. SUBARU Extra MT*
3
. API classification GL-5
(75W-90)
SAE viscosity No.
and applicable tem-
perature
——
. 75W-90*
. 90
*: recommended
Oil capa-
city*
1
STI 4.3 US qt (4.1 liters, 3.6 Imp qt) — 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
Except
STI
3.5 US qt (3.3 liters, 2.9 Imp qt) 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Remarks*
2
“Manual transmission oil” F11-23
“Front differential gear oil (CVT
models) and rear differential
gear oil” F11-23
“Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and rear
differential gear oil” F11-23
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this oil.
12-6
Black plate (565,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
*4: You may use this type of manual transmission oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from driveability and fuel efficiency.
& Fluids
Fluid
Fluid type*
1
Fluid capacity*
2
Remarks*
3
Continuously variable transmission
fluid (CVT models)
Consult your SUBARU dealer. 13.1 US qt (12.4 liters, 10.9 Imp qt)
“Continuously variable trans-
mission fluid” F11-23
Brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4
brake fluid
–“Brake fluid” F 11-25
Clutch fluid (MT models)
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4
brake fluid
–
“Clutch fluid (MT models)” F11-
26
Power steering fluid (STI)
· SUBARU ATF
· “Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid
· IDEMITSU ATF HP
0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)
“Power steering fluid (STI)”
F11-24
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
& Engine coolant
Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type
STI 8.2 US qt (7.7 liters, 6.8 Imp qt)
SUBARU Super Coolant
Except STI
MT models 8.7 US qt (8.2 liters, 7.2 Imp qt)
CVT models
8.9 US qt (8.4 liters, 7.4 Imp qt)
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-17.
Specifications/Specifications
– CONTINUED –
12-7
12
Black plate (566,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Specifications/Specifications
& Electrical system
Battery type and capacity (5HR) 55D23L
Alternator
STI 12V-110A
Except STI 12V-130A
Spark plugs
STI SILFR6A (NGK)
Except STI
ILKAR8H6 (NGK)
& Tires
Tire size 235/45R17 94W 245/40R18 97W
Wheel size
17 6 8J 18 6 8 1/2J
Pressure Front
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Wheel nut tightening torque
89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*
1
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel
nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening
procedure, refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-4.
& Temporary spare tires
Temporary spare tire size T145/70D17 205/50R17
Temporary spare tire inflation pressure
(recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Wheel nut tightening torque
89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*
1
*
2
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel
nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible.
*2: For the wheel nut tightening procedure, refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-4.
12-8
Black plate (567,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
& Brake disc
If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, consult your SUBARU dealer.
Specifications/Specifications
12-9
12
Black plate (568,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Specifications/Fuses and circuits
Fuses and circuits
& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
1 20A
(Not available)
2 7.5A
. Combination meter
3 15A
. Door locking
4 10A
. Front wiper deicer relay
5 Empty
6 7.5A
. Remote control rear
view mirrors
. Seat heater relay
7 10A
. Combination meter
. Integrated unit
8 7.5A
. Stop light
9 7.5A
. Front wiper deicer
10 7.5A
. Power supply (battery)
11 7.5A
. Turn signal unit
12 15A
. Transmission control
unit
. Engine control unit
. Integrated unit
13 20A
. Accessory power outlet
(center console)
14 10A
. Parking light
. Tail light
. Rear combination light
12-10
Black plate (569,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
15 10A
. Trunk light
. Keyless unit
16 7.5A
. Illumination
17 15A
. Seat heaters
18 10A
. Backup light
19 –
. Daytime running lights
20 10A
. Accessory power outlet
(instrument panel)
21 7.5A
. Starter relay
22 10A
. Air conditioner
. Rear window defogger
relay coil
23 Empty
24 10A
. Audio unit
. Navigation system (if
equipped)
25 15A
. SRS airbag system
26 7.5A
. Power window relay
. Radiator main fan relay
27 15A
. Blower fan
28 15A
. Blower fan
29 15A
. Fog light
30 Empty
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
31 7.5A
. Auto air conditioner unit
. Integrated unit
32 7.5A
. Clutch switch
. Steering lock control
unit
33 7.5A
. Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol unit
Specifications/Fuses and circuits
– CONTINUED –
12-11
12
Black plate (570,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Specifications/Fuses and circuits
& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment
! STI
A) Main fuse
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
1 30A
. ABS unit
. Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol unit
2 25A
. Main fan (cooling fan)
3 25A
. Sub fan (cooling fan)
4
Empty
5
25A
. Audio
6
30A
. Headlight (low beam)
7
15A
. Headlight (high beam)
8 20A
. Back-up
9 15A
. Horn
10 25A
. Rear window defogger
. Mirror heater
11 15A
. Fuel pump
12 10A
. Transmission control
unit
13 7.5A
. Engine control unit
14 15A
. Turn and hazard warn-
ing flasher
15 15A
. Tail and illumination re-
lay
16 7.5A
. Alternator
12-12
Black plate (571,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
17 Empty
18 20A
. Injection
19 15A
. Headlight (low beam –
right hand)
20 15A
. Headlight (low beam –
left hand)
21 10A
. Secondary air combina-
tion valve
Specifications/Fuses and circuits
– CONTINUED –
12-13
12
Black plate (572,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Specifications/Fuses and circuits
! Except STI
A) Main fuse
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
1 30A
. ABS unit
. Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol unit
2 25A
. Main fan (cooling fan)
3 25A
. Sub fan (cooling fan)
4
Empty
5
25A
. Audio
6
30A
. Headlight (low beam)
7
15A
. Headlight (high beam)
8 20A
. Back-up
9 15A
. Horn
10 25A
. Rear window defogger
. Mirror heater
11 15A
. Fuel pump
12 20A
. Transmission control
unit
13 7.5A
. Engine control unit
14 15A
. Turn and hazard warn-
ing flasher
15 15A
. Tail and illumination re-
lay
16 7.5A
. Alternator
12-14
Black plate (573,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
17 Empty
18 20A
. Injection
19 15A
. Headlight (low beam –
right hand)
20 15A
. Headlight (low beam –
left hand)
Specifications/Fuses and circuits
12-15
12
Black plate (574,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Specifications/Bulb chart
Bulb chart
NOTE
Lights A, B and C are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
12-16
Black plate (575,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Wattage Bulb No.
1) High beam headlight 12V-60W HB3
2) Low beam headlight (models without LED headlights) 12V-55W H11
3) Parking light (models without LED headlights) 12V-5W W5W
4) Map light
12V-8W –
5) Dome light 12V-8W –
6) License plate light 12V-5W W5W
7)
Trunk light 12V-5W W5W
8)
Rear side marker light 12V-5W W5W
9)
Backup light 12V-16W W16W
10)
Rear turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W
11)
Vanity mirror light 12V-2W –
12)
Front side marker light (if equipped) 12V-5W W5W
13)
Front fog light (models without steering responsive fog
lights system)
12V-19W H16
Front fog light (models with steering responsive fog
lights system)
12V-55W H11
14)
Front turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W
A)
Low beam headlight (models with LED headlights) ––
B)
Parking light (models with LED headlights) ––
C)
Side turn signal light (if equipped) ––
D)
High-mounted stop light ––
E)
Stop light/Tail light –
–
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
a risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
Specifications/Bulb chart
12-17
12
Black plate (576,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Specifications/Vehicle identification
Vehicle identification 1) Vehicle identification number (under the
floor carpet of the right-hand front seat)
2) Emission control label
3) Tire inflation pressure label
4) Certification label
5) Vehicle identification number plate
6) Model number label
7) Fuel label
8) Air conditioner label
12-18
Black plate (27,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2
Tire information.................................................. 13-2
Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2
Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-4
Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-5
Tire care – maintenance and safety
practices........................................................ 13-10
Vehicle load limit – how to determine................ 13-10
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle
load capacities .............................................. 13-13
Adverse safety consequences of overloading
on handling and stopping and on tires ........... 13-13
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-14
Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-14
Treadwear ....................................................... 13-15
Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-15
Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-15
Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.) ................... 13-16
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
Black plate (580,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/For U.S.A.
For U.S.A.
The following information has been
compiled according to Code of
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part
575”.
Tire information
& Tire labeling
Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Identification Number or TIN) are
placed on the sidewall of a tire by
tire manufacturers. These markings
can provide you with useful infor-
mation on the tire.
! Tire size
Your vehicle comes equipped with
P-Metric tire size. It is important to
understand the sizing system in
selecting the proper tire for your
vehicles. Here is a brief review of
the tire sizing system with a break-
down of its individual elements.
! P Metric
With the P-Metric system, Section
Width is measured in millimeters.
To convert millimeters into inches,
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimen-
sional information about the tire
size.
Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on
light duty vehicles such as passen-
ger cars
(2) Section Width in millimeters
(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
7 section width).
(4) R = Radial Construction
(5) Rim diameter in inches
! Load and Speed Rating De-
scriptions
The load and speed rating descrip-
tions will appear following the size
designation.
They provide two important facts
about the tire. First, the number
designation is its load index. Sec-
ond, the letter designation indicates
the tire’s speed rating.
13-2
Black plate (581,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Example:
(6) Load Index: A numerical code
which specifies the maximum load
a tire can carry at the speed
indicated by its speed symbol, at
maximum inflation pressure.
For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs
(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580
kg).
WARNING
Load indices apply only to the
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting
a load rated tire on any vehicle
does not mean the vehicle can
be loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical
system describing a tire’s capability
to travel at established and prede-
termined speeds.
For example, “V” means 149 mph
(240 km/h)
WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle.
Putting a speed rated tire on
any vehicle does not mean
the vehicle can be operated
at the tire’s rated speed.
. The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da-
maged, repaired, retreaded,
or otherwise altered from
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, re-
treaded, or otherwise al-
tered, they may not be sui-
table for original equipment
tire designed loads and
speeds.
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
marked on the intended outboard
sidewall. The TIN is composed of
four groups. Here is a brief review
of the TIN with a breakdown of its
individual elements.
(1) Manufacturer’s Identification
Mark
(2) Tire Size
(3) Tire Type Code
(4) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the
week, starting with “01” to represent
the first full week of the calendar
year; the second two figures repre-
sent the year. For example, 0101
means the 1st week of 2001.
! Other markings
The following makings are also
placed on the sidewall.
! Maximum permissible infla-
tion pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which this tire may be
inf lated. For example, “300 kPa
(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
– CONTINUED –
13-3
13
Black plate (582,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
! Maximum load rating
The load rating at the maximum
permissible weight load for this tire.
For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg
(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI)
MAX. PRESS.”
WARNING
Maximum load rating applies
only to the tire, not to the
vehicle. Putting a load rated
tire on any vehicle does not
mean the vehicle can be
loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
! Construction typ e
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
The generic name of each cord
material used in the plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE-
WALL 2 POLYESTER”
! Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG)
For details, refer to “Uniform tire
quality grading standards” F13-14
.
& Recommended tire inflation
pressure
! Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressure
For recommended cold tire inflation
pressure for your vehicle’s tires,
refer to “Tires” F12-8
.
! Vehicle placard
The vehicle placard is affixed to the
driver’s side B-pillar.
Example:
The vehicle placard shows original
tire size, recommended cold tire
inflation pressure on each tire at
maximum loaded vehicle weight,
seating capacity and loading infor-
mation.
! Adverse safety consequences
of under-inflation
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to flex severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
13-4
Black plate (583,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and failure of the
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
! Measuring and adjusting air
pressure to achieve proper in-
flation
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month and
before any long journey. Check the
tire pressures when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to
adjust the tire pressures to the
specific values. Driving even a
short distance warms up the tires
and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected
by the outside temperature. It is
best to check tire pressure out-
doors before driving the vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air
inside it expands, causing the tire
pressure to increase. Be careful not
to mistakenly release air from a
warm tire to reduce its pressure.
& Glossary of tire terminology
. Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of
those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmis-
sion, power steering, power brakes,
power windows, power seats, radio,
and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-in-
stalled equipment (whether in-
stalled or not).
. Bead
The part of the tire that is made of
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced
by ply cords and that is shaped to fit
the rim.
. Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between
components in the bead.
. Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the center-
line of the tread.
. Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and
sidewall rubber which, when in-
flated, bears the load.
. Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the
tread or sidewall.
. Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been
driven less than 1 mile or has been
standing for three hours or more.
. Cord
The strands forming the plies in the
tire.
. Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent
rubber compounds.
. Cracking
Any parting within the tread, side-
wall, or inner liner of the tire
extending to cord material.
. Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight
optional engine.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
– CONTINUED –
13-5
13
Black plate (584,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
. Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and higher inflation pressure
than the corresponding standard
tire.
. Groove
The space between two adjacent
tread ribs.
. Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside sur-
face of a tubeless tire that contains
the inflating medium within the tire.
. Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from
cord material in the carcass.
. Intended outboard sidewall
(1) The sidewall that contains a
whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the
same molding on the other side-
wall of the tire, or
(2) The outward facing sidewall
of an asymmetrical tire that has
a particular side that must al-
ways face outward when mount-
ing on a vehicle.
. Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufac-
turer as primarily intended for use
on lightweight trucks or multipur-
pose passenger vehicles.
. Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is
rated to carry for a given inflation
pressure.
. Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
. Maximum loaded vehic le weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
physical dimension requirements.
. Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section.
. Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehi-
cle as specified in the third column
of Table 1 that is appended to the
end of this section.
. Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread,
sidewall, or innerliner that extends
to cord material.
. Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated
new tire.
. Overall width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, including elevations
due to labeling, decorations, or
protective bands or ribs.
13-6
Black plate (585,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
. Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passen-
ger cars, multipurpose passenger
vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.
. Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
. Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound
between adjacent plies.
. Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rub-
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or
other materials, that, when
mounted on an automotive wheel,
provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the
load.
. Production options weight
The combined weight of those
installed regular production options
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in
excess of those standard items
which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or acces-
sory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, ro of rack,
heavy duty battery, and special
trim.
. Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at substantially 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread.
. Recommended inflation pres-
sure
The cold inflation pressure recom-
mended by a vehicle manufacturer.
. Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and at higher inflation pres-
sures than the corresponding stan-
dard tire.
. Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire
and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
. Rim diameter
Nominal diameter of the bead seat.
. Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width.
. Rim type designation
The industry of manufacturer’s des-
ignation for a rim by style or code.
. Rim width
Nominal distance betwee n rim
flanges.
. Section width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, excluding elevations
due to labeling, decoration, or
protective bands.
. Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the
tread and bead.
. Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber com-
pound from the cord material in
the sidewall.
. Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
testing, and it may be any rim listed
as appropriate for use with that tire.
. Tread
That portion of a tire that comes
into contact with the road.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
– CONTINUED –
13-7
13
Black plate (586,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
. Tread rib
A tread section running circumfer-
entially around a tire.
. Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the
tire carcass.
. Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal
grooves designed to give a visual
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 k g) times the
vehicle’s designated seating capa-
city.
. Vehicle maximum load on the
tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight and dividing
by two.
. Vehicle normal load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal oc-
cupant weight (distributed in accor-
dance with Table 1 that is ap-
pended to the end of this section)
and dividing by 2.
. Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel
and tire assembly securely during
testing.
13-8
Black plate (587,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
16 through 22 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
– CONTINUED –
13-9
13
Black plate (588,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
& Tire care – maintenance and
safety practices
. Check on a daily basis that the
tires are free from serious damage,
nails, and stones. At the same time,
check the tires for abnormal wear.
. Inspect the tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become visi-
ble. When a tire’streadwear
indicator becomes visible, the tire
is worn beyond the acceptable limit
and must be replaced immediately.
With a tire in this condition, driving
at even low speeds in wet weather
can cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. Possible resulting loss of
vehiclecontrolcanleadtoan
accident.
. Replace any damaged or un-
evenly worn tires at the time of
rotation. For information about the
tire rotation order, refer to “Tire
rotation” F11-36
. After tire rotation,
adjust the tire pressures and make
sure the wheel nuts are correctly
tightened. For information about
the tightening torque and tighten-
ing sequence for the wheel nuts,
refer to “Flat tires” F9-4
.
& Vehicle load limit – how to
determine
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by avail-
able cargo space. The load limit of
your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the
driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the
statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on your vehicle’s placard.
Thevehicleplacardalsoshows
seating capacity of your vehicle.
The total load capacity includes the
total weight of driver and all pas-
sengers and their belongings, any
cargo, any optional equipment such
as a roof rack or bike carrier, etc.
Therefore cargo capacity can be
calculated by the following method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
weight of occupants + total weight
of optional equipment)
For information about vehicle load-
ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
F8-10
.
13-10
Black plate (589,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
! Calculating total and load ca-
pacities varying seating con-
figurations
Calculate the available load capa-
city as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which
is indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 900 lbs or
408 kg”.
For example, if the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300
kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity by su btracting the total
weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 900 lbs (408 kg).
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 1B
For example, if a person weighing
176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the
same vehicle (bringing the number
of occupants to two), the calcula-
tions are as follows.
1. Calculate the total weight.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
– CONTINUED –
13-11
13
Black plate (590,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.
Example 2A
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which
is indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or
800 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
(10 kg), to which is attached a
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).
10% of the trailer weight is applied
to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 2B
For example, if a person weighing
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same
13-12
Black plate (591,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to three), and a child
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
child to use, the calculations are as
follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more.
& Determining compatibility of
tire and vehicle load capaci-
ties
The sum of four tires’ maximum
load ratings must exceed the max-
imum loaded vehicle weight
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
maximum load ratings of two front
tires and of two rear tires must
exceed each axle’smaximum
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original
equipment tires are designed to
fulfill those conditions.
The maximum loaded vehicle
weight is referred to Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
axle’s maximum loaded capacity is
referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-
ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each
axle’s GAWR are shown on the
vehicle certification label affixed to
the driver’s door.
The GVWR and front and rear
GAWRs are determined by not only
the maximum load rating of tires but
also loaded capacities of the vehi-
cle’s suspension, axles and other
parts of the body.
Therefore, this means that the
vehicle cannot necessarily be
loaded up to the tire’s maximum
load rating on the tire sidewall.
& Adverse safety conse-
quences of overloading on
handling and stopping and
on tires
Overloading could affect vehicle
handling, stopping distance, and
vehicle and tire performance in the
following ways. This could lead to
an accident and possibly result in
severe personal injury.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
– CONTINUED –
13-13
13
Black plate (592,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
. Heavy and/or high-mounted
loads could increase the risk of
rollover.
. Stopping distance will increase.
. Brakes could overheat and fail.
. Suspension, bearings, axles and
other body parts could break or
experience accelerated wear that
will shorten vehicle life.
. Tires could fail.
. Tread separation could occur.
. Tire could separate from its rim.
& Steps for Determining Cor-
rect Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the drive r and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam-
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five 150
lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo an d
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your ve-
hicle.
Uniform tire quality grading
standards
This information indicates the rela-
tive performance of passenger car
tires in the area of treadwear,
traction, and temperature resis-
tance. This is to aid the consumer
in making an informed choice in the
purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall be-
tween tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-
perature A
The quality grades apply to new
pneumatic tires for use on passen-
ger cars. However, they do not
apply to deep tread, winter type
snow tires, space-saver or tempor-
ary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
or less, or to some limited produc-
tion tires.
All passenger car tires must con-
13-14
Black plate (593,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
form to Federal Safety Require-
ments in addition to these grades.
& Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified
government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1-
1/2) times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
& Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spe-
cified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accel-
eration, cornering, hydroplan-
ing, or peak traction charac-
teristics.
& Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified indoor labora-
tory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet unde r the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire
that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or ex-
cessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possi-
ble tire failure.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards
13-15
13
Black plate (594,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)
Reporting safety defects
(U.S.A.)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could c ause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately in-
form the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Subaru of
America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehi-
cles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Subaru of
America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,
you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200
New Jersey Avenue, SE, West
Building, Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other informa-
tion about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
13-16
Black plate (29,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Index
14
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
14-2 Index
A
Abbreviation ................................................................... 2
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-36
Warning light ......................................................... 3-20
Access key ................................................................. 2-9
Warning light ................................................. 3-28, 3-29
Accessories....................................................... 5-3, 11-44
Accessory power outlet................................................. 6-8
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-19
Air conditioner
Automatic climate control .......................................... 4-5
Manual climate control.............................................. 4-6
Air flow mode .............................................................. 4-6
Alarm system ............................................................ 2-25
All-Wheel Drive warning light....................................... 3-25
Aluminum wheel ....................................................... 11-38
Cleaning ............................................................... 10-3
Antenna system........................................................... 5-2
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-36
Arming the system ..................................................... 2-27
Ashtray..................................................................... 6-10
AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-18
Audio
Antenna system....................................................... 5-2
Set ......................................................................... 5-3
Audio/visual remote controls........................................ 5-18
Steering switches................................................... 5-18
Auto-dimming mirror/compass........................... 3-104, 3-105
Automatic headlight beam leveler................................. 3-99
Warning light ......................................................... 3-35
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor (ALR/ELR) ................................................ 1-13
Automatic transmission
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............. 3-18
B
Basic information before use......................................... 5-5
Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/portable
device .................................................................. 5-6
Entering letters and numbers/list screen operation ....... 5-8
Initial screen ........................................................... 5-5
Loading and unloading a disc ................................... 5-5
Screen adjustment................................................... 5-9
Touch screen gestures ............................................. 5-7
Touch screen operation ............................................ 5-7
Basic operation .......................................................... 5-12
Battery .................................................................... 11-41
Drainage prevention function..................................... 2-7
Jump starting .......................................................... 9-9
Replacement (access key)..................................... 11-50
Replacement (keyless access with push-button
start system) .............................................. 2-18, 11-50
Replacement (remote keyless entry system) .... 2-24, 11-51
Replacement (transmitter)...................................... 11-51
Bluetooth
®
settings ..................................................... 5-81
Registering/connecting Bluetooth
®
device .................. 5-81
Setting Bluetooth details.......................................... 5-84
Booster seat .............................................................. 1-28
Bottle holder ............................................................... 6-7
Brake
Assist.................................................................... 7-35
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Booster........................................................ 7-35, 11-27
Disc ..................................................................... 12-9
Fluid............................................................ 11-25, 12-7
Pad and lining ...................................................... 11-30
Parking........................................................ 7-44, 11-30
Pedal .................................................................. 11-27
System ................................................................. 7-35
Brake pedal
Free play ............................................................. 11-27
Reserve distance .................................................. 11-28
Brake system ............................................................ 7-35
Warning light ......................................................... 3-21
Braking..................................................................... 7-35
Tips...................................................................... 7-35
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ................... 11-30
BSD/RCTA ................................................................ 7-56
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning buzzer.... 7-59
BSD/RCTA OFF switch........................................... 7-61
BSD/RCTA warning indicator ................................... 7-60
Bulb
Chart.................................................................. 12-16
Replacing............................................................. 11-44
C
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3
Center
Console .................................................................. 6-5
Changing
Coolant................................................................ 11-19
Flat tire ................................................................... 9-4
Oil and oil filter ..................................................... 11-15
Charge warning light................................................... 3-17
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator
light ....................................................................... 3-16
Checking
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-27
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-28
Clutch function ..................................................... 11-28
Clutch pedal free play ........................................... 11-28
Coolant level........................................................ 11-18
Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-25
Fluid level (clutch fluid).......................................... 11-26
Fluid level (power steering fluid) .. ........................... 11-24
Fluid level (washer fluid)........................................ 11-38
Oil level (engine oil) .............................................. 11-13
Child restraint systems ................................................ 1-21
Installation of a booster seat .................................... 1-28
Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt ............................ 1-24
Lower and tether anchorages................................... 1-29
Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-32
Child safety ................................................................... 4
Locks.................................................................... 2-32
Chime
Key........................................................................ 3-5
Light ..................................................................... 3-94
Seatbelt................................................................. 3-14
Cigarette lighter........................................................... 6-9
Cleaning
Aluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3
Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Ventilation grille ....................................................... 4-9
Climate control system ................................................. 4-3
Index 14-3
Black plate (4,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
14-4 Index
Automatic................................................................ 4-5
Manual ................................................................... 4-6
Clock........................................................ 3-48, 3-62, 3-76
Clutch
Fluid............................................................ 11-26, 12-7
Pedal .................................................................. 11-28
Coat hook ................................................................. 6-11
Command list ........................................................... 5-110
Compass ....................................................... 3-104, 3-105
Console ...................................................................... 6-5
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ..................... 7-23
Fluid.................................................................... 11-23
Coolant............................................................ 11-18, 12-7
Cooling system......................................................... 11-17
Corrosion protection ................................................... 10-4
Cruise control ............................................................ 7-52
Indicator light......................................................... 3-35
Set indicator light ........................................... 3-35, 7-53
Cup holder .................................................................. 6-6
Front passenger’s .................................................... 6-6
Rear passenger’s..................................................... 6-7
D
Daytime running light system....................................... 3-97
Defogger.................................................................. 3-112
Defrosting ................................................................... 4-9
Deicer ..................................................................... 3-112
Differential gear oil
Front ........................................................... 11-23, 12-6
Rear............................................................ 11-23, 12-6
Dimensions ............................................................... 12-2
Disarming the alarm system......................................... 2-29
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-36
Dome light.................................................................. 6-2
Door
Locks..................................................................... 2-5
Open warning light.................................................. 3-25
Double trip meter......................................................... 3-9
Drive belts ............................................................... 11-22
Driver’s Control Center Differential................................ 7-19
Auto indicator light.................................................. 3-35
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-36
Driving
All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................... 3-25
AWD vehicles ......................................................... 8-5
Car phone/cell phone.................................................. 7
Drinking..................................................................... 5
Drugs........................................................................ 6
Foreign countries..................................................... 8-4
Pets.......................................................................... 7
Snowy and icy roads ............................................... 8-8
Tips ................................................. 7-18, 7-28, 8-2, 8-5
Tired or sleepy ........................................................... 6
Winter .................................................................... 8-6
E
ECO gauge ............................................................... 3-12
Electrical system ........................................................ 12-8
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system... 3-22, 7-37
Electronic parking brake .............................................. 7-44
Automatic release function by accelerator pedal ......... 7-46
Hill Holder ............................................................. 7-46
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Warning ........................................................ 3-22, 7-48
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-13
Engine
Compartment overview .......................................... 11-11
Coolant........................................................ 11-18, 12-7
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............................. 5, 8-2
Hood .................................................................... 11-9
Low oil level warning light ....................................... 3-17
Oil............................................................... 11-13, 12-4
Overheating .......................................................... 9-11
Starting & stopping........................................... 7-9, 7-12
Event data recorder......................................................... 8
Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2
F
Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-4
Floor mat .................................................................. 6-10
Fluid level
Brake .................................................................. 11-25
Clutch.................................................................. 11-26
Continuously variable transmission.......................... 11-23
Power steering ..................................................... 11-24
Fog light ................................................................... 3-99
Bulb .......................................................... 11-47, 12-16
Indicator light......................................................... 3-35
Switch .................................................................. 3-99
Front
Differential gear oil ........................................ 11-23, 12-6
Fog light ...................................................... 3-99, 11-47
Fog light indicator light............................................ 3-35
Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-17
Front fog light............................................................. 3-99
Switch................................................................... 3-99
Front seats ................................................................. 1-2
Forward and backward adjustment ............................ 1-4
Head restraint adjustment......................................... 1-5
Power seat ............................................................. 1-5
Reclining ................................................................ 1-4
Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat) ........................ 1-4
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3
Consumption indicator..................................... 3-52, 3-54
Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2
Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-5
Gauge................................................................... 3-10
Requirements ................................................. 7-3, 12-3
Fuses ..................................................................... 11-42
Fuses and circuits .................................................... 12-10
G
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................... 8-12
Glove box................................................................... 6-5
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................... 8-12
H
Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-8, 9-2
Head restraint adjustment
Front seat............................................................... 1-5
Rear seat ............................................................... 1-8
Headlight
Beam leveler.......................................................... 3-99
Bulb replacement ................................................. 11-44
Bulb replacing ...................................................... 11-44
Index 14-5
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
14-6 Index
Bulb wattage ....................................................... 12-16
Control switch........................................................ 3-94
Flasher ................................................................. 3-96
Indicator light......................................................... 3-35
HID headlights.......................................................... 11-44
High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-35
High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-96
Hill Holder................................................................. 7-46
Indicator light................................................. 3-24, 7-48
Switch .................................................................. 7-47
Hill start assist .................................................. 7-49, 11-29
OFF indicator light.................................................. 3-24
To activate/deactivate ............................................. 7-51
Warning light ......................................................... 3-24
HomeLink
®
.............................................................. 3-105
Hook
Coat ..................................................................... 6-11
Towing and tie-down............................................... 9-12
Horn........................................................................ 3-114
Hose and connections ............................................... 11-17
I
Ignition switch.............................................................. 3-4
Light....................................................................... 3-6
Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-98
Immobilizer.................................................................. 2-3
Indicator light (security indicator light) ....................... 3-33
Indicator light
BSD/RCTA OFF..................................................... 3-37
BSD/RCTA warning................................................ 3-37
Cruise control ........................................................ 3-35
Cruise control set ................................................... 3-35
Front fog light......................................................... 3-35
Headlight............................................................... 3-35
High beam............................................................. 3-35
Hill Holder ............................................................. 3-24
Hill start assist OFF ................................................ 3-24
Immobilizer ............................................................ 3-33
REV...................................................................... 3-37
Security................................................................. 3-33
Select lever/Gear position........................................ 3-34
Shift-up ................................................................. 3-34
SI-DRIVE .............................................................. 3-34
Steering responsive fog lights OFF ........................... 3-37
Traction control OFF ............................................... 3-27
Turn signal ............................................................ 3-35
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF................................. 3-27
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.......................... 3-26
Inside mirror ............................................................ 3-103
Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2
Internal trunk lid release handle.................................... 2-37
J
Jack-up point .............................................................. 9-4
Jump starting .............................................................. 9-9
K
Key............................................................................ 2-3
Number .................................................................. 2-3
Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-5
Replacement........................................................... 2-4
Keyless access entry function ...................................... 2-13
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Keyless access with push-button start system ................. 2-9
Disabling keyless access functions........................... 2-16
Locking and unlocking doors ................................... 2-13
Opening trunk lid ................................................... 2-15
Warning chimes and warning light .................... 2-16, 3-28
When access key does not operate
properly ....................................... 2-18, 3-8, 7-14, 9-16
L
Lap belt pretensioner.................................................. 1-18
Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-5
License plate light ..................................................... 11-49
Light
Control switch........................................................ 3-94
Daytime running..................................................... 3-97
Dome ..................................................................... 6-2
Front fog...................................................... 3-99, 11-47
Front position ................................................ 3-95, 3-99
Front side marker................................................. 12-16
Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-6
License plate........................................................ 11-49
Map ....................................................................... 6-2
Rear combination.................................................. 11-48
Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-48
Stop light ............................................................. 11-48
Tail light ............................................................... 11-48
Turn signal ................................................... 3-97, 11-48
Limited slip differential (LSD) ....................................... 7-33
Loading your vehicle .................................................. 8-10
Low fuel warning light ................................................. 3-24
Low tire pressure warning light .................................... 3-19
Lower and tether anchorage ........................................ 1-29
LSD (Limited slip differential)........................................ 7-33
M
Maintenance
Precautions ........................................................... 11-3
Schedule ............................................................... 11-3
Seatbelt................................................................. 1-16
Tips ...................................................................... 11-6
Tools...................................................................... 9-3
Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light).... 3-16
Manual
Climate control .................................................. 4-5, 4-6
Mode (continuously variable transmission) ................. 7-26
Seat....................................................................... 1-4
Transmission ......................................................... 7-17
Transmission oil ........................................... 11-23, 12-6
Map light .................................................................... 6-2
Media operation ......................................................... 5-50
AUX...................................................................... 5-73
Bluetooth audio ...................................................... 5-60
CD ....................................................................... 5-50
iPod...................................................................... 5-56
USB memory ......................................................... 5-53
Meters and gauges...................................................... 3-8
Mirror defogger ........................................................ 3-112
Mirrors .................................................................... 3-103
Moonroof........................................................... 2-38, 9-18
Multi function display................................................... 3-48
Index 14-7
Black plate (8,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
14-8 Index
N
New vehicle break-in driving.......................................... 8-2
O
Odometer.................................................................... 3-9
Oil filter.................................................................... 11-15
Oil level
Engine................................................................. 11-13
Front differential gear ............................................ 11-23
Manual transmission.............................................. 11-23
Rear differential gear ............................................. 11-23
Warning light ......................................................... 3-17
Oil pressure warning light............................................ 3-17
Other settings............................................................ 5-10
Outside
Mirror defogger ..................................................... 3-112
Mirrors................................................................. 3-111
Temperature indicator ............................................. 3-52
Overheating engine .................................................... 9-11
P
Parking
Brake ................................................................... 7-44
Brake stroke......................................................... 11-30
Tips...................................................................... 7-48
Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4
Petrol fuel ................................................................... 7-3
Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular
phones) ................................................................. 5-87
Calling on the Bluetooth phone ................................ 5-91
Quick reference ..................................................... 5-87
Receiving on the Bluetooth phone ............................ 5-98
Some basics.......................................................... 5-88
Talking on the Bluetooth phone ................................ 5-99
PIN Code Access ....................................................... 2-19
Power
Door locking switch.................................................. 2-8
Outlets ................................................................... 6-8
Outside mirrors ........................................... 3-111, 3-112
Seat....................................................................... 1-5
Steering ................................................................ 7-33
Steering fluid................................................ 11-24, 12-7
Steering warning light.............................................. 3-25
Precautions against vehicle modification................ 1-21, 1-59
Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-8
Push-button
Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-6
Starting and stopping engine............................. 7-9, 7-12
R
Radio operation.......................................................... 5-33
AM/FM radio .......................................................... 5-33
Rear
Combination lights ................................................ 11-48
Differential gear oil........................................ 11-23, 12-6
Limited slip differential............................................. 7-33
Turn signal light.................................................... 11-48
Rear differential
Oil temperature warning light ................................... 3-18
Rear seat ................................................................... 1-7
Folding down .......................................................... 1-9
Head restraint adjustment......................................... 1-8
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Rear view camera...................................................... 6-12
Rear window
Defogger.............................................................. 3-112
Recommended
Brake fluid............................................................. 12-7
Clutch fluid................................................... 11-26, 12-7
Engine oil.............................................................. 12-4
Front differential gear oil ......................................... 12-6
Manual transmission oil .......................................... 12-6
Power steering fluid ................................................ 12-7
Rear differential gear oil.......................................... 12-6
Spark plugs........................................................... 12-8
Refueling .................................................................... 7-5
Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-14
Remote keyless entry system ...................................... 2-21
Replacement
Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-29
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-39
Replacing
Access key battery................................................ 11-50
Air cleaner element ............................................... 11-19
Battery (keyless access with push-button start
system)...................................................... 2-18, 11-50
Battery (remote keyless entry system) ............. 2-24, 11-51
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system)......... 2-24
Remote keyless entry transmitter battery.................. 11-51
Replacing bulbs .............................................. 11-44, 12-16
Front fog light ....................................................... 11-47
Headlight ............................................................. 11-44
License plate light ................................................. 11-49
Rear combination light ........................................... 11-48
Rear side marker light........................................... 11-48
Rear turn signal light............................................. 11-48
Stop light............................................................. 11-48
Tail light............................................................... 11-48
REV indicator light and buzzer ..................................... 3-12
Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-10
S
Safety
Precautions when driving............................................. 3
Symbol...................................................................... 2
Warnings................................................................... 2
Seat
Fabric ................................................................... 10-5
Front...................................................................... 1-2
Heater.................................................................... 1-6
Height adjustment.................................................... 1-4
Power .................................................................... 1-5
Rear ...................................................................... 1-7
Seatbelt................................................................. 3, 1-11
Fastening .............................................................. 1-13
Maintenance .......................................................... 1-16
Pretensioners......................................................... 1-17
Safety tips ............................................................. 1-11
Warning light and chime .......................................... 3-14
Security
Alarm system......................................................... 2-25
Immobilizer ............................................................. 2-3
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-33
Shock sensors ....................................................... 2-31
Index 14-9
Black plate (10,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
14-10 Index
Select lever
Position indicator ................................................... 3-34
Shift lock function................................................... 7-27
Setup (phone settings).............................................. 5-101
Phone settings..................................................... 5-101
Shift-up indicator light ................................................. 3-34
Shock sensors........................................................... 2-31
Shoulder pretensioners ............................................... 1-17
SI-DRIVE
Indicator light......................................................... 3-34
SI-DRIVE mode ......................................................... 7-29
Snow tires......................................................... 8-9, 11-31
Snowy and icy roads .................................................... 8-8
Sounding a panic alarm .............................................. 2-23
Spark plugs...................................................... 11-21, 12-8
Specifications ............................................................ 12-2
Speedometer............................................................... 3-9
SRS
Curtain airbag........................................................ 1-50
Frontal airbag ........................................................ 1-38
Side airbag ........................................................... 1-50
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 3, 1-33
SRS airbag system
Monitors................................................................ 1-57
Servicing............................................................... 1-58
Warning light ......................................................... 3-15
Starting & stopping engine .................................... 7-9, 7-12
State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7
Steering responsive fog lights system ........................... 3-99
OFF indicator ........................................................ 3-37
Steering wheel
Power ................................................................... 7-33
Tilt/telescopic ....................................................... 3-113
Stop light................................................................. 11-48
Storage compartment................................................... 6-5
Sun shade................................................................. 2-40
Sun visors .................................................................. 6-3
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-33
Synthetic leather upholstery ......................................... 10-5
T
Tachometer................................................................ 3-10
Temperature gauge..................................................... 3-11
Temperature warning light
AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-18
Rear differential oil.................................................. 3-18
Temporary spare tire ............................................ 9-2, 12-8
Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-29, 1-32
Tie-down hooks.......................................................... 9-12
Tips for operating the audio/visual system ..................... 5-21
Operating information.............................................. 5-21
Tire ................................................................. 11-31, 12-8
Chains .................................................................. 8-10
Inspection............................................................ 11-32
Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-33
Replacement........................................................ 11-36
Rotation .............................................................. 11-36
Size and pressure .................................................. 12-8
Types.................................................................. 11-31
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ....... 7-42, 9-8, 11-31
Warning light.......................................................... 3-19
Black plate (11,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
Tires and wheels....................................................... 11-31
Tools .......................................................................... 9-3
Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-29, 1-32
Towing...................................................................... 9-12
All wheels on the ground ........................................ 9-15
Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-14
Hooks................................................................... 9-12
Trailer
Towing.................................................................. 8-12
Trip meter ................................................................... 3-9
Trunk lid ................................................................... 2-36
Release handle ..................................................... 2-37
Turn signal
Indicator lights ....................................................... 3-35
Lever.................................................................... 3-97
U
Under-floor storage compartment ................................. 6-12
Useful information ...................................................... 5-28
STARLINK ............................................................ 5-30
V
Valet mode................................................................ 2-30
Vanity mirror ................................................................ 6-4
Vehicle
Capacity weight ..................................................... 8-11
Identification ........................................................ 12-18
Symbols .................................................................... 3
Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light.................................................. 3-27
OFF switch ........................................................... 7-40
Operation indicator light........................................... 3-26
System.................................................................. 7-38
Warning light.......................................................... 3-26
Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2
Voice command system operation .............................. 5-107
Voice command system ........................................ 5-107
W
Warning and indicator lights ......................................... 3-13
Warning chimes
Keyless access with push-button start system............ 3-28
Warning light
ABS...................................................................... 3-20
Access key.................................................... 3-28, 3-29
All-Wheel Drive ...................................................... 3-25
AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-18
Automatic headlight beam leveler ............................. 3-35
Brake system......................................................... 3-21
Charge.................................................................. 3-17
CHECK ENGINE.................................................... 3-16
Door open ............................................................. 3-25
Driver’s Control Center Differential............................ 3-36
Engine low oil level................................................. 3-17
Hill start assist ....................................................... 3-24
Keyless access with push-button start system............ 3-28
Low fuel ................................................................ 3-24
Low tire pressure.................................................... 3-19
Oil pressure ........................................................... 3-17
Power steering ....................................................... 3-25
Rear differential oil temperature................................ 3-18
Seatbelt................................................................. 3-14
Index 14-11
Black plate (12,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
14-12 Index
SRS airbag system ................................................ 3-15
Vehicle Dynamics Control ....................................... 3-26
Windshield washer fluid .......................................... 3-18
Warranties ..................................................................... 1
Washing ................................................................... 10-2
Waxing and polishing ................................................. 10-3
Wear indicators......................................................... 11-35
What to do if... ......................................................... 5-103
Troubleshooting ................................................... 5-103
Wheel
Aluminum............................................................. 11-38
Balance ............................................................... 11-35
Nut tightening torque ........................................ 9-4, 12-8
Replacement ........................................................ 11-37
Windows................................................................... 2-32
Windshield
Washer fluid ......................................................... 11-38
Wiper and washer switches................................... 3-102
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-40
Wiper deicer......................................................... 3-112
Winter
Driving.................................................................... 8-6
Tires............................................................. 8-9, 11-31
Wiper and washer.................................................... 3-101
Wiper deicer............................................................. 3-112
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A1230BE-A" EDITED: 2015/ 2/ 20
GAS STATION REFERENCE
&
Fuel:
! STI
The engine is designed to operate at maximum performance
using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI (98
RON) or higher. If 93 AKI (98 RON) fuel is not readily available
in your area, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI
(95 RON) may be used with no detriment to engine durability or
driveability. However, you may notice a slight decrease in
maximum engine performance while using 91 AKI (95 RON)
fuel. Use of 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel will not affect your warranty
coverage.
! Except STI
Use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95
RON) or higher. If 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel is not readily available,
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON)
may be used.
& Fuel octane rating:
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti
Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel octane rating” F7-3.
& Fuel capacity:
15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)
& Engine oil:
Use only the following oils.
. ILSAC GF-5, which can be identified w ith the ILSAC
certification mark (Starburst mark)
. or API classification SN with the words “ENERGY CON-
SERVING” or “RESOURCE CONSERVING”
For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”
F12-4.
& Engine oil capacity:
! STI
4.5 US qt (4.3 liters, 3.8 Imp qt)
! Except STI
5.4 US qt (5.1 liters, 4.5 Imp qt)
The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated
based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil
filter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be
checked using an oil level gauge. For more details about
maintenance and service, refer to “Engine oil” F11-13.
& Cold tire pressure:
Refer to “Tires” F12-8.
